

FROM THEN TO NOW

AMAZING ROMANTIC ADVENTURES

BOOK ONE

Duane The Great Writer

Published by Chris Courage at Smashwords

Copyright 2012 Duane The Great Writer

#

ROMANTIC ADVENTURES LIKE NO OTHER JUST FOR YOU...

# FORWARD

Virtually, all of us have read stories and seen movies that are far beyond our imagination, and we love them! We want to be a part of them; we want to be the characters in the story or the star of the movie. Most people have been taught that they can only dream such things, and this is true, but The Reality of ALL Realities IS, that we can each have a life better than we can ever imagine if we are willing to have RealGuidance and a RealEducation to have such a life.

It takes a person that is willing to have the courage to be a Real RiskTaker, a non-conformist in such a special way, a person that is not rebellious, but daring and resourceful, creative and ingenious. I am not referring to one who is over educated and intellectual, but more so 'street smart', from the experiences one has from the world around them. If then, people are willing to climb a mountain higher than they ever have and See what very few ever will, they may be ready to gain the first steps of True Insight beyond what their personal mind will ever know, and it is all so Real, so much so, that even what they can imagine will never equal what they will experience with The TruReality of Themselves.

Most of the masses have been taught to look at something outside of themselves, such as their parents, teachers, saviors, saints, and even the gods people have decided upon to worship as their authorities, but The Real Challenge and Real Adventure is already within each of us, but we must have RealGuidance and a Real Education to be able to first Recognize it.

The socialized public is educated into a one-dimensional Literal Sense, and basically nothing is taught about a person's insight, intuition, and most importantly, a perception beyond what one can even imagine that can be possible. The Whole of Life, The TruReality Life Already IS cannot be contained in any descriptive form, such as an idea that applies to our physical life. It can be so that people can think and decide whatever they want to, but when they have Real Experiences beyond what their mind and imagination have never experienced, then they will be able to enter unseen dimensions and realities that cannot be defined with words and ideas, but can only become alive by the person who is having the experience.

A person can read books about being a pilot, but if they never fly an airplane, then they never have The Real Experience of doing it. Each one of us is so much more than just a physical body and mind. We each actually have four other bodies, and what oversees these bodies is our RealAwareness. But, to get
to The RealU, one must have RealGuidance, because there is so much to each of us that is not seen on the surface and lies hidden, even to ourselves. To discover ourselves we must become The RiskTaker.

The masses, those flock of people who have in some way agreed to be educated and herded into categories that others have invented as a control over the unaware, will almost always follow their Literal Senses, their educated upbringing, which seems to fit so nicely into the social stream of things. But, The Real RiskTaker does not follow the herd, and is exceptional in his thinking, creativity, and has taken the time to develop his insight, intuition, and most of all, The TruPerception Life IS.

Those who try and walk The Razors Edge, usually fall short of The TruReality Life IS, because what I am referring to here is so much more than the Gods of Man, and all the authorities of the earth with their supposed educated wisdom. The TruReality Life IS, is So Real, Pure and Genuine, that it is definitely so that one cannot imagine that such a Reality even exists, IT IS That Real!

It is not up to me to convince anyone about what I am presenting here, but for sure, anyone can easily prove with himself that they truly are so much more than a body on earth and what they are thinking with their mind. Peter Pan did not want to go with Wendy, because he knew he would be educated and grow old. Until one is willing to come to grips with himself and decide to explore what most people never will, then he will merely grow old and never have the live he really wanted that lies beyond his dreams. The TruReality Life IS is so much greater than any fantasy one can imagine, it is The Amazing Romantic Adventure everyone is looking for from all the Invented Systems, but will never be found here. Only those who have The Heart for a Real Life will know 'What IS Real.'

# INTRODUCTION

In this True Life Adventure, you will meet Rebazar Tarzs, a RealGuide from the secret part of Life that is unknown to humans. You as the reader will find yourself moving into new vistas and ethereal worlds of magnificent beauty, beyond what you can imagine for yourself. In Unseen Universes, there is a TruReality so Real, that it would definitly seem as though it could not exist at all. The wisdom contained in this Episode of Life, is for everyone who has the Heart to See. Take your time reading what your heart has always wanted to be confirmed, and you may be one of the Lucky Ones, who really does See what others cannot. This Real Adventure is only for The Real RiskTakers, those who dare not to bow to what The Authoritarians, The War Mongers, and The Brutalitarians have devised for all unaware humans.

DUANE THE GREAT WRITER is presenting Something Wonderful for those who take the time to pay attention. It will be so that very few will succeed, because The Whole of Life is far Too Real, and so a Real Endurance of Patience and Persistence must become The TruIntent of one, or all is lost once again into more future boring lifetimes.

This is a fun episode into one of the many past lives of Duane that can help open a person's heart to so much more. The main character is 'Goldie,' Golden Winged Warrior, a half breed Indian, who has amazing experiences and is able to tell about them. Goldie, is now on his last scouting manhunt, and it is his time to learn so much more about The Whole of Life. If you read what is presented here from the viewpoint of an Adventurous Youth, and willing to learn about The Real Wonder Life IS, you will be amazed what can enter your life that would be of a Real Benefit to you and others.

Of course, there will be those who will decide what I have written to be so unbelievable. We each have the opportunity to dream whatever we want, and this is your chance. Beyond the veil of our mind, lies an Endlessness, to be explored and realized, but very few have The Real Courage to do so. For you as the reader, this adventure can be as Real as you make it, so Have Fun, as you now enter into Something Wonderful and Real...

# OPENING SCENE

It was a long dusty trail on our way to the Indian village, and the men of the troop were very weary and tired from the weeks in the saddle. We were on the hunt for a horse thief that was seen leaving the fort. The weather had been a typical summer heat in the south, and most of the men of Troop 22 were grouchy. We were hunting for an Indian who stole several of the army's horses. There was an eye witness near the scene when the horses were taken.

I don't think that anyone figured that it would have taken this long for us to find the man that took them. We had gone to so many locations where we thought the man might be, and now it becomes weeks later. I am starting to think that the army is bored, and they have nothing better to do, and so they like to go on these hunts. It's a lot of suffering for the men to trail someone this far for a couple of horses that can be gotten from the open range pretty easily. I had my own companions with me, a cat I named Little Feather. He had been with me the whole time I was in the army. I had gotten him as a kitten about a year before I left home. He was very wise and we would communicate about certain matters, including all the scouting that I did. He is the one that told me about the Indian that we were looking for, and said that he was in an Indian village by a beautiful river, and that we would find him there.

In the beginning of the search, I tried to let the sergeant know where I considered the Indian to be, but he wouldn't listen, because he had his own ideas about where the Indian was, and so the search has dragged on. The Sergeant that heads the troop is a hard-headed person that seems to love to catch the wrongdoer at his game. This is how the army life was, hard and dirty. There were a few men that had some common sense, but for the most part, the human awareness in this time era was closer to the caveman. Your basic brutality still ruled so many that wanted their share of life on earth. I was not interested in the ideas of men, but only the experience I was gaining from being around them for the short time I would be here.

The person who saw the Indian steal the horses was riding with us and could identify him. He is a civilian at the fort, and from the looks of him, he's not too happy to be out on the open range on a horse for such a long time. He also lives at the fort, and as he was riding in one night, the Indian was riding out with the stolen horses. If it was up to me, I would just let the Indian have the horses, but the army has an oversized ego to defend, and so here we are. To me, it doesn't seem worth the effort to track him down. The white man has forgotten real fast
whose land this really is, and how long they have been here. From the time I joined this outfit I have seen a lot of changes, mainly for the worse, as the white man develops the open land.

As I am writing my own story here, I was a scout for the troop; I was part Indian and part white. I was hired by the Cavalry about seven years ago. I had always been on my own and liked it that way, and I could see that the white man was becoming the predominant race everywhere, so I decided to mingle and gain some experience from the 'rough side.'

I was raised by my parents that were white and Indian. My dad was an Indian, who found my beautiful mother after a wagon train massacre from a ruthless bunch of Indians. He never found out who they were. He was hunting with some of his friends one day and they came across a ruined wagon train that almost made it to the Pacific Ocean. As my dad and his friends looked through the slaughtered mess, he heard a movement and found my mother hiding under one of the wrecked wagons. She is an aware and resourceful person who had studied the Indian language while she was traveling with her new husband across the North American continent to the West. Her husband was also killed during the attack, and his scalp taken. She later found out through her Real Resources, that it was her destiny to be in this situation and that it would change her life for the better. She calmly and willingly went with my dad as he took her back to their little tribe and campsite.

My dad was not one of those hostile Indians; he was a real man of nature and Life. He cared about all people, and was taught by his parents that all men have their reason for being here. This is one of the reasons that his small tribe, which was his Indian friends, wanted a peaceful life among the white man. He and his friends departed from their original tribe to have their own life, because they could see the possible chaos that was coming between the white man and the Indians. Many of the Indians that my father originally lived within the tribe were becoming defensive against the white man, and so he wanted to move on and away from them. He said that it would be the destiny of the Indians to be shoved aside by the white man, so he wanted to sidestep from some of that destiny by being away from the main tribes. He was a man of RealVision, and he was only interested in surviving to provide a service to those who cared for a better understanding for all people.

I had lived with my parents until around the age of sixteen. I was the more adventuresome type and my parents intuitively knew it. They both suggested

that if I wanted to roam the land, that I live with the white man for a while to learn of their ways and to expand my own views on Life. My dad told me, that he was shown by his Real Guides, that I was to go out into the world and learn what I had to for now, because in the future I would need the experience. As I go along in this story I will share some of the things that my dad taught me and also my mother who was actually very aware as a Seer. She would not usually speak to anyone about what she knew, because in those days most people had no clue as to what a person with a Real Awareness was like. The only people that she had a real relationship with were my dad and I, and that's how she liked it. The reason, that she went so willingly with my dad and his friends, was because she was shown by her Guides, that she was to meet a brave and strong Indian, that she would soon live with for the rest of her life and have me as her son. Her name was Sarah Miles, and my dad was called Strong Vision, because he could see things that others couldn't. They named me 'Golden Winged Warrior,' because my dad was given a RealVision by The Great Reality, that showed him my future and the next lifetime when I would present to the world of white people, 'The Secrets of The True Guides.'

When you're riding the long dusty trail, you have plenty of time to reflect upon the events of your life. Besides, I had a cat that was very aware who would talk to me at times, when he wasn't sleeping. For me, I had plenty to reflect upon, because even though I was looked upon as a half breed, I had the knowledge of the gods that most men only dream about. I couldn't really let others know what I knew or they would have had me hung a long time ago. I played the part of a good scout and an obedient member of the troop. The Cavalry paid me well, even better than the troops were paid, plus I had a place to stay and all my food came with my job. I was told that this lifetime was a real preparation for the future life I would have that would take place in about one and hundred twenty years or so, give or take a few.

This day was long and dreamy as many of them are on the trail like this. So, I liked to ponder on my childhood experiences that I would have in the Unseen Worlds. My dad and I would sometimes be at the Pacific Ocean and playing along the shoreline. We would swim in the warm water and body ride the waves. Like most children, I loved the ocean and the beautiful water. The waves always fascinated me as they would build up and break, and then roll onto the shore. I would sometimes sit on the sand for the longest time and just watch the waves as they magically formed, and then came to life as they moved all the way up to me until they washed my feet. It was always an interesting time in my Visionary Dreams. My father taught me that the experiences I was having while my

physical body slept were the first steps into The Real Universes, and the life I had as an Indian on the earth was only 'The Testing Ground' to build my strength and awareness so that I could eventually surpass The Gods of Man with my knowledge, then eventually obtain Real Freedom.

Sometimes there would be others who would come in my Dream Visions. For the longest time my father was my teacher. At a very young age he would explain to me things that I could not experience while I was in my body. Sometimes there were little fairy people that would come to the beach we would always go to. Dad told me that not everyone knows about these little people, but that they are very special and they will help you learn things if you have a Real Heart and are very sincere.

For many years, I learned from them how to talk to the birds and the animals. The little fairy people said they like to be with animals, because they are Real Beings. They seldom trust the humans, but they did trust my dad and mom, and they trusted me. As I grew older, I didn't see the little people as much. Dad introduced me to many different Beings from various levels of Life. There was one being in particular that stood out who is Rebazar Tarzs. When I was young, I would just watch my father talk to this man, because what he was telling dad was way beyond me. He was the same height as dad, and in a way they looked similar, except this man wore a maroon type robe and sandals, and he had a beard. When I was young, I heard the name of the man, but I couldn't pronounce it at that time. Later, as I grew older I could remember his name, Rebazar Tarzs.

As the years went on, Rebazar would come to me in my Real Visions and explain a lot of different things that I really could not understand for a while. He said that as time and events went by that I would someday realize and perceive what he was sharing with me. He would always say that I had a very special destiny, because I had a very brave heart and a Real Intent for What IS Real. At the time, I really could not grasp what he meant by what he was always telling me. He explained things so simply, but it was as though I was not hearing him at all. The way he talked was so right, but it was like a dream to me. Now that I am older and have had a lot of experience with him and my parents, I am beginning to realize what he meant.

My parents were very unique. They knew things that hardly anyone else knew, except for their little group of friends. In a way, they were like the outcasts from their own tribe, because their awareness and their desire to explore the

unknown were so much greater than that of the ordinary Indian. Some people think that all the Indians were into what is referred to as the 'Spirits of Life,' but actually, just like the white man that is into the rituals and personality of his marketed gods, many of the Indians were into the same thing. My parents knew better and they were so much more aware than most Indians.

The regular Indians also had their labels and their own ideas about the Ultimate Reality, but so many of them had lost sight of The TruReality, and were mainly into funny rituals and praying to the nature spirits. My father and mother taught me that very few really know what The TruReality really is, and that IT is not a person or personality and that IT is not found in any doctrine or law, but that IT is within The Nowness of us and nowhere else. My parents had a real connection to Real Guides. I was also introduced to them at a very young age and I had many experiences in my Visionary Dreams.

My parents would live out their life away from the rest of the world, but it was my destiny to be a part of the outer world in preparation for my special future. I did not want to leave them, but at the same time I had the urge to do so, because it was the call of my Real Being to venture out and become a Real RiskTaker and develop my courage. My parents told me many things, including the various worlds and levels beyond the earth. I remember certain descriptions and experiences with some of what they told me, but some things I was not ready for at the time. I think I took my upbringing for granted and all that I learned. I figured that everyone else was learning what I did, but as I grew older, I soon found out it was not so. When I would relate my Real Visions to my friends they would make fun of me, so after a while I stopped saying anything. I began to see the life of the humans and how they are. They only see the earth and the things that are material. Some of them have a 'belief' in things that sound good, but I learned what they were deciding was more in the line of storytelling.

The Indians had their name for everything as all cultures do, but I do not want to confuse anyone here, I only want to share the simple possibilities that I have learned during this Indian lifetime on the earth. So, I will not get into all the definitions they had, but use some of what Rebazar wanted me to tell. One needs to know what Rebazar called, 'The Secret Knowledge,' to lead them to The TruReality, which provides everything, and is always Here and Now, and can only be found within our own Nowness and nowhere else. Not in the past or a future that does not exist, but only Now. This does sound simple, but it takes a lot of years of intensive training to realize what is being presented here. The journey I have been on is an adventure into the unknown and becomes the best

a person's life can be. Very few are ready to experience Life as it Really IS, and so it was Now my time.

The sergeant told me to ride ahead and report back if I saw the Indians and where they were. Even after all the weeks on the saddle, the sergeant was still as stern as ever, probably because he had a real hard and sore rear. I never really questioned his direction or orders, because I knew Life was guiding me wherever I went, and that things had their own way of working out, even when the situation became difficult at times. I didn't move my horse too fast because of the heat; it was very hot and dry. My horse that I called Walking Horse, liked to walk and not run anyhow, even though he was probably one of the fastest horses around, he just liked to walk. The first time that I was about to ride him he told me so very directly. He made me laugh then, and he has been doing so ever since. But, I have made him run at times against his will when needed, and I would always really hear about it later from him.

During the day's ride, Little Feather looked a little dry as he was holding on. He always rode behind me, clinging to the blanket that I had tied to the horse. He never talked too much as we rode. He said he didn't like to talk while he was riding; it was too bumpy to try and concentrate. The horse and the cat had a difference of opinion on many occasions that was usually rather humorous to listen to. They were both wise in their own ways, and they could both be right with different points of view. I liked to hear what they had to say, because it was always something new for me to consider. I was never lonely or bored, because they were with me, plus animals along the trail were always saying hello to me. When you can talk to animals they seem to know you can, but it is really not talking, it's more like assuming you can and then it takes place, this is how I was taught.

I always liked the winters best in the south, because the temperature was usually just right. The summers made me dream of the cooler days when the sun wasn't always up and keeping things hot for the longest time. Out here in the West, the winters weren't that bad for the most part. We were stationed in the Southwest, and some summers would just boil.

The clothing we wore to ride our horses was rather heavy and made riding in the heat very uncomfortable at times. It had to be durable so, that it would last a long time, because we would wear the same outfit for months at a time. In the West, you wore the same clothing for possibly your whole life. It was the style in those days and also the affordability, and so after a while your clothes were a

part of you and you didn't want to take them off. Every now and then you got to bathe, what a luxury! It was always like starting a new life, and it was a real luxury in those days. I liked to bathe, but it wasn't always possible. All of us came from the dirt and so we were dirty most of the time.

I headed on out, slowly trotting along and wondering about the Indian that took the horses. Little feather could sense my concern and he told me to not have a concern, but to wait and see what happens. He told me to stop assuming things and take more naps. See, he is wise and I listened to him and so I decided to do just that, except I couldn't take naps like him, as I had to always be alert.

The Cavalry originally captured all their horses from the areas that the Indians would get theirs, but they didn't care about the Indians and what they needed, their only concern was for themselves and what they wanted. I know that many of the Indians thought all the horses belonged to them, and so they figured they had the right to take them back at any time. Everyone had their own ideas about the life that was taking place out here. For me, I was being taught to observe, and learn to survive the environment and gain the experience needed to advance past what I was going through with the Cavalry.

What I was constantly shown from Rebazar was more important to me than the ideas that men would dream up to basically confine themselves with. It doesn't take too much awareness to understand your basic human person here. Sometimes, I could sense from the whites a feeling of realizing the injustice they were doing to the Indians and their lives, but at the same time I think they were probably bored, and didn't mind stirring up a little trouble to keep themselves busy, because it really did seem like Life just dragged on in these times and the work to survive was very hard. There wasn't a whole lot else to do out here except to keep building something onto the existing fort where I was stationed, and then hassle the Indians once in a while, because they were looked upon as savages.

One of the most disliked things to do out here was to dig for water, because sometimes it meant going down fifty feet or more. Can you imagine digging for water? Instead of taking the time to learn from the people that lived here and worked the land, the white man usually decided with his attitude instead, that only caused confusion and a lot of problems at times. The Indians were willing to share, but the white man always wanted more than his share and looked upon the Indians as lesser beings. For some reason, all the white men I knew never regarded me as just an Indian, and at times looked to me for answers.
I rode along for most of the day until I finally spotted the tribe and their encampment in the far distance. Little feather woke up when I stopped and climbed on my shoulder. "He's in there," he said, in his little silent voice, and then went back down on his blanket.

It was still a ways ahead and I had a good view of them from where I was at. Now that I was here and knew where they were, I was not sure what to do. I actually did know what to do even though I had been at this point so many times before. I had been a scout for a long time and followed so many trails that led to the so-called bad Indians, but my experience with all of this was wearing thin. I was getting tired of the good and bad routine that seemed to be the lifestyle of so many that knew nothing else.

Little Feather, stretched and yawned and said, "Let's take a nap and see what happens." I had to laugh out loud after he said that, and then I immediately realized I had better be quiet. The horse turned his head and looked at me and suggested that I be quiet also. For once the cat and horse both agreed.

My dad taught me that all men have their destiny, and that they must learn from it in the end, as every feather from The Great Eagle will return to its origin. My dad was rather poetic at times. He liked to say things in a beautiful way according to how all natural things reveal themselves to us. Feather means 'NU,' what the white man calls soul, but the soul of man is unconscious, until it gains the spark of Real Awareness from The Great Reality and becomes NU. I was never really interested in righting all the wrongs that took place on the earth that the Cavalry was into; I was more into realizing what had Real Value, along with the adventure that Life seems to present to all of us. I was in love with the wonder of all that exists and not the decisions people make about their personal lives and how they lived. If someone stole a horse, I knew things would take care of themselves, but grownup unaware men see things differently, they like to try and control everything and usually make things worse.

There was an incident once, where a white man stole the horse of an Indian friend of mine after I had just started scouting for the Cavalry. The next day, when my friend found that his horse was gone, he told me about a VisionaryDream he had, where he saw his horse missing.

Then, in the next scene of the experience, he saw the horse riding back to him all alone. We discussed the dream and laughed about it after we found that his horse was missing. We knew that the horse would return and the man that took

it would be stranded all by himself. It would be a lesson for him that he would never forget. Sure enough, by late afternoon that day the horse did return.

I have seen so many different ways that The Great Eagle works ITS Reality, for those that are aware of IT and work to serve others. I never thought with my position in the Cavalry that I would hunt so many Indians, but here I was, on another Indian hunt, looking for an Indian brother that took his own horses. It all seemed so silly to me.

I looked back at Little Feather, he was sound asleep and off on some far out adventure with his cat friends in The Unseen Worlds. I have always found cats to be exceptional Beings. In some countries they have been guardians for people, because of their ability to see what humans cannot. Most humans do not consider animals to be the same awareness as us, but they are. It's all about attitude.

From where I was at, I had a good position to be in. I was well hidden behind a cluster of trees that were overlooking the Indian campsite. I was thinking that I should ride back and tell the sergeant. The shade from the trees and the soft breeze seemed so nice after riding in the hot sunshine all day. What I was viewing was a beautiful terrain that had a lot of greenery and seemed rather dreamy, as it displayed its presence in the clarity of the sunlit day. These Indians had picked a great spot for their campsite. They had camped next to a river that seemed to be full of fish. Most of them were in the water and bringing out their share. I dreamily watched the Indians as they were having fun in the water. I sat motionless, and thought about the ocean and the waves coming into shore. I questioned myself for being here.

Within myself, I wanted to rush over and jump in that river, but I didn't think it would be a good idea, so I waited and suffered while I just watched. I was hoping Little Feather would wake up and tell me something, but looking at him and seeing him sleep the way he does, I didn't want to disturb him. I looked at the horse and he seemed really uninterested as to what to do also. Okay, I thought, I'll just wait it out. I sat there and continued to think about all the scouting and hunting I had done for the Cavalry over the years.

There was one time when we were after three white men that robbed one of the local town gambling casinos and shot several people. It took us weeks to find them and when we did, they were brought back for trial and were eventually hung. The West was a brutal place, and almost everyone carried a gun. I didn't

like guns, nor did I carry one. I was a scout and that's all I wanted to do, and be for now. When there was any kind of conflict, I stood back, unless one of my friends was in danger, then I would be creative and figure another way to deal with it besides violence.

I was taught by my parents and The Real Guides, that there is always another way to deal with a situation than to be violent. The Real Purpose for any of us is that we are on the earth to learn and to expand our Awareness of Life, not make a career out of this place. The idea of most people is to go after something and then to keep going after something else, which is fine, but I was taught the simple life and to need less. The idea of progress soon started becoming a nuisance to the natural order of things here, and I could see the effect it was having in certain areas. I know that everyone has to live, but there is a way to do so, without being cruel to others and the land that supports everything.

Each life that we have here goes so fast, and the time we spend here could be centered on a real relationship with Reality. Most people don't take the time to stop and pay attention to what is really taking place in their lives, and so they continue to return here without knowing what has gone on before. The earth is a 'Place in Life,' and not the whole picture of what Life IS.

My father taught me to listen closely to the sound of things, even the sound of a bullet traveling through the air. I had been around several gunfights, but I never got involved, it's really for the brutal person to use a gun. I never liked killing anything, even for eating. My main diet would be things that nature would already provide, and I would do some fishing when I had the opportunity.

Father and I went to Mexico at times to visit people who he had met over the years on his travels. Their main diet is rice and beans, which I really liked. Working for the Cavalry and being paid, I was able to buy my own rice and beans. Potatoes and other vegetables were foods I liked when I could get them. There were farm lands that were scattered here and there in the southwest, and most farmers had fruit trees. I ate meat if someone else prepared it, but for the most part you might say, I was a vegetarian half breed. The Cavalry provided beef jerky I really liked, and I could get all I wanted from the compound. I liked the simple life and the constant learning I was acquiring. I was also taught to listen to how nature speaks. My parents told me that everything has a message for us if we can learn to understand it. I could read the outer messages Life was showing me on a daily basis. The Reality that IS, speaks to all of us all the time, but we must learn to pay attention. The human awareness is taught to see

things a certain way, usually in a reasonable fashion. Some things may work for the physical life, but as your life passes very quickly, most people will not pay attention to what is really taking place. It does really appear that what people are doing is something that has importance, but very few pay attention to nature and what it is always proving, as it demonstrates itself all the time to us.

For the most part, the average Westerner had a hard life, and usually had a hard attitude. I was different, in the respect that I was constantly shown from The Real Side, that there was so much more to Life than what was happening and appearing on the surface, or what is known as our outer life with the physical body. It was hard in a way, being different, and then again it was so much better, but every time I would go a little too far to the right or left, Rebazar would show me what I was doing, then I would bring myself back to being just me.

As a half breed, you take a lot of heckling from certain people and learn how to handle it. It has taken me all these years to get just a little respect from a very few individuals who I can call my friends. I never really minded the attitudes others had, they actually taught me a lot and how to better survive. I do like being different, it allows me a simple freedom that most people do not understand.

As I'm sitting here and looking out over the wide open lands, I can see small animals running about. Then, I heard a sound and looked up into the huge open blue sky. I can see a hawk circling overhead. He is high above everything and I know what he is seeing. I am sometimes a bird soaring in the open sky in the other worlds. It is something Rebazar taught me to do. My parents told me about the Hawk, and that it is a great symbol just like the Eagle. They said that it meant you were a brave and high flying being, if the hawk circled you. That it was a 'gift message' from The Great Reality to see and understand what Life is showing you. The Real Guides are known as The Eagle Eyed of The IS, because they can see what others cannot.

I always watched the skies for signs from beyond, as nature liked to play itself like the sound of music all the time. I have learned that The Great Eagle, The Ultimate Reality has a very good sense of humor and only has love for all those things that IT has created. IT only cares for all things and wants each feather from ITS Being to return with great courage from all the experiences we can gain in the lower levels, especially the earth. Being on earth is the hardest task, but it must be done. It is the greatest struggle, but once we figure out what is
really taking place here, then our lives come together so much better on all levels. This is only one of the many lives that I have lived here, but this was a real good one, because it is setting me up for what I will be doing in the next life, which I will write about when I eventually get there.

My parents constantly taught me about so many things in nature, and how they apply to something that reflects The True Value from The Ultimate IS. They have said, the silence and stillness within me is the connection to The Real Sound and Light, the voice of The Great Eagle with invisible wings. My parents liked the poetic aspect of Life and ITS relationship as harmony. I liked to sit in silence and listen to The Real Sound that I could hear from within myself. Sometimes it would be a high pitch sound that I could hear from my inner ear, and at times it would be the sound of the ocean with the waves rolling in. I liked it because it was a constant reminder that the Love of Life is always with me as I am a part of IT.

The Real Connection was given to me by Rebazar. My parents and The Real Guides gave me different Key Sounds at times, to make The Real Sound come into me stronger. They told me The Real Sound and Light cleared out the old decay of things that were of no use, that of certain thoughts, ideas and emotions. I liked to bathe in The Real Light and Sound and feel the newness of my own Being. It was a daily practice for me to keep my attention on The Real Sound and Light. Doing so gave me a Real Purpose to live and survive the hard life of the West. I felt very fortunate to have The Real Secret Knowledge that not even the manmade gods have.

The West had its own simple language, and everyone had their understanding of it. I could speak three languages, mine from my parents, English from the whites, and Spanish from the Mexicans. My parents really liked the Mexicans. They said they are a humble and hardworking people who asked very little of anyone, and they were always willing to make their own way and to help others. I liked the Mexicans too. They were always in good spirits, no matter how little they had or how hard they had to work. I had taught some of them the ways of The Great Reality, but for the most part, they had their invented religious beliefs they liked to cling to. It doesn't matter to me what people 'believe' for themselves, I like to see everyone as they really are, Beings of Light. But of course, when you are on the earth you will consider yourself to be a human only, and for the longest time, until you wise up and gain Real Experience.
My father's dad, my grandfather, was a real storyteller and the original teacher of our family. He was from a wise and mystical tribe, that very few of the Indians knew about and none of the white men ever knew. I never really knew my grandmother; no one really talked about her at all. When I would ask anyone in my family, they would all remain silent and look away. Grandfather was like my dad, he lived very simple and peaceful, and his main interest was to learn about Life, not mess it up or distort it. Every day, I realized more and more how very fortunate I was to have been born into the family I was in. My parents and I were shown the long line of lifetimes we went through to finally come to this one. Many Indians and most white people have no idea about their Real Heritage. Again, most people keep looking to their personal life and never really look past what is taking place, so they are once again lost in The Passing Dream of the material worlds.

I have seen so many things in the short span that I have been on the earth this lifetime, and I know for sure, that I would not want to live like the white man and do the things he does, because he has blocked himself from The Real Side of Life. The years that I have been with the white man has taught me a lot; it has taught me what I don't want for myself. I have no attitudes towards the whites, because I know they are learning their lessons for now, and that there is plenty of room for everyone on the earth, so far that is.

I can survive anywhere, so I don't need to stay near people that don't care about others. I know I will always meet good people who care about how Life Really IS. I have met some good people, but for the most part, they are not really alive when it comes to how Life Really IS. They like to stick to an idea they have been taught, usually from someone that knows nothing about The Trueness of The Unseen Worlds and all the Beings who reside there. Most of the white people only have their outer life, and they do not know about their Real Life and how it relates to everything. The whites do not teach about The Real Side of Life, they only present the 'appearance side' they want others to know, at least the ones that I have met.

I have also read their 'Good Book,' what they term their Bible, and in it I found the mention of some of the things that I have been taught. I have told some people what I have learned from The Real Guides and my Real Visions, which relate to what is written in their doctrine, but from a more realistic viewpoint. But they never seem to be interested. Most of them only want to accept what someone else has defined for them without any Real Investigation and Real Experiences on their own. I have shared the sensibility aspect with these
people, that I am relating basically the same message that their saviors and saints provided, but from The Real Sense of it, and not just from the literal mental documentation idea that has been pieced together to confuse people into becoming unaware followers. Life is Living The Real Experience, and not just 'believing' in something that sounds good. The Good Book, is supposed to be the great truth, but The Real Guides told me that a lot of the meanings were removed or changed, because The Rulers of The Earth, want control over the minds of their followers. Besides, the original people that did have Real Experience, usually never wrote anything down, it was usually someone else that received the story second hand after the event took place.

The mention of the different levels of Life in The Bible is very vague, as they are termed, 'The Many Mansions.' And so, much of The Real Knowledge has not been entered or altered all together, so all that is left is the little bits of information, that are so misunderstood. The old writings are mainly for people that want to feel good about something that sounds really good. This is why, when a person has been Tap Lined into a gathering of those who have no Real Awareness, they become held to the same position, that all agree to for lifetimes of unawareness. Reincarnation is mentioned in the writings, but most people do not get the idea of it. And so, these people end up in the Astral Worlds, and then return unaware in future lifetimes. I would rather have Real Experience with The Great Reality and The Sound and Light that bring me the expansion of my True Being. I have learned to grasp the simplicity of Life from The Real Connection, and by doing so I can see the evidence of The True Reality working in my life all the time.

From what I have learned, the followers of the belief systems are only interested in the stories that sound good, and not always the actual truths that can be realized through them. The followers of these invented systems have become so used to storytelling, that they think it is the way to Real Freedom, when in fact it is only the first step. So, many of these people are more interested in some form of strange agreement than the adventurous risk of exploring The Endless Worlds of The Great Reality.

As I was sitting there thinking about all this and watching the hawk that was flying in the sky, I suddenly heard a slight rumble. I can hear things the average person doesn't. I looked around and I could see the troop in the far distance, many miles away. Little Feather suddenly woke up and looked around with me. Even though the sound was miles away, our hearing picked it up real fast, and I could see them moving toward us.
I could hear Little Feather say, "There goes a perfectly good afternoon," as he looked in the direction of the troop.

The horse also looked real fast and then turned away and said, "Oh boy, here come the big butts."

I had to hold myself back from laughing. I could sense that he was pretty bored with the drama of the ignorant soldiers. They were only a dot on the horizon, but I knew they would be here within a few hours. I didn't want to leave the shade of the trees, because one of the trees was telling me a few interesting things about what was taking place with the Indians, and I wanted to hear more. Against my will, I rode off and out into the hot sun again. I could see Little Feather just hanging on as I galloped along.

"Couldn't we have just stayed and rested?" he asked, as he was trying to hold on.

"I would have loved to do that, but we must finish out this game we are playing with the white man. Be patient, there is a change coming soon," I said, as I was considering the humor of his remark.

After a while I was with the troop again, and then rode up to the Sergeant and saluted him. "Hello sir, I spotted the tribe and where they are camped. It's about an hour or so from here," I said, trying to sound official.

"Good work, Mr. Goldie," he said, with his commanding attitude. "It's been a long ride and the sun will be down in a few hours. We'll camp here for the night. Over by those trees looks good," as he pointed to a nice shaded area.

Everyone turned their horses, and slowly rode to the spot. I had several good friends in the troop that I would sometimes camp with. Most of the men were younger than me, and were not the hardened core like the older soldiers, who had been around a lot of years and gone through all sorts of hard and enduring situations. I usually minded my own business and let everyone have their attitudes. My parents and The Real Guides taught me that The Unseen was The Real Life, and that I was to pay more attention to it than to what people thought or did on this earthly plateau. I liked listening to what nature had to say, instead of the ideas that men have, which are usually of no use, but sometimes they do give a message from The Invisible Side without them really knowing it.
All of us settled in for the night as we soon sat around our campfire. I rested with my friends, Jess and Riley and of course Little Feather and The Horse. Jess and Riley were a little younger than me, and they were both easy going and liked to hear the stories I would tell them about my life, and even sometimes about my Real Visions and The Real Guides. These two were very flexible and fun to be with. The great outdoors can get real lonely at times, and at times it is nice to be alone, and it is also great to have good friends too. All three of us built a little fire and set up our few belongings, then sat and talked about what we were going to do when we caught the Indian.

"How do you see this situation, Goldie?" asked Jess, as he watched the fire burn.

"I'm a little tired of chasing Indians who are taking back their own horses. The land is still free enough and there is plenty for everyone, but I have been shown that the time will come when what we are seeing now will be hard to find. The freedom of the range and those things that are provided are to be shared and used for the good of all, but the white people want to take everything and put it in a cage or kill it," I said, as I listened to the crackling fire.

"I think I should have been an Indian too, Goldie, because I like the free range and all the beautiful things that nature has provided," said Jess, as I laughed at what he said. I had to laugh, because what he was saying seemed to warm my heart. I liked these two for how simple they can be.

"You have the heart of an Indian and that's all that matters, Jess," I said, and then we began to laugh and so did Riley.

We talked for a while until the fire went real low, and then they went to sleep. I stayed awake and just stared up at the sky. I sat and listened to the sounds of the evening. There were a few crickets and an occasional bird that had a slight squeak to it. I find humor in the noises that animals and birds make. This little guy was way off in the distance somewhere, probably looking for a friend. Looking up at the stars, they were like all The Wonderful Guides, who are illuminated on the many Unseen Levels. I love The Real Side and all the freedom that I have when I am there. Then, I went right to sleep and took a journey on my flying horse in my dream to one of my favorite places, the Unseen Pacific Ocean.
In my Vision Dreams, I like to stay by the sea shore and hear the waves roll in. The temperature is always right, never too hot nor too cold. The sun is always shining as a great ball of light in the sky. I have always known that it is The Great Eagle that lights all the worlds. I was taught to pay attention to my nightly visions, so that I can have the freedom to become more aware with them and travel to the other levels when The Real Guides are ready to take me. I have come here most of my life and I have never grown tired of the simple and wondrous beauty that it all is. The scenery is breathtaking, and so much cleaner and clearer than the earth. The wonderful colors are very brilliant, and everything has an ethereal reality to it. As I was walking through the water with my winged horse that I call, "Flying Spirit," my good friend and guide came walking up from down the beach and alongside of him was Little Feather.

"Hello, Goldie," he said, with his strong voice and wonderful laughter. It was Rebazar Tarzs, the wondrous guide from The Great Reality. He is a strong looking man, about six feet tall with black hair and wearing a black beard. He doesn't dress like an Indian, but he looks like one with the color of his skin. He wears a type of rusty colored robe and sandals that look as though he got them from Mexico. We have met here most of my life and he has taught me so much, so much more than I can ever relate to anyone with their human mind.

"Do you want to see what some of the future will bring while you are still on the dirt level?" he asked, with a big grin on his face as Little Feather was staring at me.

"Great, I am always ready to explore, so let's go Sir," I said, then jumped on my horse and waited for him to lead the way.

RT leaped from the ground and flew up into the air like an eagle. I followed him as we both soared over the vast ocean of lighted brilliance that contained a blanket of luminous reflection from the great sun above. Little Feather stayed on the beach and watched us.

"The Great Sea of Life," said RT, as he pointed all about while we sailed on the wind and flew past numerous puffy white clouds.

I loved to be with Rebazar, he is a real original. The great heights that we would fly were rather jittery at times, but I loved them. What a wonderful view and feeling to be here in my Real Awareness. We sailed far into what appeared to be outer space, past the planets and the stars. The sky was not black, but a
continuous blue. After the greatest distance, there became this wondrous light that we headed into. I felt Flying Spirit move swiftly as he followed Rebazar from the blue openness into a brilliant whitely lit area.

As we moved through the light we soon came out the other end into a beautiful terrain that was a blanket of greenery with lovely trees and rolling hills. There were also lakes and rivers that were of the bluest colors. We gently sailed over the ground until we came near an interesting village of some kind. This village was not like the ones that I knew of on the earth. There were so many beautiful places that the people here lived in with many different shapes and sizes. All of it looked like a place the white man would build. We soon touched the ground and walked through the strange new place, strange to me anyhow. We came to a clearing that was surrounded by huge trees that were of this world. There was something going on and RT began to explain it to me.

"Look, that is what will be taking place in the future on the earth," he said, as he was pointing to a machine that was moving on its own.

It looked like a wagon with four wheels, and on the top sat a person who was controlling it. It also made a funny sound as it passed by us. Smoke was coming out the back end as the driver continued to circle the area. It looked a bit funny to me.

"You will someday see many of these machines on the earth; they will be the new form of transportation that will replace all the horses. What you are seeing here is where things are really invented and then eventually become available to the earth people. Many come in their dreams and discover the inventions of the future here," he said.

I watched with a real fascination as the machine kept going. Amazing, I thought. How could anyone possibly think of such a thing? Then I began to think about where I was at.

"Where are we and what is this place called?" I asked.

"We are in a different part of the second level, the Astral World, and what you would call The Happy Hunting Grounds or Paradise by the belief systems. This is one of many heavens to the white man that is labeled with so many different names, depending upon what belief system one belongs to," said RT.
I did notice that there were different colors of people that lived here. Everyone seemed so happy and fulfilled.

"There is no killing or wars here like there is on the earth, within this area or on this level. This is the first heaven of the earth people, and the lord of this region sometimes takes on the duties of being their god for those who come here after their earthly life is done. There are many more levels to the Astral Worlds, that contain more light than this region, and someday I will take you there, but there is no hurry. The Indians call this place their Happy Hunting Grounds, because all are happy to be here.

A lesson to learn is that it is a lovely and wonderful area, and a person can be happy here, but happiness is something we decide and is a part of ourselves, but this place is not The TruReality. People on the earth are taught to find happiness; again it is a decision not a place. You have also been here in the past, and this place has changed since then. You have been to many of the levels that are heavens in your past lives, and the experiences of them are always within you. You can learn to rediscover what you have learned at any time. Each time you go back to the earth in a new life you take on a new body and a new mind, and the past is usually forgotten, but it is still always with you. Each lifetime you start over and try to discover The Real Secrets of your True Being, but so much of the time you get sidetracked by what exists on the earth only. The Reality of Now is always present, so it is an opportunity that can only be Here and Now," he said, as he smiled.

I was trying to remember when I had been here before during those lifetimes when I was someone else. There was something that was trying to let me know, but I wasn't sure.

"When the time is right and you need to know, you will. We must return now to your earthly body, the soldiers are waking up," said RT.

In an instant, I was back in my earthly body and waking up. I had been to The Real Side with Rebazar on so many occasions since I was very young. For the most part, we would stay along the beautiful beach where the sun never sets. I was about nine or ten when he brought me Flying Spirit, the horse. Up until that time he said that he was preparing me for what was to come in my future. RT is a very Special Being. He said that he is a part of a large tribe of others like himself, known as The UIS. He and his friends are guides to the many levels that exist beyond the understanding of the people of earth.
Getting up from one of my wonderful experiences is always rather hard. I wanted to just keep sleeping, but duty called. I have learned from my dealings with most people that they are usually stubborn and set in their ways, and so I have decided to be easy going. My two friends Jess and Riley are the same way. I have tried to tell them about The Real Experiences they are having, but they usually laugh at me, thinking that I am joking. I cannot prove what is taking place in my life to anyone, but they can prove it to themselves if they will take the time to learn.

We were soon saddled up and ready to go to the Indian campsite. Little Feather jumped up on the horse and seemed to want to sleep some more. The Sergeant told us to be on guard if there was any trouble. I was hoping there would only be a small confrontation and that would be it. It also looked to be another hot and rather dry day. The sun was up early and the sky was very clear, not a cloud anywhere. It was always a rather unique adventure being in the great openness of the outdoors. I liked it so much better than being back at the fort and near the town that we were posted at. Then, I realized there was something good about hunting for the bad guys, I could get away from the fort and be paid for it. I began to laugh at myself, and wondering why I had never thought of it before. Off we rode with the rest of the troops into the Indian's campground on an adventure that was about to take place.

It wasn't long before we were at the campsite of the Indians. As we rode in, everyone stopped what they were doing and just stared at us. I did not see a smiling face among them. I would have thought they would have at least noticed the cat. I was a little concerned as to what we were going to do when we did find the horse thief. Then suddenly, there was a little commotion in one of the tipi up ahead. Something was going on, because the sides of the tipi were moving a bit. I looked over at the Sergeant, and he was staring right at the tipi and what was taking place. We rode right up to the side of the entrance of the tipi and everyone dismounted. The Sergeant calmly and quietly told the men to surround the tent and have their guns drawn. I decided to let the men do their thing, because I was not interested in taking part. I was only here to scout, and all the confrontation would be on the part of the soldiers. I decided to ride on ahead and stay away from the action. I rode about a hundred feet away and then turned my horse to watch what would take place.

The soldiers stood outside waiting to see who would come out. After a little more commotion, an Indian woman came out of the tipi and was startled by the troopers she saw. She quickly ran off to another tipi and went inside. I found

what she did to be a little humorous. I could see that when she came out of the tipi, the men were a little nervous also. Then, after a few moments, an Indian came out.

The witness was there and he immediately said, "That's him! He stole the horses! That's him!"

Everyone surrounded the Indian, and then a couple of the soldiers grabbed him and tied him up. He put up a real struggle and did some yelling and screaming. He even kicked one of the men between the legs to where he had to go and lay down. It was rather funny to see all these grown men wrestling with each other. It was almost like a game they had invented to keep themselves busy with. I just sat and watched the whole scene as it unraveled and considered what was taking place and how everyone was involved.

The horse made a comment about the scene, which I had to laugh to. I was waiting for the cat to say something, but he just stared and said nothing, as though he were bored with these people.

Now that we had the man, it would be the long ride back for a trial. When the white man tried someone like this fellow, there were no Indians on the jury; actually there was usually no jury. With all that I had been through in the last seven years, I could understand why my dad and all his friends left the traditional tribes, because of things like this. I could see the justification of this fellow about the horses he took, but he could have saved himself a lot of trouble by just going out and getting his own on the open range. I think that some people are more bored than others so much of the time, and they want to cause trouble just to have something going on in their life.

The white man has come onto the land of the Indians, and made laws that restrict others, especially the Indians. They know the Indians want the horses, so they create a law that restricts them from getting them and then hunts them if they do get them. A real clever idea that leads to a fate that nobody wants, but so many have decided to have. The whites have made the treaties and they are the ones that usually break them. At times, I felt so alone on a world of such cruelty and injustice. I knew that I needed these experiences to understand a Real Humility and compassion for all Life.

With my Real Awareness, I was able to maintain my place in this world and be detached from the events that took place like this one. I had no interest in the

invented justice that was created here; I knew that Life took care of ITS own. I cared for people and I was willing to share what I knew with them, but most of them were too busy creating situations they had to deal with, so they never really had the time to listen or learn to what Real Value has.

In a matter of moments, everyone was back on their horses and ready to ride. I let the troop go first and I would tag along behind for a while and let the dust settle from the drama that took place. The Indian was well strapped to his horse, actually the Cavalry's horse. Two of the soldiers gathered the other stolen horses as we rode out. The local Indians watched us very closely as we rode by them. Once again, they did not look too happy, but they did not say a word as we headed out. I again felt the gift of The Great Eagle that allowed me to be raised away from places like this. I loved my people, but they always had the chance to move into a better awareness of their own if they really and sincerely wanted to.

The sun was rising higher in the eastern sky as it looked to be another hot and dusty day on the trail back. The entire scene was a picture that you could hang on a wall as the surroundings all blended together, while we rode out onto the wide open stretches of gently rolling lands.

I was bringing up the rear for a reason, I was to warn the men, if any of the Indians were to follow us and become hostile. I was rather surprised they didn't do something, because on other occasions they would suddenly ride after us and try to scare us, and then usually back off after a shot was fired from one of the soldiers. It was usually a scene that played itself out almost the same every time, but not this time. My two friends, Jess and Riley had to maintain their own positions. They were not allowed to leave the formation. I was the Indian scout, so I could pretty much do whatever I wanted.

The sun was rising higher in the sky and it was going to be even hotter than it had been. When that sun is overhead, it seems to just stay there as though it won't go down. This was a lifetime of real endurance. The Great Eagle wanted all his feathers to be strong and prepared for what my grandfather called 'The Journey to Real Freedom.' He taught my dad and mom, and then they taught me. I was to be a destiny that all the races of the world would benefit from. I was also told that there would be a special White Winged Man before me, who would come to the earth in the next century. He would also be my teacher when I returned to take my position. Until then, I had a lot of learning to accomplish from The Real Guides.

As I watched the sun aflame in the sky for what seemed to be the longest time, I could see that it was finally deciding to go down at some point. We had been riding for hours and I could tell the men were getting antsy to stop and rest. The Sergeant was a real hard soldier. He liked to push on until he would almost drop. If he wanted to ride all day and night, then everyone else had to do the same. I was born to ride, and I could sleep on the saddle and many times I did, but the heat was no fun. I could even leave my body and then return while I was riding. After about eight hours of riding, the Sergeant signaled for us to stop and rest for the night. We stopped by the same river we had crossed on the way to the Indian camp.

It was a beautiful and not too wide of a river. There were a lot of trees along its shoreline. As we all got off our horses, I could hear a lot of moaning from the men about the long ride, mainly about their sore rears. It was always humorous to hear how such tough men moan and groan. I rode up to the water's edge to let my horse drink and rest awhile.

All the horses had their heads in the water as I stood there and watched. Some of the men jumped right into the water and swam around in their clothes. I knew the Sergeant didn't like the fact of his men soaking themselves in their uniforms, but he never said a word and just let them do it. The Real West is a rugged place, and it's a good teacher if you are a willing student to learn about what it is really telling you. I noticed that most men were too stubborn to learn very much in this lifetime. I could see that it took a lot to break down the individual ego, so that it could be used for the greater cause that Life had for all of us.

The water looked so good, that I decided to jump in and take my once in a while bath. It had been weeks since I had taken a natural bath. Real men didn't carry soap, they just scrubbed themselves up once in a while and that was it. There was a lot of natural smell around and all of us were part of it. After my swim in the river, the big hot sun was finally going down. It was as though it was not willing to do so, but it did. I liked the winters better out here near the big ocean, they are so much friendlier.

My friends, Jess and Riley are usually a funny pair, they like to joke around and sometimes get themselves into trouble. They came out of the water and we made a fire for the night. The air was still warm as the sun began to set in the West. The late afternoons were the best time of the day. I could relax and think about what I wanted to do on The Real Side for the night. The TruReality and the endless adventure that I experienced with IT, is always on my mind. It

amazes me as I watch the outer drama of humans running around trying to figure out their lives, when all they really need is a guide like Rebazar. But, humans like their egos more, and deciding how Life should be, instead of being guided by those who know.

As we were sitting around the fire and not really saying a word, Jess began to talk... "I had this funny dream last night, Goldie, it seemed so real that I wanted to tell you about it," he said, acting rather shy. I smiled and said I would like to hear about it.

"It seemed to take place during the night. One moment I was sitting on the ground, and the next moment I was running after something or someone. It was dark in the dream, and I was running through the darkness, but I couldn't see where I was going. I was able to make my way around, but I never caught what I was after. Then it ended, and I woke up. I sat up for a while and wondered about it, I was actually sweating. What do you think it meant, Goldie?" He asked.

I thought about it for a moment and then said, "It sounds like something in the future that you are chasing, but I'm not real sure what it is yet. It could be that something is about to happen. The Real Side is a mystery, until we realize what it means or it exposes itself, but it will reveal what you need at the right time. Sometimes it is revealing and other times it is evasive. How did you feel about the experience, Jess? He looked at me and said, "It was rather frustrating as I was running and not being able to get to what I was after. I just ran and ran and that was it." I had to laugh a little bit within myself, because these two friends of mine hardly ever spoke about their Real Experiences.

"It's a good sign that you are paying attention to your nightly visions, Jess. Your Christian Bible contains the experiences of those who have had interesting dream experiences from the past, but most people do not pay attention to their dreams," I said.

"You have read the Bible, Goldie?" said Riley, with a funny look on his face. "Yes I have. I have read many books about various things. I like to learn about what is taking place here, and then explore The Real Side of them. My dad taught me to pay attention to where I am at all the time. Now that I am with the white man, I constantly study different writings that pertain to my journey through Life. I have read The Bible several times, but not in the literal sense that has become standard with the human viewpoint, but from the openness of Seeing that it is a culmination of experiences from an era of time on earth, and

that there are always broader horizons to be discovered. I only read the parts that relate to The Reality, The Great Eagle. The Bible can be a good reference book for some, but the experiences that it contains are from a part of history that is long gone. Life is always new and greater, and the past can never replace the present. The past that once was will never be again, because there is always something better right Now. This is why Real Experience is essential to perceive Reality, as opposed to 'believing' in documented ideas. Something like, the idea of eating certain foods can be fun to discuss, but the actual eating of them is better and Real."

"Just like your Dream Vision, Jess. If it would have happened thousands of years ago, you could have been in the Bible too. The Great Eagle is always in The Here and Now, not in the past or the non-existent future. The TruReality is with you Now, and trying to get your attention, because you are a part of IT. That is what the man Jesus was talking about when he said that he was the light and the way. He did not mean it in the literal sense; he meant it in The True Sense. Any one of us can be our own light and our own way if we chose to be. The same is true when he mentioned that he was the son, we are all already that. He was also describing the various levels or what he called the many mansions, which are the different heavens or areas of Life that most people know nothing about. The Bible is missing a whole lot of information about The Real Universes, and so that is why people are confused and unaware of what is really taking place within them, while they are on this earth. Those that do study their Good Book do not even know where their heaven is. If they had Real Guidance they would be shown," I said.

I then looked at them and I could tell that they were rather perplexed at what I was saying. So I decided to stop there, because I could see the look on their faces, which was one of an almost disbelief. Little Feather had a remark also that I may have said too much.

"Wow, that was very interesting, Goldie. Where did you learn all the things you know?" asked Jess, with a real intent.

"I first started learning from my mother; she is a very Aware Being. She would teach me as I was growing up about all the things that Life is trying to tell us. She taught me how the animals and the birds talk to us, but most people can't understand what is being said to them, because of the way they have been taught and convinced about their surroundings, so they have cut themselves of from any communication with nature. The schools that have been invented here
are for people that want to read about what others have decided for them. There is no Real Experience in only reading about something, unless it can be put to use. It is just a lot of mental agreements that sound good and make people think they have gained something.

Once a person is exposed to The True Reality, then everything begins to make sense. Life is so much bigger than a person's mind and imagination, and so as we learn to take the risk to explore more so, than what most people cling to, then we soon discover how much bigger and better our life can be. The sun in the sky is a great example of Being Real, as it shines upon all, and all of us can see it."

"With our connection to a Real Life, The True Reality that Life IS teaches and speaks to us in ITS own unique way, that is not limited to the considerations and assumptions we have been accustomed to. What we have termed as 'nature,' she said, is always demonstrating something wonderful to us, because The Great Eagle speaks through ITS children, those who are willing to Become More Aware. Most people look upon animals as dumb and without a soul, but they are just like you and me, they are Real, and they are on their own journey until they reach the human position."

I suddenly got an interesting comment from the cat and the horse on that one. "I was shown once by my Real Guide that the feathers from the head dress of

The Great Eagle are all the same, but have different experiences that make up their lives. On this level known as earth, we appear different to each other, but there is no difference within The True Reality of ourselves, because we are all from the same True Source. There is only one Real Source. We are all the drops that make up the sea of Life, that's where you and I come in. Some of us are More Aware than others, but within ourselves, we are all the same Beings, each one of us. We are all unique in our own way, because The True Reality is unique. You have accepted the role of just being human, and so now, this is what you are," I said.

I knew that I was giving them a lot, and so I decided to just relax for a while. The cat said it would be a good idea. I could see that they were wondering what I was talking about. All of us just sat there for the longest time and said nothing, and then they went to sleep.
I sat back and thought about our trip back to the fort and fell into a light sleep. It was sometime during the night that I heard something out in the distance. My parents taught me to listen closely to everything. I could wake myself up like a cat at any time if I had to. The sound was in the distance, and as I listened, it sounded like the footsteps of someone wearing soft shoes like the Indians do. Whoever they were, they would move a little, and then stop as though they were listening to see if anyone was awake. I was not going to move and confront whoever they were, it was not my concern. The only idea I could come up with is, there was someone who was going to come and rescue their friend. No matter, it was not my affair, no matter what happened.

Then, I remembered Jess's dream, where he would soon be living this experience he had in his dream. I decided to see what would take place and let things go the way they would. The footsteps continued and I became unconcerned and fell back to sleep. I was suddenly on The Unseen Beach, where the sun is always shining brightly and there are no intruders around. I realized I was here and the soldiers were on the earth, ready to go into their funny routine. I kept my attention on the surreal beauty of the ocean and the sky, and forgot about the earth entirely.

RT appeared from somewhere, and came and sat by me on the sand. "Ha, ha, ha, Indian Boy, you are very wise to let what will happen be as it will," he said, with a big smile.

I had to laugh, because I was so happy to be with him again. "You are the one who taught me to do so," I said with a big smile on my face.

We both laughed and gazed out over the beautiful ocean of Life. I loved this place, and it meant more to me than saving some horses from the Indians. I didn't want to go back and deal with what was going to take place, but then I was suddenly woken up by a shout in our camp.

"The prisoner has escaped," shouted one of the soldiers, as I could faintly see the men running around to try and find someone.

Jess and Riley jumped up, and then ran off into the black nothingness. It was a dark night and very hard to see, just like in Jess's dream. I just sat and let the event take place. I could hear all kinds of sounds taking place as everyone was moving about. It was actually rather funny to hear the goofy noises and commotion of these guys. I learned a long time ago that to take part in these
affairs was usually a waste of time, and what would come from it would be nothing but trouble. If someone were after me it would be a different story, but this event was more humorous than anything.

RT showed me the lifetimes that I had spent in turmoil. There were so many lives where I was the aggressor and also the hunted. He said those lives were a good lesson for the ones to come, but what I had accomplished was very little, and that they were really a waste of time. So much of what he taught me related to this very moment. It is a funny thing how the simplest of lessons can take lifetimes. Again, it is the ego of the human side that is so resistant to letting go of worthless assumptions.

Most of the people that I have met in this life are not interested in taking the time to learn about their True Reality, so they continue to come back to the earth and start all over again each lifetime, without remembering they have been here before. These are the people that 'do and don't' believe in something. They haven't figured out the fact that there is no such thing as 'belief,' there is only What IS Real.

I could hear all the shouting and the running around in the dark as the men seemed to be panicking about their little 'chase idea.' It was so funny listening to all these grown men trying to find someone in the dark. Jess was now out there somewhere living his dream. He was running through the dark and trying to find the prisoner like all the others. Everyone was gone from the camp. I listened closely, but I couldn't hear anyone nearby. It was a very silent night except for the sounds of the men moving in the distance. I continued to sit and think about The Unseen Worlds, and then I decided to go back to sleep and leave the earth.

I was suddenly back on the beach again, and this time my flying horse was there at the shoreline and walking through the water. Then, I noticed that there was a woman with my horse. I walked over to them and noticed that she was a beautiful blonde woman, in what appeared to be an all-white Indian dress. She was petting the horse, and then looked up at me...

"Hello, Goldie," she said with a big smile on her beautiful face. "It's good to see you again."

I was a little puzzled at what she was saying, and then I asked her, "Do you know me?" I said rather perplexed.
She just smiled and said, "Of course I do, we have known each other for a long time, lifetimes as a matter of fact." Now I was really beside myself. What was Life bringing me that I couldn't remember?

She began to laugh and then said, "You can't remember, so I will help you. You and I were man and wife in a distant past life. I was taken away by outlaws and tortured. It was either me or our daughter, so I chose to go. You were out fighting and defending our village. I was taken to The Seventh Level by Gopal Das, and I have been there ever since. I have already met you in the future also, but you will not know this yet, but soon you will."

I stood there amazed like a child at what she was telling me. I felt like I was really in a dream. "I don't know what to say," I said. She smiled and said, "You are funny Goldie. Someday you will know, but for now this is your life to live as an Indian on the earth, and eventually you and I will be together again. There is the Real part of you, The RealU that knows what is taking place, and then there is the part of you that is going through the lower maze of Life to try and find the answers to your own True Reality. Rebazar and the other guides are preparing you for a big event that will take place in your future, actually your next lifetime. You will get all the assistance you need to succeed into your future event. I wanted to be a part of your training, so that you would have many options to consider."

All of what she was saying sounded very interesting. It was like a roadmap to a Real Adventure. Here was a new and refreshing view of greater possibilities. Like a kid I was excited.

"How is it that you can see things that far into the future?" I asked with a real curiosity.

"From The Seventh Level of The Real Universes, all events are already basically laid out, because all there is can only be Real. All things must come to the end result, The Perfection of Reality ITSELF. Your free will does come into play as the events unfold and the opportunities are always there, but for you, your intent is so strong that it will carry you through to your destiny. Your nature is exceptional, so therefore the position that is waiting for you will be the same, so exceptional that very few will See it."

"The Real Guides have a formula they go by that is realized through them from The Great Reality, which is known as 'BeingISness.' It is The Ultimate Position
with The ALL IS. There exists the privileged position of The Mantle of The ISNESS, which The Real Guides only give to specially trained individuals that have the greatest of hearts and the boldest of intentions. Right now, Rebazar has the position, because he is The Brave One. Your training will continue until you reach The Real Position, and your mission is over and then you will once again enter into The Real Universes where I am," she said, as she smiled with her beautiful face.

"Who are you?" I asked, still wondering if this were all true or not, and was I really dreaming this time?

"My name is Shiss Harah U, Goldie, which you already know in your True Self," she replied with a smile.

"That is a beautiful name, I hope that I can remember it," I said, as I was looking into her beautiful blue and green eyes.

"I will be around from time to time. There is a lot of preparing that is being done from The Unseen Side while you are still on earth. There is so much that I could tell you, but you will get all that you need from The Real Guides, and what you will be going through on earth. My heart is always with you, and I will see you soon," she said, and then left as though she was the wind.

I was still standing on the beach with the bright sunshine overhead and the splendor of this Real World with all its aliveness surrounding me. I looked within myself ever so deeply to try and bring up something that would relate to what I had just experienced. My heart was now searching for this Wonderful Being, who I had just met. She brought a new magic into my life from the short time she was with me. Life was now pulling me in another direction and had opened a new door that would change my life forever. I looked into the light within myself and then I saw her. She was a Radiant Being, all aglow in the most wondrous light of somewhere unknown.

"Hello, Goldie, you found me, I am so glad. It is the love in your heart that brought you here. I will always be around and I will see you many more times before your life is over upon earth," she said, as she was perfectly aglow.

We were in a world of light where there was only light. As she looked at me, I could sense a Reality of Being in a unique position of amazing freedom. The light we were in had a life all its own. I had no words for what was taking place,

and so I just looked at her and at the same time became aware of the surroundings. Then, something within me realized that the men were returning from their hunt, and suddenly I was back in my body. The light of dawn was showing itself again and beginning to expose what was taking place. As I awoke, I could just barely make out the men walking around. They were grumbling about something. Then, Jess and Riley came over to where I was.

"Goldie, where were you? We've been out searching most of the night for the Indian and his friends," said Jess, as he seemed to be very tired and could hardly speak straight.

"Really?" I said, trying to act as though I didn't know what took place.

"You didn't hear us running around all night?" he asked, with a dumbfounded look on his face.

"I was asleep, and when I sleep, I am sometimes hard to wake up. I didn't even know you two were gone," I said, hoping they would just let it go at that.

"You won't believe what happened Goldie," said Riley, while he was trying to catch his breath. "Not only did the Indian and his friends get away, but they took the horses again and several of ours. Somebody is going to be walking back to the fort or riding double."

The thought came to my mind if it was my horse that was missing, but then I got an impression that mine was still here. "I hope mine is still here," I said, just to sound friendly.

We soon found out whose horses were taken. One of them was the Sergeant's, and oh boy, was he upset. He did a little ranting and raving at the men for a bit about their lack of paying attention and handling the situation. The Sergeant decided to take one of the men's horses, while those without had to ride double with others. Everyone got their gear together, and all of us mounted up. Then, the corporal asked the Sergeant where we were going.

"After those darn Indians that stole my horses, where do you think, Mr. Miller?" replied the Sergeant, in a nasty shouting voice. The corporal became a little whiter in the face, and said nothing more for the rest of the day.

"Goldie! Front and center," yelled the Sergeant. I immediately came to the front
of the troop and next to the Sergeant. "Do your job half breed! I want those renegades caught," he said, as he was looking at me with a real intent to get those Indians.

It was quite obvious the direction the Indians were headed in. The ground was rather soft where we were and there were tracks everywhere. I took off in the direction of their trail and the troop followed. The sun was now up and at our backs. The trail looked as though it headed back to the Indian camp, but I figured that would be too obvious, especially for Indians, because they were very clever when it came to loosing themselves from others. We followed the tracks as far as they went, which took us about a half a day. Then, the Sergeant wanted us to stop and rest. The area we were in had some nice big trees, and so I parked my horse under one of them and sat on the ground for a while with the cat. Little Feather had a few words to say about what was taking place.

"When are we going back to your parent's house? I need a home where I am fed and loved. This wild trip we've been on is no place for a cat," he said with a little whimper in his tone.

I had to laugh, and as I did my friends came over. Jess and Riley came up and asked me what I was doing. "I was taught that if I lay next to the earth that I would be able to hear the direction of those I was after," I replied.

They didn't say a word. Then, they sat down and just watched me. I closed my eyes and went to The Real Side. I was suddenly a viewpoint hovering above the area and out of all the lower bodies all together. I was above the ground and soaring like a bird. I felt myself moving above the land, and then I began searching the area. I then remembered what I was looking for, it was the Indians. I began to go higher until I could see for miles. Suddenly, along the horizon, I spotted the Indians. There were five of them along with the horses. Then, I moved toward them to try and see the area they were in. All of a sudden, I heard the Sergeant yelling for everyone to get back on their horses. I was then immediately back in my body and aware of what was going on, so I stood up.

"I know where they are," I said to Jess and Riley, and went to tell the Sergeant. "Sergeant, sir, I know where the Indians have headed."

"You do youngster?" he said rather surprised.
"They're headed west, sir, toward the ocean," I said as I watched the funny expressions on his face.

He looked at me rather suspect and said, "How do you know where they are, Goldie?"

"Sir, I'm the scout and haven't I always led you on the right trail?" I said, feeling ready to ride.

He rubbed his chin and then seemed to be lost for words and said, "You know something son, you're right, you do always seem to know where we need to go. Well then, let's go! Lead the way youngster." Then, he saddled up and watched me as I went back to my horse. The cat was already on the horse. For the first time in a while I was also excited about finding the Indians. It just seemed like a lot of fun.

"Can't we stay and take a longer nap first?" asked Little Feather. "Not this time little buddy, we're on a big rush now," I said, smiling to myself.

I wasn't serious about the chase, but I wanted the others to think that I was. Besides, I knew that this would be my last time, so I wanted to get on with it and get it done. Everyone was ready to go, and so off we went. I knew exactly where they were as long as they continued to head in the same direction. The sun was now straight up and it was another hot day. I was once again leading the troop, so I couldn't do much day dreaming, I had to stay alert and focused.

"You saw them from The Invisible Side, didn't you Goldie?" said Little Feather, as I turned and looked at him with a smile.

He was very aware, and sometimes went with me on my Real Journeys, but he wouldn't always tell me. He would sometimes hide out in The Unseen Worlds and just watch what I would do. Then he would say funny things about where I went and what I did. I wondered if he saw the beautiful woman who came to see me. "I saw her," he said, and then went to sleep.

We rode for the rest of the day. I didn't think that we would catch up to them before nightfall, because they were moving faster than we were. I started to think about all the hunts that I had been on. It was always an endless journey of chasing someone. My friend and guide Rebazar never seemed to be chasing anyone, he was always in The Worlds of Light, and always happy to serve
others. I began to wonder how long I would be on the earth and having to go through all these tiring events; I liked The Invisible Side so much better. The end of the day was near, and the hot sun was finally giving up and decided to set in the West. Everyone looked real tired, because they had already been up for most of the night. Looking over my shoulder, I could see that the Sergeant was very tired also. He looked as though he could fall asleep in his saddle any minute.

I rode over to him. "Sergeant, sir," I said. "They have a real good head start on us and they are moving faster than we are."

The Sergeant took a minute to consider what I had said and then yelled, "Halt." Great, I thought, finally!

"We'll camp here for the night men," he said as he dismounted and almost fell to the ground. There was a lone tree up ahead and so I rode over to it and tied my horse up.

Jess and Riley came right after me and did the same. "Hey, Goldie, you can't ditch us," said Jess, as he was trying to laugh through his exhaustion. I laughed as they settled in by me. They took their time to get their things arranged, because of how tired they were. All of us walked around and gathered some brush for the fire. After a while we were sitting around our little fire and relaxing. The cat went out for a walk to see what he could find. He liked the afternoons and nighttime to prowl and do his funny stuff.

"Well, Goldie, where do you think the Indians are?" asked Riley.

"I don't exactly know, but I do know they are far ahead of us and we could continue to chase them for the rest of our lives," I said as all of us laughed for a bit.

"It does seem that I am getting older out here," said Jess, as he laughed about that one.

I was thinking that these two were beginning to see the light, you might say. I think they were realizing what a game all of this chasing around was. I have come to the conclusion that there are two basic lifestyles on earth. The first one is, where you live like everyone else and do all the things they do and never look for anything else. Then, there always exists the opportunity to explore all the
possibilities that are not always seen on the surface, and discover what most other people will not. I like the second choice better.

I could never live the ordinary life of the average person, where they only live for their physical life only. After their life is done here, they will go to one of the temporary heavens, and then return here to do the same things over again without any Real Awareness about where they are at and how Life Really IS.

I knew the Sergeant, on the other hand, had a different view of things. He took everything rather serious, because he was in charge and he had to hold up a certain image for the men, an image that he liked himself. If he became too much of a comedian, the men wouldn't respect him, which will never happen with him. I wouldn't want his job as the commander of others and always going nowhere. If I was in a leadership position, I would explore the individual qualities of each person, and then allow them to express themselves as to how they would contribute to the given situation. Then, I would decide to do something that provided a Real Benefit for everyone.

For the situation at hand, I wouldn't be chasing Indians for their own horses. I would simply go out and get my own. The Cavalry and the official position they have created is something they have decided to defend, no matter what it takes or what the cost, even if it's a man's life. So many unnecessary situations could be avoided out here without the interference of some form of invented attitude of control.

If I was to speak my piece out loud I know the cat would agree. My horse would also have a few words to say, but he usually lets the cat do all the talking. At the end of the day, it was a beautiful sunset, beautiful because that ball of fire in the sky was really hot and it was good to see it getting ready to hide behind the earth for a while. We finally had our fire going, and we were all settled in for the night. All of us sat and relaxed, and then Jess finally spoke...

"You don't care if we catch these Indians or not, do you, Goldie?"

I didn't know what to say right away, but then I spoke, "Why would you say that, Jess?" I replied.

"Because you don't seem to be too enthused about the chase," he said.
"Actually, I have nothing better to do, and besides I'm being paid to ride and scout, so I'm fine. But you are right, Jess, I don't have a great concern for catching them, it's just a job and not a life style for me," I said with a consideration. They seemed to be satisfied with my answer and soon fell asleep, because they were really tired.

I sat there and looked up at the stars for a while, and then removed myself from my body and ended up on the beautiful beach again. There was no one around, and so I decided to take a walk and do a little sightseeing. I liked being here as opposed to the earth, I felt so much freer. I could tell within myself that I didn't have the little annoying attitudes from the personal arena like on earth, I could Just Be. The sun never seemed to set within this world, and it was not hot like on the earth. I walked along the palm laden shore and watched the long palm leaves sway in the gentle breeze. I could see beautiful birds in the trees, as they seemed to be watching me.

This is a Real Life, I thought to myself, a life with all the natural surroundings where there are no political creations. Each one of us can have our own endlessness without interfering with anyone. The sound of the ocean waves and the trees moving about, along with a few birds, this is such a great place to be. I walked for quite a ways, and then sat down to just listen to the ocean. As I looked out over the sea, it was a glittering reflection of dancing light that had a healing effect on me. I really enjoyed that healing feeling.

Everyone goes somewhere into the other worlds for the most part, to try and heal themselves from their daily affairs, but most people are not aware they are leaving their bodies while they sleep. They wake up each morning thinking that it is a good night's sleep that does it, when it's really their True Being finding the right spot to be.

I sat for a while, and as I was about to get up, I happened to look down the beach and I could see someone coming towards me. As she got closer, I could see Miss Shiss Harah U.

"Hello Goldie," she said in her lovely voice as she approached.

I stood up and greeted her with a slight bow, but then she came up to me and gave me a hug and a kiss.

"There," she said, "That's better, now we can get on with things."
I was rather surprised and even giggled a little. She was feeling humorous also and laughed with me. We both sat on the white sand and stretched our legs out. She just looked at me and smiled. This was a new experience for me, because I had never really been with a woman or had a relationship. I suddenly liked the idea and liked being with her.

"Do you think you will catch the Indians, Goldie?" She asked as she looked at me with her Beautiful Beingness.

I began to laugh and then said, "I don't really want to, because what they are doing is of no concern to me. But then again I will, because this will be my last hunt."

Then she said, "I know that you are only interested in The True Reality, it holds your heart doesn't it?"

I looked at her and said, "Yes, the life of Real Adventure and Trueness, that is what I live for, but most of all to stand in The Real Light and be with The IS."

She smiled and took my hand and then looked at me. "I have always loved you like no one else in all your lifetimes, and I will continue to do so, until you return to the higher levels where we will be together."

I was rather taken by her being with me and what she said. She was so straight forward and honest, and I could tell that she had a Pure Heart.

"Rebazar said, that he would take me to those places someday, but when, I do not know," I said.

"Your time is coming when he will take you; there is no rush during this lifetime. You have a lot to learn and you will be around for a while yet," she said.

"I think that I would like to do something besides scouting before I leave this lifetime," I said, as I sat there and tried to think of something.

"You have many gifts you can share with others and so you will figure out what to do with the rest of your life," she said in her sweet voice.

As I was about to say something, I was suddenly pulled back into my body from the sound of a gunshot. It was another dark and moonless night and really hard
to see. Something was going on, but as of yet I didn't know what. I could hear the men that were camped a distance from me, they were talking and moving around. I couldn't see or hear Jess or Riley, so I figured they were with the others. I stayed where I was at and waited to see what would happen. Eventually, Jess and Riley came running back to our spot.

"Goldie," said Jess, as he was trying to regain his breath, "You won't believe this for the second time Goldie, but the Indians came back and stole all the horses. The three of us are the only ones that have horses, because we were over here away from the others."

I couldn't help but laugh out loud. "Are you kidding me?" I said as I continued to laugh. "No kidding," said Riley, as he was still trying to catch his breath.

"The yelling you are hearing in the distance is the Sergeant screaming at the two men who were supposed to stay awake and watch the horses, but they fell asleep on duty. So, they're all gone, all the horses are gone! What do you think will happen now Goldie?" he said as he was breathing hard.

I thought for a moment and then said, "It's quite obvious boys, and all three of us will be riding back to the fort tomorrow for help while the rest of the men wait here."

Jess and Riley sat back down in the darkness and settled in without saying another word. I could barely see them as they went back to sleep. I laid there for a while and thought about what was to come. This could be my chance to leave and find something else to do. I thought long and hard about what else to do, but as of yet I couldn't decide. I wanted to make a real difference in some way, but I knew I had to get away from this situation that I had come to know. It was soon early dawn, and the light of the hot flaming ball was about to make its way over the horizon again. I was looking forward to going back to the fort, because I knew that it was my time for a change. The Sergeant came over to our campsite with a real hard look on his face.

"Okay men, this is what you are going to do. You three will ride back to the fort for help. We have enough provisions to last a week or so, and even then we can find something around here to survive on. I want the three of you to take off immediately," he said very sternly.
"Yes sir," I said, and got up real fast and was ready to ride in a matter of moments.

Little Feather stretched himself out and finally jumped up and was ready to go. The horse made some noises that gave me the hint that he was happy about the news. I told the horse and the cat that this would be our last ride with the army. They were very excited. It wasn't long before we were all on our way and heading back to the fort. The fort was only about two to three days from where we were. I wasn't going to tell Jess and Riley about this being my last trip until later, but when we reached the fort I was going to get what was owed to me and be on my way.

I hadn't seen my parents in years, and so they would be my first stop. I was overjoyed at the decision I made of not having to trail horse thieves any more. My horse and cat even knew that we were going to have a change in our journey, because they seemed to have more energy than before.

I had been so busy with what was going on with my Real Experiences that I had forgotten to have a little talk with him. It was hard talking to my horse while we were riding. It was much easier when we rested. I was going to make a point of it this very night and see what he had to say. The cat didn't usually listen to the horse, he had his own ideas about Life and how things should be.

It was another long and hot day on the saddle, but it wasn't that bad knowing that I would soon be finished with all the man hunting. The afternoon was soon upon us as we came to a small river with huge trees that were scattered all about. I always looked for trees to camp near, it always felt better than to be out in the open, because I actually liked trees and some of them would talk to me at times. They were also a gift from The Great One, because they provided shade in the summer months. I really liked the openness and the feeling of the big sky all around, but I always thought about the ocean and being there.

We decided to camp for the night, because we were going to make it to the fort in three days with ease. I didn't see the need to hurry. I wanted to enjoy my idea of getting a new life, and just take our time returning. Besides, I was now feeling like a youthful Indian again after so many years of intensive training. After we settled in, I took my horse for a walk along the banks of the river to have a talk with him. He had a lot to talk about. He said that we hadn't talked for a while and he had a lot to say. I listened as he talked...
"Those horses belonged to the Indians," he said. "They had originally captured and trained them. I spoke with all the horses the soldiers had, they were all from the Indians. The Indians that you were following are good people. They merely wanted what was theirs to begin with. The Indians don't really care if the white man gets his own horses, but they don't like it when they steal theirs. The horses wanted to go with the Indians, because the white man is harsh on them, and that is why the Indians got them so easily." "I can understand the Indians motives," I said, "because I wouldn't like it if someone took you."

Then he continued. "You were right in not judging the situation, because it had nothing to do with you. You are also right about what you are doing now, and that is getting on with your life and leaving the hunting of men to others. You will do greater deeds than other men could even dream of. Our destiny is to ride free from the restrictions of the society that is being created in this time. There is so much more and we will find it."

I gave him a hug around his neck, and then he became silent. I know how he is, he speaks his piece and then let's it be. I liked hearing what he had to say, because it is a wonderful experience being able to communicate with him. I didn't know of anyone else that could do it, except for my parents and my Grandfather. It is hard for me to believe, but The Great Eagle has a Real Purpose for me. I felt privileged to know what I will do, but it is hard to accept, so I liked hearing about it from others. I also liked hearing their views on what was taking place in my life at this very moment.

I have learned that Life is an endless procession of experience and there is no end, only a continuous new beginning. That is what I was trying to tell Jess and Riley before, about the Good Book that so many like to believe in. It had its day with what it provided, as Life is always new and there are so many that are having better experiences today than those people of the past. It has amazed me how long the scriptures have endured. It just goes to show you that it takes a while to let go of something small to have something even so much bigger and better. Everything I have been taught from The Real Side has nothing to do with any written material that most people look to. Life is all about Real Freedom, not laws and rules that have been documented; these things have been politically invented to steal from others.
I returned to our campsite where Jess and Riley had taken a swim. They were just coming out of the water when I arrived. I decided to take a swim, and by the time I got out of the water it was getting near dusk. All of us were soon sitting by the fire and relaxing after another long day.

"You seem rather happy today, Goldie, is there a reason for that?" asked Jess.

"Of course, my horse just gave me some good news," I replied, waiting for their response.

They both looked at me, and then began to laugh. "That was an Indian joke, right Goldie?" said Riley.

"Oh sure, all us, Indians, talk to our horses," I said, and then we all laughed again.

I wasn't going to try and convince them, they had the right to believe me or not. The cat had taken off and was prowling in the night. He is a great cat and is a good friend too. He always says funny things to me, and I can tell by the way he hangs around, that he likes being with me.

It was soon dark, and all of us talked about the men back on the trail and how they had to wait without any horses. We laughed about that one. I kept thinking about how this was finally it for me, and that I could go home and be with my family. I had learned a lot over the years with the army, but now it would become a past life that would soon be forgotten. Eventually, we went to sleep and I found myself on the beach with my horse, Flying Spirit. He liked to hang around the water's edge and get his feet wet. I liked to walk along the sand or just sit and stare out over the ocean and watch the reflection of the light. As I was sitting there I heard a voice...

"Hello Goldie," she said. It was Shiss.

She came over and sat next to me on the sand and said, "You are making a good choice by quitting. You have learned enough of the ways of the white man this time around and there will be better things for you to do. I can tell that it makes you happy, and that's all that matters."

Then, she put her arm around me and kissed me on the cheek. I listened closely to what she was saying.
"I feel good about my choice, because I want to see my parents. But after that, I am wondering what I will do. I have been a hunter and scout for so long that I really don't know anything else," I said as I looked at her.

She began to laugh and then put her hand along my arm and said, "You know more than most men. The wisdom you have will bring you into the best possible times of your life, you will see."

I was hearing what she was saying, but I couldn't see it for myself. I wanted to do something that had a Real Purpose, besides just hunting for something and surviving at making a living.

"You had to do the hunt, because you needed to see what you had to get past. Now that it's done, you will meet your new life as it gradually enters your awareness," she said.

This woman is very wise, I thought. I felt like a child sitting next to her. What she was saying is so simple. I wanted my life to be the same, but it didn't seem so to me at this time.

"It is the hardest thing to see ourselves, and that is why you consider yourself like you do. Just learn to be and live your life, which you are already doing. You have become a greater person, and you have a ways to go to get yourself where you want to be, but you will be there. I will always be around to assist you, because I love you and want to protect you. There will be the hard times, but you will make it. The tests that come your way are because of what you have chosen. Most men choose what comes easy. You have chosen what is almost impossible. You have something to offer that no one else has. I am always here whenever you need me. Remember, for your own wellbeing, I love you no matter what happens," she said, as she kissed me on the cheek, then got up and walked down the beach humming a tune.

What an experience, I thought. No matter what, I could never totally reassure myself of what I knew to be what I was to be. There was always a part of myself that I had to drag along and convince. It was soon morning and I was once again waking up to the dawn.
Little Feather came over and licked me on the face and said, "If you don't find me something to eat right now, I will lick you while you're in the other worlds." I had to laugh at his remark, but I also didn't want to be licked anymore, so I gave him some of my beef jerky. As soon as we got our gear together, all of us rode off. After two more days in the saddle, we finally came to the fort. It was late afternoon when we arrived. I didn't want to say anything right away about my departure, I would wait until morning. I spent the night in the barracks with the other men after we had reported to the post commander about what had happened. I was tired from the long ride and just wanted to rest.

# SCENE TWO

The next morning when all the men who were to go on the rescue mission and getting ready, I went to the post commander and told him that I was leaving. He tried to talk me out of it, but I stood my ground and said that I had enough. The cat was with me and gave me a wink when I said that I was done. I had already told my good friends Jess and Riley the night before, because I knew they would be busy in the morning with packing up for the trip back to the Sergeant and the men of the troop. They soon realized why I was so happy, because I was free from a job that was now over with. I watched them leave, and said goodbye again as they rode out. I decided to hang around for a day or so, just to think about what I might do after seeing my parents again.

I went to get some reading material from the little library they had at the general store to see what I could find. The cat said it was a good idea, because I needed to keep myself busy while he would take his naps. As I was browsing through the books, I came across one that was written on the subject of teaching, and how to teach others. Then, I remembered what Shiss had said about what I needed would come to me. I never really thought about teaching what I already knew so well. Suddenly, it seemed like a good idea. I took the book back to the barracks and sat and read for most of the day, while the cat just slept.

The author spoke of the fact that, to learn what you already know even better, go out and teach it. I thought about all that I had been through in my life, and soon realized that I did have a lot of experience to share, especially in the area of The True Realities that very few people know about. All the realizations that have come from my Real Connection, and making sense of my outer life, would be a wonderful gift to so many. I began to look over all the years of experience I did have. Shiss was right, I can do this.

I kept reading for a long time, so much so that I dozed off and found myself with Rebazar. He was there, standing and looking right at me as though he had been waiting for me.

"You found the right book. What do you think?" He said, looking at me with that grin on his face.

"I will give it a try, but I am still wondering how to start," I said, hoping for some good advice.
He looked up to the sky and then looked from one horizon to the other, and then looked back at me. "You can start from wherever you like, there's plenty of room to experiment with," he said with a great laugh.

Okay, I thought, that gives me plenty to think about, the skies the limit. Then, I was woken up by several of the post soldiers coming in off guard duty.

"Hey Goldie, we hear you're leaving, we sure will miss you," one of them said. "I will miss you fellows too, but it's time for me to move on," I replied.

"We understand, I wish my term were up so I could go home. Good luck to you, Goldie," they said.

"Thank you, it's been good knowing you," I said, as they went off to have their supper.

I would really miss some of these men, because there were some good ones here. I got up and decided to take a last look around before leaving in the morning. I walked outside and down the boardwalk, and then past some of the little stores that were inside the post. At the general store, there were so many things that one could have and own, but I liked to travel light, I really didn't need that much. I was going to miss this place, but I knew it was time for a change and I was going to go for it. I was a pretty savvy half breed now, and I felt good about all the things I had been through. The book I read helped me a lot and I know that after I see my parents and talk with them, I will have a better idea of where to start my new life.

The next day came pretty fast and I was ready to go. While I was getting ready, the cat walked in from his night out. He yawned and said that he was tired.

"We are leaving right now," I said, as he looked at me uninterested. "So, I have to ride that silly horse again don't I?" said the cat.

I just laughed and walked out while he followed me, as the horse looked over and made a remark.

I said my goodbyes to my friends and then I was on my way. For some reason, as the day went on, the hot sun decided to taper off a bit. It wasn't so hot as

usual. I rode at a steady pace and my horse had told me before we left that he felt good and strong about the journey and that he was even excited. I had to laugh when he told me that. It was rather lonely out on the open range by myself, but I knew The Real Guides and my new friend Shiss were with me.

The human level of awareness can be a lonely place, if this is the only realm that you are aware of, but I had plenty to consider from all that I had been through. RT, had only taken me to a few levels in the other worlds, but I knew there were many more that were even better. I was realizing that The Guides wanted me to go through the harder part of Life to strengthen myself for what was to come. RT told me, that when he was on the earth, that it was always difficult to present The Real Message to the humans, because of what a hard place this is and how the awareness of most people is. I can see now that this is what I am learning, to pay attention to everything. Each day is hard for me to be here, but I know that I have to proceed with my purpose until my time is done here. I didn't really mind as long as I have something of a Real Benefit to do. I knew there would be those who would understand some of the knowledge I would be presenting.

The first couple of days of casually riding were very enjoyable and also stopping each afternoon to camp out. I never saw anyone except for the animals that lived on the land. As I would ride along, there would be an occasional little critter that would come up to me and start telling me about his life out here. The Road Runners are the funny ones to communicate with, they are always in such a hurry and they converse the same way. On the third night I was really tired, because during that day we had to climb some hills.

On top of one of the plateaus, I found a nice area that had some large rock formations and some trees. It was a great spot to camp for the night. I stopped early and set out my gear. I was above the rest of the terrain. It was as though I could touch the sky. As nightfall came the moon began to rise. It was a perfect night with all the stars out and the full moon coming into view. The cat took off as usual and vanished in the night. There was something rather fun and mysterious about this night. I could tell there was a change occurring in the air. I felt a difference in something taking place in my Real Awareness. I began to think about the unseen mysteries and all that I had learned so far from my guides up to this point in my life.

With all the experience I have had, and then to realize what to make of it, there never has been a dull moment in my life or a real need for anything. With the

Real Journey I was on, I knew that my life would only get better. Rebazar is a great teacher and I knew he would always be with me. I thought about Shiss, and how she would fit into my life. I wasn't quite sure how, so I would just have to wait and see.

Then, I fell asleep as I was looking up at the stars. I was in a dream somewhere beyond the earth. It was as though I was floating in the sky. I was gently walking on the air far above the earth. There was a wonderful silence as I was all alone in a place in Life that I did not recognize. It was as though I was suspended in eternity and had the freedom to separate myself from all the lesser elements. I felt fine and reassured, even though I was alone. It was a friendly loneliness. I knew this was part of the change that was occurring. It is The Real Change that made no sense to my outer life at times, but did affect it with many gifts from beyond the world of others.

I don't know how long I was gone from my body, but when I returned it was morning. As I opened my eyes and looked up at the sky, I could still see the stars as the light of dawn was approaching. I just laid there for a while and looked up at the sky and how free it is. I looked around to see if the cat had returned, but he hadn't. I knew that I was about to start my new life, whatever it might be. It was another step into the unknown and all that it entailed and I wanted it. I felt a great burden lift from me, now that I had chosen to change directions. I felt free for now. After a while, I got up and walked around to see where I was at. After the experience I had during the night, I almost forgot where I was. Something had taken place that gave me a renewed feeling to go on. I thought about the book and the idea of teaching, which I liked. As I was going over some of the details I wanted to pursue, the cat walked up...

"Are we ready to ride horsy again?" he said, with his little monotone voice.

"It sounds like you are excited to ride again, little buddy," I said, as I laughed at his mannerism. I soon saddled up and we were on our way. After a few days, I was riding into the area where my parents lived. They were both there. Mom saw me first and came running over. As she did, I got off my horse and greeted her with a big hug.

"You've come home, son! I saw you in the other side and knew you were coming, you look wonderful," she said, as she hugged me again.

"And here is Little Feather, mom, he has grown so big," I said.

The cat jumped down and said, "Hello mom, do you have any fish?" She immediately laughed and said sure.

Dad had been out collecting wood, when he walked up. "Well, young man, it's good to see you, thanks for letting us know that you were coming," he said, as he laughed and we walked toward the house.

It was great to see them after all these years. They had built a small house for themselves and so did some of their friends. I went inside to see what they had done.

"It looks like you are living like the white man, father," I said jokingly.

Both of them laughed as dad said, "There are a few things that the whites have done well, and that is they know about building a good place to live."

"I am so glad to see that both of you are so well," I said, grabbing them and holding on.

"It has been a long seven years away from you. I have learned a lot and it is now time for me to bring a new change into my life. Before I left the post, I read a book on teaching, and that's what I've decided to do. I'm not sure how to go about starting, and so I was hoping that you two would give me some advice."

"That's wonderful," said mother. "You will be a great teacher. There is so much that you can share with others. You already know so much, and as you teach others, Life will teach you."

I could see that dad was thinking about something. "Well dad, what do you think?" I asked.

"There are Indians who want to learn about The Real Worlds, and so there must be white people that want to learn also. I would suggest that you write a book. If you have something to show people they will pay attention. With a book, just like the one you read, people will listen to you and it will prove to them that you are a Real Person. You have many years and even lifetimes of wonderful experiences to share, so you will be busy," he said.

"I like the idea, dad, you are very wise. I will start to write immediately and I will need a place to do it," I said.
We laughed and then mom said, "That is why we built this place, it is meant to be that you would come back here to write your new book with us and be a great author."

All of us laughed and hugged each other. My parents now had a nice little house with an indoor stove. It was a great place, very simple and well done. They still had the tipi standing, but it was now used to store their other things. I could see the progression of things as time went on. They had lived in the wilderness for a long time and they knew so much about so many things. Where they were was well away from where most people would consider anything to be and that's how they wanted their life. They liked the solitude of nature and what it has always taught them.

Both my parents had Real Experiences like I did, they were taught by Rebazar and my grandfather. They told me that grandfather had passed away while I was gone. He was now into the Happy Hunting Grounds, as some of the Indians would refer their heaven to be, the Astral Worlds. But, I know grandfather went past the limited heavens into The Real Universes. He also talked about the different levels and that there were many Heavenly Grounds to roam about in. He was a wise man who knew The Real Guides, and would tell all those who would listen to his adventures. I was rather sad that he was gone and that I was not around to be with him during his passing, but I knew I could visit him in the Invisible Regions at any time.

That evening, we sat around the house and talked about the days when I was growing up. My parents were Real People, who knew the meaning of Life and the simplicity that it is. The house they built was just like them, very creative and well done. I liked where they lived, and as we sat and talked, I could see myself writing my new book here. I thought to myself, how amazing my life had been so far with all the experiences I have gone through and to finally come to this new moment. I was trying to figure out where to start with my writing.

"Mother, where do you think I should start the writings of my book?" I asked.

She immediately laughed and continued to do so. I began to laugh too, because she was so beautiful. Then, my dad started laughing.

When we were through and things calmed down, she said, "At the beginning of course."
I laughed again as it did make sense. The answer was so simple that I couldn't see it myself.

"You are wise mother," I said

She smiled and said, "Of course I am, Goldie. Life is wise, it is within and all around us and you will share the bigger parts of what it is with so many, and we will have fun reading it."

How could anyone have better parents than these, they were great. They were my best friends and I was fortunate to know them.

"When I was very young mother, what did I like to do the most?" I asked.

"You liked the things that most children like, but when we took you to the ocean for the first time at the age of three, you were so excited and elated, especially for such a young child. That was when we met Paul and Mary for the first time along the beach. They had just come in from a fishing trip on their boat with their two young daughters. We were visiting your grandfather who liked to live near the ocean at that time. All of us got to know each other real fast, because it was meant to be. During that time we told them about The Real Guides, and they started to have Dream Visions right away, and were shown some of the other levels by The Guides. We stayed with Paul and Mary for about a week, and you and the girls were at the shoreline playing all day and every day," she said.

"Now I know why I love The Pacific Ocean so much. I came into this life wanting to find the ocean again, that is why I was so excited at such a young age, but now I have found The Real Ocean within myself. All the realizations I have had have come from The Real Connection to The Real Ocean, the one that lies beyond the one that I am at in The Invisible Worlds. You two love the ocean so much, why don't you live there?" I asked.

"We will someday be there again Goldie, but for now this is where we are to be. We are teaching our friends that live around here about The Real Guides, and when the time is right we will move from here and go back to the ocean, probably near Paul and Mary. When we met them, we shared some of our experiences together. They caught on to what we were telling them real fast, because they were prepared by The Real Guides, this is what we were shown. This is where you will start your book with us, but I don't think you will finish it here son. I can see that things will change for you very soon, and so you will
finish your new writing somewhere you will be happy," mom said.

"Wow, this is interesting. I can see that you are right mom," I said, and then kissed her.

The night time went fast and I was tired from the long ride. They slept in the house, but I wanted to sleep outside in the darkness. Since I was here last, my dad's friends had built their houses also. There is so much open space around here, and so his friends built their homes a distance away. I figured that I would go visiting while I was here and that I had plenty of time to do so. The country side is very fertile and there are trees everywhere, you could grow anything here. What the area was called didn't really matter, my parents never cared, and they just lived. I found some soft ground to sleep on and then I spread my blanket out. I lay there thinking of grandfather for the longest time and how I wanted to see him, and so off I went as the body slept. I found myself flying in the other worlds above some great land mass that was by the sea. Then, I remembered that grandfather loved to always be near the great waters. Suddenly, I spotted him sitting on a bluff overlooking the ocean. I flew down and landed right beside him.

As I landed and went over to him, he said, "What took you so long?"

I laughed as he said his funny line. "Grandfather, you left without saying goodbye," I said jokingly.

"It was too much trouble, I wanted to get out of that earthly place and be by my Real Ocean," he said with a smile.

"You do look happy Grandfather," I said.

Then he remarked, "My name is White Warrior, you can call me that now. On earth I was your grandfather, but here I am free with all The Real Warriors. I am no longer a prisoner of the body and all the details that it must have. It is good to see you, Goldie, I knew you would find me soon enough," he said, as he smiled.

"I had a feeling that you would be going on your 'Journey to Freedom' and I was hoping to catch up with you before you left," I said.
"I am so glad you did, Goldie. It looks as though The Real Guides waited for you to see me off, because here I go," he said, as he pointed out to sea.

Then, from out over the ocean in the distant sky, there was a formation of light that caught my eye. I stood there and looked as the light became brighter and brighter. It was a beautiful vision that was unfolding right before us. I watched while it took its time to become what it would. The lights from the sky and the reflection on the water were so brilliant and stunning. I felt a real love for grandfather and what was about to take place for him. I knew this transition is very special, because so many people leave the earth in misery or not knowing where to go, and some even stay lost between worlds and are thought of as ghosts.

None of the tragedies of human errors exists with The Real Guides, as they take care of their own. There is such a vast difference as one becomes more aware with the proper education from all the misconceptions spread upon the earth. The Whole of Life is not about any sort of 'belief or faith,' as IT IS Already Real and Wonderful. A child cannot understand what their parents are trying to teach them, and so it is while one is trapped in the human consciousness, they will never See or perceive Reality, because it takes a huge course to complete one's self for this Real Journey.

"It is my birthday Goldie, The Real Guides are preparing a big party for me," he said, as he began to laugh.

"Really Grandfather?" I said. "How old are you?"

"Ha, ha, silly boy, every day is my birthday! And besides, I am White Warrior now, not your relative anymore," he said as he laughed.

I laughed with him as we both watched the marvelous event of brilliance unfold as the sky seemed to open up. It was a gradual unveiling of luminous light that spread harmoniously outward as though it was reaching out to touch us. Then, there began to appear numerous Beings of Light, who were emerging from out of the center of the light that hung over the ocean above the horizon. They floated toward us as we watched. I looked at grandfather as he was staring right at them. Then suddenly, I knew what was taking place, they were coming for him.

As they approached, he stood up and held his arms wide open. Then, I saw his
Real Being leave the body he was in and gently go with them while the body fell to the ground and completely disappeared. He glided out a ways toward The Real Guides, and then looked back at me and gave me a wave with his hand, as I could sense his gesture of love. I could see that he was totally happy and beaming from his Being.

It was an amazing sight to behold as he stood there as a Radiant Being of Light. I saw Rebazar with him and all the other guides. The light from The Unseen Worlds filled the entire sky. There must have been thousands of Great Beings all lined up as grandfather went with them into The Real Universes of The Great Eagle. Standing there, I was experiencing the wonderful sincerity that Life Truly IS. Then, all of them went gently back into the light and they were soon gone. The light returned to itself until there was just the sun hanging in the sky.

I realized that he had waited for me, so that I could say goodbye, even though I didn't, it didn't matter. I had the knowingness of what was taking place. My grandfather is a Wonderful Being, who has The Real Connection that very few know about. I knew that I would see him again, and that he had to go to the higher levels to establish himself. Then, he could return to where I was at if he chose to. It was not my time yet to learn about The Real Beyond, the secret realities that exist far past even our inner experiences. I knew that someday I would know when I was able to travel the way of The Great Eagle and his guides. I felt a great privilege within myself as I stood and considered what had just taken place.

This was the first time I had seen this event and I knew what it meant. I soon returned to my body as the light of dawn began to enter where I was at on earth. I laid still for a while and listened to the morning birds as they made their usual singing routines. After a while, they calmed down and then there was a real silence, which was the best part.

Then, I heard the cat walk up. He just sat there and looked at me while I was resting. He always has the right expression on him. "I'm going to find a nice place to sleep," he said as he walked off.

The silence was soon broken by my parents as they came out from their house and greeted me. "Hey sleepy boy, come and help me get some wood for the fire, and here is some fish for our cat," she said, laughing.
I immediately got up and went with her to gather the small pieces of wood that were scattered everywhere. It was a real joy to be home again and to see the changes that had taken place. When we got back to the house and we were sitting around the table, I wanted to tell them what had taken place during the night.

As I was sitting there and Mom was preparing some fruit for us, she asked, "Were you at the special happening during the night?"

At first I didn't know what she meant, because she took me by surprise with what she asked. Then, I realized she was talking about what took place with grandfather.

"Yes," I said, "He told me his real name, but I will always think of him as my grandfather."

She sat down and handed me some fruit and said, "You are a very special Being, Goldie. The world will not know that, but there will be those that will. All of us here are special, because The Great Eagle has granted us the awareness to see beyond the layers of darkness into The Real Light, and given you and me and your father, The Real Voice of ITSELF to live by. There are a lot of smart people in the world who think they know what they know, and then there are the very few who have The Real Connection to The Great Reality. You will tell others through your writings, and they will have the opportunity to explore for themselves.

Mankind is coming into an age where his awareness of things will bring him what he wants in the material sense, but The Real Heart of him will still be searching for The True Source of ALL. What we experience from The Real Side is because we are open to it. Most people will turn away, but you will be here to teach them. It takes someone like you with courage to do this."

My mother is so wise and wonderful. I always felt humbled by my parents. They were always so mindful of everything they do in Life, no matter how small the task, they took great care in doing it. Then, I explained my experience with grandfather.

"What I saw was The Great Light from beyond and The Brilliant Guides coming from the unknown. Then, grandfather went with them, like a great soaring bird," I said.
Both of them smiled, as they ate their fruit and laughed. "What is so funny?" I asked.

"We were standing right behind you at the place you were at, but you were so involved in what was taking place that you didn't even notice us. Even the cat was there," said my dad.

I thought how wonderful they were also there, even though I did not know. I just looked at them and smiled. My relationship with my parents wasn't always verbal, but a notion of knowingness that seemed to prevail through all that we did together.

"I want to start writing my new book today, but I don't have any materials," I said to them.

My mother got up and went to a cabinet she had. She pulled out some paper and a marker of some kind to write with and brought them back to the table.

"This is what you used when you were young and you liked to draw things," she said. "There should be enough paper here to get you started until someone goes to town."

She handed me about fifty sheets that were rather large. I had to write with a feather pen and ink, this is how it was then.

"You saved all of this for me, didn't you?" I said.

"Something did tell me that it would be needed for a very special occasion, and this is the time and place for it to be created. Most of the world will not believe you, but that doesn't really matter. You will do it for all those that it does matter and they will be ever so grateful, and so will all of Life," she said, as I stood up and gave her a big hug.

"Thank you mother, I love you," I said as I hugged her again.

I decided to call my new book, 'The Golden Warrior.' It seemed to be right at the time. I also decided to start with how my parents met and when I was born into this life. I would sit with my mother and she would tell me how I came into this world. After my dad found my mother at the wagon train she said that she fell in

love with him right away. Her desire was always to have a child like me. She told me that bringing me up was the greatest joy of her life. I was raised like a Real Indian, in a teepee. Of course, the first few years I stayed close to my mother, but as I grew older, I went on little hunts with my father.

He taught me about the natural things that are all around us, and also those things that are happening within ourselves. We would hunt for animals that we caught with the bow and arrow. We only took what we needed from the wilderness, because there were many other things to eat besides animals. It became fun to hunt, but I didn't like hurting the animals, so I let him do it. He also taught me how to fish in the streams like the bears do. I liked watching the fish go by and then trying to catch them. It was a real fun time for me at that early age.

Grandfather would also come with us when he visited, but he would mainly just watch, because it was hard for him to get around. Sometimes we would spend the night in the forest among the lovely lonely wilderness. We were always all alone, and sometimes an animal or bird would come by and talk with us.

The trees had their own language too, but they mainly kept to themselves. I learned that they like the peacefulness of Just Being. I liked the silence of the great outdoors and being with the real part of Life that knows ITSELF. Every night, before I went to sleep, dad would tell me to pay attention to my experiences from The Real Side that I was having, because The Real Guides were always trying to teach me something new.

It was at a young age that I met RT on The Invisible Side. My father said that Rebazar is a great teacher, and that he had known him all his life from when he was a young boy. It was his father that knew him also, and that was my grandfather. There were other wonderful guides who would appear to us at times, but for the most part it was, Rebazar.

One of my first encounters with him was at The Real Ocean. I was about 3 or 4 at the time. I found myself at the water's edge, standing in the bright inner sunshine and wondering where I was at. Then, RT came up from the shoreline along the beach and introduced himself.

He then pointed out to the great ocean and said, "This is The Sea of Life. IT is made up of the drops of Life that you and I are. ALL Life IS Light, and you and I are the same light, as all are. It is your time to wake up to this True Reality Now.
You and I are the same bright star that has come from The True Source, and has taken the journey to find ourselves. I have found myself, and now it is your turn to find yourself, and then make a place for yourself in The Real Universes."

At the time and age I was at, I just stood there and listened, not knowing what to think. I liked looking out over the beautiful blue water and watching the reflection of the sun's light dance upon it like sparkling jewels. It is similar, but different from the ocean my parents took me to when we met, Paul and Mary. I can still see all the events I went through with Rebazar, as I always carry them with me.

Then, RT said, "Life is Light, and all things that have come to be are from The Real Light. You and I are The Real Light Life IS. Within us is the answer to ALL That IS. As time and events progresses on the earth, the idea of men will be to continually confine The Free Reality That IS, to a controlled documentation of authoritative obedience. The created documentation can be a reference point, but not The Real Answer. You now know that The Real Experience is within you, and that you are the answer and The True Light for you. The way to What IS Real is through you. Letting go of the external hold and becoming part of The True Reality, is the only answer. There is only one True Reality, and IT created everything according to ITSELF."

This was a basic idea of what RT first told me as an introduction to The Real Awareness of myself. Even though I was very young, it seems to be easy for me to remember so many of my meetings with him. His wisdom and training were very basic, and are not based upon any rules or regulations, or any kind of distortions, but directly with The Real Source ITSELF, The Sound and Light.

I have learned from my parents that The Real Guides are in direct contact with The Ultimate Source, and do not lend themselves to the gods that man has invented. Rebazar explained to me that The True Reality, The Great Eagle as he would sometimes call it, was not a person or a personality from out of past events and stories that have been handed down through history, but an actual ISNESS that Always IS and will Always BE, and that IT only continuously demonstrates Real Love and True Freedom for all. That IT cannot be found in the past or in the future, but always in The Here and Now, and only within ourselves. As we learn to open ourselves up to What IT IS, then we start our Real Journey, past the limited lives we have spent on the earth and other planets and systems. The True Reality IS a Real Freeness, unlike anything institutionalized by humans.
RT gave me The Secrets of The Real Connection to The True Light and Voice of The Great Eagle, The Reality of The Unknown. It is very simple, but it is only for those who would risk all, and only they would find The Real Source. He explained that I did not have to give up living my earthly life, but to just give up those things within myself that had no real purpose or value, that it is the expanding of my awareness to What IS Real. It has taken me a long time to digest the things he has taught me. The more I have realized, the less I seem to know.

"Less is More," he would say, "And the personal gathering of more is less. To realize The True Reality, you must allow yourself to react to less, so that you can experience Being More and More Aware."

He always directed me into the area of Just Being, and that everything took place in this moment, Now. He called it "BeingISness." As I became older and more capable, we would take little journeys. I think I was about 12 when he brought me my flying horse.

"Do you like him?" he said with his great mannerism. I was so overjoyed that I could hardly speak.

"He's wonderful and he has wings, and you are giving him to me?" I said, almost crying.

"He's all yours. What will you call him?" he asked.

I thought for a moment, and then decided on, 'Flying Spirit.' "Can I ride him now?" I asked, hoping that it would be so.

"Let's go," said RT, as he leaped from the ground into the air. I jumped on Flying Spirit and then took off into the sky where RT was waiting. "Let us fly on the wind and be free," he said, as he motioned for me to follow him.

We took off far above the land masses that were below. I could see scattered islands everywhere as they were spread out like giant shells on a beach. The sky was filled with white puffy clouds that were spaced apart and just right for flying over. It was a real thrill to experience myself flying in the wind, and so free. Since then, I have had many trips into The Unseen Worlds with my flying horse.

Rebazar has taught me that there is so much more to Life than just the flying
adventures. His main purpose is to teach all those who are willing, The Real Secrets of True Being, and how Life Really IS. He said I should take time out to enjoy all the Wonders of Life, and all IT contains, and have a Real Purpose, something that keeps me going into The Invisible Reality, where all things are realized and there is no end to the possibilities. He constantly pointed out that I was one of the fortunate ones, in that I was not brought up according to any doctrine that was to be found on the earth, that I learned what I knew from The Real Source, my openness to Real Experience. As we were flying he began to explain...

"Beyond your experiences lies The Endless and Unseen Vistas to The Great Reality, that all souls are seeking, but they first must become NU, so as to take on The Real Journey. Most of the people of earth have become convinced by solicitors peddling their written doctrines, and then they manipulate people to profess themselves into a 'belief' of something. Earth's history has shown that most people cling to an idea that has been presented to them, which they allow themselves to be convinced by that has no Real Value, even though there are huge numbers of followers involved in the idea. Every person has the right to decide whatever they will, but you are among the very few who has not been exposed to the ideas that are of the limited nature and the invented gods of man."

"There are two basic fields of positioning action, and within these there are many more, but for now we will say there are two. First, there are the lower regions of natural limitations and creativity that profess to be the ultimate, until you are able to experience the True Expansion of your Real Awareness beyond them. These first few levels are positioned in the mind and its various parts. Within these areas reside The Decided Space Gods that man has created and made his 'official authority.' These governors have built and rule the lower beautiful heavens, which can be enjoyed by all, and are mainly for the benefit of learning. Eventually, each soul learns to realize and discover The True Unseen Worlds that the mind cannot perceive, and is introduced into a NU Position.

Within the mind and emotional areas, The RealU enjoys the things that it is able to create and survive with while still having their bodies as vehicles on certain levels. The mind and all that it entails is the first awakening of The Real Awareness to what is possible, but The RealU soon learns that the mind has its limitations, and discovers that the creative side of Life is only temporary in the lower realms. This is why the heavens of man can only exist for so long, because they are from the creative nature of The True Reality, and are not The

Real Universes of Sound and Light. Until The Real Awareness of the individual is willing to let go of the control and manipulation of creativity for the sole purpose of keeping itself unaware, then it will not experience The True Reality and all the benefits which are possible."

"The second position is that of 'BeingISness.' This True Reality lies beyond what the mind can even consider to exist. This Wondrous Reality is 'indifferent' to all the ruling systems of the earth, and all of the mental and emotional realms, because there will always be those that want to maintain a control over others. This is where The Real Guidance to What IS Real becomes necessary, because the mind is limited to its area of experience only. This True Reality, which IS Real, has always been Here and Now. IT always has and will continue to do so, because IT IS an ISNESS. There are so many teachings that look to an 'authority god,' not realizing that it is The Creative Space Gods that they are agreeing to and not The True Reality. There are so many gods within the mind realms and all that it decides, but there is only one True Reality, and IT IS Pure. The idea that, ALL Life IS One is true, but the realization of What IS Real is separate from what the mind can conceive. This is the position of The Ultimate IS, where the mind isn't. This is the ISNESS that I am always referring to. It is in everything, yet unseen in The True Sense by most."

"You have the heart of a child and the life for adventure. You are not interested in being stationary like most of the earth people. The average person is more interested in their facts and figures and their possessions, than they are of The True Nature of What IS Real. The ideas that most people have of Life, amount to very little compared to The ALLNESS. It is important to take care of those things that involve your life on all levels, but to live your whole life just to support your physical body only is to plan for more limited embodiments into the future. This is where you have separated yourself from the mass thinking of a limited embodiment to a Real Life Style."

"You are being prepared for something that will take place in the future, something that very few will ever know or even comprehend. It will take a lot of your strength, and that is why you are having the life you do right now. You need the freedom to explore, because the future will be a different set of situations to deal with. You will have The Real Guidance, which very few will have, because you are willing to have it. It is The Unseen Training, that almost no one would even consider and you will only discover it within yourself."

"There are an endless number of Real Universal Guides that the majority of

earth people know nothing about. Human history has documented certain individuals that have come to the earth to bring their message; they were the students of Life. Very few of them were The Real Guides, because the message they bring is too extreme for people. The masses must have something that has been softened or they will rebel, because of the comfort zone they have been bought up with. They have been taught to fear what their authorities have designated, instead of exploring and discovering Real Truth. But what usually happens, because the message is diluted, is that it is misunderstood and then distorted by those that would misuse their positions. This is where The Real Experiences from The Real Side take over from the outer written words, and provide the evidence to those who are the young at heart. The outer information is the start, but without The Real Guidance and Unseen Training, the outer language has no Real Value, except to comfort a person's mind and emotions into staying unaware for eons."

"There is no Real Experience in the mind, only in The RealU. The creative realms are for the purpose of exposing an avenue to start with for The RealU, to get through the process of elimination, to first discover what is not Real and then to eventually come in contact with The Real Guides, who are with The ALL IS, and then be shown What IS Real. There is always the appearance of a life in the creative realms, but it will only last so long. You have been here thousands of lifetimes to get to the position of where your awareness is Now. Life ITSELF is in no hurry for The RealU to accomplish its destiny with ITSELF. The Real Body of Man, his very Beingness, is not seen with the physical eyes. Once you have realized your True Self, the lesser parts of you will make sense accordingly. Your training will be non-stop, and the knowledge and wisdom that you will achieve will be beyond the senses of your mind. Your part will be the hardest, even your friends will wonder about you. When a person like you takes up the task of revealing The True Reality to themselves, The Unseen Doors are opened and the flood of Light and Sound comes through that produces the realizations from The Ultimate True Reality. This constant experience with The Sound Light Reality, leads one to a contradiction with the mental established orders of authoritative mind controllers. They cannot and will not understand your NU Positioned View, because they are stuck with their routines of regulated and documented conformity. So, their first inclination is to resist, because they do not want to give up their position or control as they have been taught to fear their gods if they leave their formulated idealistic authority. They have been taught that fear is greater than Real Freedom. If they were to truly explore what you will be presenting, they would discover that it would benefit them and many others."

"In the creative worlds there is always room for expansion. An idea that has been realized can be expanded upon, so that there are not as many limitations attached to it. It all depends upon those who handle the idea or ideas and what they are willing to allow. Again, those systems that have been established on the earth have proven to themselves that their way works for them, and so they are usually not interested in seeing past what they have created. As they continue to only agree with their creations, they establish an involvement that disallows them to understand The Real Source of their creativeness. Creativity, is a must within the Mind Worlds, and should be seen for what it is, a temporary situation that allows the individual to compare The Unseen Reality with what is only temporary. One cannot grasp The True Reality all at once, but must gently Be with IT. Your experiences in the material levels provides for a comparison to occur, so that you can recognize, and then further realize what Reality IS. The average person would not understand this simple observation, because they are usually operating from their invented intellect, their 'Literal Senses,' and not from their True Being of ALL Light."

"Very few will catch on to the fact of how The True Reality IS, and that is, that IT has no ending or beginning, that IT IS as IT IS Now, and IT cannot be conceived through the senses of the mind and what is considered, but IT is constantly experienced everywhere we are. IT, can only be Seen and experienced by those who have the heart and will to See IT. Each one of us must go through the educational process of what the mind and the levels it pertains to is, but then the opportunity comes to reach past the limited life into a new life of boundless expansion. The Real Guides provide this opportunity, and attempt to make it available to all those who will listen. When The Real Presentation is brought to the outer life, the physical world, there is always great resistance from the distortedly educated, because of what has been established here. People have been taught to fear for the most part, what they do not understand, but they do not seem to fear their limited and hard life here, even when they do not know where they are going from here. The Real Gifts of Life are always present and within your grasp, so Just Be," said RT, as we continued to fly, and then I found myself back in the body.

What I know of what Rebazar has taught me, I have realized over the years. Those that I have given a little of the knowledge to usually ask me what good is the knowledge that I have. Just by them asking, they are showing their lack of awareness. The knowledge is the first step to The Real Freedom in the other worlds that already exist. The knowledge helps one to be released from the limitations that our own considerations confine us to and the worlds we have

invented that holds our Real Awareness from The True Reality. I know that so many people look to something they can hold in their hands with their mind and emotions, but there is so much more than the tangible elements and the considerations of ritualism that have been invented. It is the knowledge of The Invisible Reality that provides a position of Real Survival, as I have experienced by being outside the body.

After a couple of days of writing, Rebazar came to me in the other worlds one night.

"I can see that you have found your purpose, you will now explore The True Vista of The Ultimate Reality. Your writings will be way before their time, but your own education for what is to come in the future will manifest into the time period that all will be possible," he said.

RT was talking in such a way as to have what he said go right over my head. He never came right out and said that I would be coming back into the future to do what others wouldn't or couldn't, but after a while I was getting the knowledge of what he was presenting.

"The experience of the future machine that you showed me, did that have significance?" I asked him.

He looked at me with his coal dark eyes and said, "What do you See?" he said, and then he laughed.

I stood there trying to see past what was taking place, and at the same time See something within myself that was right in front of me, yet not yet obvious. I was beginning to realize that there was so much that I wasn't Seeing, and that there were already plans for me that I was not understanding at this time.

"Your book will be a good start for you to build your life upon, and to bring forward from within yourself The Hidden Reality that lies waiting to be Seen and Heard. As you continue to create your new position, you will continually perceive what it is that you really know. At some point, you will recognize your journey, and then you will know what you must do for you. You will benefit the most and those who listen will also have something to start with. In this time right now, you are the youth and the newborn. This world is waiting for something Real and Complete, and you are the one who will show the fortunate souls that pay attention the most," he said.

I always marveled at his words and how he delivered them. I was beginning to catch on to how The True Reality IS, and how IT wanted to be expressed, by the very fact of writing my perceptions down and then going over them. The main theme was to provide the information as to how and what I was experiencing was possible. Since the human race began, mankind has been experiencing a relationship with The True Reality, but not really recognizing IT, so IT has sent The Real Universal Guides to assist people. It is really a simple identification process that the intellectually stimulated over considers. Children and nature are the best examples of natural, simple and demonstrated wisdom, and we do not have to over consider them, but just view them and enjoy the experience of Being Real with ALL.

The limitations that have been taught from generation to generation, have flourished throughout the earth and established themselves in every corner of what has been termed as, 'life' here. The secrets that Life is sharing are always with us, but we must decide that we will become a part of IT. There are many different ways for one to unravel the mysteries that lie within, and it is our own pursuit that makes the exposure possible. Not everyone will continue on into an endless unknown, because they feel safer with what others have considered for them. Most will stop at a point and decide they have discovered The True Ultimate, or that they have had enough. Then, they will sometimes establish an idea for themselves and others and stay in it for the longest time, even lifetimes. All of us have Free Will, and we can have anything, but it is the actual 'not having,' which is the secret to a Real Life. It is not that one has to give up anything, but simply learn to understand what they are doing with their life and allow Real Guidance to become the bigger part, instead of the little part.

After about a week with my parents, and writing the book for most of every day, I wanted to do something fun for a change. I suggested to them that we take a day off and go to the big lake. The lake was at the head of the river that we lived near. We could enjoy the day and fish for our dinners that would last us the week. They agreed and off we went. The cat decided to come after I told him that there would be a lot of fishes. It was about a three-hour ride that went through some forest lands and over small hilly areas. It was a great ride, in that it was so free from everything that I was used to with the army.

We soon arrived at the big lake. It was a sunny day and the water was a blue green color with the beautiful reflection of the sun beaming down upon it. There were so many birds of different species all around the lake enjoying themselves.

The birds that I usually saw very little of were ducks, and today the lake was loaded with them. Ducks have always fascinated me, because of the funny sound they make and how they walk, especially the little ducklings.

As the ducks made their funny sound, Little Feather remarked to me, "Let's stop here and play with the birds."

"Ha, ha, little kitty boy, I thought you want some fish?" I said, as I watched him focus his whole attention on all the moves the ducks were making. Cats have their own defined focus, and it is fun to watch them, as their mannerisms are so comical.

"I really do not mind a change once in a while," he said.

"Then you may have to take a swim out there to meet them," I said, as he looked at me without that smiley face cats have.

As the sun was softly warming us, I saw several Hummingbirds fly over to a tree we were coming to. I could hear their little chatter, as it is almost the same sound I hear in my ears, sometimes as one of the many Sounds of The True Reality. As we approached, I could hear them giggling in their own way, as one of them said...

"What is that creature you are carrying on your horse?" I immediately knew they were referring to the cat.

"Oh him, he is a strange small creature I found from somewhere in the wilderness." I said, as I giggled with them.

"What is he for?" one of them asked.

"I do not really know, he seems to just hang around and beg for food," I said, as I could not help but laugh out loud.

"He doesn't look very friendly, would he eat us?" one asked. "I'm not sure. Would you eat one of them, cat?" I asked.

"Of course not, I just like to play with little birds," said the cat. Then, the
Hummingbirds quickly flew off and into the sky."Well, you are meeting some new friends," I said with a smile.

"I do like eating new friends, I am willing to try anything, and all of them looked like the right bite size for me," he said, as he yawned.

I laughed again, and then we soon stopped to set up our campsite. It is so nice to see this place again, I thought. What a great difference just living is without the adamant pursuit of something. As I looked around, I always marveled at nature and how it produced an endless supply of whatever was needed. The water on the lake was so smooth and glass like. I knew the earth was just one place there is life and I loved every moment with it. Here, things really are simple once you let the course of the natural flow do what it does best. I like to take the time to watch what is taking place with the animals and how simple their lives are.

Grandfather used to tell our family stories about the life that exists on the other planets as well. At the time, I never really paid attention about people living somewhere else. His Unseen Journeys took him to a lot of places. He said that he had met some other planetary inhabitants at times, but their worlds were very different from ours. From what he told us, I did like the earth best, especially being with my friends and family that knew the Real meaning of Life, and the adventure IT IS.

The time I had spent with the white man was interesting, rewarding, and educational, and taught me what I really didn't want my life to be while I was here. Now I see that is was a good experience to learn from and to see what else is happening on this world, but for the most part, what I wouldn't be doing and how I wouldn't live my life. The white man's main interest is grabbing all they can for their physical life only and leaving things scattered about, as they will be returning to deal with all of it when they return in new bodies. I did meet some very good people, and I'm sure that someday they may discover The Great Reality for themselves. My parents are the example that I live for, they always give back to the land and others, and not only in the physical sense, but from their Being, that is always a light that shines.

As I was dreaming all these ideas within myself, I heard a voice.
"Are you ready to catch some big fish, Goldie?" said dad, as he was getting his homemade fishing pole ready.

I had to laugh, because he was so humorous when he was fishing.

"Sure dad, I will be with you in a moment," I said, while I was tying the horses up, as my horse asked me if I had any apples.

"Mom, did you bring any apples?" I said to her.

"Oh yes I did," she said with a big smile, "I knew the horses would want something fun, it's a special day for them too."

I gave the horses each an apple and they were all so happy. They told me they really like being by the lake and watching the birds.

"You like the birds too?" I asked my horse.

Then, they told me that just standing around and being a horse was not the only thing they liked doing. I began to laugh out loud and went and told mom.

"Oh yes, I know, they told me that a long time ago," she said.

"That is funny, because they never told me, even my own horse never really told me that he liked birds," I replied. Then, I went over and sat next to dad...

"Are we ready to fish?" I asked, as I put my line into the water.

"Ready son," he said. "And so tell me, what have you written so far in your new book, Goldie?"

"There are so many things I have come to realize over the years. I am starting off with the experiences I had with you and mom, and then Rebazar. I am relating the experiences, and then providing some information about what was taking place because of them. I am learning there are so many different ways to define what I have been through, and what it means to me at this time. I don't want to limit the experience by my definition of it, but at the same time, I want to give some sort of explanation as to why it is all so possible," I said.

"It sounds very good Goldie, you seem to have a good grasp as to how you are
going about it. You will have an endless field to work from, because Life will provide you with all you need. I already know that your task will not be easy, because of how people on the earth already are, but you will reach some. Your mother and I have read many books, and we still are. It is good to have knowledge of where you live, but The Real Knowledge of Self-Sufficient Survival comes from The Real Guides. We have read books about the trials of life here, as those in the past went through while they were presenting a few simple truths to anyone who would listen. Their lives were not easy, and many times they were eliminated, because the established orders didn't want their followers to realize their own freedoms. All forms of political and religious control eventually fail, and it is actually the right of each person to decide if they want to get with others and start a new establishment. Each of us here has decided to live the example of The Real Guides, working with each other and recognizing and respecting each person's Being. The earth is a hard place, and there are many immature souls still struggling to find The Real Sound and Light, so they think with their minds that by creating a position for themselves to control others as slaves, will set themselves apart to enjoy their so-called freedom, when in fact, they are actually afraid to be equal as all of us are, so they have condemned themselves to their own causes and effects," said dad.

I was learning all the time. Here was my father telling me so much of his insights, and they were so great. It is wonderful talking with someone who knows more about what I know than I do.

"I'm looking to take a trip to the Pacific Ocean, sir. I've always wanted to see it again and live there," I told dad.

"That sounds like it would be a great adventure and a lot of fun, son, you should do it. I can See that it would be a good place for you to write and be with the vast openness the ocean is," he said.

"I'm so glad that you agree, because I have thought about it for a long time. I really miss the ocean, even though I can go to the other worlds, I want it as my whole life everywhere," I replied, feeling good about my decision and how dad agreed.

Then, there was a pull on my line, I could tell it was a good sized fish by the strength it had.
"You've got something there, son, let's see what it is," he said.

I pulled the line in and there was a huge fish, it was the biggest one that I had ever caught.

"See Goldie, Life is giving you the big fish and you can handle it," said dad, as we both laughed.

Just then, mom came over and said, "Okay boys, you've done very well," as she grabbed the big fish and took it to be cleaned.

"I don't think we will have to catch any more for a week," said dad, as we laughed.

Both of us caught more fish, but not as big as the first one. Mom cleaned the fish and started the fire. The fish smelled great. We had some vegetables mom prepared, as we soon sat around and ate, and then we just rested for a while.

"What a great life this is," I said. "This is so much better than being with the civilized part of this world. I really learned a lot when I was with the white man, but this is so much better. I feel wonderful being here with the both of you, I am so glad you are my parents this life."

Mom laughed and said, "Goldie, you are funny, it's great to have you as our son this time, and that you are back with us, and to hear about what you have learned. And I know what you mean, Goldie, I could have continued my life with a white man in the civilized world and things would have turned out different. It probably would have been another wasted life. I am fortunate to have been through the wagon train disaster and then to have met your father. The life that I have now is the best there is. It would have been easier for me to go the other way, but I prefer what I have from being with you and your father," she said, as she hugged me.

"The white men work hard at making so many things even harder in their lives, because they will not take the time to discover The True Reality son," said dad, as we laughed.

I was really enjoying being here in the realness of nature with my best friends, my parents and the horse and cat. I thought of the ducks as my friends, because I knew they are very friendly. Several of them did come close to us and said a
few words, but I could tell they were a little nervous, especially with the cat standing on the shore glaring at them. They implied they do not see people around here at all.

"Well, it's getting near dark and it looks like another great evening, shall we just stay for the night?" asked dad.

"Yes, can we spend the night here, Mom?" I asked.

"Of course we can," she replied. "Then we will have plenty of time to gather our things in the morning."

We ate and sat around for hours and talked until it was time to go to the other worlds. I learn so much from talking with my parents, and there always seems to be something new they relate to me.

"I have an idea, let's all meet at, The Beautiful Ocean," I said.

"That sounds like fun Goldie. We can continue our love affair with Life on the beach together," said Mom.

All of us got ready and put our bodies to sleep. We were soon with each other at The Beautiful Beach in the other worlds. The brilliant sun was shining overhead from the vast blue sky, and sparkling down on the ocean that filled our view. All of us began to laugh as we stood there and just enjoyed the beauty of our Real Awareness. I wanted to go in the water and swim with the waves.

"I love this place and how Real it is," I said. "I could stay here forever and be just fine. Who wants to go in the water with me?"

We will go swimming with you son," said mom, as she hugged me.

All of us jumped in the water as we were and splashed each other. The water was crystal clear and felt alive. I could see little silvery fish swimming all around. We walked further out to where the waves were breaking and rode them with our bodies. As we were swimming, a group of Dolphins appeared and jumped around and then swam in the waves with us. They began to talk to us and make their funny sounds. In a matter of moments, several large white birds that looked like Pelicans flew in and landed near us in the water. They said they had seen us here before and they wanted to meet us. As we were in the water Rebazar

came walking up, and all of us were so happy to see him. We waved, and then got out of the water to greet him. As we walked onto the shore he spoke to us...

"This is a wonderful place for all of you," he remarked, "And I will soon show you levels that are even better and freer. All of you will have the greatest experiences that Life has to offer, and there are many wonderful places that are waiting to be realized by all of you. Enjoy your time here and I will see you soon," he said, and then he disappeared into the air.

All of us hugged each other, and then we strolled down the beach laughing and talking about what the Dolphins said.

"We are fortunate to be able to come here anytime we wish," said dad. Then mom said, "Look, there are three horses with wings over there," as she pointed down the beach.

I recognized my horse, and there were two others with him. We walked over to the horses and realized that RT had brought them for us. There were also some large white butterflies that were moving about the horses. I got the impression they wanted us to follow them.

"Let's take a ride in the sky," I said, as we all jumped on our horses and then took off into the sky. All of us flew up over the beach and into the big blue sky as dad led the way with the butterflies in front.

"Follow me and the butterflies and we will go on a great journey," said dad, as he motioned us with him.

We continued to fly far upward into an area that had huge scattered white clouds here and there. They were giant puffy things that filled a large area of the sky. I had never really noticed them before, but as we got closer they began to seem so much bigger. We were soon on top of them, and all of a sudden, I could see a city in the sky. There were castles in the clouds on what appeared to be solid ground and everything was so very colorful. I had seen castles in books, but I had never seen any in real life. These castles were enormous, and they were beautiful and so much better than the picture drawings that I had seen and read about. The sun was shining on them in such a way as to make them glow and gleam with a mystical aura. They were mainly of a light of white color with lightly colored trim around the windows and entrances that was silver and gold. All of us flew down to the huge green grassy areas that were all around
them. There were many people everywhere, and they noticed us as we flew in. They came over smiling to greet us, as we landed on the lush greenery and prepared to dismount our horses.

The people living here wore light colored outfits that looked like short dresses. It seemed to be their style of wear. As we dismounted our horses and were greeted by some of the people there, they introduced themselves, but not in the verbal language like on earth, but a silent communication that was very soft and pleasing. The area had its own wonderful light about it and the people here were so happy and serene. We were then escorted to one of the castles, led by several of the inhabitants. The people here were very beautiful and radiated with a happiness that seemed to be from their living here and being free from any conflict like on earth. I watched them closely as they moved about with their graceful mannerisms. I like to learn from people like this and the simple splendor they had developed.

As we approached the giant structures I had to speak out loud. "This place is huge," as I looked up while we were right under the entrance.

"We can have our castles as big as we want, all we have to do is imagine them the size we would like them," said a lovely blonde lady, without actually speaking to me.

She led the way as all of us went inside and walked around for a while. The inner ceilings were hundreds of feet high with very large chandelier type lights that hung from them. The castle walls were very high and they had giant paintings throughout. The art work looked to be scenes from other places and worlds that I had never seen before. Every single painting was a beautiful scene of some lovely place she said was part of their experiences while they have been here. She told me that their cloud home had been here for eons and that The Real Universal Guides had helped them find it and showed them how to sustain here.

Looking about, I felt as though I were in some future era that I couldn't even imagine. I looked closely at the paintings and I was amazed at the brilliant artistry of them. They were almost as perfect as a scene in real life. My parents walked about and talked with some of the other people who came in. I continued to stare at the artwork and imagine myself in some faraway place. Then suddenly, I was somewhere else, but where I didn't know. I looked all about and
I could see all kinds of wonderful things and places. I was far into the sky and observing all the wonder that was around me. Then, Shiss appeared at my side...

"It is not your time to come here as yet, Goldie. You've been daydreaming with your Real Vision and you moved yourself here," she said, laughing with her marvelous style.

"How do I get back?" I asked.

"Simply imagine where you were and then you will be there," she said, smiling at me.

I did what she said and I was soon back in the castle with everyone. I had to stop myself for a moment and consider what I just did. I had never thought about an inner movement to The Unseen before, so this was something new that I really liked and I would try it again someday.

After a tour of the castle, we came back out to our horses. I noticed the white butterflies and how there were so many more of them. They were all over the large and beautiful flowers that were everywhere. We went to our horses and then flew off into the sky and then back down to the beach again. My thoughts were on the experience that I had just gone through. It all seemed like a dream; even though I knew it took place. There is basically nowhere in Life that there isn't life.

"That was an interesting journey," I said to my parents as we landed.

"We thought that you might like it," said dad. "We have been there many times and know many of the inhabitants. Rebazar took us there years ago. We like to go and visit once in a while, because the people are so genuine and gracious. They can also see the future, because they are in the future already. They are the result of themselves in the future while living in the present. This is what RT has told us from our trips to the clouds with him. Now you know and you can go there anytime and find out things for yourself."

I stood there and listened to everything dad was saying, it was an incredible realization that I was having about what had just taken place. I knew that I would return there again someday to research what I would need for my writings for the earth people. I now had a new option in my life that would provide a Real
Benefit for me and others. We returned to our bodies just as the first light of dawn was approaching on the earth. I was a little stiff from sleeping on the ground, and so I took my time getting up. Mom and dad felt the same way, because I could hear a few groans from them as they got up and slowly moved about. I began to laugh as they made their little noises.

"Your time will come son, when getting up with this body will be harder," said dad, as he heard me laughing about his remarks.

"I know very well what you are going through, I have slept on the ground a long time too," I said.

Then, we all packed up and were on our way. As we were leaving, Little Feather showed up and jumped up on the horse.

"You weren't going to leave me here were you?" He said, as I laughed from his remark.

"I'm glad you showed up, kitty boy, because I was so involved from the other worlds and my experience I had last night, I would have forgotten you," I said, as I continued to laugh.

That day we returned home and I continued to write, then added all the new experiences I was having. My parents did their usual routine and continued to improve their living arrangements. I liked to help them with their lifestyle, because it was great being with them and how they lived. Within myself I knew that it was time to take my trip to the Pacific Ocean. I didn't want to leave yet, but I knew that it would be soon. I was going to stay with them as long as I could, because of how the West was, I didn't know how much longer they would be around on the earth.

It was approaching late evening, and mom asked me to sleep inside with them, because she wanted to tell me about a Real Adventure that she was shown several years ago. I liked hearing about her episodes, I was always learning from whatever she told me. That night, all three of us sat back and listened as Mom relayed her story...

"I never told you about this Real Experience I had, Goldie. There are actually several that relate to it. You were with the army at the time, and I never mentioned these experiences to you in the letters I sent you. I wanted to tell you

when you came back with us, so that we are together," she said, as she smiled and touched my face.

I was all ears and felt excited like a little kid about what she was going to say. Mother was always so wonderfully real about everything.

"I like hearing your experiences mom, they make me realize how important the ones that I have are," I said as I sat there, ready to listen to her lovely voice.

My whole body was feeling the excitement as I lay with her, trying to keep it calm. Then she began, as all three of us were lying in our sleeping positions.

"One night in the other worlds, I went to a place that I had never been to before. At first, I was a little startled, because I didn't know where I was. But, I soon relaxed and went with the experience. I was near a forest that had straight and tall trees that were very high and had an unearthly appearance to them. They were the most beautiful trees I had ever seen. As I looked up into the branches, I saw a very large White Eagle. As I looked at him, he continued to watch me with his staring gaze. I was standing in a clearing, and I suddenly had the inclination to walk into the forest and explore. I didn't even consider going, I just went. As I approached the tall trees and entered, I looked up at how tall they were. There was a wonderful deep silence about the entire area as I slowly looked around to see what I could see. I began to like where I was at, because it was calm and peaceful. There was no sound and not even a drop of wind. I knew within myself there was something in the forest that I was to discover and become aware of. I had a clear sense about me as I moved along. I only considered moving forward to see what I would find. The interesting thing about this place was, that even though there were a lot of trees, there was a lot of light that seemed to be everywhere as though the sun was all around. I was not afraid, but very curious to discover what the mystery about this place was. I started walking into this unknown area, because I knew there was something for me to find here. As I went further into this forest, I soon came upon a small house that was set in an opening that stood all by itself. It was a nice little house, almost something that you would find in a children's story. I could see a little smoke coming from a pipe in the roof as though there might be a fire or stove on the inside."

"I stood for a moment and looked at the whole scene. There was a grassy pathway leading to the house that was so vibrant and rather sparkly. I had to smile to myself as I stood, because I could feel something wonderful was going

to happen. I slowly walked across the open grassy area and approached the little house, then went right up to the door. The door itself was a nicely painted creamy yellow and it had a shiny gold handle. I stood there for a few moments and wondered what to do. I had to giggle to myself about the whole idea that I was in. I felt a little funny about what I was doing, and so I couldn't help but giggle. I felt that I should knock, but I was rather reluctant and shy. I knew when I went in I would discover things I wanted to know and that they would be things I would have to live with. I was very curious, and yet apprehensive at the same time. Something within me made me raise my hand, and then knock on the door. After knocking, I stood there and waited, but nothing happened. I knocked again and waited, but still nothing. Then, I heard a voice speak from inside the little house."

"You have to knock harder or I won't answer the door," said the voice inside, and the sound of a bit of laughter from whoever was in there.

"Okay, I thought, I'll knock harder, and so I did."

"That's more like it," said the voice from inside, and then the person came to the door. He was an elderly man, about six feet tall, with short gray hair and a gray beard. He looked very healthy, and my guess would be that he was about fifty, but what I noticed was that his skin had no wrinkles on it. I could feel that this man was someone special, kind of like Santa Claus, was my kid-like impression."

"Come in young lady," he said, "I was wondering when you would get here," as he smiled, and motioned for me to enter.

"From what he just said, I began to wonder about what was taking place and how he knew I was coming. I knew that I was in the other worlds, but this was a different episode that was taking place within me. I realized that it was a nice change, because it created a real challenge for me to figure out. My Real Awareness was Seeing everything that was all about the house, and at the same time taking in all the magical wonder that I was going through."

"You can sit down here, Young Lady" he said, as he pulled out a chair for me to sit on that was painted with a beautiful design all over it.

"It was a small colorful chair that I would have guessed to be for a child. Then, he sat down at the little table in front of us on a similar chair, and smiled at me.

On the table, was a glass ball about the size of a small pumpkin. It seemed to be so perfectly rounded and made me interested in what it was for. I had never seen a glass in such a shape before. I kept looking at it and wondered what it was."

"Oh, don't mind that silly thing," he said, "I only keep it for looks, I never use it," as he chuckled a bit.

"The whole scene I was in seemed so very curious, but I wasn't going to say anything that would change the course of what was to come. The inside of the place looked like a child's house. Everything was very neat and tidy, but of different sizes. Each particular thing was rather colorful. I knew that this was a good experience and so I decided to enjoy it while it lasted. I felt very safe and secure with this person, and so I totally relaxed and became like a child myself again."

"I have some very interesting things to share with you, Sarah," he said, as he looked right at me with his coal dark eyes and smiled.

"For a moment, I was taken back by the fact that he knew my name, but I didn't say anything."

"You are a very special person and so is your husband, Strong Vision, but most of all, it is your son that is the great value that will come forth as The Great Light. You already know certain things, but there is so much more that you will know and I will help you," he said, as he silently looked at me with a gleam in his eyes.

"Then, he paused to see if I had any questions. I wasn't sure about asking anything, as I was more interested in hearing what he had to say, because of what he seemed to know. I didn't say a word, but calmly waited for him to continue."

"Your son has a destiny that could provide a great benefit for so many when he realizes his True Purpose. You are part of his realization, because your life is as it is. You knew all this before coming into the life you have on earth at this moment. All three of you planned the arrangement you now have, so that all three of you would have the opportunity to experience The True Reality that Life IS. To the rest of the world, what you three are experiencing is but a dream, an illusion. But you know that it is Real and Beneficial, because you are living it. All three of you have come together because of the choices you have made from

the past. And because of these choices, The Real Guides are here to assist you. As your life continues, you will collect more Real Experiences, that will unravel the knowledge all of you need to survive what is to come for your passing to The Real Side."

"The wagon train incident you went through where your white husband died was no accident; it was all planned for him to go, so that you could take the next step. He already knew this before your life on earth started. That is why you went so willingly. You then met your true love, the one you had been with for lifetimes. He also knew that you were there, because he was shown you would be. By the meeting of you two, the formula for the entry of your son was able to take place, so that he would have the opportunity to have this unique lifetime to get him ready for the next one. I want to show you certain things that will be taking place in the future, so that you can tell your son when he is ready to know. He will be shown also, but coming from you, he will be so elated. This is how Life works, it covers the field so that many will benefit from What IT IS," he said.

"He then pointed to the wall, and suddenly the back wall to the little house began to waver as though it were melting. Then, it became a soft swirling mixture of the many things and colors that were all on the wall. Soon, all of that disappeared and there was a scene that began to appear. At first, it was a soft whitish light that covered the area, then it gently melted away and became a beautiful scene of a grassy field that went on out to the horizon. The man stood up and put out his hand for mine, and as I stood up, I took his hand."

"Follow me into a Wonderful Experience," he said.

"We both walked through the place where the wall had been, and suddenly we were in a wonderful open area with the sun shining brightly overhead. There were large green trees scattered about with softly singing birds. The terrain flowed outward into mellow and slightly rolling areas. The air had a fresh and wonderful smell to it. We walked for a ways, and as we came over a small hill, we were suddenly on a bluff overlooking the ocean. The man did not say a word, as I watched him look down upon the huge body of water as the reflection of the sunlight seemed to glimmer all about. I turned my head and looked at the water also. As I did, I could see something in the distance out in the water. At first, I didn't know what it was, and after a few moments of watching, I definitely didn't know what it was. It looked like a man riding some kind of log on the waves that were rolling into the shore. We both watched for a while as the man
in the water would ride a wave and then go back out and ride another one. I found the whole idea fascinating, and wondered what was taking place as I was very focused on this event."

"Let's go down and take a closer look," said the man.

"We walked down the grassy embankment until we met the sand from the beach. Walking out to the water's edge was a very pleasant and invigorating experience. The smell of the sea was so fresh and the sound of the waves was actually a healing sensation. As we soon approached the water's edge, the man with the log in the water, rode a wave all the way to the shore. I watched him very closely with the utmost fascination as he was standing on his log. Then, he came over to us, carrying what I thought to be his log."

"He walked through the shallow water up to where we were and then said.....

"Hello mother," with a smiling face, as he stood there all wet from his experience."

"I was suddenly rather shocked at what he said. I hesitated for a moment and asked in disbelief..."

"Who are you?"

"He looked at me with his tan skin, blond hair and blue eyes and said,"

"I am the future that is Now! I am your son that will be beyond what you know of me now. What you are Seeing is what will be. The Great Reality has granted you this moment in Life to See and Know what very few will realize. Mankind has been misled into considering the earth as the only reality and the invented systems that he educates himself with. In the Future Now, there will be so much more information for people to look to, but it will become a sea of knowledge that so many will get lost in that has very little value. The simplicity of what The Real Universal Guides have available for all of mankind is, the direct connection to The Sound Light Reality from The Seventh Level and beyond. In time you will come to know what you need to for your journey through Life. Now, you are Seeing the Future Me, as you will See it from The Seventh Level, when you and dad are free."
"Then he became silent, and just stood there and waited for me to respond. I know that I stood with my mouth open for several moments as he stood there also as though time meant nothing to him. I then became aware of the board that he was carrying and asked..."

'What is that thing you are riding?'

"This is something that will take place in the future, The Now Future. It will be part of the culture that I will be coming back to. The lifestyle that you know now will soon vanish as the white man continues to spread across the lands. You and dad will not have to come back to earth unless you want to. Before your life is over, all of us will go to The Seventh Level and be established there. I will be coming back, because of whom I am and what I will be doing. It is my choice and challenge, because of what I want to be," he said."

"I was still overwhelmed by what was taking place. Even with all The Real Experiences I have had, this one topped them all. I didn't know what to say, because I felt lost in a time change that I knew nothing about. I actually began to cry. I was amazed that I could do so, because I had never cried in the other worlds before. I bent over as though I had lost my strength, and then you held me up."

"It's okay Sarah, you have done so much for all of us and so this experience is a gift for you, because of the great heart you have. I have always felt a great privilege to know you and dad, and I will be returning to the upper worlds someday to see you again after your lives are over here. The human race does not at all understand the wonders that Life holds, and what awaits those who explore beyond their own mind and senses. The lifetime that you are in now is a startup for me to prepare for what is to come. Most of the world does not know who The Real Universal Guides are; they have no idea at all. The public has only come to know those who were possibly trained by The Real Guides. Through the history of man, there have been those that professed to know what The Great Reality IS, but they were usually referring to the gods and lords on the lower heavenly levels that are connected to the mind and emotions. You and dad, along with grandfather, have held true to The TruReality, and so it will soon be your time to have your journey to Real Freedom."
"Life is in love with ITSELF, and everything that exists within IT, but it is our Free Will that determines the direction we take. The Real Guides are always ready to assist anyone, but most people do not want Real Truth, they want their own truth that they believe is true. It does sound funny, but it has always been so. The human mind is a very limited vehicle that pertains to its own environment and very little else.

The Great Reality does not control anything except ITSELF and what things are to be, and all else has Free Will to do whatever it will. You and I and everyone else, has the freedom to decide anything we want to. We have the Free Will to go beyond what has been decided by others that limit themselves to their own self convictions. Without The Real Guidance, most people are lost to the labels of their gods that have been invented over the ages. Each person can have whatever they want, but to find The Real Ultimate, is something that cannot be read about and learned from books. The experience that you are having right now is Real, because, ALL Life IS Here and Now. I am here and I am in the future already. When you return you will find me where I am, but I will always be here in The Ultimate Reality, far beyond the reach of any understanding that can be considered."

"The day is coming when The Great Reality will once again present ITSELF to the world in the form of many unique individuals. Time and space will experience, The Return of The Real Sound and Light from The IS, The ALL Knowing Unknown. There will also be one before me. He will teach many, but when he leaves there will be those who will appear to be The Real One. All anyone has to do is learn to go to Rebazar Tarzs and The Real Guides, and do some research until they achieve The Real Connection to The IS. I will come after The Chosen One, but very few will know what is taking place. I will go through a long test period, because the position contains a lot. Even those that know me will wonder, but Life has its own way. There will be a time that many will once again know, and that is when I will be ready. You and dad will be in The Real Universes, beyond the perception of the mind while all this is taking place. There is only one who has The Real Position with The Sound Light Reality, and you shall see it now."

"You pointed out to the beautiful water. The sun was so bright that I could hardly see, and I didn't know what it was you were motioning to. Then, I saw a splash in the water. It was a fin from a large fish that was moving about. With the bright reflection of the water I could barely make out something that was moving toward the shore to where we were standing. Then, for a few moments the
water was very still. As I watched, suddenly a person's head came up from the water. I could see that it was a woman with long blonde hair. Then, she began to rise out of the water until her upper body was showing. She hesitated for a moment and then the rest of her body began to appear, but then she was all the way out of the water as though she was standing on it. As I was trying to figure out what I was seeing, this woman had the fins of a fish! I truly couldn't believe what I was seeing. She was actually standing on the water as though it were on the land with the tail of a fish. Then, her fish body slowly transformed into two legs and she walked over the water and on the land and stood beside you. I didn't know what to think. I had never seen or even dreamed that such people existed. It took me a few moments to gather myself. You came over and put your arm around me and kissed me on the cheek as you held me and presented her..."

"Mother, this is my friend, Sunlight, she is a MerMaid," you said.

"I stood there and looked at her for what seemed to be the longest time. I was thinking that she was the most Beautiful Being, as I continued to stare at her. Then I had to ask..."

"What is a MerMaid son?"

"You laughed and so did she, and then you said..."

"She is part of the undersea people that help protect all of the sea life. They are rarely seen, because most humans would capture them and keep them in cages, and even kill them as demons. Humans are the strangest breeds on the earth. Animals kill to eat and survive, and humans kill for the pleasure of it. Sunlight and her people are very aware of The Real Guides and their purpose. I asked her to come and meet you, so that you will know she exists."

"I walked forward and put my arms around her. I could sense the great love that she had for me as I stood by her. She simply smiled and then kissed me on the cheek just like you had. I was feeling so relieved of any doubts about anything. I had a pure and wonderful knowingness, that everything that was taking place was so True and Real. As I looked at her, I was so taken with her lovely features. Her eyes were the same color as yours, a blue green aura of brightness. She put her hand on my shoulder and then pointed out to the horizon. I looked out over the brilliant glare and watched the reflection of the bright sun stream across the water. As I watched, I began to notice the sea rise
from a great distance out. It was as though it was as far out as the horizon. The sea began to rise and take the shape of a huge wave that was moving toward the shore. The wave kept getting bigger until it was at that point where it was about to break. Then, I noticed something; I could barely see someone on the very top of it on a log like the one you were riding. I could see this person riding the wave all the way to the bottom as the upper part of the wave came over and started to cover him up. For a few moments the person riding the wave could not be seen, and then all of a sudden he appeared from out of the white water and moved along the face of the wave in front of the breaking part. Then, he turned very quickly and went up and over the wave and actually shot himself into the air. As he was flying above the water, he disappeared along with the wave. What I had just seen really fascinated me. I had to laugh for a moment, and then consider what had just taken place. Then you asked me..."

"What did you see, mother?"

"I'm not sure, but it did look to be a very large wave with someone riding it. I have a feeling that it has someone significance, but I have no idea what," I said, while I was still staring out at the bright sunlight upon the water."

"Then, Sunlight spoke..."

"That is your son in The Now Future, Sarah. He will be riding The New Sound Wave for the people of earth, The Rod of The Golden Reality. The Great Reality will choose him to share The True Reality with those who will listen and want to learn to become More Aware. What you saw was the first wave that will be coming, please look again, as there is so much more to all of this," she said, as she motioned with her arm out to the brilliant horizon.

"Again, the sea began to rise from a great distance out. The second wave rose even higher than the first one. I could see the same person riding the second wave, but as he got closer to shore, which was still a long ways out; a second rider appeared who rode the wave closer to the shore. Whoever the man was, he stood in the shallows of the water and waved to us. At this point, the person who was at first on the wave had already went up and over the wave like the first time. The fellow standing in the shallow waters pointed out to the horizon in the same direction Sunlight had, and as he did, a third wave began to form, and then he disappeared. This third wave seemed to take its time building, but it soon became even bigger than the first two. It was gigantic in size. I would say that it was hundreds of feet high. As the top of the wave began to come over,

there suddenly appeared the same rider, which is you Goldie, on it. This wave was different from the first two, in that it was very clear as the top of it formed into a huge cylinder that was transparent. I could actually see the rider inside of the wave with all the water covering him, and at the same time he was not affected. He rode the wave for the longest time and as he did, the sunlight beamed through it to where he looked like a Being of Light, moving along a smooth surface that was so surreal."

"Look, at how clear the wave is, Sarah. The True Sound of The Great Reality will be clearer than it has ever been," said Sunlight, as she put her arm around me and smiled.

"The man rode the wave all the way into the shore, and then jumped off his board in the shallow waters and began to walk towards us. I could see that he was an older version of you. As he approached, he waved and then disappeared. I immediately sat down on the sand and just stared at the water for a moment. You and Sunlight, sat with me, as I was beside myself at what had just amazingly happened."

"What does all this mean?" I asked, a bit stunned by what took place. "Sunlight put her hand on mine and said..."

"You have the privilege of knowing what most of the world will never know, Sarah. The Great Reality is making ITSELF known to all that will listen, because the time is coming when so much of the world will be ready for The Return of The Real. In the near future, the earth will be plagued with so much conspiracy, that most people will consider it to be a way of life. They will actually be fooled into thinking their so-called modern age, with all the advancements, is the best possible life that is available to them. The Space Gods that rule the material worlds will be so very dominating over the minds and emotions of the masses. The world systems will have great numbers of 'believers,' that will follow the printed word from the authors of invented doctrines. Simply put, there will be so many confused individuals on the earth, because of what has been perpetuated for the longest time. The original conspirators have planted certain evidence in the ground to be discovered later on, so that it all looks to be something of an authentic nature, but it has all been under the direction of The Space Gods and their agents on earth, that most people look to and worship. This will all equal the modern world systems of education, belief, politics and the social orders that most people believe in. The masses are into what has no lasting benefit at all,

like finding the old arrowheads that are used today, thinking they have some kind of value. For the most part, the arrowheads they will find were from the wars and deaths of others. The World Slave Traders, will have taken complete control of the planet, and will stop at nothing to forever rule over the drugged minds of the masses. Most people will be put into slavery without them even knowing it is taking place, thinking to themselves it is all part of the 'modern day lifestyle."

"Instead of seeking out What IS Real, people will look to the ideas that others have created, and then consider themselves to be 'believers' in something that has no substance at all. Belief in anything is merely a superstition, a ghost, a magic trick, invented by the authorities who do all the takeovers, which have robbed people of their earnings, as none of what they do is a Real Event. Real Experience is what you and I are having all the time. We live in The Real Worlds with our Heart and Being, and we have The Real Connection to The True Reality. Your son Now, Goldie, will ride The Sound Wave of the future, along with his friends who will work with him to provide the greatest of all presentations to the earth. By no means will his task be easy, but actually rather difficult, as most of the earth people will not want him around. There is so much more I could tell you, but you will know all there is to know, because you are Real," said Sunlight."

"Then, you and Sunlight, stood up. She gave me a hug and I kissed her, and she walked back toward the water and as she was about to get in, she turned and waved. Then, she walked out a ways and dove into the water. She surfaced for a moment and then went back down, and as she did I could see that her legs had turned back into a MerMaid fin. You stretched out your hand and helped me up."

"Sunlight will be coming back in the future to assist me. She will go by her Indian name, Sun Woman. We have known each other for lifetimes, just like I have known you for so very long. It really doesn't matter if you are the child or the parent in Life, all that matters is that you have realized The Great Reality. Mankind has his Space Gods and his healers from the past, but they are for the unaware, only What IS, can truly be Real. Just like the great sun in the sky, The Great Reality is beyond the understanding of what the civilizations of this world can invent. You are a special and precious being, Sarah Miles, and you already know what is True and Real," you said.

"Then, you turned and walked out over the water as though you were on the

land. As you moved upon the water, a great light began to appear from the sky. It came slowly down from its far heights, and it was a brilliant staff of light that soon met the surface of the water. It was a brilliant light that seemed so soft, as it positioned itself. You walked out to it and stood in the dazzling center, and then turned and waved to me. I waved back as you were standing on the water in this enormous light from the sky. You stood in the light and I could see your brilliance and how benevolent you were. Then, you gradually disappeared into the light as the rod of light moved itself from the water and slowly drifted back up into the sky. I stood there almost in tears again. My very being could hardly contain the experience. I felt weak again and went and sat on the sand. I sat there for quite a while, and then noticed that the man who had brought me was gone. I sat and breathed in the sea air to revive myself and soon realized that you would always be around, and that this was just a small part of the total reality that I would be living forever. I closed my eyes and I was soon back in the tipi with your dad."

Mom had a tear in her eye as she was telling me the experience. I let her be for a few moments.

"I'm okay now Goldie," she said, as she began to laugh.

"Wow mom, you are something, something wonderful," I said, and then I gave her a hug and a kiss.

"What you have told me is so much more than I can even understand at this time. I feel so small in all of this big life. The earth is going to be going through a huge change in the near future. I look at all the openness to the land there is now and it is hard to imagine that so much of it will be gone. Rebazar has shown me some of the future here, and it does look interesting, but very complex."

"I can see that it has already been planned that we are to journey to The Seventh Level. Rebazar has told me about it, but he said that he was waiting for the right time and that there was no rush, because he didn't want me to become unstable with my physical life here. You and dad will be going there after this life," I said, as I looked at him.

Dad was really tired and had fallen asleep, and we could tell, because he was starting to sound like a bear.

"Your dad already heard the story, that's why he's gone," mom said.
We both laughed for a while and then went to sleep. I went to the other worlds and found RT waiting for me by the ocean. I walked over to him and he greeted me...

"You are following The Vista of Light, the road that leads to The Great Reality and beyond. Your writings will show what most people could never imagine to be possible. Your mother has shown you from her heart What IS Real and True. You will someday be The Reality that will provide the way to what would seem to be the impossible journey. It took your mother over a million lifetimes to achieve what she experienced and told you. The great test of your very Being is coming and you will succeed like no one else. Your life will never be simple, because of your very nature. You will succeed, because you never give up through all the trials and errors of your lives, The Real Guides have stood by you. Each one of us know what it is like to be shunned, hunted, hated, and sometimes gotten rid of in the name of some idea that people invent with their minds and emotions. Each one of us has been where you are now and we will always be with you as you continue to move forward. This lifetime is a preparation for the bigger event to a come. Only, The Great Eagle knows when that will be. Your forever guide and True Love is the Light and Sound from the heart of, That Which IS," he said.

Then, Rebazar walked over to the sparkling water and put his hand in the incoming movement of the waves, then lifted his hand with the shimmering water dripping from it...

"This is you and I, ALL Life IS Light! We are all there is and even more than that. We shall forever be, and continue to realize what cannot be considered or reasoned out," he said.

The water began to glow even more in his hand, like many sparkling diamonds that have a life all by their own.

"The drops of water have become alive and aware, just like you and I. They will now start their endless journey into the worlds of matter and eventually come to realize The Great Wonder that has always been with them," said RT, as he let his hand down and the sparkling drops went back into the ocean, and as they touched the water and the Light, they were began to grow and spread until there was a stream of Light, all the way to the horizon as a beautiful glow.
"Life is Always Light, and from the Light, ALL Life IS. There can only be The Real Light. All of what is possible is from The Great Reality that has always been forever as The True Light from your very Being. Those who risk all they have will have all there IS. It cannot be any other way, Life Loves The Risk Taker. After millions of lifetimes of searching, you are the sum total of what you are now, and it is always your choice to realize more. I am your friend and guide, and I will be with you as long as you decide to Be Real. The Great Reality has chosen you, and you will soon see the future, but for now, keep writing and all things that are to be will be as they should be," he said.

Then, he walked back over to me and smiled and said, "It might be time to go to the Pacific Ocean."

Then, right before me, he became a ball of light and gently moved up into the sky and blended with the sun. I watched patiently at how this wonderful scene was played out before me. I stood there and stared directly into the sun, until I felt mother softly rubbing my arm.

"Goldie, are you going to sleep all day? It's almost noon. Get up, I have some fresh fruit for you," she said, as she rubbed my face.

I felt like I had some kind of hangover. I must have stared at the sun a long time, because I was rather numb and stiff.

"I'm trying to get up mom. I had another full night with RT. I don't even know which life I should be living anymore," I said, as we both laughed as dad walked into the room.

"Is he still flat out?" asked dad, as he did a roaring laugh.

All of us laughed for a while and I finally got up and staggered around. "Living is hard, I think I would rather work," I said.

"That's right you have to work, you have to write your book," said dad.

Then, the cat walked in. "Okay, where's my fish?" he said in his little voice, as all of us laughed at once.

As the day went on, I sat and wrote. I have realized that each person can have
their own so-called philosophy on Life, but to step beyond the borders of the theories that so many of us have been educated by is the best of everything. This is what my book is about. It's about The Reality that Already IS. I know that people dream of something that could be, but very few of them are willing to take on the task of discovering more than what they can dream.

There was a point in my life when I didn't know what to do either, or even where to go, but I didn't stop, because I always felt there was so much more than what I already knew. It takes a constant effort to explore ourselves and to learn to evaluate our experience of Life properly. At times, I have thought that what I was realizing was the ultimate position, until something else would occur in my awareness and show me differently.

This is why any form of documentation can be confusing, because no one can follow the same idea forever, as all things become outdated in a very short time. Unless there is someone who has The Real Connection to The Sound Light Reality, then all written stories and ideas, no matter how supposedly 'divine' they are, are merely words on paper, because The True Reality is only Alive with What IS Real in the very moment IT IS, which IS Always Now. As I am writing my new books, I can perceive that there can only be this moment, and what I am relating is for Now, but soon, it will have to be updated to meet the times in which the consciousness of people has matured.

I wrote for a few more days, while mom and dad did their Indian-white woman and man life. They are the best of people and I really did not want to leave, but I knew I had to. I knew that I had to move into the next adventure and see what Life would expose to me. The risk factor is a must for those that want to discover The Real Secrets that Life has waiting. If a person plays it safe their whole life, then the end of their life is like the beginning. They haven't allowed themselves the advantage of What IS Real. The average person is in agreement with everyone else, thinking that the next person must know. This idea only leads to more unconscious lifetimes of basically the same.

If I had said no to what my parents were presenting to me, then I would not have had all the realization and experience I have. If a person never takes the risk to find out what else is possible for them, they will never discover the hidden benefits that can only be exposed by their deciding something different than what they've always known. This is how Life works. All of us have read so many different things and produced certain formulas within ourselves, because of what we have accepted. These ideas become a way of life for so many, and there is
usually no moving away from them. I have discovered that there are very few people who will explore The Real Unknown within their own awareness and make sense of it accordingly. The world of men is full of the beliefs of others, but very few have the connection to The True Reality that sustains all of us.

# SCENE THREE

I knew it was time to leave for The Pacific Ocean, which wasn't that far from where I was at now, but it was time to explore. That evening, as all of us sat down to eat the fish we caught at the lake, I decided to tell my parents that I was going to leave in the morning.

"Mom, dad," I said, "I have something to tell you."

As I was about to speak they started laughing, so I hesitated until they were through.

"You're not going to tell us that you are leaving, are you?" said mom, as she was still giggling.

I couldn't help but laugh with them.

"So, you already know, don't you?" I said.

"Last night, your mother and I were talking with you on the inner. We like the idea of you going to the Pacific Coast."

I just looked at them for a moment, because they are two perfect people in my eyes. "I had a feeling that you already knew, so it doesn't come as a surprise to either of you," I said.

"I read some of your new book, Goldie, it's really good, but way too advanced for the average person," said mom.

"Well, I know, maybe in a hundred years there will be those who will understand it," I said. "I have to write what I feel and say and what is me. What I have experienced and realized up to this point in my life is far too much for almost anyone, but I feel good about it."

They both agreed, and said that I was doing the right thing by being myself, and they said my writing showed it. "I have no real concern if people accept you or not, just knowing you is wonderful no matter what you decide," said mom.

Then, the cat spoke up as he was finishing his fish, "Am I going to have to ride the horse again?"
"Only if you're coming with me, Little Feather," I said, with a giggle.

"Okay, I'll do it. I want to see what the fish at the ocean taste like," he said, and went and found his favorite spot to lie down.

That evening we sat in our beds, mine was on the floor. We talked about some of the years of my youth. As I was being raised by my parents, I was also attending a school for a short time that we had to ride several hours to get to. I would only attend the school a couple of days a week, because it was so far away. Sometimes, I would sleep outside the school with several other kids who had to ride long distances also. Our parents would take turns staying with us and we would have the best time camping out together.

Going to school when I was young was so much fun, because I had a lot of friends. All of them were white kids, but to them it didn't matter that I was an Indian. Children are usually not like their conditioned adults, they are more flexible and adventurous. The view of a child is one where almost everything is amazing and fun. The parents of my friends would sometimes act funny around my parents, because my dad was an Indian. Dad didn't care, because he knew who he was. When some of the parents would talk with dad, I could tell they were rather startled at what he knew and how wonderful his English was. Dad, always spoke to people directly and was always considerate. Even as a child, I could see that the other parents did not have any Real Experience in their lives, only the physical situation they were living. Some of my friends were having Real Experiences, but they didn't like to talk about them, because their parents did not want them to mention anything out of the ordinary.

One night as we were asleep, a pack of strange wolves came around. That was the night that my dad was with us. He doesn't carry a weapon, and so this situation was very courageous. Dad and I could hear the wolves coming from a good distance away. The other kids were all asleep, but we were very aware of what was taking place and what could happen. Wolves know when humans are around, they are very aware themselves. There were four wolves and they were rather big. We could hear them in the distance, as we were lying around the backside of the school in our blankets. Our horses were tied up about ten feet away. There was a partial moon that night, so when the wolves were close enough we could see them. We could see them slowly and quietly move into their positions for what they wanted to do. It was an eerie feeling that I had, as I watched their shadows move about in the night. At first, they stood their distance; I would say about a hundred feet away. They stood very still for the

longest time and didn't make a sound. There was a real silence to the night as I kept looking their way to see what they would do. I was also watching my dad as he was watching them. Then he whispered to me...

"They are trying to decide what to do. They know that we know they are out there, so they want to make sure of what they are going to do. The head wolf is discussing ideas with his friends right now," said dad, as I cringed at what he was telling me.

After a few moments, one of the bigger wolves started walking slowly towards us. I snuggled next to dad, because I was rather alarmed as I watched him walk slowly to us like a sly fox.

"It's okay son, they cannot harm us, you will see," he said in a very low and whispering voice.

I liked what he said, but I was still jittery about what was taking place. The wolf came within about ten feet of us and then sat like a dog on its rear end. My dad scooted up out of his blanket and sat up against the back of the school. In a low voice, my dad began to talk to me...

"The wolf wants to make a deal. He's telling me what he wants," said dad, as I could see his face in the pale night.

I was really starting to shake now, as I was wondering what was going to happen next. In a real low voice I asked very nervously, "What does he want?" Hoping the answer would be something funny.

"Him and his friends want to eat one of us," whispered dad.

I didn't think that was funny at all. I think I even wet my pants immediately. I can't really remember, because I was so scared at the time. I knew my dad could talk to animals, and he was teaching me, but I was too nervous to pay attention right now. I just wanted the wolves to go away.

"What will we do dad?" I asked, barely getting the words out of my little mouth.

"Nothing," he said. "The wolf is saying all he wants is one of us, and that he would leave you and me alone if I let him have one of the other children to chew on."
Now I was really frozen stiff. The other kids were my friends and I didn't want them to be eaten by wolves, but the way I felt right now I couldn't decide anything anyhow. Besides, what would their parents think?

"I told the wolf that I would think about what he had proposed, and to give me a few moments to decide which child they could have for their meal," dad whispered to me.

I couldn't believe what I was hearing, but I was too scared to say any more. My mouth and jaw were so tight I was having hard time breathing. I decided to just lay there and close my eyes and pretend I was somewhere else.

After a few moments dad said, "He's getting impatient and he wants me to decide right now, or all the wolves will attack and take all of us. Don't worry, any moment now we will have help," he whispered to me.

Suddenly, from the sky, I could hear the cry of Eagles. I knew their sound, and I knew they were coming to help us. All of a sudden, there were more than twenty huge eagles swooping down on the wolves. One of the Eagles was so big that he picked up one of the wolves and flew off with him for a ways, and then dropped him into a ravine. All the other wolves ran in a panic. They scattered real fast and were gone in a matter of moments. The Eagles circled us overhead a few times and then left. I was so relieved and gave my dad a big hug.

"You see son, there is always help when you need it. Now we can put our bodies to sleep and thank our Real Friends," he said.

I suddenly felt great again. What a neat experience I thought. I thought about what just happened and how the Eagles came so fast and rescued us. I was so relieved to be able to relax and get to sleep. That night in the other worlds, dad and I were standing outside of the school house which looked a lot better than the one on the earth. The rest of the kids were not there, just us. It was a bright and sunny day and as we were standing there, a group of high flying Eagles came into view overhead. They slowly descended until they landed on the ground. Then, just like magic, they became human forms. The man in front of the group was Rebazar. He came forward and greeted us...

"Hello good friends, how is everything?" he asked.
Then all of us laughed, and dad said, "Thank you and your friends Rebazar, you saved us."

"It was The Great Eagle that summoned us to your aid. We are always more than happy to serve those who are of The Real," he said as he bowed slightly and then turned back into a big Eagle, and then flew off with his friends.

The next day, dad and I talked about the experience as we rode home. He told me to learn to pay attention to the smallest things, because there is always something to learn. He also said that he understood my reaction to the wolves, because I was so young. I was about six at the time. As we were riding home that day, dad would have us stop when there was an animal or bird around. He wanted me to practice my communication skills. One of the birds dad spoke to told him where some wild berries were if we were hungry. We mainly saw and heard birds as they were flying about. Most of them did not have too much to say, dad said.

Then, we came across a large tree that had a bird in it that was making a sound I had never heard before. Dad wanted to stop and find out what was going on.

"The bird is telling me son, there are some really bad Indians up ahead of us. He is saying they probably wouldn't bother us, but that it might be a good idea for us to rest and wait for a while, or go around the area they are in. Let's just stay here under this nice tree and wait to see what happens, shall we?" he said.

Of course, I agreed. We got off our horses and sat against the tree. The bird kept making sounds, not a lot, but just enough to keep us informed, as dad was telling me what he was saying.

"The bird is saying, these Indians have bothered some of the white settlers that live on the outskirts, here and about. He said they are not hurting anyone, they are just being annoyingly silly, by scaring people and taking crops from some of the people's gardens," said dad.

The bird flew off in the direction of the Indians, and so we waited for a short time until the bird returned and told dad that the Indians had moved on and they wouldn't be back. We thanked the bird and then rode for home. My dad always amazed me with his patience.

"That was a scary time for me, dad, when I was so young. I can think of so many
wonderful adventures we had. I will be writing about them, so hopefully people will appreciate all the wonderful little Beings that make up this world and the ones beyond. I know that most people consider animals and birds to be a low life form, and not realizing they are just like us. They are on their own journey, until they reach the stage of taking on the human form. Every Being is searching to find The Great Reality. Because of how people have been taught they are unaware of the best and biggest part of Life," I said.

"You will have so much to write about, probably for the rest of your life Goldie," said dad, as he laid his head back and went to sleep.

"I will miss you both, mom. The Pacific Ocean isn't that far away, you and dad can come out and visit me after a while. I know the change will do me good. I want to see if I can find some kind of teaching job as I am writing my book. It would be good practice until I can decide what else to do," I said.

"Whatever is best will come to be Goldie. Rebazar and his friends will guide you all the way. Let's go to the other side and see what's happening tonight," said mom, as she lay back with dad.

I stood up and gave her a hug, and then I lay down and went to sleep. All three of us were once again standing on the beach at The Pacific Ocean. The waves were very big and beautiful as they came roaring into the shoreline. The smell of the sea was so refreshing.

"A good sign," said dad. "The great strength of Life is performing ITS wonderment. It is showing us you will make a difference in the lives of so many, as you will be like the waves that have come to shore."

"I want to build a little place for myself on the sand by the water, and then you and mom can come and stay with me. By then, I will have the book finished and you can read it to see if I left anything out," I said, as I began to laugh.

"I want to remember this place, so that when I bring my body here it knows where it is at," said dad.

"I will help you remember dear," said mom, laughing and knowing that she has to lead dad around sometimes.

The waves coming into the shore were really big today. All of us walked out and dove under the waves. Dad got tossed at first and then got the hang of it. We swam out past the break and saw some Pelican like birds sitting in a group. I suddenly got an impression from one of them. They knew who we were and they said that RT had told them we were coming. Mom and dad received the same impression and waved to them. After a while, we went in and sat on the beach in the sun. All of us stretched out on the sand and just enjoyed the moment. After a long stay, we were soon back in our bodies and waking up to another day on earth.

"It gets harder to get this old Indian body up each day," said dad.

"You're not that old yet, dad," I said, as I wanted to just lay right where I was at and dream about the experience with the ocean.

"Okay Goldie, you have some riding to do today, your new life awaits you," said mom, as she reached over and tickled me.

I got up, against my will, and began to gather all my things I would be taking with me on my journey. There is only so much stuff that you can get on a horse. As I was getting ready to leave, my parents were standing by me, ready to see me off...

"Goldie, here are a few dollars that I have had from the things that I have traded, you will need some money to get you started," said dad, as he handed me the money.

"Dad," I said, "I have money from the army I saved up, I'm fine."

"I know, but I want to give you what I have, because I will never use the money. Your mom and I have everything we need here, so we don't need money. We will know when it is time to come and see you. We will see you from time to time on the other side, just enough to say hello, because you have so much to do. We will be there with you and providing our own assistance, so until then, have a good trip, son, and you already know we love you very much," said dad.

Mom didn't say anything, as I could see it in her eyes, as she was so happy for me with a bit of a tear rolling down her cheek. I hugged and kissed both of them, and jumped up on my horse.

"I will see you two soon," I said, as I rode off in the morning light.

Suddenly, I felt the cat jump up on the horse. "You forgot about me! I want to see the ocean too, and eat some new friends" he said, as I laughed out loud at his cat humor.

It was a nice and mild day, not as hot as when I was in the army. The seasons were slowly changing and it was a nice change, one that I looked forward to. It was only a couple of days ride to the Pacific Ocean, but I would take my time. My parents and I had been there several times before, in years past, to visit some Mexican friends they have. Paul and Mary lived right next to the water at the ocean. I was hoping they would still be there, because it would be a good place to stay while I was getting myself settled.

The first day riding was rather pleasant and invigorating. As I was riding in the early morning, I saw a large Hawk in the sky. He kept circling the area for quite a while, and then flew down and landed in a tree that was up ahead along the trail. As I approached the tree, he was sitting on a branch that overhung the path. I stopped right under him and waited to see if he had anything to say, because I knew he was right where I was at for a very good reason. At first, he just looked at me, then he would look away, then he would look at me some more. It was as though he were sizing me up. I love these types of birds, because they are so wise and knowing. I had to laugh to myself at the animated way he was acting. After a while, and without even a peep from him, I figured that he was just going to stay silent.

As I was about to leave, he suddenly said, "What's your hurry, Indian Boy. The ocean isn't going anywhere is it?"

I immediately stopped and began to laugh out loud. I knew he was something special, so I got off of my horse and sat on the ground under him, and waited to see what he would do next. After a moment or so, he flew down beside me, several feet away. He was a genuine beauty. He paced around a bit before he began to speak...

"You have begun a new journey that very few will even consider," he said, and then looked about once in a while, to the left and to the right.

"There will be those who do not want you to succeed. They will be part of the

tests you must go through to gain the endurance you must have to accomplish something that only a very few have attempted. You have the protection of The True Reality and ITS Guides. They are always with you, and watching everything you do. What you will be writing and presenting is very important, because it allows The Real Light and Sound to enter this world from The Real Source. Not everyone can do what you will be doing, because you are a certain way, a certain Being that has come along the road of Life to this point, and made yourself what you are. You will be constantly watched," he said, as he looked at me from side to side.

Then, the hawk walked around a bit as though he were considering what to say next. I liked watching him and his mannerisms, because right in front of me was an exceptional experience from the Source of ALL Life. Then, he flew back up to the tree and sat on the branch.

After a moment of silence he said, "See you on The Real Side," and then he swiftly flew away and back up into the sky, and then was gone!

It took me a moment or so, but then, I realized that it was Rebazar, having fun with me and Being a Hawk. I know The Real Guides like to disguise themselves and test us to see if we are paying attention. Sometimes, they come to me on The Real Side in a disguise. It may be a test, or a lesson that I need to realize to add to the knowledge of my survival. They have taught me that ALL Life is about survival, and as we learn about the higher levels, we can always live in a better position of survival. This is a lifestyle that is far beyond the limitations of the material worlds and the mental restrictions that a person can be convinced by. I soon mounted my horse, and then rode on as the sun was approaching high noon. The cat didn't say a word during the whole experience. I know he understood what the Hawk was saying, and I also know he doesn't like to get involved. The horse didn't say anything either, as they both were nature's silence.

It was a perfectly clear day and there wasn't a cloud in the sky. I felt very healthy and aware after the experience with the Hawk. I think RT came to give me a Real Confidence boost, because now I was really going into the unknown. I was wondering about my life and how all things equaled up. As I saw myself and everything that I had gone through, I could only realize one true idea, and that is that every moment of living in the present is all that IS Real.

I rode for quite a long time feeling free, as I was watching the big open sky for

more signs. As I was riding along, something curious and different was beginning to happen. I started to see vague images along the trail ahead of me, like wisps of dream-like imagery, one would see in the desert from too much sun. They were rather subtle and unidentifiable at first, but as they would slightly reappear and then disappear, and then reappear again, they became more obvious. It looked like a scene that was a type of mirage. At first, they were scenes of people that seemed to be moving about and doing their personal affairs in a big city type setting that I had never seen before.

After a while, there began to appear a background that became apparent, and then gradually enlarged itself into a scene that I was not familiar with. There were huge structures that were very tall and were made from materials unknown to me. I had seen drawing pictures in books that looked similar, but these structures were very tall and most of them had smooth looking exteriors, and a lot of windows all the way up the sides. The people were dressed in clothes that were new to me, and there were those machines with the four wheels, RT showed from the other worlds. The machines did look about the same, but these were sleeker, and the people were sitting inside and not on the top, like the ones Rebazar showed me. I was rather mesmerized by all the activity taking place.

Then, what really struck me was, there were machines in the air that were flying. They were really big and strange, like bizarre birds. They were mostly gray in color, with different designs on the sides of them. I stopped my horse, and got off to feel the ground, to try and some way to understand what was taking place. I stood there and stared at this imagery for the longest time. I was amazed at what I was seeing. I didn't know what the scene meant or even what was going on. As it continued, I began to wonder if I were having a hallucination from being out in the sun too long. I kept trying to consider why this was taking place, and if it did mean something. After a while, I was rather bewildered from the whole experience. This whole experience had now made a huge impression on me. For a moment, I really did not know what world or plane of awareness I was on.

Then, as I was about to mount my horse, I heard a voice within me say, "It's the future you will be living, so look again Goldie."

As I moved from my horse and walked a few feet in front of him, I noticed to the right of me, the Hawk was sitting on a cactus, and looking straight at me, as he said...

"Look at the scene again, Goldie, there is so much here for you to be prepared

for. Your future is Now, and by the very fact of what you are writing and bringing into this world of men, you are laying the groundwork for something Wonderful and Real! You are The Real Risk Taker, because at this time there is no one else who will do it."

I turned my head from the Hawk, and watched what was taking place. He was right; it must be the future, because there is nothing on the earth at this time that I know of, that resembled anything like what I was Seeing. Then, the scene took a gradual shift into a different scene. It soon became a view of the ocean along the shoreline where there were people who had hardly any clothes on. Some of them were carrying a type of board and then going out into the water and floating on them. I was now recalling the experience where I saw myself as a blond headed man, and The Real Experience that mom told me about. Then, just as I thought it, there I was, The Future Me, with a board in my hand and then going out into the water. After getting to where the waves were, I caught one and then rode it near the shore, then went back out again to do the same thing over and over. It was very fascinating watching all the action as an adventure.

"This is what you are preparing for; it is your next lifetime when things on the earth will be very different from what they are now. What you are Seeing is for you to be ready for. The humans are going into totally creative time frames, which will be so far advanced from your present life. They will have what would seem to be impossible right now, but what mankind will have is a better material life, but his awareness will be buried in what The Space Gods want. You will come into an era of a Real Challenge of Survival. You will eventually be so creative with your writings, you will touch certain people who will See Beyond the illusions of the material realm," said the Hawk.

As I was looking at the scene, it began to change again to where there seemed to be some kind of a great conflict going on. There were machines flying in the air and exploding, and with them came all kinds of destruction. The scene was showing many places that were devastated. There were people hurt and dying or dead everywhere. It was hard to imagine all the destruction that was taking place. Along with this, the view shifted to a place of huge structures that looked like shafts into the sky. As I watched, several flying machines went directly into two of the biggest structures and exploded. The fire from the crash began to spread, but then the view went to the bottom of the buildings and underneath them. It was rather dark for a moment, and then suddenly there were a series of explosions. The view came back out and above the two buildings. I watched in

shock, as I saw the huge structures eventually topple to the ground. I could not fathom any of this, nor would I know how to explain it in my writings.

"Future Conspiracy, which is taking place now, is but only with those humans who have the education to recognize it. The Real Guides See Everything, and they allow mankind to make his choices, and you will have the advantage of knowing this from this life and into your next one. A huge preparation is being done for you, because you have The True Heart," said the Hawk, in his silent voice.

I didn't understand everything he was telling me, I just went along with whatever he said. Then, the scene began to fade into another one. It was a view of the earth from high above. I knew what the earth looked like, because I had seen it like this many times when I was flying outside of my body. The view began to descend downward toward the upper part of North America, and eventually down to the surface where there were a lot of lakes. Then, the scene became dark and then gradually disappeared. I soon realized that the last scene was me coming back into a new body in the future someplace in North America. It would seem that I would be born in the northern part of the United States.

I wasn't sure where yet, but it really didn't matter. I now knew what I was working toward, that there would be a new world order that would be created by the unaware people of earth in the future. I suddenly felt rather faint and disorientated, because of what I saw. All the beautiful openness that this land has would soon be gone. Not in this lifetime, but soon enough. I began to wonder why the future was shown to me at this time.

"To prepare your great strength, Goldie, so that you will know what to do when the time comes. There will be many things you will be shown, because the future is Now, and it will be here soon enough. Most people will not be prepared for it the way you will be. They will be coming back many times and having to deal with all the pollution and disease that will be so prevalent in the world of tomorrow and the lifetimes after. Even in the future, most of the populations will still be stuck with The Space Gods and their systems. You will be prepared, because of your knowledge with the natural order of things. You will know what to do when others won't. You will give to so many the opportunity to do better in their lives, but so many of them will not listen. The future will bring numerous deceptive controllers, Slave Traders, those who profess to be what they are not. The religious systems will secretly rule all the political war machines, for the domination of absolute control, with imbedded fear as the foundation for

everything. To you, the human traitors will become obvious, after your training period, but most people will not even believe that such people exist, even when the evidence is right in front of them. What you will be doing this lifetime will bring you into the next one and what you must do then. Your life will be the greatest of adventures."

"The whole of mankind wills itself to control its destiny, a destiny of eventual demise and destruction. This is what people have been taught by the gods they pray to, to fear Real Truth. They first ask and pray to their gods for something, and soon these people want more, and eventually realize their gods will give them the power over others. This is, The God Power of Deception and Destruction. And so, the rulers of men soon become bored and they provoke the chaos that has been The Real History of the earth. The stage has been set for thousands of years as the reign of Terroristic Power continues to grow and spread into the civilized world. The masses are constantly messaged to become accustomed to the brutality that will rule the unaware. The Gods of Man, The War Mongers, The Brutalitarians, The Human Deceptors, The Authoritarians, and many more infiltrating alienistic influences will subconsciously control the humans.

Of course, the humans will be fooled by the marketing ploy of their 'new social order' and they will only want more from those that have become the 'authorities' on what is best for everyone. You will be shown so much more before this life is over. Above all is, The Great Reality, which has nothing to do with, The Gods of Man and The Earth Controllers. This is why most people will consider what you will be presenting to be of an evil nature, because they have been taught to fear any Real Truth and Real Freedom. The minds of men will be filled with so much deception and misinformation, that they will only consider the confinement they are experiencing as the only safety they will ever know of," said the Hawk.

I did not know what to say, as I stood in silence.

"Now, watch the scene again, Goldie," he said, as I watched.

I was Seeing the earth once again from far above, at it sat in all the surrounding darkness. It was a very still and silent scene of such a small place in Life. From where I had my view, it looked to be such a lonely place to reside. Then, from somewhere out of the darkness there came a beam of light. It was at first far above the earth, as it slowly ascended toward the top of the planet. The shaft of

light soon came to a point on the earth's surface, and then seemed to spread itself outward. It was as though it was trying to heal the world in its own way. It was a truly amazing sight to behold, as I pondered what it was and what it was supposed to mean to me.

"This Reality of Light you are Seeing is a huge part of your destiny. It is not important that you know what this is now, as you must be prepared for it and grow with it. As I have said, the future will be here soon enough, and you will not forget this moment with what has been shown to you, as it will be what you will be living as you become more aware of all that you are to realize and become," said the Hawk.

Then, the Hawk gradually flew back up into the sky toward the sun. I watched him as he went upward until he seemed to vanish into the light of the sun. I had to sit down for a minute and just rest. Little Feather jumped from the horse and came over to me. "Are you okay Goldie?" he asked, as he sat himself and looked at me rather intensely.

"Oh yes," I replied, "Just another day on the earth, little friend."

I was okay with everything, and I knew that my life was going to have many complications, but I needed to just sit for a while and let the gentle wind take my mind away. I sat for the longest time on the ground and looked up into the sky. Just to sit back and let go every once in a while was the way I handled all the experience that I was having. Here I was in an era of time that will soon be forgotten by so many. I already thought some people here with their attitudes were strange, but through the course of deciding, it will be that those who are here now will expand upon their cruelty as their way of life.

Some people make it their career to force their issues upon others. The white man forced his way onto this land and has driven the Indians and many of the Mexicans away, and decided that we are not worthy of what we have always had. I see no fault here, only people deciding what they will not want in their lives, but cannot see what will come from what they are doing. They have become deceived into thinking that their 'control' is the answer. But eventually, those who want from others will become lost in their awareness, and be plagued by the reality of their own Cause and Effect, which always shows up.

After a while, I got back on my horse and kept riding. As I was riding, I knew the sun would be setting in the ocean, and that I would soon see the great body of

water again, the Pacific Ocean. It was soon late afternoon, and I was rather tired of riding. I came upon a nice area that had a few small rolling hills. There were no trees around, but there was some giant cactus. I cleared a small area in the sandy lose ground, and laid my blankets down and prepared myself for the evening. There was a vibrant and colorful sunset during the late afternoon and evening. I liked this part of the day the best, just before the sun set. It was the most peaceful and restful time of all. My crossing the barren land was also peaceful and interesting, because I usually saw no one. After I arranged all my things, which were very few, I sat there and thought about the images of the future I had seen. It looked to be a world of turmoil and congestion, a place that I don't think I will like very much, compared to where I am now. I was not at all looking forward to the next life, and I was trying to decide within myself how I could maneuver around it. I lay there for the longest time until I was mentally exhausted, as my attention began to fade.

Then, the cat came over beside me and said, "I saw what you were Seeing also. It really looks to be a strange place to live. I know that I will be coming back and having to live somewhere. Seeing what I saw suddenly makes me really appreciate the life I have now," he said.

I thought about what he said and considered him to be very wise, as I went right to sleep, and then found myself by The Unseen Ocean. I was sitting in the sand on my back and looking straight up at the sun. I felt so good being away from the body. I was free again for a little while. I lay there for what seemed to be the longest time, and then Rebazar walked up and sat next to me. I had to ask him about my concern with the future, already knowing he would give me the answer that I didn't want to hear.

"Can't I just be done with the earth this time?" I said, hoping for an okay from him.

He rubbed his chin, and then said, "The world will be looking for the man with, "The Golden Staff."

Okay, I thought, every time I put myself right in it! I had never heard that term before, and so I asked, "What is The Golden Staff?"

"A very special position is given to only one, a Real Assignment from The Great Reality. You are being prepared like no one else, because there is no one that will do what you will or can. There can be those that would have the position and

do fine, but not like you. There will be another who will come before you and his time will be short, but he will set the pace for you to eventually continue. It will be difficult for you, but you will eventually succeed and make a difference. It takes a lot of unseen preparation to be able to handle what The Golden Staff of The Real Light and Sound is. I have had the position for a long time, that is how I am able to assist you and others, but you still have a body on earth and that is where The Real Light is needed the most.

Your life now, is as it is, because you are preparing and you need the serenity that this place is. The future will be very fast paced. I will also be there for you, guiding you through that life also, but for now, just live this life and enjoy it. The images you are being shown are a vital preparation for you to expand your Real Awareness. You are the most fortunate to learn and then present The Super Knowledge of The Real Guides," said RT, as he got up and strolled down the sandy shoreline, while I wanted to just lie in the sun and forget everything.

The next day came fast as usual, and I was up at daybreak. As I sat up and took a look around, I could see men on horses in the far distance. They weren't heading towards me, but in another direction. I could faintly see them on the horizon. They were all in formation and I soon figured they were with the army. Seeing them suddenly brought back the memories of my time spent with the military. I was so glad that I had decided to leave. It was something that was way in the past now and I liked it like that. I gathered my things together, along with the cat, and rode off with the sun at my back.

As I was riding along, I was wandering if I would see any more mirages like yesterday. I would like to see a nice scene from the ocean, but if not I thought, I'll be there shortly anyhow. It was a nice pleasant day that wasn't hot at all, and so I just enjoyed the ride.

I was coming into an area where there were trees, and ones that I had heard about, palm trees. They were kind of funny looking. I knew it would take me a while to get used to them. I was used to the big trees that provide a lot of shade covering. These palm trees looked funny and they didn't provide much shade at all. It was about noon, when I came across several houses that were along the trail. They seemed to be put together with anything that could be found. As I got closer, I could see that they were Mexican families who had decided to live out in the openness of this area. I stopped and dismounted to say hello. As long as I was out here, I figured I would meet some new friends. They were farmers, and they were growing a variety of crops, along with a lot of cactus. I introduced

myself to a man named Jose and his wife Maria. They had three children that were running around outside playing. I told them that I was on my way to the ocean and if they knew the De La Cruz family. They said they didn't, because they haven't been to the ocean. They told me that there were fishermen who come out to their place once in a while to exchange fish for the things they make and grow.

I took a walk with Jose through his field and I was truly impressed with what he had done. His farm was well taken care of and everything looked great. He also had several wells on his land that provided all the water he needed. Then, we walked back to his house and he and his wife invited me in to have something to eat. I had forgotten about eating altogether, because I was more interested in getting to the ocean. He said that Maria had made some rice and beans and if I would like some. Of course, I said. I love rice and beans and how the Mexicans make them. I forgot to mention that these people only spoke Spanish, which I already knew, so I had no problem communicating with them. They were real people living a good life.

We sat down to lunch and began to talk while we were eating. Jose, was wondering why I was out here and what was I going to do when I reached the ocean. I told him that I was writing my book, and that I was going to try and find a teaching job of some kind. He asked about the book and I told him that it is about my life and the adventures I am living. At first, he just stared at me in amazement, until I told him that he was also having dream experiences, but that he hadn't been paying attention to them. He rubbed his chin and began to consider what might be taking place within him. As he was doing so, Maria, who had been sitting with us, began to tell me about a dream she had. She said that her dreams are very real and colorful and that she sees her family and friends in them all the time. She told me that she has a saintly person that helps her with her personal situations from time to time. She said he is a tall man with dark short hair and sometimes has a beard. She began to laugh, as she was telling me her dream experiences. I seemed to sense who she was referring to.

"He doesn't always have the beard," she said. "He told me that he doesn't always like to wear it. I only see him once in a while, most of the time I am with my family. There have been times when he would come to see me and we would go to beautiful places that I didn't know about. I have seen the heavens that are described in The Good Book. They are very beautiful compared to the earth. The saintly man told me that I was able to visit them, because I had a pure heart. He said he was preparing me to go into what he described The Real
Universes, which were far beyond the religious heavens. He said by the end of my life here I would be ready to be a Free Being in this lifetime. He has taught me many things that cannot be found on the earth."

As I listened, I knew it was Rebazar, she was talking about. I wasn't going to tell her that the Being she was meeting was far beyond what the saints ever knew. I already knew The Real Guides could be in all places at the same time, an ALL Awareness Position. When the average person has The Real Guides with them, they usually consider them to be one of the saints or saviors they have read about.

Sometimes this can be true, but so many that were here before reside in the two heavens and have things to do there. I could see that Jose was still thinking while he was patiently listening to Maria. I like the Mexicans, because they are usually a very humble people. As Maria was telling me her dream experiences, I was also watching Jose and his expressions. I could tell that he and Maria hadn't discussed her dreams too much, if at all, but he humbly listened. I asked her if she had shared what she was telling me with other people that she knew.

"No," she said. "It is because, all the people I know are very religious, and if I were to mention my dreams to them they would brand me a demon. The beautiful saintly man told me to keep my experiences to myself, and just tell those I have learned to trust. He said most people have been so conditioned into fear from the religious orders, so they are confused and will attack what they do not understand. I am very happy to know what I have learned, so I am quiet about my journeys."

I was now learning something that I had always thought to be true about the religious mind of people and how they have been introduced to their doctrines. They do not have all the information they need to truly understand what has been presented to them. They were only given certain information that was mainly a benefit to those in control, so they could maintain the control over others. The old doctrines are merely old experiences from the past. Even Jesus remarked, 'You shall do greater things than I.' But of course, most people do not get what has been presented to them from their buildup of emotional attachment and lack of Real and proper information. I was having a wonderful experience with Maria. I could tell that she is a saint. When you meet someone that has a Real Heart, there is a Real Connection of love beyond what the mind can understand.
Rebazar taught me about many of the teachers of the past, and that Jesus was a great teacher, and he was one of many. He said that Jesus became popular in the minds of so many, because of the psychic miracles he did and all the promoting that was done about him after he left the scene. RT told me of many beings that were like him and even more so, but many of them were not out in the public like Jesus. RT said, that most of The Real Guides stay in the background so that they are not bothered by the society they reside in. He told me that I would be in the public, especially the next time around. I wasn't sure if that would be good or not, but I was going to do what I had to no matter what the course, even if I didn't want to.

"That's rather odd isn't it, Maria?" I said. "The scriptures talk about dreams and their value, but if you mention them you are condemned for doing so. You have been making The Real Connection to The True Reality. That is what all the great teachers from the past were referring to. But today, for some reason it has become a real distortion from the original ideas that were presented. I can see that it is your great heart that allows you to meet with your friend in your dreams. I have similar experiences and I keep them to myself."

"I know Senor Goldie, you are right; I wish that I could tell others. I have a friend who lives in the other house across the way. She and I talk all the time between ourselves about our dreams, because she has beautiful experiences too, but we don't tell anyone else," she said.

"Years ago when we first started sharing our experiences she was very shy about them. Over time, I told her about the man I was seeing and who is teaching me, then she began to see him sometimes. I see her in my dreams at times and we talk there about what we are shown. In a way, it is really fun having our secret."

I looked at her and smiled. "You are a saint, Maria, with a wonderful heart, and that is why you have The Real Guidance. Your guide is my friend also, and there is so much that you can learn from him. I am glad to hear that you have a friend that you can talk to. My parents taught me and introduced me to my dreams when I was very young."
Then, Jose began to speak, "Maria, I did not know that these things were happening with you. Now that I know, I will listen to you. I want to hear all about the things that you see, because I want to be there, too." Then, he reached over and hugged her.

I knew that it was time for me to go. I got up and said goodbye and thanked them for everything. I left them there as they were embraced and walked out to my horse. Just as I was about to mount up, Maria came running out and gave me a hug.

"Thank you Senor Goldie, you are the saint that has been sent to help us all," she said, as she kissed me on the cheek and went back inside.

I rode off and waved to the other Mexican families that were outside doing their duties. As I went along, I considered what had just taken place. I knew that this situation was a rather easy one, because of how these people are. I had already experienced the hard attitudes when I was in the army. The public would be my next test.

# SCENE FOUR

By the afternoon, I was at the coastline and along the shore. My parents gave me an idea of where the De La Cruz family lived, and the little town they lived near. I could see some houses along the shore as I looked north, so I decided to go and see if they knew my friends. It was a very pleasant afternoon by the ocean.

The wonderful smell of the sea was great to be with. The waves rolled in with their gentle healing sound, as I rode along and they came washing in. I always loved it here, and I wished my parents lived here also, but they were raised basically where they were at. They liked the more forestry areas with all the different surroundings, because to them it was more private. I was finding out within myself that I liked so many different areas, and that to stay in one place too long was rather hard for me. I would guess that as I got older I would have a different view, but I liked being like the wind, free and adventuresome.

As I rode along the shoreline, I considered all the shoreline that there must be. I imagined that it would take me the rest of my life to see all of it that is along the Pacific side. I suddenly realized that it would be fun to travel all the way up the coast at the right time of year, even though I liked the Southwest, because of the weather.

While I was in the army, we took a trip to the Midwest during a bad winter, and it was ever so cold and harsh, I told myself I would never again leave the Southwest and head east. Some of the men I met while serving as a scout were from the eastern side of the country. They told me of the winters they lived in. They said the summers were even hard at times, because of the humidity and the heat. The West Coast is a great place to be, because most of the year you can sleep outdoors and still be comfortable. The outdoors is my kind of life, listening to nature and experiencing the feeling of being with everything that is so natural and free. It wasn't hard to see the future, even though I had been shown some of it. Most people would settle for their place and then live there for the rest of their lives and working to support their surroundings.

Since I met The Real Guides, I have always been fascinated with how they live and be. I would not suggest my lifestyle to anyone, because it's not that easy, but for me it has to be. Within me, it's as though I don't even have a choice, Life keeps drawing me into its unknown reality that I must keep realizing. Physically it is hard, but when it comes to the other worlds and what is taking place there, I
am more than happy to sacrifice this short lifespan for something that I will always have. As I came upon the people who lived near the shoreline, a Mexican fellow came out of his little house to greet me...

"Buenos dias Senor," he said, in his humble and friendly mannerism.

I returned the greeting and dismounted my horse to rest my legs and body from the ride. I asked him if he knew the De La Cruz family. He said he did, that they lived about a kilometer up the la playa, the beach. I thanked him and jumped back on my horse after a little rest and rode north.

"Great, we are almost there," said the cat.

"Yes we are," I remarked, as I passed several little shacks that fisherman families lived in, until I came to a rather nice house that was set back upon the bluff and overlooking the sand and sea below.

I could see Mary, as she liked to be called, outside hanging up some clothes. Her husband was Pedro and he liked to be called Paul. They were both unique like my parents. That is why we were such good friends. Mary and Paul also knew The Real Guides, and had a lot of experience with them. I hadn't seen them for a lot of years. My parents and I would visit them from time to time since I was about four and then a few times after. I rode up the bluff and then Mary noticed me. At first she just looked for a moment, and then realized it was me and then came over my way at a fast pace.

"Goldie it's you! I was wondering who the handsome stranger is," she said with her sweet and kind voice.

I jumped down and we hugged each other, and then Paul came out and said, "I finally caught you with another man Mary, I will find a new wife in the morning after you fix me breakfast," then he laughed real loud as he always does, and came over and we shook hands.

"Good to see you, Goldie. We knew you were coming, we saw you on the inner riding across the flatlands. Come in and have something to drink, and we will talk about the great coming events you will be doing," he said, as I followed him.

The cat jumped off the horse and followed us. We walked inside and sat down at their table.
"You two have the nicest house around Paul, this place is like a palace. The inside here is wonderful! You have done very well for yourselves," I said, feeling so glad to see them. "Where are your two daughters, Rosa and Sonya?"

"Oh, they are like you, they want to see the world and fly from the nest. The life of a fisherman was not for them, they are working in town. One is working at the general store and the other one is teaching school at the school house that the townspeople built about three years ago," Paul said.

"That's what I would like to do is teach school. It would be a good trade for me to learn while I am writing my book. I can also teach young people about their Real Experiences. Children are usually having them all the time, whereas the grownups have usually become so set in their ways they have a hard time relating to them," I said.

"Sonya loves teaching at the school. She has told us that there are a lot of children of different ages and there are too many of them for her to teach and handle. She has been asking the people who head the school for help, but there is no one who will teach. Perhaps you could get the position you want and help her out," said Paul.

I sat back for a moment and thought about it. "That would be great. I will ride into town when I have settled for a while and talk with Sonya. Do the girls ever come back out here and visit?" I asked.

"About once a month or so, they come by to see us old people," said Mary, laughing as she was telling me.

"Come with me Goldie, come and see the room that you can stay in while you are here." she said, as we stood up and I followed her into a bedroom.

"This is the girls' room. You can see that they had a real nice place to stay, and so now you can stay here," said Mary, as she showed me where everything is.

"Thank you Mary, it truly is a beautiful room," I said. I didn't have the heart to tell her that I liked sleeping outside under the sky and the stars.

"Let's go get your things and bring them in, I will help you," she said, as she was walking out to my horse.
"I don't really have too much, just a few things that I was able to carry," I said.

"I'll bet they have to be washed, don't they?" she said, smiling at me and then grabbing what was on the horse.

"Oh, I'm sure they're fine, Mary," I said.

"Just as I thought, they smell like the trail you came in on," she said, giggling as she took them to where she did her laundry.

"I can do that Mary, I have done it all my life. You have enough to do around here with Paul," I said.

"Go and write your book Goldie boy, you're not going to live forever this time around. You need to finish it, so other people in this world know the truth about Life. So many of my friends are religious and they are not interested in The Real Truth. I have attempted to tell a few who I know about something other than what has been around for so long, but they are all set in their ways, because everyone else agrees. It is all none of my concern. I was where they are at one time, but now I see things so much better and freer. It was your parents who taught us so much when they used to come to the ocean. It took a few times for what they were saying to sink in, but after I had a beautiful experience with RT, I was so convinced that I immediately stopped going to the gatherings.

My friends wondered what was going on and I did try to explain a little of what I knew, but they were not interested in listening. Maybe we should have kept going and kept up the front with them, but I could sense that there was becoming a difference, and that it was time for us to just let them be. I love and respect my friends, but after Paul and I discussed it, we decided to not go for a while, just to see how we would feel. After a while, we realized we had made the right decision, and that to just live the rest of our lives as we are okay, it's actually great! It also saves us a trip into town when we don't have to go. We have pretty much everything we need here and we like our life as it is."

"In time, a few of our friends started coming around and asking us why we weren't coming to the meetings anymore. We told them we could practice what was being taught within ourselves without having to go anywhere. We explained to them how it was done, and that what they had read for most of their lives was a hint as to what is needed to understand what Life was trying to teach us all. A few of our friends also stopped going to the meetings and they come over to our
house once in a while when they want to tell us what is taking place with themselves. I find it really amazing that everyone that tries the connection with RT finds that it seems to work almost right away. Everyone has their own experience from The Great Reality, as RT calls it," she said.

"That's great Mary," I said, smiling with her. "Mary, you have such a wonderful heart, it is so good to know you and Paul. I can see now that Life has brought us all together to share the love and understanding we have all earned. Every time I hear someone's experience I am elated by the very fact of how ongoing and endless our lives are. I want to hear some of your experiences. What about tonight at dinner?" I asked.

"Okay Indian boy, let me do your clothes while you go and write," she said.

"I will write after I take my horse down to the water for a swim," I said as I walked away laughing and feeling a new life coming on.

Mary fed the cat some fish as I went to my horse. I took my horse and went down by the water's edge as the sun was in the late afternoon sky. The sun in the other worlds was more brilliant than this one here on earth, but the one here is still a beautiful experience to watch. The sound of the surf moving across the water was a real treat for me. To be by the water again and have the sound it makes is a dream come true. The freshness of finally being in this wonderful area was a great feeling for my entire being. I sat and wrote for several hours while the horse played in the water. I was writing about everything that had just happened, until I could no longer make out the words as the sun was disappearing. It was a perfect sunset into the ocean.

Then, Mary yelled down to me, "We are ready to eat. Come and have your favorite rice and beans, Goldie."

I had been so lost in what I was writing that I forgot about the rice and beans she usually cooked. I grabbed the horse and rode up the bluff and went inside. "I can smell those great beans cooking, Mary," I said, as I came up to her. Their house was lit with several lanterns that created a nice effect at night with plenty of light to see.

"Sit down and let's eat," said Mary, smiling as she served the rice and beans and her homemade bread.
"This looks great, I'm starving. I'll probably eat all that you have," I said.

"Well, there will be real thunder in the house tonight, Mary," said Paul, as we laughed.

After we started eating, I asked Mary and Paul about their inner life, and if they had anything they could share for my book.

"We have a lot to tell you," said Mary. "I also keep a record of some of the dream experiences I have had, also with Rebazar. I write Paul's down too if I think they are any good." Then, she laughed and so did Paul and I.

"Here is one that I had not too long ago, you were in it Goldie with us. We were all at la playa and pushing Paul's boat out into the water. The idea was we were going to go fishing. We went out a ways and then all of us put our lines in the water. You, Goldie, kept bringing up fish after fish. Paul and I were amazed at how many fish you were catching. I think Paul and I caught one fish each. After a while, the boat was full of fishes, hundreds of them, and then we went back to shore. As soon as we took the fish out of the boat, they turned into children that stood there and were waiting to be instructed. Then, I woke up. What do you think Goldie?" asked Mary, as she smiled.

"It's quite obvious the fish in this experience represented the people that I will be meeting and possibly teaching. They will still be young, but willing to learn," I said, smiling with them.

"I have had many dreams that are similar to that one where we are fishing, and also seeing you as you are writing your books," said Mary. I have had some with Rebazar lately, where he was telling me about you coming to see us and that you would be staying for a while."

"I will be here for a while, if that is all right with you?" I asked them.

"You can stay as long as you like, Goldie. We are glad to have you here as our friend," said Paul.

"Thank you so much. I will be writing for a while, and I will be glad to help you out around here. Then, when I feel I am ready, I will go and see if I can find a teaching job of some kind," I said.
"For now, all you have to do is eating and writing," said Mary as she hugged me.

All of us talked for the longest time and finally finished everything she cooked. I had stuffed myself, because the entire meal was so great. "That was a great dinner Mary, I'll help you clean up if you like," I asked.

"I can do it, why don't you go and have fun writing your book," she said, and began cleaning up.

I went to my new room and sat on the bed, and thought over what I was going to write next. All the years of being trained by The Real Guides, was coming through to me in my writings. The world seemed to be behind the times when it came to the main part of Life. Most people just lived this life, and that was it, never exploring the hidden secrets of themselves. I wanted to finish my book and see if I could get it published, then I would have something to show people. After writing for a while, I was rather tired, so I went to sleep and to the inner shoreline.

RT was there to meet me. "Hello Goldie, how's the book coming?" he said, with a big smile on his face.

"I have plenty to write about, Sir," I said. "When I get it published, the world will have a better idea of what else Life has to offer."

"Everything will take place according to the events that follow each other. There will be people all over who will be ready to take a look at what you will be presenting. We will let you know where to go and who to see. What you are doing this lifetime is planting the seeds that will show up later, even after this life is over for a lot of those you come in contact with. The controlling systems have created a huge misconception, with the idea that if you join them you will instantly be saved from everything and rest eternally in their heaven.

It is impossible to attain a great awareness through a water dowsing or any other ritual that has been invented to fool the physical brain into a belief of something that sounds good. You have the willingness to be prepared for the impossible, while the rest of the human race is depending upon the ruling systems to take care of them. Continually consider The Great Reality, and eventually everything will become clear to you. I will see you soon," said RT.
RT walked down the shoreline as I stood there and watched him go. As usual he vanished into thin air. I could sense the long journey that I would be taking and all the places I would be going. I knew that I was going to have to be creative, because of what I was presenting. All the years of training became like a story to me. It was my life that I was living, and at the same time I was being shown The Real Side of what has no boundaries. I was okay with everything within myself. I really didn't have a plan, but I knew that things would go as they should. I could see after all the years of being with RT and The Real Guides, that they never really had a plan either, they lived each moment and were directed by The True Reality, as IT became realized in them. Their lives are simple, yet what they know is so much more than what can be seen on the surface or even explained in words.

I sat and watched the ocean and the sunlight reflection. As I was staring out to sea, I saw something in the water. At first I thought it was a Dolphin jumping around. Then, it came closer to the shoreline. I could see something under the surface swimming towards me. Almost instantly the head of a person appeared and waved to me. It looked like a girl with her arm in the air. I hesitated for a moment, and then decided to wave back. As I was waving, she dove down and her fin like tail came to the surface and then she was gone. I stood up real fast and ran to the shoreline, but I could see that she was gone.

The next morning came fast. I was up at early dawn, as Mary and Paul were getting up at the same time.

"Buenos dias Goldie, another day to live on the dirt," said Paul, as he was laughing.

"Que paso Paul?" I said, as I was trying to wake up.

"We are going fishing today, youngster. You and I will take the boat out and get fish for ourselves and some to trade with our friends," he said, as he was getting dressed.

"Okay, that sounds like work and fun at the same time, I'm up for it," I said, as I got ready to go.

Mary was already up and fixed us some rice and beans. I could smell them as I came into the room.
"I could eat those things every day," I said to her.

"There is always plenty here for you, Indian boy. We never run out," she said, smiling as she was serving and moving about her kitchen.

Paul came into the room and sat down. "The Indian and I are fishing today, mama. The rice and beans will get us going," he said, with a loud laughter. We ate and then went down to the shoreline.

"It is another great day with the sun gleaming on the sea and reflecting the light of reality on this world," I said to Paul, as we moved his boat to the water's edge.

"You are a great light in our lives, Goldie. It is so good to have you here with us," said Paul, as he steadied the boat.

"You are the same to me, Paul. You and Mary and all those like you. Actually everyone is the light. They don't realize it yet, but they are on their own journey to The Great Eagle that IS," I said, feeling well rested and ready for some hard work.

"Let's shove off," said Paul, as we pushed the boat into the water and then jumped in it.

We paddled as fast as we could to get out and over the waves that were coming in.

"The waves are bigger today, this is the biggest I've seen them in a long time," he said, while he was moving his arms as fast as he could to get the boat moving.

It took a while to get out, as we finally got through the heavy surf. We rowed to a spot about a kilometer off shore. Paul knew where the fish were usually at. He said that there was a shallow reef under water and there were always thousands of fish to be seen from the surface. When we got to the spot, I could see through the water very clearly. There were many schools of different fish everywhere. It was a beautiful sight just to watch them moving through the water so effortlessly. We put our lines into the water and waited. It wasn't long before we began catching the fish. They were so easy to catch. Within a couple of hours, we had part of the boat full of fish.
"We have mucho," said Paul, "Let's head back to the house. Mary will be so happy to see all the fish."

We paddled back and then rode the surf into the beach. As we were doing so, I thought about the experience of myself in the future and riding the waves on those logs. We were soon on shore and pulling the boat across the sand. It was a lot heavier now.

"The boat was a lot lighter this morning," I said, trying to make all the effort as fun as possible.

It took the rest of the day to get the fish up the bluff and prepared. What a day it was, but it was worth it. We now had enough fish for a lifetime and then some. The cat came down as we were unloading.

"I'll take my share right now," he said, licking his little teeth.

After we were finished, Paul and I sat down in a pair of hammocks he had strung up that were overlooking the bluffs and out across the sea.

"This is great, Paul. I love the ocean and everything that blends into it. We really did good today, that was fun," I said.

"Us Mexicans have the best life," he said, as the late afternoon sun was setting into a colorful mixture along the horizon.

"I find everything to be so amazing, how it all works and provides itself to all of us," I said, just relaxing my really tired body.

"You have a way with words Goldie, that is why you will make a great writer," said Paul, as he was swinging back and forth on his hammock.

Then, Mary came out carrying two big plates. "Look what I have amigos, fish and some old-fashioned rice and beans corn tortillas," she said, giggling as she handed us the plates.

"This looks great Mary, muchas gracias," I said as I grabbed the plate and began to eat.
"This is the life, Senor Goldie," said Paul, and we didn't say another word until we were finished.

Mary gave Little Feather some fish and he said to me, "Muchas gracias, Senor Goldie, for catching the fish." I had to laugh at how he communicated with me.

I was exhausted after we were through eating. I just lay there and watched the sun disappear into the ocean. Soon, the stars were out and the night time sky came into view with its blanket of dotted lights. There was no lights out here except for the lantern that Mary had near the house, so the evening was very dark and provided a perfect backdrop for all the stars that filled the sky. I lay there looking into the vastness of the sky and wondering what it was like to be way out there with the stars. It must be like on the inner, where you are floating and feeling free from the weight of the world.

After a while I fell asleep from the labor of the day. Suddenly, I was outside of myself and above the earth. I was a good distance up, because I could actually see the curve of the earth. There was a bluish aura around the earth that seemed to cradle it and provide a friendly feeling about the place. Way out here, the idea of the earth is different, in that all that was taking place on this giant ball in space no longer seemed to be very important. What is of importance is the freedom from the body and its restrictions. I felt free and able to move wherever I wanted to. I decided to go further out into space and explore. I was near the moon, so I went to take a look. As I got closer, I could see all the craters that were there. It was an eerie feeling to be so close to it. I wondered about all the craters and how they came to be. I decided to ask RT next time I saw him. As I was thinking about the moon, I suddenly heard a voice.

"It was an interstellar war that took place many centuries ago and you will be shown someday," said the voice, and that was it.

I really thought for a moment about what was just said, and then wondered what could have made such huge impressions. I flew down very close to the surface and moved across the rugged terrain. It was a cold, gray and lonely place that was not at all inviting. I sped along the surface at a very fast pace. I was soon at the other side, the dark side, and took a look. It was just a dark place. Just as I was about to leave, something caught my attention. There were some lights way up ahead that I could barely see, so I decide to investigate. As I came closer, I could see different types of structures that I have never seen on earth. I flew around the area and began to realize that it was some kind of mining camp. I
could not see anyone anywhere. I figured they must be resting or asleep. They seemed to be digging up a very large portion of the area. What they were doing looked to be pretty dull and uninteresting, so I decided to move past this place and explore some of the other planets.

I went further out into space. I had read about some of the planets in books and knew their names. From where I was at, I could see Venus and Mars. I took a close look at Venus, it was very cloudy. So I went over near Mars. It seemed to be an interesting planet, especially with all the coloring that it had. I went down to take a closer look. I could see there were a lot of canals running in all different directions along the surface. I got very close to get a better view. It was mainly a lot of gray reddish soil that covered almost everything. There were also a lot of rocky areas that stood out all over the place. Just like the moon, it didn't look too friendly.

As I was floating above the surface, suddenly, something came flying overhead. It was moving at a very fast pace as it passed me. As it swept past, it then stopped very abruptly, a good distance from where I was at. It looked like a giant dinner plate. It floated above the surface of the land, and then gently lowered itself into one of the wide canals and then disappeared. I didn't know what to think about what it could be, but it sure was interesting. For a moment, I was a little shocked and I didn't know what to do. Then, I realized that I was safe with the inner body that I was in, and quite possibly whoever it was that was here, may not be able to even see me.

I floated over to the place that I last saw the big plate vanish. I looked closely at the ground and I could barely see that there was some type of door that was down in the canal and on the surface. I then remembered what RT taught me, and that is that I could go through anything with The Real Self. I decided to give it a try, and slowly went down through the ground. I soon came out on the other side into a gigantic opening that was underground. It was rather dimly lit, but easy to see. The area was very large and inside was a huge city of some sorts. The structures were nothing like on earth and they were stacked very high up from the bottom of this place, which seemed to be a long way down. I could see there were many flying things moving all about.

Then, the door above me began to open. I moved to the side to see what would happen. It was another flying object that was entering. It swiftly went down into the city to where it was going and then out of sight. It was an amazing place, actually rather strange and eerie. I slowly moved closer to one of the taller

buildings to see who these people are. As I was floating about, several people came walking out to an outside walkway that leads around the building. I got a good look at them. They were not like the people on earth at all. Their heads were bigger and egg shaped, and they had very large eyes. The ones that I saw wore long robes that covered their whole body. I tried to realize what they were saying by listening to them with my Real Awareness, but I could not understand them and the language they were using. It was a fascinating experience, but I soon realized there was nothing here for me here and so I left.

I flew back up through the door and up into the sky, then stopped for a moment, and then flew as fast as I could to the brightest star I could see. I was soon very close to the brightest star. It was a huge ball of fiery light. It was so gigantic and awesome. I slowly moved around it in awe.

I suddenly realized that I didn't know where the earth was at. I knew how to get back though, and that was to imagine myself back in the body. All of a sudden, I was back and still lying in the hammock outside in the dark night. I looked around and saw that Paul was gone. I stayed outside until morning, because it was so nice out and I didn't want to disturb Paul and Mary, while they were sleeping. The cat came walking up and said that he saw me take off earlier with my inner body. I softly laughed at his remark as he walked off. I was up early and walking around. I was thinking about the planet Mars, and what I had seen. It was hard for me to believe what I did see. I knew that if I told anyone they would consider me to be out of sorts. I wanted to tell Mary and Paul first. I knew that I could trust them, because they were into the adventure of Life like me. They were soon up, and I went into the house and sat at the table.

"Buenos dias Goldie," said Mary as she prepared the rice and beans.

"Good morning Mary, I have something very interesting to tell you," I said, as Paul came into the room.

"Hola amigos" said Paul, as he sat down.

Little Feather walked into the room and sat next to me. He looked straight at Mary, and then she laughed, because she knew exactly what he wanted.

"Here you are Mr. Cat," she said, as she handed him some fish. "So, what's new Goldie?" asked Paul.
I was thinking about how I was going to tell him what happened, and at the same time make it sound fun and interesting.

Then, I went past all the thinking and said, "Do you know there are people on Mars?"

I waited for their reaction in a funny sort of way with my mouth tightly closed. They began to laugh as they were preparing their tortillas.

"You mean those funny-looking creatures that somebody's god made and then got them to live on Mars?" said Paul, as he laughed even louder and almost choked on his tortilla and beans.

"What?" I said. "You already know about the Mars people?" They both looked at me at the same time and continued to laugh.

"Rebazar never told you, did he?" said Paul, still feeling humorous.

"There is some form of life on all the planets, but they are not always that obvious. In the future, the earth people will be dealing with what RT calls 'aliens.' They are on the planet now and have been here for thousands of years. I have never seen them around here, but I have friends that have traveled to the inland regions and seen strange flying things in the air, and even saw them land on the ground," said Paul.

Then, the cat said to me, "Are you sure you're not seeing things?" All of us laughed at that remark.

"That's what I saw in my experience. There were these machines that flew in the air and looked like the plates we eat on. I went to their underground city and saw where these strange creatures lived, below the surface of the planet. It was well hidden and I did see it and it was huge. I never imagined that there was life on other planets and more advanced than ours," I said, as the cat kept staring at me oddly.

Paul and Mary began to laugh again.

"Goldie, you are so funny. Life on this planet is not really advanced at all. Most
people are still hurting each other over things that don't really matter. Do you know what would happen to the religious orders if people knew there is life on other planets? They would probably have a lot less members than they do now. Their doctrines basically designate that the earth is their god's pedestal. People on this planet are kept in the dark and unaware.

The aliens have been here a long time and they really do not want to have to deal with the humans, unless it is necessary, because many humans are too dangerous and ruthless, like wild beasts. It would be like you going out and living in the jungle with all the beasts that could eat you. Of course you wouldn't do it, because you would rather be by the beach. There are the good aliens and then there are the bad ones, but our only interest is getting to The Real Universes," said Paul.

"How long have you two known about them?" I asked.

Paul rubbed his chin and began to think. "I would say about ten years or so. Mary and I have seen them in the other worlds, but as I said, never on the earth," said Paul.

I began to wonder if my experience meant anything. Also, why would they be on the earth? I thought.

"Do you have an idea why they would be on the earth, Paul?" I asked.

"My guess is that they are exploring the different planets for their own needs, such as their need for different types of minerals. I have met a few people that have seen the flying objects that you are describing. RT has told us there are different races throughout the planetary systems that are far more advanced than anything on the earth today or even in the future. He said, they are always out exploring, because they have the capability to do so. He said, they don't usually make contact with us because there is no reason to. He told us there are good strangers out there and there are bad ones, and both kinds visit the earth all the time, but they are best left alone. Rebazar told us what they have to offer is very little compared to The Real Guides. He also said, that in the future, many people on earth would become very interested and misled by them again," said Paul.

"That's so interesting. RT never mentioned them to me at all. I never even imagined there was life on other planets," I said, sitting there in kind of a daze.

"Goldie, you have enough to do in this lifetime. Trying to figure out why people from other planets are here won't be any benefit to you at all. Besides, who would believe you? You will have the time of your life just getting past the stubborn resistance of the outer attitudes that people have about their own Real Experiences, let alone trying to tell them about space people," said Paul, as he began to laugh.

Then, the cat looked up at me and said, "I don't believe you either."

I had to laugh out loud for a moment. "You're right, Paul. I think it was the impact of the experience and how different it was that took me by surprise. I know what I have to do, and that is finish my book, and then try to see if someone will publish it," I said, as I was thinking past what we had just talked about.

"You will have plenty to do just trying to make that possible, Goldie. You already know that what you are doing is The Real Way, and it is like nothing else," said Paul, as he got up from the table with Mary.

"We're going to go out and do our chores while you sit here and write and eventually become famous," said Mary, as they strolled outside laughing and holding each other.

I thought to myself, how fortunate I was to know these people and to share their wonderful insights.

Little Feather finished his fish and said, "I'm going to go and take a nap and have fun with my kitty friends on the other side," then he jumped down from the chair and went off somewhere.

I stayed indoors most of the day and wrote as much as I could. There was still so much more to write about and realize. I loved what I was doing, because there was no end to it. It wasn't restricted to the physical limitations only, what you would call the process of survival on this world. Writing was now becoming an adventure for me. By the end of the day, as the sun was slowly setting over the ocean, I emerged from my room to take a walk outside and to breathe some fresh air. Paul and Mary were still busy with tending their affairs. It was always fun for me to watch them at whatever they did.

"Amigos" I said, "I'm going to take a walk along the shore, I'll be back soon," and then waved to them as I walked off.

It was a pleasant and windless afternoon, and the ocean was calm with small surf that rolled gently in as I walked along the water's edge. Paul and Mary, had a great spot to live, I thought. This is where I would like to build something like a small house for myself, right next to the ocean. I was surprised that there weren't more people living along this part of the shoreline, but most people choose to live near the established cities. The ocean to me was like Life, a big and endless experience, which was always waiting to be realized continually. The sound of the ocean waves is part of The Life Giving Reality that comes from The IS. I can feel the difference when I am here.

As I was slowly walking along and watching the sun setting behind the island that was miles off shore, something began to appear in front of me. At first, I wasn't sure if I was just seeing a reflection of some kind and so I didn't think anything about it. As I walked further, there were a few specks of light that looked like little fire flies, only brighter. They would appear and then disappear. I stopped to watch if they would continue. After a moment or so they did continue. I slowly walked on, and as I did, there was something that was appearing out of the side of my vision. As I looked to the right it could not be seen, but as I looked straight ahead, I could see something with my peripheral vision. There was a form of activity going on where there was light from what appeared to be an alternate source.

I stopped and watched what was taking place right next to me. There was a scene, but I could not make it out entirely, because it was actually in another dimension that was separate from the earth. As I watched, the appearance of what was taking place began to widen and become more apparent. Whatever was taking place seemed to want my attention. I could sense something drawing me into the scene that was at my right side. I stood very still and let whatever was to happen continue. I was suddenly moving into what seemed to be another world, just like the worlds that I was used to on the other side, but actually it moved into me. As I was entering the new world, I could also see to the left of me the world that I was leaving, the earth. The surf was still rolling in and I could still hear the sound of it as I was engulfed and entering another arena or world. After a few moments, I was all the way into the new area, and as I looked back, I could see the view of the ocean slowly disappear.

I was now in a new and different environment. It was like the places that I had been with RT, but there was something different about all of it. There were small rolling hills everywhere that were covered with beautifully green grassy surfaces that seemed to stretch as far as the eye could see. There were trees scattered

about, some by themselves and others in small bunches. It was a perfectly lovely setting that was very calm and serene. I began to move from the position I was in, but I didn't walk, I floated. I actually floated a little bit above the grassy surface. I moved smoothly along the top of the rolling terrain and out toward the horizon. I soon came to a high cliff where I was over- looking a gigantic ocean. I stopped and stared out over this sea of wonder. It was a glittering sea of light. It was so bright that I could hardly look into it. It shimmered and dazzled like sparkling diamonds, a thousand diamonds, and perhaps millions upon millions of them. I could smell the pure fresh ocean. It had a fragrance so penetrating and real, that I do not even have the words to explain it.

I closed my eyes and all that I saw was light. There was nothing but a constant glittering of whitish light that was alive and surrounded me, and at the same time was all of me. Then, I heard a sound. It was very low at first and seemed to be coming from somewhere. I could barely hear it at all, but I knew it was there, because it was like the sound that is in my inner ear that I hear all the time. The sound began to get a little louder and it became more apparent and continued to be more obvious. It was soon moving from where it was and then toward me, and then through me until it was a part of me. After a while, I felt as though I was the light and sound and there was nothing else. My attention was so fixed on the sound that I forgot all about where I was at, and at the same time the light became more intense and totally surrounded me. Then suddenly, I heard a beautiful voice from within the wondrous light.

"Goldie, you have come and I am here for you," said the sweet voice.

I opened my eyes and there stood Shiss Harah U, in the radiant light. She was floating in front of me, beyond where I was and out above from the distance below. She looked like an Angel. She was all glowing white and radiant. Then, she came over to where I was and stood beside me as she radiated with her light.

"Hello Goldie, I was hoping that you would come. Let's go and sit under your favorite place, a big tree," she said, as she smiled and led me to a perfect spot.

We both moved under the closest tree and sat on the seemingly perfect grass that had a freshness to it that was so rich.

"I am so glad to see you," she said. "I have been watching you and the progress you are making with your book. I can see that you will be a good writer, and you
will continue to do so in your future life. It takes a lot of preparation for what you and The Real Guides are doing. Some people can become famous in a lifetime, because it took them many lifetimes to perfect their skills. From the human side, it always looks like Life has given a person a gift, but it is really the person them- selves deciding what they want their life to be. Life is already The Real Gift for all of us; we just have to decide what part we will play in it. Those who misuse their abilities and talents, cannot enter The Real Genuineness with The Pure Worlds, and are only keeping themselves in the darkness of the first three levels. What you will be presenting to others will open new vistas of opportunity," she said with her wonderful voice and beauty.

I sat and patiently listened to her. Her voice was so wonderful to hear, and with all the surroundings that were so alive, I was having a great experience. Being outside of the earth and into one of the inner regions was so nice, I thought. I began to wonder where I was at. This place felt as though it were different from the regular beach that I went to, even more alive in its own way.

"This place is different," said Shiss. "It is a place all its own beyond the creative gods that mankind has come to know. This is our world whenever we want it. You and I, Goldie, are this place that is alive and endless. There are so many wonderful areas for us, because we do not agree with the fear that has been accepted by most humans that want to bow to their authorities. They will not explore beyond what their mind is restricted by. To them, this place does not exist, so they will never know that it does. We have a Real Freedom that cannot be explained, but is Real and can only be lived in for us."

As I listened to her, I seemed to have no real concern for what people considered, because their ideas were old and of no value to me. I knew that there would always be those who would argue about some idea that had become familiar with those that had no Real Experience with Life. I was just so glad to be where I am and nothing else seemed to matter. I sat back and stared at the wide open sky and I felt a great release of everything that wasn't really anything at all, but Real. I felt as though I had been emptied once again, and I could relax and enjoy Life as IT Really IS. I watched the light gently move about in the sky, as though it were dancing with itself in a simple fashion. There were specks of light that were sometimes brighter than others and they would become very bright, and then blend into the rest of the light and be a part of all that it is. It was Life Being Alive and Real, and I was here to experience it, oh, lucky me!
"You are experiencing The True Reality as IT comes from the center of ITSELF, Goldie. We are on a very high and awesome level of The Light Regions. Where we are most people could not comprehend, because of their abnormal conditioning. The light and sound are now stronger in you, and it will even more assist you through time and space to do what you have to," she said, while I was just listening and watching Life Being Alive with ITSELF.

"I could stay here forever," I said. "Stay here and be whatever I am. The earth is a hard place and I don't always realize the unnecessary things that I take on until I am here. I can see all the little attitudes that really mean nothing to me, but the mind and what it decides is rather a pest that collects so much nonsense. I love being here and being Real with you, Miss Shiss."

I wanted to listen to what she had to say with her wonderful voice, and at the same time, I wanted to be a part of what was taking place with what I was experiencing. As I sat and looked out into the vastness of this magical aliveness, something began to occur in me. It was like I was receiving impressions from somewhere. They were formulations that I began to put together within myself, as some of the past lives I had lived on the earth, and other planets and systems, suddenly and slowly came as pictures, that would play out their own scenes and tell a story that related to my own Being. It was a marvelous experience realizing all that I had went through in the past to get to where I was at in the present. I could See so much, and it had all led me to where I am now. There was so much to it, so much more than I could realize.

"You are Seeing what you need to give you more confidence for your journey through Life, for what you will be doing while you are on the earth, Goldie. This experience will also give you the knowledge of comparison, a very important part of what you have to reveal to others as you teach them. You are continuously being given mass amounts of experience and knowledge with your physical life, along with your other subtle bodies that are being shown what the brain cannot comprehend. The Secret Knowledge is only for those who can be trusted with it. The War Mongers of the earth are constantly trying to figure out how to destroy others in a quicker fashion, and they want this knowledge, but they will never have it, because it does not work for those who cling to their darkness. With their distorted ways and ideas, they will eventually do themselves in, and be returning in future lifetimes as cripples and morons, until they wake up," said Shiss.

The pictures I was Seeing were similar to large cards. Through my imagination, I
could go through them quickly, or I could slow them down and take a real close look at them. Some of what I was Seeing was very interesting. There were many lifetimes where I was very courageous and inventive. Then, there were lifetimes that I did very little, because the world was in a certain way at the time. I could See that I was not always a man, but took on a woman's body at times for the experiences I needed. The cards kept coming faster, because I wanted them to. I was able to perceive what I needed in a very rapid fashion. Then, the cards changed from the human experiences to that of animals and birds. I could See, that I had been so many different things, even as far back as prehistoric times. I didn't look at all the lives that I lived, because most of them had no use to me. I knew they were only stages of awareness that I went through to get to where I am now.

I estimated that I had been moving through various embodiments for several million years. From all the lifetimes I saw, I did realize that there was a difference between the animal awareness I had at one time and when I became a human. Most of the animal viewpoints were that of a more Real Beingness. As I became human and continued on through the centuries, I was using the mind and emotions more so than my intuition and perception. I could See lifetimes where I was bogged down from the emotional and mental distortions of outer agreements I accepted, because I was agreeing with everyone else and I was right there along with them.

The intuition is the closest position to The Real Awareness of us. The human race has actually misled itself with the idea that the mind is the greater benefit and is the 'knower.' The mind is only an offshoot of materialism, a storehouse for information, and not The Real Innovator that brings forth the realizations from the unknown areas of Life. The mind can only store information, and some of the information that it does store is misleading and without any Real Value. When the vital experiences and right information that has been accumulated over lifetimes are properly perceived by The Real Awareness, then we can utilize everything that has taken place for our own advantage.

Up until the time we meet with The Real Guides, we are mainly mislead by the various 'authorities' of mind knowledge, and what they are presenting for their sake of their own support and takeovers. These are the 'sound-good systems,' the world of humans have come to know from business plans, that have matured for thousands of years. Eventually, we can advance on the road of Life, once a Real Guide meets up with us and gives us an overview of all that we have went through.

I realized, that I was relating to the other part of myself that knew The True Reality, not the part of me that constantly questioned what was taking place in its own little world. Where I was at, the personal self was unavailable to interfere with my Real Perception. I took a look at the life before this one. I was an Indian then also. I could see many different scenes where I was with Rebazar. He has taught me in my previous lives, and by doing so, each life has become even better. I could see that the life before this one was very hard, and I had to struggle a lot, but he told me that it was necessary to do so, because it would build my endurance. I was willing to go through what I had to so that I could have the life I wanted, even though I didn't know what it was going to be. I entirely trusted The Real Guides, to bring me to the point of realizing What IS Real. Shiss, eventually broke me out of my experience when she started communicating with me through her Beingness.

"Goldie, I can See what you are looking at. It has all been a plan for you to come into this position and from here to go further. The Real Guides know who The Great Reality has chosen. Some souls will enter The Real Universes during your time on earth, but they will not be The Chosen One to present The True Reality, The Golden Staff of Light, that is the vehicle to secure the freedom for all individuals in the lower levels. Your past lives were shown to you because you had not yet considered them. The earth planet is the school of hard lessons that must be dealt with, to bring about the right attitudes for a survival that most people are not aware of. It is also for the sake of your own Being, and to center you into The Real ISNESS," she said.

What she was saying seemed to go right through me and establish what I needed to understand and firm up the direction I was to take. I looked up at the sky that was a deep beautiful blue and so alive in its own reality. Specks of light, from many areas would appear and then moved about and would disappear into somewhere. The True Reality that all souls are seeking is so immense that there are no words to describe it. The doctrines of the earth were invented as an indication of what else there is, but have actually become a lost cause for those that allow themselves to be led by their minds, instead of their own Beingness and Heart, that is having The Real Experiences with What IS Real. I could See the illuminated road I was to travel, and how it would be hard on the physical body. From this Real Position, it was a simple process of perceiving what is occurring in me.

"You are correct, Goldie. You have The Real Vision that surpasses what everyone else cannot See. They cannot realize anything past their embodiments

and the drama that is taking place in their lives, which is constantly perpetuated by The Influence. This is why The Real Guides have chosen you. You will bring forth The True Reality like never before. There will only be so many who will see and realize what you will be presenting. There will also be many more that will play the part of resisting within themselves to justify what their mind holds to be a reasonable position. The great evil that broods through the world of men is constantly building upon itself, and does not want to let the unaware from its grasp. It is because there are so many that want the decay instead of The Real Wealth and The Real Treasures that Life has to offer. There will always be those who want the destructiveness that comes with living on earth. They could choose The Real Light and explore the unknown, but they will choose the darkness as a way of life without seeing what they are really choosing. Your next lifetime will prove what people really want, and that is to justify being held to their personal life, so that they can have all the things that have no value, but that have value to their minds and emotions only."

"For you, and those that are willing to explore, all the advantages that are always in the present Nowness will lend themselves. It takes great courage to overcome the little self that only wants the limitations and ends up obliterated. Your Being, is in such a way that you will always cling to The Real. You will be scorned from so many who will be jealous of you, because they will want what you have, but they will not sacrifice like you to get it. They will see that you are successful, but they will wonder in their little minds how you are able to accomplish what you do and know," she said.

As she was talking, I had moved my awareness into The True Reality, and there was a sound that was so wonderful I didn't want to leave. I forced myself away and soon returned my awareness to myself and sat and observed where I was. I have always had a desire to know about those people in the past who have gone through what I am going through now, and how they did it.

"So many people look to those in the past who have presented certain ideas about the gods they knew, yet most people still only cling to their doctrines without any Real Experience," she said.

What about Jesus, who was he?" I asked.

Shiss looked at me and smiled. "I was wondering when you were going to ask me that. There has always been a mystery around him, because The Real Truth about him has always been kept hidden. He is not the only one that did what he
did, or said what he said, there were many others, but it has all been kept a secret. There are forces on the earth world and up to the third level, which do not want The Real Truth to be known. The rulers and controllers only want the mental and emotional attention of people and their support to build their own egos, and to furnish themselves with the lifestyle that makes others envy them. They are the ruling classes, the Elites, who have anointed themselves as royalty and the privileged, so they can justifiably steal from others. It exists on earth today as it always has, but it will even be more so in the future. Jesus was foretold to enter the human realm in a certain body. He was an advanced soul at the time, and was destined to be trained by The Real Universal Guides during his life on earth. The Real Guides accepted him while he was still in his youth and taught him for many years. At some point, Jesus decided to go out on his own and do what he did. He actually did too much by performing miracles that were of the Dualistic Power. As he was trying to prove that he was sent by The Gods of Man, the church was watching him closely and becoming concerned with what he was doing, so, they forced the politicians at the time to get rid of him."

"By getting rid of him, they were still in control and had their followers, and they did not have the criminal conviction of what they had done, nor the blame for his death. It served the purpose of the church to get rid of Jesus, because he was starting to get too much attention, and the dark forces do not like to be number two on the earth. As long as it was official with the political scene, then the church appeared to be innocent of having anything to do with his demise. Finally, the church established the idea that Jesus died for the sins of all, which eventually took hold as a very strong idea among the masses. Again, the earth systems are based upon agreement, and fear being the basis of these systems.

Fear, is what has perpetuated the hold of all the ideas the church has invented to rule the minds and hearts of unaware souls. People are taught to fear the invented authorities, and so lifetimes pass and people are still clinging to their fears. In The Real Universes, there is no room for fear, only Real Freedom. Look at all the poor people who support the great structures that have been built in the name of the gods that man has chosen. There are so many everywhere and they will multiply many times over into the future. And what are the people themselves given? They are given a fabricated 'hope' that their life will become what has been proposed to them, but they lack The True Realization of a permanent position of Real Freedom, because they are taught to 'believe' in the formulated written document and verbal words of deceiving humans only."
"What people really get is a secondary life, that will only last so long, and then they will have to return into another unknowing position with a new body and a new mind, and be under the same ruler ship as their previous lives. The second and third heavens are truly beautiful, but there is so much more to know and be. Jesus was taught on the other side before he came onto the earth, and he is no different than you and I, as he has chosen his life to be what it is. He was a very aware individual, and so The Real Guides took him on as a student. He was born into a certain family, and then he was guided to the secret schools to be taught until he decided to go out into the world on his own. He also learned many of the psychic miracles, such as healing and transforming material matter into whatever he wanted. At some point, he went out to tell others about what he had learned. Once people found out that he could manipulate matter, they wanted to use him to combat their enemies. So, a plan was set into motion by the church and its leaders to get him out of the way."

"The church destroyed the saviors and saints of the past, because those unique individuals that took on the courage to provide some truth to the masses were becoming too popular, and Jesus was one of them. The church rulers could easily see that if they let the truth bearers have their way; the church would lose its position of control and power over the minds and hearts of their support. So, being the rulers they are over the hearts and minds of even the politicians, they contrived the idea to eliminate those who would stand in their way by a means that would not reflect upon the church. The church ordered the execution to be done by the political systems that were already feared by the public, so it wouldn't matter if they were to blame, because it would all appear to be workable and justifiable. This is how The Influence of The Space Gods works. Because most people are not able to get to The Real Truth, they must settle for something of no Real Value at all. The thread of conspiracy has weaved its way through mankind's history as the main predominating force and becomes very evident when seen from a Realistic View."

"The mind of man has been so integrated with the undermining of his soul that he cannot even see any Real Light, but only the light of the Astral and Mental Worlds, where his gods are waiting for his return to their formulated heavens. Mankind is living the dream he does not want, but must do so, because he has been emotionally unstable through an educational process that has created an endless deception of images that hold him to the effects that he wishes to be rid of. In this day and age, and into the future, it is a huge paradox for anyone to rise above the compacted illusions that constantly confront society. The illusion makers of the earth are looked upon as gods in the same fashion as The Gods
of Man. Deception rules the public awareness, and is paraded about as though it were something unique. Future lifetimes for all those that like to play, The Space God Games, will be a continuation of mental and emotional unstableness."

"With Jesus, his first mistake was that he got caught up with his own personal magic, his psychic powers. He actually began to interfere instead of properly present what The Real Guides wanted. The Real Guides do not use the lower powers to perform miracles for the sake of convincing others, nor do they interfere with personal will. They know that each person must choose for themselves without being persuaded. Jesus, also let himself be trapped and hung for no reason. The church invented the idea of him taking on the sins of others so they could promote him as theirs. In this way, they played both sides to their benefit, the church rulers got rid of him, and in the same vein established a subconscious hold on people for lifetimes of manipulation. What has been said about Jesus over the years is from the promotions that the controllers want everyone to believe in. While he was here, he actually tried to teach people about The True Reality, and something better than the established belief systems, but most people would not listen, because they were already so emotionally attached to their ideas that had been promoted to them for hundreds of years. He allowed himself to get caught in the political nonsense of the day. He did show courage, but he was in a hostile environment where he should have left and let The Brutalitarians to their own fate. Anyhow, it doesn't matter what he did or didn't do. The promoted experiences that are claimed about him are a sweet story for unaware children, and have nothing to do with a soul become more aware."

"Life is simple and Real beyond any belief that can be imagined, you already know this. You are willing to discover what others won't. Most people plan their lives in a certain fashion, and not realizing that everything they have planned becomes lost. This is the reason they continue to return and search for The True Reality, which has been within them and nowhere else all the time. The promoters of the belief systems only want more than their share of the earthly life. They also want the shares of others. Jesus said, the blind would lead the blind, and it is so. What he meant was that the controllers would take advantage of the unaware and use them for as many lifetimes as they could. Your purpose will be to show people how to be free from their limited self and to enter into The Real Universes, beyond the levels and realms the belief systems have established. People do not have to spend lifetimes on the earth for nothing, they can learn to make The Real Connection within their life Now and clear away all

the illusions that have been proposed to them. Anything is possible once people have the right education and guidance," she said.

This is great hearing her talk about The Trueness that lies beyond all description. At the very moment I was in, there was no considering anything, only Being Real Now. Everything she related to me became alive within me and a real part of my Being. I now knew so much more as a continuous realization was occurring. Not so much from the words, but all The Aliveness of The Real Light. She continued to share her great wealth of reality as I listened...

"You have now become full to what you can comprehend at this time. ALL Real Wisdom, is for those who are ready to have it and those that are not ready will resist The True Light Bringers, because they want Life to be as they decide and not as IT Really IS. The Space Gods hold the minds of people to where they are emotionally blind to what is really taking place. The agreement of the multitudes into a system of 'belief' that does not exist is for those who are not ready to realize What IS Real. I will see you again as we continue our journey through The Endlessness of The IS," she said.

She was there for a moment as she put her hand on my face and then went into all the light that surrounded her. It is a beautiful episode in my life that I will always remember. Without a hint, I found myself back on the beach and lying on the sand. It was dark out and the stars were very bright. As I looked across the ocean, the beautiful reflection of the moon and stars joyfully jumped around with the incoming surf. It was easy to see by the moonlight, and so I went back to Paul and Mary's house.

When I got to the house, everything was really dark. I knew they were already asleep and into the other worlds, so I decide to sleep outside and not disturb them. They had a table with benches in the front of the house under a type of wood cover that extended from their house that was covered with palm tree fronds. I grabbed some blankets that were hanging out to dry on the clothes line and laid them on the table. I wanted to be off of the ground and away from any little bugs and other things. I lay down and stared at the night sky. The stars were so bright that they looked like planets. It was a wondrous sight, along with the calm silence of the night. This is a great time for me and I loved every moment.

As I lay there and relaxed, I suddenly could sense something was around the area. There was a presence that all of a sudden became known to me that I was

not sure of. I laid there perfectly still and calm, and then sat up very slowly and looked around. At first I couldn't see anything. Then, there became a faintness of a figure about fifty feet from me. There stood what looked to be the outline of a man. He was standing very still and I was not getting any impressions from him. All that I could make out was his very subtle physical form. He stood as though he were watching me. I sat and watched to see if he would do something or say something. It was as though we were both watching what the other would do. After a while, he slowly walked toward me. As he walked toward me, I noticed that I could not hear any sound of him moving along the ground. He was soon right in front of me at the table. I still could not make out any features that he had, he was very dark, but then I did hear him talk in a very low voice, and he said to me...

"I know who you are and I know what you will be doing. I am here to make sure that you do not succeed. I am The Influence here, and this is one of my worlds. Mankind does not want you, they want me. I am here for them and they want what I have to offer. I provide for them and they keep me alive by wanting the things of this world. You are not welcome here, you and your friends. This is a world where desire rules and the strong destroy the weak. You can try and tell others, but I will tell them my own truth, and that is that I am all there is and you are the enemy. There have been others like you and they were eliminated also. Never think that you can succeed in my world, because I won't let you. History proves what I am telling you, Indian Boy. None can succeed here, because I rule the minds of all my believers. People want a future they cannot have and pray to me to continually have it. It is an endless cycle of birth and death that I control and you cannot interfere, because no one wants what you call Real Truth, they only want to be controlled and taken care of."

Then, he vanished right before me into the air. I was left there wondering about what just had taken place. All the years that I had traveled, even into the other worlds, I had not experienced anything like this form of creature. I decided to go to the inner and ask RT about what just took place. I fell asleep, and then found myself in an area that looked rather deserted. It was a gray type of area that had very little of anything, but dirt and desolation. The sky was all overcast with thick dark clouds. I didn't like the place at all. It was lonely, and I couldn't feel any life where I was at. I didn't want to be here, but I knew there was something I had to find out. I must have come here for a reason, I thought, as I walked around to try and make sense of something from this dead looking area.

Then, I heard a voice from behind me say, "Welcome to my world Indian Boy."
As I turned around, I saw the same dark figure that was beside me during the night.

"Who are you?" I asked.

The dark figure stood there for several moments without a word, and then spoke...

"I am you and I am everyone that wants something. I exist because you want me to. I am what makes up all that you see. When you want something , I am there to make sure you get it, and if you don't, I make sure that you keep desiring whatever it is you think you need. I am The Influence of Desire, and existing in all creation. Everyone wants me, because they want what isn't really there. Those who follow me get whatever they desire for as long as they want, or so they would think they do," he said, in a very calm voice.

I could see that the things he was talking about were really dead and not The True Reality That IS Life, The Light and Sound.

"What you are talking about are the things people want and chase in their lives that have no Real Value, but seem to make sense to those who only consider the earth to be all the life there is. I am only interested in The True Reality, The IS. Real Love and sacrifice have value, and the desire you present has none," I said, wanting to go from this place, but I felt as though I needed to hear this, because there is a part of me that will always take on the hardest lessons.

"You have so many great abilities that you don't even know of yet. I can show you how to master all things and be the ruler of anything you want. I am connected to everyone and they are connected to me. I provide all that is necessary, and there is nothing that you cannot have in my kingdom. Yes, it is true, where I live is a gloomy and dead looking place, and I must always stay in the shadows and not reveal myself, because then people would see me for who I am, and they would run from me instead of desiring what I provide. I do not want to disturb anyone or anything, because everything is working just fine for me. I have countless numbers of people that will not explore past what their mind and desires want, so I am very happy at how things already are. You have so much potential, more so than the majority of people who only want to live their earthly life, and then return again unconscious, not knowing they lived before. Join me, and I will give you whatever you want forever," he said.
I stood there and said nothing. I knew whatever he said was an illusion of something that did not exist, except as an illusion in the worlds of time and space. I was now realizing something I was waking up to. Here stood the unconscious creation known as, The Hidden God. I simply watched him and waited until he spoke again...

"When you present to the world what you know, I will be there in the shadows and always watching. I will be the hate that people will desire to rid themselves of you and what you are presenting, because they will only see what I want them to see, and that is you robbing them of their planned desires and the entire fulfillment they want to happen with their human bodies. Their hate for you will be the fear that I bring to them, so that they can enjoy their drama of affectionate disillusionment. My followers love their unstableness; it gives them a cause to stay lazy and unaware. I will be maneuvering those minds that cannot understand what you are presenting that want to put you somewhere to be forgotten. My people do not want to move from what they have known, and they will not give up their prejudices to know Real Truth, because there is no such thing as Real Truth. My job is easy, because there are so many who really want me, and to be right about what they know and do. They are the ones who are so convinced that their physical body is all there is, they will gladly die for the conviction of it. Look at the history of your world and all those who brought a little light into it, they were soon gotten rid of by their own kind, and then later written about in so many creative stories. I make sure the unforgettable drama continues throughout eternity."

"Were the writings what really happened in man's history, or was I just having fun? Who does know? Does it really matter? No, not at all! Most people do not want Real Truth, unless it suits them and is according to their way of thinking and deciding and what they feel is right. So, what they are really saying is they want their personal life to be satisfied with what I can provide, the desire for things that are always beyond their reach. Earth people do not want any change or expansion of their awareness, because that would mean they could lose what they have, in their minds that is. I decide the illusions of conviction when it comes to this world. Everyone here has already decided what they want and they have the right to have it, and I am here to make sure they get it. What you See, is the hidden side of all the 'fronts' I have influenced others to create. What you propose, you and your friends, is too unacceptable a task to complete. Mankind is lazy and stupid, that is why he would rather trick his neighbor out of what he has, or better yet, justifiably destroy him and just take it."
"I make sure that everyone is busy on the earth creating situations they will never get out of. Most people do not want to leave the earth and see what else Life has to offer, they want to stay glued to the ground and collect all kinds of stuff to show how successful they are. Power and money, along with the lure of obsession is what makes the world go round. It can never be love, because hate and desire are more powerful, and this is constantly demonstrated with all the corrupt souls who control the religious and political systems. They preach love, but they are always watching and waiting for others to be off guard so they can steal everything from them. The preachers and government agents write and proclaim the rules, regulations, and all the commandments they make, are for the good of all, so that when they totally imprison a person with them, it is actually for that person's own good, and then all their belongings go to the authorities. What a wonderful scam I have influenced so many to take part in."

"I am always there behind the scenes, working my way through the minds of those that are willing to hunt down the historical figures that mankind looks to. I am The Influence that made sure they were destroyed and then worshiped as dead figures. It was very easy for me to persuade the weak minds of the unaware, especially thousands of years ago, when the average person was so superstitious about everything. By me influencing the rulers of the church to condemn any form of recognition of what they were really doing, it gave a real cause for the political side to discourage anyone that was not in agreement with the authoritative order. Some people supposedly 'believe' that I do exist, but really they don't. They do not want to take a look inside of themselves and see me there; they would rather pretend they know their own mind, and they are safe in it. The truth is, they do not know their own mind, because I rule all minds. Then there are those who consider me to be their idea of the 'devil.' I was invented by mankind to accomplish what he is too weak to do, take control of his own soul, so I have what he will not do. The real devil is in the hearts of those that want it there. The devil is another invention of The Gods of Man. As long as people look to the authorities and skies for their salvation, I am in total control of their souls."

"Mankind only wants to believe what he wants, he only believes in desire and to have things that are of the earth. All serve my purpose and I do very well, and I must say, I am very pleased with myself. Your guide friends know me, but they let me be, because they know that I must exist here. I work in the first three levels, and none would believe who for. I will let you figure that one out for yourself. You can try and tell others that there is something beyond what they already know, but they will hate you and despise you for it, because they will
fear losing what they have, what I have provided for them. I know that you are strong and you will not surrender to me, but I will still influence others to destroy you. This is my world and you have no rights here," he said, as a huge boom of thunder rolled across the sky.

Then, he vanished and there was nothing but dust where he stood.

The sky became even darker, as it began to rain. The clouds began to react with lightning and thunder as it began to roar. I stood there for a moment and considered all that had taken place. Then, there was a section of the clouds that began to part. I could see the blue sky above as the sun came shining through. I could also see that there was someone standing on the clouds, it was RT. My heart suddenly soared and I knew that I could fly up to him, so I leaped from the ground and up I went. I flew through the rain and into the bright sunshine. We both flew high above the darkened area and out into a beautiful and wondrous sky. I felt free and refreshed after what I had been through. I was again in the light of the bright sun, and as I looked back down, I could see all the cloudiness finally melt away and disappear. We were both floating in the blueness of the sky.

"What was that all about?" I asked, rather weary from the experience.

Rebazar laughed and said, "You have now met The Dark Shadow, who rules in the three lower realms. He is not always as he appeared. He can appear as someone handsome or beautiful, and also entice the strongest person. He rules the good and bad side of all things and is the one in charge of keeping all souls in the lower awareness so that he can rule over their lives. The Great Reality has created all things for all of us to experience and as we become more aware, we are better able to choose our own direction. Mankind has created The Shadow Creature out of his distorted imagination. You needed to see The Dark Shadow, and become aware of how he operates, because you will have to constantly deal with him while you are in the lower realms. He is a good test for all who want to go beyond all goodness and evil. He has always existed, but you never really paid attention to him and what he has been doing. He moves through your awareness and uses different approaches to get to the outside world through you and others. You will get better at recognizing how he works through yourself and others and eventually you will overcome him all together."

"The Great Reality is building your strength so you can handle more of what you have to do in this life and the next. It is true, that there will be very few that will

listen to you, because there will be very few who are willing to gain the strength needed to succeed. I can only guide you to what has Real Value. You must make the choice of what your life is to be. Life is so much more than what is seen on the surface. Most of the world is under the control of The Dark Shadow that broods over it, even though most people consider themselves to be free thinkers. It is not my concern what others do or the choices they make, I can only present what else is possible and assist those who want to be free of their temporary lifetime cycles. I know the position that you are in, it is a difficult one, but you have the best guidance always. Do not be concerned about The Dark Side, just be aware that it exists and let it be. He has no real power of control; he only has what you allow him. He can also present himself as a woman if need be. Place your entire Being in The Real Light and Sound and your heart in The Great Reality," said RT, as he bowed, and then vanished into the blueness of the sky.

I slowly flew back to earth and soon found myself waking up with a stiff back from sleeping on the table. I felt something on my stomach and saw that it was the cat. I slowly sat up to see the sun coming up over the horizon in the east. The cat yawned and jumped down onto the ground and went into the house. I could hear Paul and Mary moving around inside the house as their rooster was sounding the beginning of a new day. I was thinking to myself, what an experience I just had. Now that I was more aware of The Dark Forces that occupy certain areas of Life, I was beginning to see why certain events went the way they did. I knew that it would take some time to consider what everything in my life was about according to the material side. I could See that what I had learned so far was so small compared to what I will be getting into as my life here continues.

Then, Paul came outside. "Buenos dias Senor Goldie. I see you found a new place to sleep," he said, and then he began to laugh. He was always in such a good mood, while I was always looking at what was behind the actions and meaning of things and events.

"Que paso Paul?" I said, giggling along with him and his remark.

"Today, we must work in the fields and pick some crops, Goldie," he said, as I was getting up to my feet and trying to feel okay.

"Sounds great Paul, I'm up to it," I said, as I went inside and saw Mary heating up the beans.
"Buenos dias Goldie. I have the beans ready so that you have mucho power to work today," she said, as she laughed and brought them over to the table.

The cat was already eating his meal as usual. "I had a long night, so I'll be napping while you're out picking," he said.

"You know kitty boy, someday you are going to be a human and I will be watching you from the heavens above, while you are on earth struggling," I said, just to see what he would say.

To that, he didn't say another word. I sat down as Mary served the beans and enjoyed the aroma.

"Mary, have you or Paul ever seen The Dark Shadow character?" I asked.

"Oh yes Goldie, we have. He is very clever and works his way into the hearts and minds of everyone.

"How do you avoid him?" I asked.

"In a way, you really can't while you are here, because you might say, he owns your body," she said.

What? I thought.

"How can that be?" I said, feeling a little out of sorts with everything at the moment.

"He is the negative nature that we must learn from while we are here, but that does not mean he is bad. He represents the dual nature of things, and is all part of what takes place in this material realm. It is no different than a young child learning from their parents and going to school. Of course it is a struggle at times, but eventually the child learns, understands, and then lives accordingly. All of us are simply adjusting to the whole of Life, as we are the many little parts in IT. Everything is okay, once we learn to adjust our sails to the wind that moves through Life. Most people think of him as the devil, but he is what makes up the material worlds, like the dirt we walk on here. He is that part that allows a distortion of The Real Awareness to take place, so there can be a comparison between light and darkness.
RT taught Paul and I about him a long time ago. He controls those people that want to control others, and he uses all kinds of attitudes in people to do so. You are still innocent about these things, but your time has come for you to learn more. All that is created in the lower sense is his place to be. He is what makes up the creation that people think is something else besides what it Really IS. When I was into my religion, I thought a certain way about how Life IS, but after all the years and lessons from The Real Guides, I have come to realize that you have to have The Real Knowledge to properly understand The Dark Side of creativity. But, do not misunderstand, there is a good side to creativity also, and that is what we are doing. All of us here are living according to what we are aware of as a Real Truth, and that is our True Being, and the position we have in Reality."

"The Influence promotes a false front to people and gets them to agree, and he is only being natural in his own way, because there are so many who want to be influenced, and so they are. It is all in the agreement, and then seems to produce a Real Experience, but it is not Real at all. Again, it takes a lot of studying The Real Knowledge, like you are writing, and especially Real Experience, like all of us are having. The promotion of 'written distortion' will not bring about Real Experience, as the masses have been taught for lifetimes. The belief systems are a good example. They promote all of their goodness for the public to view, but their main goal is to actually have as many people accept what they have decided and keep them in a position of servitude, instead of showing their followers how to become Self Sufficient. Their experience in the physical realm is Real, but as we journey into the greater levels, we soon experience what they have promoted is an illusion and does not exist beyond this world. The Influence, can only seduce a person if they let it, otherwise it can do nothing. Most people have very little or no Real Experience beyond what RT calls, 'the giant mud ball,' earth. So, it only stands to reason they will be influenced, more so than becoming more aware," she said.

"Well, I met him last night for the first time and he was scary. I first saw him outside while I was getting ready to sleep, and then I went to the other side and found myself in his world. He said he would stop me from doing what I was deciding to do, and that he would make sure that others were influenced to stop me," I said.

"Of course he will say all of that, Goldie. He wants everyone to be a slave to him and he wants you to agree, but don't be too concerned, he is only a test. All of us must learn about our own lower nature before we can progress to the higher
levels. The Dark Shadow, only exists within this world and the next two manmade heavens, the ones the religions look to with their 'decided gods,' but beyond that, the path is free to travel to The Real Universes," she said.

"I need more experience," I said. "I thought that I had a lot, but now that this has happened, I feel as though I don't know anything. I can see that it takes Real Courage to get through all of these lessons. No wonder most people want to stay with their beliefs and have someone else decide for them," I said.

Mary laughed and said, "He's just testing your ego to see how you will react. He's hoping that you will break down and submit to him, just like so many have. The idea is to just be aware of him and how he works, and then to let him be. The way not to react is don't do what the do-gooders do, and that is to go around and push your beliefs or experiences on others, telling them that your way is the only way. Just through the attitude of pushy persuasion, The Dark Side is making its way into your life. Most people who follow some sort of belief, do not realize that The Dark Side may control it, and is the same deity they are looking to save them. RT, has taught us that The True Reality is beyond all good and evil, it is The Real Life that we all want as The RealU, The Real Awareness. The Gods of Man are an idea that people have decided, so they seem Real to them, but they are a creation that The Influence has a reign over. The Great Reality is not a conception or a decision that one makes, IT IS a Pure and True Realness, of which none can imagine, but each must experience for themselves, as there is no other way."

"Our physical life is just a temporary place, until we learn what we have to, and then we can continue on into The Real Worlds. Most people will return to earth for more lifetimes even, though their belief tells them different. This is how The Dark Side controls others, and that is through their own ignorance. You will provide a way for the people to become more aware of what else is possible and the many levels beyond the manmade ones. How many will really listen and follow through? It matters not, because each person has Free Will, and it must be respected no matter what the next person chooses. So, we are the Lucky Ones, Goldie! The Real Guides are aware of who will take a risk and explore beyond their limited personal self, that is why they like you, because you will risk everything," she said.

At that moment, Paul came into the room and sat down.
"Goldie was telling me about his meeting The Diablo last night," said Mary to Paul, as he was gulping down his beans.

Paul began to laugh and then said, "Ah yes, the great trickster. He had us fooled for many years with worshiping the personalities and doctrines of the past, and the gods that most people think are Real. Mary and I were very sincere seekers of what was really true. We would discuss all the flaws in the doctrines we were studying and ask questions of the priests and those that belonged to the different faiths. They didn't like us questioning what they had worked hard to convince others with, 'blind faith.' It wasn't long before we were looked upon as worshipers of The Dark Side, because we were questioning all the things that didn't make sense in the written scriptures. We were not being disrespectful, we simply wanted to know more, we wanted to know The Real Truth, and no one was willing to tell us. We soon found out why, because they didn't know. Until we met RT, we didn't know anything about The Real Journeys that are possible. All of us here now know that it takes Real Experience to realize Real Truth, and not just something written to believe in, because they say so."

"Our friends and those who are attending the church, have decided to restrict themselves to what they read, and then are told what their god is like according to the personalities of the past and what is decided for them by those in authoritative control. We respect the beliefs of others and what they want in their lives, but we have the right to decide for ourselves. Our friends want to all think alike, and they are good people, but they are the ones that will inherit the earth. They are only reading about certain areas as a reference to a form of truth, and have not learned about The Real Universes, beyond their mental conceptions of their heavens."

"After a while, Mary and I realized that no one we knew had the answers to what we wanted. It wasn't too long after that that we both began to have Real Experiences in our Dream Visions, after meeting with your parents. It took us a little time to get used to having these new experiences, but we finally gave in and accepted them. You must realize that we had no one here to talk to. Your parents gave us the ideas to start with, but we had to figure out what things meant. We tried to tell our friends we thought we knew real well, but as soon as we started mentioning our dreams, they began to turn the other way when we would see them. After years of training with RT and his friends, Mary and I decided to just live our life and let everyone else be," said Paul, as he was eating his beans.
I sat silently and just enjoyed being with these two. I was getting a Real Educational Course.

"You are, The New One, Goldie. We already saw you in the other worlds while you were still young. We knew you would be coming and doing what you will to present to the world what you know. You will take what we are sharing and expand upon it," said Paul.

"But you two seem to know so much more than me," I said.

"It's not only the knowledge we are sharing, Goldie; it's really how you have come to be with ALL of Life. You will get all the knowledge you need from so many sources, but the main idea is who you are and what you are capable of. There is something coming in your future that staggers the imagination. The True Reality, what Rebazar refers to as, The Staff of Real Light, will be coming to earth, and will be working through you as you mature. Not everyone can handle and be aware of the position. RT has shown us so many things about you, that is why we love and care about you so much," said Paul.

"I don't always know what to say. There is so much that I am not aware of. It was hard for me to see myself, even in the light of all the experiences I have had. I often wondered how a man of The Light feels. I wasn't aware of what you have been telling me, Paul. I am now realizing that it has been more of the adventure for me, and I haven't been paying attention to all the rest of what there is," I said, feeling rather small and insignificant.

Paul and Mary began to laugh.

"Goldie, you are very special. Of course you can't see it all, but we will be here to remind you all the time," said Mary, and then they both laughed again.

Paul got up from the table and said, "Let's go amigo; we must tend to the food that is growing for our future."

We went outside into the beautiful day. After that little talk we had it was so nice to be outside. I know what I am doing, I thought to myself, I love the great outdoors and The Real Adventure of doing. That day, we worked in the fields until late afternoon. It was a good feeling to be a part of a family like these people. We worked all day in the hot sun, picking and planting. Paul and Mary,
had put a lot of hard work into their farm, and by doing so their harvest was wonderful. They had the best vegetables around. Some of the fishermen would come by and trade their fish for what Mary and Paul had too much of. The days passed, and after a while I began to miss my parents. I knew they weren't going to live on earth forever. It had been about two months since I left, so I decided to go and see them on the inner that evening. Before going to bed, Mary, Paul, and I, sat at the table after dinner talking.

"How old are you, Paul?" I asked.

"About forty-five or so," he said, and then he laughed along with Mary.

I couldn't help but laugh with them. "You are about the same age as my parents. Sometimes I wonder how long they will be around," I said.

"They have a ways to go, because they want to see you publish that book of yours," he said.

"It is exciting thinking about it, but doing it is another thing. I can't help but think about what The Dark Man told me, and how he would try and stop me. What do you two think?" I asked.

Mary put her hand on my shoulder and said, "Whatever you will need to succeed will come your way. He is only part of the test. Besides, he can't outsmart The Real Guides, they know everything," she said.

"I feel like I am always starting over, even with all that I know," I said.

"We understand," said Mary. "I know exactly what you need, and that is a woman in your life to create some real issues, so you won't think about yourself so much."

Then, she really laughed with Paul. "You will have to meet my daughters, Goldie. They were so young when you were here with your parents, but now they are a lot bigger and feistier," she said, as she was laughing about the hardest I had ever seen her.

"Oh yes, Senor Goldie, they will love you and knock some sense into you," said Paul, as he began to laugh as well.
"Well, it all sounds good, I guess. Do they ever come home for a visit?" I asked. "Very rarely," said Mary. "They are both what you would term as 'career girls.' One is a school teacher in the big town that is about a half a day's ride from here and the other one works in the General Store, which I told you before and you must have forgotten. They may come by while you are here, but who knows. I check up on them on the inner sometimes, but they are usually very busy there too."

I had no real concern to meet them, but it would be fun to see them again. I had no experience with women yet, so I didn't know what to think about them.

"Are we picking tomorrow, Paul?" I asked.

"Tomorrow, I will be sleeping late and doing little things all day. We already have plenty to eat for weeks, so we can take it easy for now, besides you have to write," he said, smiling at me.

"I'm going to turn in and take a trip to see my parents tonight, I'll let you know what happens, so I will see you two tomorrow," I said, as I went to my room.

I paced back and forth for a while, looking over everything that Mary and Paul had told me. So much of it is what RT has been teaching me, but now it was starting to sink in even more. Suddenly, I stopped pacing and began to realize the reason for meeting The Dark Side. Could it be that it was motivating me to pay attention to what I was learning and look it all of it more seriously? I was truly taking a look a lot of things differently now. It was as though I was more motivated to pay attention to the details of everything that was going on. I really did like my new view and understanding. I spread myself out on the bed for a while, thinking about all that had happened in the last few days. I suddenly felt older, not wiser just older. I began to realize how quickly our lives go here. I was already twenty four, but I felt as though I had lived several lifetimes already. Then, I looked over the history of the earth and all the people that had come before me. It has been millions of lifetimes for me and others and we are still here trying to figure out our position. I began to realize how amazing the reality of this very moment is. All that has ever taken place and all that ever will take place are in this very moment, Right Now.

What does all of this mean? I had no real plan as to what to do when I did finished the book; everything seemed so up in the air. Here I was, the man that knew so much, but what did I really know? I know that Life knows, and I am
always learning. As I was half asleep, I kept going over in my mind the experience with The Dark Man. I was slowly beginning to understand why he was here and what his function is. RT gave me some lessons about the lesser reality that forms all the material worlds, but at the time, I didn't understand, so I forgot about it. From what I know now, I have a better view of it and how it works. Looking over so many things that have been created on the earth and all the ideas there are, I can see some of the ways that this dark nature works. He is very subtle, and it's plain to see that most people do not recognize even a small amount of what is taking place.

I finally fell asleep and went to my parents' house in the other worlds. Suddenly, I was walking up the road to their house. On the other side everything looked a lot better. The trees were a lot greener and the ground looked to be very rich with multicolored soil. I came up to them as they were working around their house. Mom saw me first, and ran up to me and gave me a big hug. Then, Dad came over and held me for a moment.

"Goldie, we are so glad to see you. How are you?" mom asked.

"I'm great Mom," I said. "I wanted to see you two. I really miss the both of you."

"Come and sit with us, son. Look, we have a new outdoor table," said mom, as she put her arm around me.

All of us walked over and sat down.

"How is everything son? Are you still writing?" asked Dad.

"Everything is fine, and yes I am writing almost every day. Life is giving me the lessons I need to continue to realize what I have been going through. I have gone through so much since I saw you last. The biggest surprise is my meeting with The Dark Side of Life. That experience has put something in me that I cannot as yet figure out altogether," I said, looking at them and being so happy to be here.

Both of them looked at me, and then Dad spoke...

"We know what you are going through, son. We have had our own confrontations with it ourselves. Both of us have had many lessons from RT and The Real Guides over the years, about the darkness that rules the lower realms.

We knew that the time would come for you to know, and so we let things alone until you were ready," he said.

"I don't think that I am ready, but it did happen. It has been an eye opener for me. I now look at things differently, so much more so than I have before. I know that I will move past all of it, but I can also see that it has broken many of my own illusions. I have a greater compassion for those people who are unaware of what they are 'believing' and who they are following," I said.

"Don't be too concerned for those that want to stay with what they believe ; they will have the opportunity in some future lifetime and for now, they are where they need to be at. It's simply part of your testing to become what Life has waiting for you, son," said mom.

"I know that now, but it is still hard for me to accept. Even though this dark creature threatened me, I will still pursue what I must," I said.

"Of course you will, you are heading in the right direction, Goldie. RT has said that you are going through what you have to and you will be fine. He said that it will be hard at times, but you will make it through. We are now in The Big School of Learning, and have come through a lot of the lesser lessons," said mom.

"I know that all will be well with everything. I have a hard time seeing it for myself sometimes, and I won't give up," I said.

"We are going to come and visit you on the earth very soon. How are Paul and Mary?" asked mom.

"They are great, I really like being with them. They are wonderful people and I am so glad to know them. They said, they miss the both of you. I have learned so much from them. They are very wise and just like you; they have a lot of Real Experience. I think it's time to go, so please come and see me when you can," I said.

"We will son, see you soon," they said.

After giving them both a hug, I stood up and walked off and then found myself back in my room. It was still dark out, so I decided to get up and take a walk outside, because the house was rather hot. The cat was nowhere to be found, I think he was out prowling. I went quietly out the front door and into the front

area. It was still warm outside also, so I went down toward the ocean. As I was walking down to the shoreline, I saw a figure standing by the water's edge. It was The Dark Creature again. I stopped abruptly, but then decided to continue on. I came within about ten feet of him and then stopped. He just stood there and said nothing for the longest time, and then spoke

"Have you decided to see things my way, Goldie?"

I was a little taken by what he was asking, and then I replied, "I know who you are and I know what you are doing. You have the population of the world fooled with all the labels that your unaware slaves have invented, but I am not interested. You have nothing I want. Actually, there is nothing I want anyhow. I am only here to serve The True Reality, and then I will be a memory like so many before me. You have all the people of the world to fool, why would you even bother with someone like me?" I asked.

He began to make a hideous laughter that was very loud, as though he could have waken the dead.

"You fool, you are the prize of all time, and you do not even see it yourself. I am The Influence of the god that rules the lower realms, and I will be granted a great favor if I bring you to him," he said, in his contemptuous mannerism and voice.

It took me a moment to consider what he had said, but then I replied..."I will meet your god, but on my own terms, and when I feel the need. You are nothing but a rat from the gutter that leaches after the ignorant. Your reward will be your doom when your cycle ends," I said, as he stood there and said nothing.

I could see his red eyes as he looked at me with his evil glare, so I decided to tell him off to see what he would do.

"Oh yes, I know how you have come to be. You're the accumulation of all the disgust that has been created over time, but the day will come when you will exist no more, and your god will be a slithering memory just like you," I said, feeling rather strong.

He looked at me for a moment, and then turned. Then, he raised his hands over his head and the ocean began to change and move about. The waves became very big, and they were going every which way, it was suddenly all chaos. Then,
dark clouds began to cover the stars and moon as lightning appeared in the sky. The thunder was extremely loud, as it roared and clashed with the ominous scene that was taking place in front of me. I stood there as though I were in a startling dream. It was a real scene to behold. My physical body and emotions were experiencing everything that was taking place. I was amazed at his ability to do whatever he wanted to.

"You see, I can do anything," he said, in his mocking voice.

Then, a bolt of lightning struck the sand right next to me and left a big hole in the ground with the sizzling sound from the rushing water over it. For a moment I was startled, but I stood my ground. Then, another one came even closer and threw sand all over my legs.

"The next one will slit you into a thousand pieces, if you do not surrender to me and my will immediately, Indian boy," he said, in a loud shouting rage with his arms moving about.

I stood my ground, and put all my attention on The Great Reality and RT. I waited to see what would happen, but then everything calmed down as he started lowering his hands. The clouds quickly went away and the sky was clear again and the sea was very still. The Dark Man put his arms down, and then suddenly appeared as Rebazar. He walked over to me and put his hand on my shoulder, and then began to laugh as he said...

"You passed the test Indian boy, you did great."

I wasn't sure for a moment what was happening, I just went with it.

Then I said, "What about the other night and the experience with The Dark Shadow?" I asked.

He was still laughing and then said, "Oh that was the real bad hombre all right. You met The Real Dark Shadow in that experience."

I had to sit down, I was worn out. Actually, I lay down on the sand and wanted to sleep.

"Will I make it through this life, RT?" I asked, feeling strange.
He laughed again, as I was lying on the sand feeling like a patient of some kind. "Of course you will, you have a great strength. There will be times when things seem to be so overbearing, but that is when you will realize the greater truths that Life has for you. Not everyone is willing to sacrifice like you, so you will be fine," he said.

It was still hard for me to see myself as usual, but I would just keep going anyhow. I did fall asleep on the sand with me being aware that I did. It was soon morning and the tide was real high, and suddenly I was part of it. A big wave hit the shore and drenched me. I got up very quickly and went back up to the house. I was still tired from everything that took place. Mary and Paul were up, and doing their chores as I walked up.

The cat was there also and said, "Look what the cat drug in."

I had to laugh, because his dry humor is right on most of the time.

"You've been swimming at night, Goldie?" said Paul, as he and Mary giggled while I went inside to dry off.

I decided to lie down for a while and then write. There were so many things that ,e about The Dark Side, and I wanted to write about them. He said that someday he would take me on a Real Journey to the different levels to meet the imposters that so many people consider to be The True Reality. RT told me that just like on earth, where people portray to be something they are not, the same holds true with the first three levels. The earth appears to be the reality that Life is, but it's not, it's only a world that simulates what Reality IS. The earth is just a place in time and space where we learn more about ourselves and was created for the purpose of a training school. Souls get lost in the material Maya and animatedness of the body worlds.

I wrote all day long, and took little siestas off and on when I got tired. It was soon evening again and I began to feel so much better. It had been another hot day, and I would have passed out if I would have gone outside. It was dinner time and all of us met in the kitchen area and sat together.

"Senor Goldie, are you feeling alright today?" asked Mary, looking at me rather sympathetic like.

"I'm okay Mary, I just needed to rest from all that has happened lately. I am
beginning to understand as my life progresses that things change and are not always for the better. It seems to be part of the journey to strengthen myself for what is to come. Thank you for asking, but I know I will adjust as I realize my purpose for everything," I said.

"You have a big job to do, Goldie, and The Real Guides want you to be capable. When you go out into the world there will be so much resistance toward what you will be presenting. Some people will feel threatened by what you know. Everyone is so convinced about themselves and their life, they will not want to hear what you have to say, but that is the challenge and a part of your life. Mary and I went through it with our friends and the religion we used to belong to. I like the people that we know, and respect the process they are going through, but it is really them that have made the choice to close their eyes and stuff their ears. Most people always think there is something wrong with the person that is trying to provide a better insight into the unknown areas Life IS, but they never see themselves as the ignorant one. Just take it easy for a few days and write your book," said Paul.

I went to bed early and thought about, Shiss Harah U. I had left her rather suddenly the last time I saw her. My body fell asleep and I found myself walking along a white road that led up to a mountain trail and wound its way up the side of the mountain. It was a feeling of relief to follow it upward to the top. I know I could have flown, but I liked the walk and the scenery. When I reached the top, I could see everywhere. There was a great and wonderful ocean spread all around, with islands scattered all about that filled the scenery. I could see huge white birds in flocks with very large wingspans that sailed by. They were completely white all over and very large. They looked like Pelicans, only bigger. I also saw large green areas with rolling hills with a few animals that didn't look familiar. As I was looking at all the intense scenery, I saw a movement in the water a ways off shore. Once again, I saw something come to the surface and wave to me. I watched very closely as this person continued to wave, then dove under water, as I saw a fish-like tail follow them, as they disappeared.

In the far distance, I could see a type of city with huge structures that seemed to have a slight glow to them. They were huge dwellings that I had never seen before. It seemed as though I was in the future again. I felt very safe and healed in this new area. I needed a place like this to be. The top of the mountain had plenty of room to walk around on it. It was like a lookout that someone had carved out and made perfectly for this spot. I sat on a rock that looked almost like a chair and watched the birds as they flew by. Just to watch them sail on the
wind was a pleasure all its own. They were so effortless and smooth. The sun reflected itself in the pure blue waters of the sea, a sight I always liked to be near and feel the light all over myself. I felt fortunate to be able to have this experience and just be what I really am.

I know it is hard for most people to accept anything but the earth, but that is their choice. The sun above, the sky all around, and the sea with its sound of the waves and fresh scent, this is what I See as a Real Life for me. The sun continuously shines, as the sky never has an end, and the sea goes on forever, as there will always be the Sound of Life wherever I am. All of this is so Perfect and Pure.

As I was staring into the lighted reflection of the water, I heard a beautiful voice say, "Goldie, I am here for you."

I knew it was Shiss, without even turning around. I waited to look until she came over. She was laughing as she walked up and put her arm around my shoulder and then kissed my face. I laughed, because I felt a little shy about the whole scene.

"You are beyond the world of elements and into the Worlds of Being," she said with her sweet voice. "You are healing yourself from the drossiness of the dirt world."

I had to smile at how she put the words together. "I am not familiar with some of the things that you say. I am a simple man that has learned from parents who are Indians," I said.

She giggled and hugged me. "You are wiser than everything and you will soon prove it to yourself," she said as she walked around and did a few little twirls like little girls do when they are playing.

"You are the freedom that mankind has been looking for. You will teach what very few could never even dream of. Your life will not be easy or plain, but your Worlds of Being will always be unique. I am always with you even when you don't consider me, but The RealU is always intently in The True Reality, and there I am also with you," she said, as she strolled around.
I had no words for what was taking place. I was glad to be here and away from the darkness that I had experienced. I got up from the rock and lay on the ground and stared up at the sky.

"Are you going to leave me again, Goldie?" she asked.

I started laughing while I was lying on my back. "Okay you're right," I said, as I got up and went over to her. "May I have this dance young miss?"

She put her arms around me and we held each other and moved about slowly. I could suddenly hear music that came from somewhere out of the ethers.

"I can make any type of music that I want to. I will teach you how it is done, and then you can make your own music," she said, as we continued for what seemed to be the longest time.

"You see Goldie, you are a dancer and you didn't even know it. Here we are free to be whatever we want to be. We can laugh and love, and there are no influences to bother us. We are beyond time and space and all the ignorance of the human worlds. I love being with you Goldie," she said, with her sweet face and girlish charm.

"I amaze myself Shiss, I feel so good here and I can sense the rhythm of being with you as it all feels so right. This is really being in love with Life. Everything is so perfect here with you, thank you for coming to me," I said, as I held her to me.

"We are having the dance of our lives and we shall do so forever. This is just the beginning. This place is wonderful, but you will experience the greatest Worlds of Light beyond the psychic realms," she said, as we continued to waltz as though we were floating.

The music she was making was so pure and healing. I was very aware of all The Realness that was taking place.

"I am feeling so much better now. I really need all these breaks from the earth. It is hard to comprehend how many lifetimes I have been in the darkness and finally Seeing what I have been through," I said.

"Yes, you do need time for you. When I was on earth with you it was the same
way, only worse. Now that I have been in The Real Universes for such a long time, I am used to the most wonderful position of Being. Your duty to Life comes first, so you must do what you have to do and play your part. It will all be a passing dream that will eventually lead to a Real Life. In The Real Universes the lower levels are a speck of dust, so keep your spirit going and always See me, the one who loves you," she said, as she kissed me.

We danced and danced, and then I suddenly woke up in my bed still hearing the music in my head. Sometimes, when I wake up from the other worlds I wonder if I was really there. I was all of a sudden back and stretched out on the bed. I lay motionless for the longest time looking over what took place with Shiss. I felt so alone being back in my body, it was a strange feeling being here. It took me a few minutes to get up, and then I didn't feel like doing too much. I was still feeling restricted by the dark experiences I had. I knew that it was so, because I never used to feel this way. I had to confront myself and get through all of this so that I could continue on with my life the way I wanted to. Instead of writing today, I decided to go and work out in the fields with Paul and Mary. I went into the other room and sat down with both of them.

The cat was already there and looked at me as I came into the room. "Que paso," he said with a little accent to his voice.

I just looked at him and giggled.

"Buenos dias Goldie," said Paul. "Have some beans to empower you today," he said, as Mary and he both laughed.

I began to laugh too. "Both of you are great," I said. "I am always so glad to know you. I have to get away from myself in some way, so I want to work in the fields today."

"It's going to be hot again youngster," said Paul, as he ate his beans and rice.

"I know, but it will be good for me to do something and then be real tired. Maybe I can knock what's in me out and be done with it," I said, hoping that it would be so.

We worked in the fields all day until the sun finally decided to give up the heat and cool down a little. As an Indian, I could take the heat and so could Paul and

Mary, they were real tough. That evening we all sat around and talked and laughed about how hot it was. I felt a lot better, because the day had made such an impression on me that I forgot all about what I had gone through. I now really appreciated my time with Shiss, I thought about her all day long. Our relationship was different from the ones on earth, similar but different.

In The Real Worlds of Being, there is a much better relationship than the physical part that happens on earth, each person is unique and they live in an Illuminated Reality, if they have the awareness to do so. We ate and talked for a while and then went to bed rather early. I didn't realize how tired I was. I wanted to write a little bit, but I fell right to sleep. I woke up on the inner and found myself sitting on the sand and watching the waves roll in. Then, I looked to right and there was Shiss sitting there. I had to laugh and then so did she.

"It is so nice to just let go and realize there is nothing to pursue. The inner turmoil that you go through is your considering that you have to resolve things as they come into your life. Just let them be and live your life and fill yourself with the love that is everything. You have already made your choice about your destination and you know what it is. It is there for you, within yourself, so enjoy the process," she said, while smiling at me with her hand on mine.

"I know that I am too hard on myself, Shiss. There is a part of me that wants to constantly grab at Life. I don't as yet understand it, but I am wanting to," I said, looking out at the lovely view of the water.

"Just enjoy what you are going through and the things that come with them, then all will pass and you will become your dream, an Illuminated Being without any concern for the limitations that are to be found in Life," she said so sweetly.

"I so enjoy you teaching me, it helps me to center on what is important. You are The Angel of Healing for me, Miss Shiss. RT has taught me so much, but you have brought me so much more than I could ever have imagined. I think about you all the time and how you are. You have filled my life with such a joy that nothing else seems to matter. I know what I must do, and knowing that you are with me is such a great strength to go on into whatever is to occur," I said.

We sat and watched the waves roll onto the shore. Within myself I was constantly sorting out the things I didn't want as a part of my life. I soon found myself on the floor in the house and feeling the aches of the body as I woke up from being with Shiss.
Paul and Mary were just getting up.

"Good morning, you two," I said. "I think I may start sleeping on the bed and stop being the Indian. My body is feeling the pain. Actually, I remember that I did start off on the bed, but ended up on the floor."

They both laughed, and said the bed was the best idea ever invented. I had to laugh at how they said what they did. I began to realize they were right. All of us met in the other room and sat down and rested from just getting up and moving to the next room. We giggled as we looked at each other, because we knew what we were all thinking.

"Rice and beans again, Mary?" said Paul in a funny voice, and we all laughed and laughed until they were ready.

"Are we working outside today, Paul?" I asked.

"You can help me do a few things, Goldie," he said, as we finished and went outside for most of the day.

In the late afternoon, we came in and sat with Mary while she made us a bite and something to drink.

Just as we were finishing, we heard some horses ride up. "Who do you think that is, Mary?" asked Paul, as he had a big grin on his face.

"You know what, I'll bet you're right," she said, as they both hurried from their chairs and went outside.

I immediately got up and followed them.

"Rosa and Sonya," said Mary. "I knew it was you two." She went over to them and helped them off their horses.

"Dad, mom, we are so glad to see you," said Rosa, as Sonya didn't say a word as she calmly got off her horse and was bent over.
"Mama, Sonya is very sick. She needs to rest until she gets better; that is why we came to you. She wanted to be here," said Rosa.

Everyone went inside, as Rosa and Mary took Sonya to her bedroom. "Mama, who is that man in our house?" asked Rosa.

"That is Goldie. He has been here for a while now to write his book," said Mary. "That's Goldie? He's a beautiful man now isn't he mama?" she said.

"Oh yes, more than you know, Rosa," said Mary.

Sonya didn't say a word, but went right to sleep. Then, Mary and Rosa came back into the front room. Rosa came up to me as he was standing with Paul.

"Goldie, I didn't know that was you, it's been so many years since I saw you. You are a big boy now," said Rosa, and then gave me a hug and then turned to Paul.

"Dad, it is so good to see you," and gave him a hug and a kiss.

"Let's all sit at the table and I will make everyone something to drink," said Mary. All of us gathered around and sat down.

"Tell us what's wrong with Sonya, Rosa," said Paul.

"I'm not sure, dad, but a few of the children in her class came down with the same symptoms. Two days ago, she was feeling bad and she thought that it would go away, so she didn't want to bother you, but this morning it was worse and she asked me to bring her here. The town doctor looked at her, but he has no idea what she has. He suggested she rest and see what happens," said Rosa.

"Mary and I will find out tonight, we will go and see RT and ask him," said Paul, as Rosa immediately interrupted.

"Dad, she needs a real doctor not one of your fantasies," said Rosa, with a bit of emotional strain in her voice.
I sat there and was amazed at what I was hearing. With all the experiences Paul and Mary have had, I would have thought that their daughters would have learned from them. I decided to keep quiet and let their family situation handle itself.

"Rosa, someday you will wake up to what's happening within yourself and find there is so much more to you than what any doctor knows," said Mary.

"Okay Mom, I know you and dad get a little strange at night, I can see that, so I won't interfere with what you decide," said Rosa.

I had to laugh at what she said and as I did, I couldn't help but laugh out loud. "Stop that Goldie, you're being silly," said Mary, as she was giggling also.

I had to say something and I did. "What strange things do you two do anyhow?" I asked, trying to hold back from busting out loud.

Paul and Mary looked at me with a funny look on their face and then began to laugh out loud.

"Yes Mary, what are the strange things we have been doing lately?" asked Paul.

"I'll tell you what we did strange; we raised a daughter who can't find herself yet," said Mary, and all of us began to laugh, even Rosa.

"Here's something to drink," said Mary as she served everyone, and then sat down with us.

"Sonya will be fine, she probably needs a rest from the big city life you girls have been living," she said, and smiled at Rosa, then hugged her.

"You're probably right Mama, I think I need a rest from the city life myself. It's so nice and peaceful out here. I deal with so many people every day and some of them are so picky and snooty, because I am a Mexican," said Rosa.

"A beautiful Mexican American, Rosa," I said, and then she began to blush a little.
There was a silence for a few moments, and then everyone loosened up again.

"You better watch what you say, Goldie, or you'll have to deal with her," said Mary, and everyone started laughing as I sat there smiling.

She was right. I should just say nothing and be uninterested for my own survival. "Rosa, what about the school, who will be teaching?" asked Paul.

"I don't know, dad, but I would think there would be someone who would take over. I didn't think about asking anyone, I was only concerned for Sonya," said Rosa.

"Well Goldie, this could be the position that you're looking for. Why don't you ride into town and see if you can get the position?" asked Paul, with a smile on his face, as Mary nodded her head several times in agreement.

"Are you a teacher now, Goldie?" asked Rosa.

"I was thinking that it would be a good idea for what I will be doing in the future," I said.

"Mr. And Mrs. Hastings might consider you, because as far as I know, there is no one else. I will help you out with what I can, but I would suggest that you tell them you have some kind of experience, otherwise they would probably say no, because they are rather particular," said Rosa, as she looked me over.

"I will see what I can come up with by morning for something to tell them. This sounds great and I will be ready in the morning. I will sleep outside tonight, because the house is so full. All of you have a lot to talk about, so I will say goodnight," I said.

It was already getting late, so I excused myself and went outside. I sat in the hammock for a while thinking about tomorrow and what I was going to tell the townspeople. I did teach the men about scouting and how to talk to animals, but I don't think the townspeople would understand the connection to what I did and for teaching children. Suddenly, Life was bringing a new adventure for me, a new challenge. I knew I was ready for it; I just had to figure it out. I took my time and thought over as many details as I could about all the possibilities of how I would teach children.
As I went to sleep, I kept thinking about talking with those in charge of the school. I fell asleep and found myself at the foot of the mountain again. This time, I flew to the top and sat there and thought about teaching, and how I would proceed once I had the position. As I was sitting there and looking out over the water, I happened to notice a bright star in the blue sky that was far out over the horizon above the sea. It was becoming brighter, and then I realized that it was coming closer to me. I had an impression that it was Shiss. I would soon find out, because it was almost here. As it was right in front of me I could see that it was her. She gently floated down to where I was and became a glowing person, and then she came over and hugged me.

"Hello Goldie, I can see that you have visitors," she said with a smile on her face.

"Mary and Paul's daughters, they are at the house for a while," I said.

"Here is your chance to start what you wanted. You see how Life IS, you already know what you want and you are willing to provide something of Real Value in exchange, you might say. This has been the reason for all your training. The Real Guides have taught many down through the ages, but not all those who were taught The True Way, have followed through with providing a Real Benefit for others. There have been those who have misused what they have learned, and distorted the real meaning of what The Real Guides are trying to provide for all. Your heart is in a good place, the center of light and love. You have so much to give and learn, and it is your intent and perseverance that will help you succeed, because you will not give up. You will meet so many along the road of Life, that will try and influence you, and at times you will veer a little, but your heart and Being will always be in The Real, because of your Real Intent," she said.

"What about what Sonya is going through right now, will she be alright?" I asked.

"The illness that Sonya has is a lesson for her that was brought on by her. She will be fine; she just has to rest for a while. She was raised with her parents in the simple life, and then went to the big city to explore and learn about herself, so that she can eventually discover her own Beingness. Each time any of us takes the next step into the unknown there is so much more to realize and adjust to. Her illness has provided an opportunity for you to move forward into more possibilities that will expose themselves to you. It is always your choice to
do so, because there are very few who will travel the road you are on. This is where you are coming into her life and she into yours. She is a very special connection for you to progress even further, so be patient and watch closely what takes place," she said.

I sat and listened very patiently to Shiss. It was a wonderful experience to hear her voice as she presented the wealth of knowledge from her very Being.

"Life is so wonderful from this position, Shiss. I can see the definite limitations with the written word. All of this becomes so much more Real when it is told to me verbally by you and RT, and even my family about The True Reality. I do so appreciate what you are doing, because it helps me to see more clearly what I want to provide and how I will set out to do it. I know that writing and having people read what I have written is just the first step, and I will continue to learn and present what I know to be True and Real, and so much better as I go along and learn more. Getting people to look within themselves for Real Truth will be the interesting adventure," I said.

"The real wonder of you Goldie is how you hold your heart above everything else. You are willing to give of yourself to provide a way for others to experience themselves. I will always be with you no matter where you are. You are doing very well, just live your life and be. It is time for you to go back and discover your new life," she said, as she put her hands on my face ever so gently and then kissed me.

She began to glow, and then lifted herself up in the air and sailed off toward the sun until she became the light that shined upon all. I stood there for a moment or so and just stared at the great light that was in the sky. I knew that someday I would know and have the wonderful Beingness that Life IS.

# SCENE FIVE

I woke up to the sound of Paul's rooster. The sun was just coming up, and I was all alone outside watching the stars in the sky fade into the morning light. As I began to move the body, I could feel the aches beginning to occur. When I'm gone, the body sleeps very well, so well that it never moves and I am left with a stiffness that I have to get through. I eased my way up and rather hobbled over to the house. I kept thinking that I was still young, but I felt like I was aging real fast. No one was up yet, so I went to see my horse. He seemed to be doing fine, as he started talking to me...

"Where have you been while I've been here chewing most of the time?" He said, as I began to laugh, even though it hurt to do so.

"I've been busy doing all sorts of funny things. Actually, I can't even believe what I have been through. When was the last time I saw you anyhow?" I asked, as he looked at me with those big horsy eyes.

"I figure it's been about a year," he said, as he let out one of those horse laughs that you sometimes hear these animals do.

I had to laugh with him, because he was a jokester. "Okay, do you want to go down by the ocean and run on the beach?" I asked.

"That would be nice, can we go right now?" he asked. I grabbed his reins and said, "Let's go, horsy."

He seemed to be all excited as I walked him down the bluff to the sand. It was a clear morning with a soft warm breeze from off of the land. This was a great place to be. I went over with him all the things Shiss had said. I knew that I had to write them down before the day got going or I would forget so much of it. I let my horse run for a bit and then I rode him back up the bluff and to the house again. I put him with the new horses that Rosa and Sonya rode in on.

"Have you introduced yourself to your new horsy friends yet?" I asked him. "They are both girls and I'm a little shy," said my horse.

I couldn't help but laugh out loud, because after all that we had been through, I
finally discover that my horse is shy. I walked back over to the house, and as I got near the front door I could tell that everyone was up, so I walked in and said hello.

"Buenos dias Goldie," said Paul, as he was just getting up.

Mary was already fixing something for everybody. "Come and sit Goldie, I am fixing something for you," said Mary.

Rosa soon came out and sat with us. "Hello Goldie, good to see you," she said. "Hello Rosa, how is Sonya?" I asked.

"She is very sick. It will be quite a while before she can go back to her school," said Mary.

I wanted to hear what Rosa had to say about the situation as it is. "Let's talk about someone to take her place at the school," I said.

"I told Rosa last night, Goldie, about you teaching the school. Rosa knows some of the people that help run the school, and she said she would introduce you to them," said Mary.

"That would be great. When do you think we could go Rosa?" I asked.

"We could leave tomorrow if you like. I wanted to stay for another day with Sonya, and then I have to get back to my job at the store. We can ride into town together and talk with Mr. and Mrs. Hastings, who are in charge of all the affairs of the school. They are very nice and they may consider you, because they really do not have anyone who will teach. The money they pay is very small, and so most people will not do the job. You can also live at the school house. There is a nice room there that has everything. Even though they do not pay much, they do provide meals that are donated from a local cafe, and you can get certain free supplies from the general store where I work. There are also people in the community that donate to the person teaching the school. They know the pay is very small. Sonya wants to start her career at this first little school, and then work her way up into a university someday, because she loves teaching," said Rosa.
"This is great! I'm not too concerned about the money. I want the experience so that I can share what I know with others. Do they have books there as references so that I know what to teach?" I asked.

"Oh yes, they have lots of books, a whole library full of them. And if you need more, there are many people in the town who have books they will donate. Sonya was able to get books on any subject she wanted, and there are so many people that helped her," she said.

"This all sounds really good," I said, as I was getting excited about the whole idea.

I sat and thought about what it would be like teaching and how I would go about it as the three of them talked. As usual, I was in my own world considering what was to come next in my life. I had an idea of what to do and I knew that it would work out. I knew that I couldn't just come out and tell about what I am experiencing all the time, I had to be more creative in my approach. After presenting some of the simple truths that I have learned and seeing the reaction that people have, I knew I had to tone down my presentation.

I wrote most of the day, while the women stayed around the house for Sonya. Paul came in and out while he was doing his duties around the house outside. I wanted to write down what I had realized from my experiences with Shiss. After I put down what I remembered, I made a general outline of what I would teach and what my approach would be to the children. I knew children were more flexible than the adults, and they may have some experiences they would like to share. I would have to wait and see if I even got the job. It was soon evening and all of us sat together, except for Sonya, she was not able to get up. We had fish, which the cat loved, for dinner and listened to some of Rosa's stories about her life in the big town, which she called the city. After dinner, I went outside and sat in the hammock to let my dinner settle. Rosa came out and sat beside me in a chair.

"Goldie, why is it that you want to teach?" she asked.

"I want to share the knowledge I have experienced and come to know with others," I said.

"You are not talking about what my parents are trying to tell me about my dreams are you?" She said, looking at me for the answer.
"What your parents know is unique and very few will understand what takes place within themselves, but you are right, what I want to teach about is The Reality that takes place within each of us," I said.

"You know that almost no one accepts the imaginings of the mind to be anything but silly stuff, especially those who are religious. Everything to them, besides their own doctrine, is devil worshiping. I have met some really strange religious people who are so convinced about their written material, that they would gladly get rid of any opposition to their beliefs. I am not at all religious, for me it's very easy to see right through the fallacy of today's religions, because I made a real study of them when mom and dad were involved. I even pointed out things that they never thought of, and finally they left their religion. Most people who follow a belief usually do not investigate the real history of those beliefs. They only accept what they are told on a social level to be accepted as a person of their community. Religion is sometimes just a social status where people want to belong. I like the idea of the individual identity with their reality, as my parents call it, that's the way I see things in my life. Each one of us has our own ideas about living, and that's what I do," she said.

"You are very wise, Rosa," I said. "I like hearing what you have to say about your life."

She smiled and said, "At some point in my life my parents started telling me about their dreams and the people they were meeting in them. Well, I was not interested. There was something within me that could not identify with what they were telling me," she said.

"When you are ready, you will know all you have to, and then it will all be clear to you," I said, in a kind voice.

Then, Rosa said goodnight and went inside. I could tell that she was very determined to be how she is, which was more than fine with me. For me, it was another great night to be out amongst the stars and the night air. I was now experiencing what I could see coming, and that is people already making up their minds without any Real Experience through their own investigating.
In a way, it is all rather humorous. All of us have The Real Connection to Life, but we tend to block it by deciding something different. It is plain to see that the educational systems do not teach anything about The True Reality, but only an outer relationship with our temporary physical life. No wonder most people are so confused, stubborn, diseased, and have a fear of death when they are ready to leave here.

I would like to teach about how everything we are all experiencing relates to everything we do. If a person has just the outer knowledge that relates to this world only, then where are they when the time comes to pass on from here? It would seem to make sense that a person would want to be prepared for The Real Journey, as though they knew they were going to take a trip someday. Aside from the basic educational institutions, there are the religions that are supposed to handle the mysteries of Life beyond the grave and death, but from what I have learned, they do not teach a person to properly be prepared for anything, but morbidity.

That night, I went and met with Rebazar, and he again explained the different levels of Life to me and how they relate. He said that the first two heavens were where most believers would go after this life, and then they would again someday return in a new body with a new mind to once again try and figure out The True Reality of Life. He said it is best to gain The Real Guidance while you are still on earth, so that you can free yourself from ever coming back here. The higher levels are so much better than here, and they are so much more refined. I spent most of the night with him going over so many things, and then returned to my body.

The next day came fast, and boy was it hard getting up again. I did get up after the rooster seemed to scream his regular routine, and then I went inside to see everyone.

"Good morning everyone, Rosa and I are going into town today to see if I will be the new teacher," I said, as I sat down.

"Only after you have eaten your rice and beans, Goldie," said Mary, as she laughed with everyone.

"We will miss you, Goldie," said Paul.
"I will come to visit from time to time, because I like it here. I am also hoping that my parents will come and visit you very soon," I said.

After we finished, Rosa and I got the horses and said our goodbyes, and rode off to the town. Rosa and I rode up the coast by the ocean. It was another clear and sunny day. There were lots of palm trees and seagulls all over the place. Out by the waves, there were Pelicans skimming over the surface of the water along the waves as they would form. We saw many Mexican families who had built little places along the way. I liked to see how each family created their own life style.

I love how the Mexicans live. They have very little, but they are always happy at whatever they do. Their lives are totally simple and direct with nature. The Mexican families were sometimes far and few between, and we would wave to them as we rode by. After a couple of hours in the saddle, Rosa wanted to stop and rest for a while. We were still along the coast, so we sat on a bluff overlooking the water. We ate some bread and fish that Mary had prepared for us.

"I like being near the ocean like you do, Goldie, but I don't want to live on a farm all my life like my parents, I want to explore Life for myself," said Rosa, as she ate.

"I'm that way also, Rosa. It's hard for me to stay in one place a long time, but I will always be near the ocean, because I know this is where I am to be," I said.

"What is your book about?" she asked.

"It's about my life and what I have experienced and come to realize with my family and with my friend, Rebazar. What he has taught me and the places he has taken me," I replied.

"I can respect what you are doing, Goldie. My parents have told me about their experiences. I know that I have had some things occur within myself, but I don't feel what they share with me relates to my life at this time," she said, as she was looking at the ocean.

"I can understand, Rosa. What I have come to know takes a lot of endurance to continue on. In a way, I would not suggest that what I am doing in my life would be the right way for anyone. For me, all I can do is move forward into the next
position of understanding for myself. I already basically know what I am up against as I present what I know to others. I am not here to convince anyone of anything, I am simply here to share what I know with others. My writing will be another option for people. I also know that there will be very few who will take the time to learn and explore what else is possible. As I write about the experiences I have had, I continually learn so much from everything I am going through. For me, it's really about the adventure and the lifestyle I know is Real," I said.

"You are a brave soul, Goldie. I can see that what you are attempting will take a lot of courage, because most people are so indoctrinated into some form of belief, that really only equals words in a book and possibly nothing more, I don't really know. This is where my parents and I do agree, because I can see what the church is doing and what they have done in the past. I'm not interested in what most people look to as their god; because there seems to be so much fear, guilt, and intimidation involved with what the authorities are telling people. The religious people that I have met, who are really into their belief, seem so afraid of anything else in their life, even what they believe in. They label everything. When I look at nature and see horses running free and the birds flying high in the sky, I have this wonderful feeling that Life is telling me something that is right in front of me. I have read so many books about other cultures and how they see and believe Life to be for them. If I had been born somewhere else in the world I would have the understanding of that place and those beliefs. I know within myself that there is something that is beyond what I can understand, but I don't think I am ready to find out about it just yet. How do you see Life to be for you Goldie?" She asked.

"It's all really rather simple to understand and accept, once you learn to get past your own resistance. What you just said about nature and what you are seeing is very Real. The earth and everything that is taking place here is part of the big picture, but only a piece of it. The basic Reality of what we are all going through is that there are so many more worlds, levels, and areas to discover than what we have come to know on the earth. All of us will be here a short time, and then move into another area that already exists, but while we are here we can learn to explore the other worlds that are within ourselves right now. It is all decided by the choices we make. You have decided not to explore, so for you your life will be according to what you decide it will be. Those people that look to a belief system, have the right to do so, and the outcome of what they have chosen will be whatever it is. All of us are in the same Life and live with the same True Reality, but from our limited personal mind we are deciding about something the

mind cannot fathom, and so this is where we can learn to find out with Real Experience with our Real Awareness," I said.

I could see that Rosa was thinking hard on what I was saying, but it was not my intent to convince her, because she had the right to decide her direction and what she wanted for herself.

"I like how you explain yourself, Goldie. It seems so free and easy. I can tell that you do not cater to a belief, but a lifestyle instead, and I really like that," she said.

"That's very good, Rosa, that is the true meaning of what I like to present. I am not going to share what I know to establish anything, I am only sharing it to let others know that the opportunity exists, and that's all. Life in The True Sense is a Real Freedom, beyond what our mind and senses can know. It is a Beingness, which is beyond description. It is just like the sun in the sky, the sea that flows, and the sound of the wind that is free to move and be. The biggest part of Life is the same. I will share what I know from what I will write, but what I will be writing will not be The True Reality, as it can only be a reference to IT. Sharing with others is part of the great adventure of living and learning about yourself, and the continual expansion of The RealU. It takes a lot to learn What IS Real, and then to present it, but it is what makes my life what I want it to be," I said.

"Well Goldie, what you're telling me sounds wonderful, like a child's dream for real happiness. I would like to try for the same dream someday, but for now, I have to find out about other things that I want to have in my life, such as my career," she said.

I nodded with her and didn't say any more, I just sat there until she wanted to go. We soon mounted up and were on our way. As I was riding off, the cat finally caught up after finishing his fish and jumped on. The big city, as Rosa called it, was actually a good sized town that was near the ocean, but most of it was a few kilometers inland. We rode along the coast at a casual pace, until late afternoon when we came to the big town and then headed inland to the center of it. On the outskirts, there were a few houses here and there. Most of these people had farms of some size.

There were a lot of crops being grown all over the place. It was a beautiful area where the people here had put a lot of work into. I was a little nervous about this new part of my life and what would soon be taking place. It was another step
into the unknown for me, and having to deal with the limited part of myself. Even though there was always reluctance within myself, I was willing to do what most people won't. RT had taught me years ago about the little personal self, and how you have to force it to get what you want, or it will rule your life and drag you into situations that you may not want. I could easily see what he was saying, because every time I came back from the other worlds to the earth, I was not as happy as I was while I was on the inner. The earth is a hard place, and to endure it with the awareness of what else is so much better is very difficult at times. I knew how most humans are, they like the positions they have set up according to what they have been taught here, and what they want that equals their survival on earth.

We soon reached our destination where Rosa was living. She lived in a nice room above the general store. It was a Sunday afternoon, which I just found out myself from Rosa telling me, because I don't really keep track of what day it is. She said, the store is only open until noon on Sundays, and then the owners go to their church gathering in the afternoons. We went up to her room after we tied the horses up around back. The cat followed us to her living area; it was a very nice place. She had been rather creative with so many things that made it pleasant and comfortable. She had her living space and her bed in the same room. We sat on the little couch she had and rested ourselves for a while. I was finally starting to See my new life unfolding right in front of me. I had to laugh to myself, as Rosa looked over at me and wondering what I was seeing.

"Do you want something to eat, Goldie?" she asked.

"Sure, I'll eat anything, so don't go to too much bother," I said.

"There's some homemade bread and honey down in the store and I can get you a can of beans. How would that be?" she asked.

"That would be great," I said.

She went downstairs while I rested my eyes. I slipped out of myself for a moment and saw Rebazar's face.

"You're doing good youngster, relax and enjoy it," he said. Then I found myself right back in the body as Rosa was walking up the stairs.
"Here you are," she said, as she walked into the room. "I bought something for the cat too," as she handed it to him.

"This looks real good, Rosa, I'll have to take you out to a nice dinner one night somewhere in town," I said, as she handed me a plate of some bread and beans.

"We'll have plenty of time for that, Goldie. Tomorrow we'll go and see the people who take care of the school and see if we can get you in," she said, as she pleasantly smiled.

"That would be good," I said, as I was enjoying the meal. "Goldie, can I ask about your personal life?" asked Rosa. "What do you mean?" I said.

"Do you have any lady friends that you are seeing?" she asked.

"You mean like a girlfriend, someone that I would be going with or dating?" I said, as I was starting to laugh.

"What's so funny? Did I say something funny?" she asked.

"Well maybe, because I never really thought of myself as having a personal life, just a life that keeps moving into the next adventure that will be taking place. The subject is a bit humorous to me, because I have always been an Indian, and an Indian Scout, who has little if any time to consider women of any sorts," I said, still giggling a little.

"You are funny, Goldie. You are such a handsome man. When the single women in this town see you they will be coming around in great numbers," she said, while she was smiling at me.

"I don't really know what you mean, because the life I have lived here so far has not involved any real relationship like my parents have. I have been so involved in what I do, that I never really thought about a relationship with a woman. Besides, where would I keep her? There is only so much room on my horse, and the cat uses the little bit I have. I doubt if there are any women that would accept what I do and where I'm going," I said, still thinking it was rather
humorous to consider myself with someone while I was on earth.

"Well Goldie, we'll see what happens as time goes on. You mark my words, there will be some persuasive young ladies that will try to make you see things their way," she said, as she was also giggling a bit.

We both had a good laugh about what she brought up. She made me think about Shiss, and how wonderful she is. At this point in my life, I couldn't see myself with a real relationship here. I liked the inner worlds so much, that what I was experiencing here was such a pale comparison to all the beautiful wonders that lie beyond this life. We sat up for a while longer and talked and then we went to sleep. We were both tired from the long ride and all that had taken place during the day. I immediately went to the inner and found myself on the top of the mountain again. Shiss was already there waiting for me.

"Hello Goldie," she said, with her sweet voice. "You are making good progress. The Guides are taking care of the preparations for you to meet the people who will okay your new life as a teacher. There is nothing that you have to consider, so try and relax, because all us on this side are working to make sure that things will turn out for the better. There will be a few bumps, but they will be good lessons for you as you go along," she said.

"Okay," I said, as I just sat and stared out over the ocean. Shiss sat by me and put her arm around me.

"There is no one like you on earth, Goldie. You are a shining light that very few can see. I can see into your heart and all the magic there that you possess. I learn from you in so many wonderful ways that you don't even know," she said, as she smiled.

Then, I looked at her with a bit of amazement. "Really?" I said. "I never knew that."

"Of course you didn't, because your heart is pure, and your only intent is like the sun above, to shine on all without the wanting or needing of anything. You make my life sing. Being with you is a joy. You will work for everything in your life and give it all away no matter what the cost. The earth people only want their share of what they are working for and then they want more to continue on their temporary positions. They don't have the awareness to See, The Real Value

Life IS. They don't understand that they could have their personal life, and at the same time have a Real Freedom that outshines the sun they live under. You have the great heart, and most of all the great intent, because you care about What IS Real. You care about everything enough to let it be as it will be," she said.

"You must be telling me all this, because I have never really considered all the things you are saying," I said.

"That's because you are living the Beingness that Life IS. This is why The Real Guides want you. You are far beyond the intellectual mind and all that it thinks of itself. You are a selfless person, a Real Benefit to all that very few will understand or recognize. You do not have the ego like the common man. You are a beautiful person, but you do not see yourself as such, you only see The Reality that is your very Being, that will allow you to have a freedom from all the drudgery of the earth when you are finished with what you have to do," she said.

"I love to hear what you have to say, Shiss. Not because it's about me, but by listening to you I gain such an insight into so many wonders that seem to be realized from your very presence," I said.

"You and I know how to universally share what we are in our hearts. I know how awkward you feel as you are going through what you have to on earth, that's because the lower part of yourself is not the same as you are here. When I was on earth, I had many hard lives, just like everyone else. The Real Guides want others to know about the higher worlds, so that they can experience the beauty that Life Really IS. The earth is a sad place compared to where we are now. There is no belief or educational system that can save a person from the decisions they make. The present and future systems on the earth will continue to teach people the incorrect way to find Real Happiness. You will teach what others can't even dream of. There will be those who will listen, and you will see their hearts open up and blossom like yours has," she said.

I wanted to stay longer, but I could feel the pull of the personal self-wanting to draw me back to its own little place. I was soon back on earth, and I could see the faint light of day soon appearing through the window of Rosa's room. She was still sounding asleep. So I just lay there for a while until she decided to get up. After a while, I heard the faint sound of a rooster in the far distance. It took me by surprise, because I didn't expect to hear a rooster this close to town. Rosa turned herself over and then slowly raised herself up.
"Are you up, Goldie?" she asked.

"I am not up, but I am awake," I said, with a little laughter to wake myself all the way up.

She got up and dressed herself while I waited. Then, I got up and put myself together. It was still early, so we just sat for a while and drank some water as we relaxed.

"Let's go over to Dr. Hastings's office, and see if he and his wife are there. She works with him as his receptionist and they usually get in early," she said, as we got up and I followed her out.

We left Rosa's room and walked a few streets over to where the doctor's office was. There were a few people who were already up and walking the streets. As we arrived, I could see that the doctor's wife was already there. The front door to their office was open so we went in, and here is where it all started...

"Good morning Mrs. Hastings, I would like to introduce you to my friend, Goldie. We have stopped by to see if we could talk with you about the teaching position at the school," said Rosa.

"Please sit down Rosa and Goldie, I will go and get the doctor and we will all talk," she said, as she went into the next room.

As I sat, I could feel the body getting a little fussy about being here. It's like night and day being here, and being on the other side. The doctor and his wife soon came out, as Rosa and I stood up to greet them. I could tell they were very good and likeable people.

"Good morning Rosa, and is this your friend Goldie? Good morning to you, sir. Please sit down and let's talk about why you are here. I don't have any appointments for several hours, so we have plenty of time to talk," he said.

Rosa helped me to explain who I was and what my qualifications were. Rosa, said things that I didn't even know I knew. After about an hour or so, we all shook hands and agreed for a trial period for me to teach the school children. As I was walking out, I had to ask her...
"You said some pretty interesting things in there about me, Rosa," I said. "I can tell you really care."

"I know Goldie, I know what you're thinking, and I also know that all of us need help at times and this is your time. I already know what they wanted to hear. I would help Sonya with the school at times, because we always had fun together and I love the children too. When Sonya first started I was already working at the store and I remember when the other teacher left. The situation was similar to now. Sonya had never taught before, but she really wanted to, and I already knew the doctor and his wife, so I helped convince them to give her a try. It was a real struggle for her at first, but she kept at it until she became so well liked and looked up to. The first year was the hardest for her, because she was not a real educated person, but she has a wonderful heart that always finds a way to make things come out the way they should. I can tell that you were rather uncomfortable with the meeting. I could see myself in you when I first applied for the job at the store, but I wanted to learn, and so I went past my fears," she said.

"You are a fine person, Rosa, I am so glad to know you. What you did took a lot of courage. You are putting your trust in me for this position," I said.

"I can see that you are the type of man that can do anything, Goldie. I think your shyness is a form of humility that you haven't discovered yet. I have met so many bull headed men who think they are a real wonder about themselves, but you are a genuine person. I am so glad to help you out, besides, I know you will make it fun for the children," she said.

Here I was again not seeing what others could see. I thought about what she said, as it made me relax within myself and trust my own direction. Now that I had the position, I really didn't know what I would be doing. We walked to the school, which was at the end of the main street, about six streets from the general store. Rosa led the way, as we arrived and then walked up the front steps to the door.

"I have the keys, Goldie," and then she handed them to me.

"And now you have them, young man," she said, as we walked in.

It was a beautiful room with a high pitched ceiling that was painted a friendly shade of off white. There were big windows on both sides that looked out to large grassy areas, and trees that encompassed and helped design the entire
setting. There was even a small lake with ducks that were floating about. The whole place felt really good. I knew that I would learn a lot here.

"Look at the ducks; I have always been so fascinated by them. They are the funniest of all birds," I said, as I looked outside and then around the rest of the room.

I went up to the desk and the big board that covered almost all the back wall. I was amazed at the great job that had been done to put together such a fine looking school house.

"I never thought of it before, but after seeing this room, I would like to learn to build things."

"I will introduce you to the man who designed and help build this place. He's a few years older than you, and he has been designing and building since he was young. His father was a builder and taught him the trade, and then he studied on his own to improve his skills. He has built several homes in the town and even helped remodel the store several years ago, where I work. His name is Ben Perkins, and I will introduce you to him. Let's go see where you will be staying," she said, as we walked through a door and into another room.

We entered a real nice room with a large ceiling that had several windows. It was a big room with the bed right in the middle.

"You won't have to sleep on the floor in here, Goldie; you are now in the modern age. Look over here, this room has a big closet for some of your things, and also there are hundreds of books in here. If you need more books, the town has a community center that has thousands you can use at any time," she said, as I looked around and found it hard to believe that I was really here and ready to teach.

"The children and their parents will be notified, and so day after tomorrow you will start teaching," she said, as we walked out into the main room again.

"Now that I'm here, I don't know what to do first," I said.

Rosa laughed and said, "You'll be fine. After you've met the children and their families and taught for a while, you will blend right in with everything," she said, as she led the way back to the front door.
We then walked back to her place, because she had to get to work. I went up to her room and wrote while she went to work. The cat was still sleeping while I was writing, but finally he woke up.

He let out a big yawn and then stretched, and asked, "Is this our new home, Goldie?"

"No, we will be living at the school house. I know that you will really like it there, because the surroundings are very nice, and there is even a lake where you can chase the birds," I said.

He seemed okay with what I told him, and then went and stared out the window. It was late afternoon, when Rosa finally came upstairs.

"Hello Goldie, are you okay with everything?" she asked, smiling as she came in.

"Everything is very good, Miss Rosa. Let me take you out to the dinner I promised you," I said.

"You know what Indian boy, that does sound good," she said, as we both laughed and got ready.

"There is a nice family cafe across the street where most of the people around here go to. Let's go there, and then they can all see their new school teacher."

I was really nervous now. This was going to be my first public appearance. I put on my best clothes and looked like a real gentleman. We were soon ready to go.

"You look great Goldie. Everyone will see you coming," she said, with a big smile on her face.

I suddenly didn't know if I wanted to go or not, but I did. We walked across the street and entered the cafe. I was rather taken by all the people who were there. It was very crowded and everyone was dressed so perfectly. I felt rather out of place, but I did like the experience and risk of being in a new place.

It was a big cafe that was beautifully decorated and seemed to have a real lively atmosphere to it. There were many waiters moving about the place and bringing
food and drinks. I noticed some people looking at me as I came in with, Rosa. I figured they knew her, so I didn't pay too much attention to them. We were escorted to a nice table by the window and sat down. Rosa, looked at me and smiled, and then held her hand over her mouth as though she was trying to keep herself from laughing. I began to smile and laugh a little and shrugged my shoulders at her, about her mannerism.

"What's so funny Rosa? Did I wear the wrong clothes?" I said.

Then, she really laughed. "Silly Indian, look around, you are the most gorgeous man here. Look at all these women staring at you," she said.

I was afraid to look, but I did. I slowly and casually took a glance around the room, and she was right, there were a few who were looking right at me. As I made eye contact, they would smile, and I shyly smiled back.

I looked back at Rosa, and said, "Can we go now?" She really began to laugh at what I said.

"Of course not, I want you to sit there and suffer while I enjoy myself, knowing that I am with the most handsome man in town, and while all those white women drool," she said, as she was still giggling and trying to refrain herself.

"I really do like this place, Rosa. It's so different from any place that I have been. The experience that I will be having while I am living here will really add to my life. I love the wildness of the outdoors, but this is a real fun change for me," I said.

"I felt the same way when I arrived here, Goldie. I like going back and forth from my parents' life to this one, but I know this lifestyle will be my main interest," she said.

The waiter came over and we ordered. As soon as he left, a young woman walked up to our table.

"Hello Rosa, it's good to see you. I hope everything is going well?" She said, as she was mainly looking at me.
"Very well Rebecca, and please meet my friend, Goldie. Goldie, this is Rebecca Anderson, a good friend of mine," said Rosa.

I stood up and shook the woman's hand.

"Hello Mr. Goldie, I am so pleased to meet you sir," she said, as she smiled and looked me straight in the eyes.

I could feel something that I was not ready to handle from her, so I sat back down.

"I hope to see you again, Mr. Goldie," she said, as she walked off.

As the woman left, Rosa began to laugh. I could see that she was trying to hold back from making a scene of her laughing.

"Goldie, you are so funny, your pure innocence is great. I could tell that Rebecca was approaching you, and you were a little confused. This new experience is going to be some real entertainment for you," said Rosa, as she smiled at me.

"I am ready," I said, "It will take some getting used to, but I like it."

We had a nice dinner, and then we took a walk outside and down the street as the sun was setting. It was a nice afternoon that had a pleasant feeling to it. Rosa showed me around the town and told me some of the history and how certain businesses got started and what they did. I was starting to feel more comfortable about my new life here. It was fun to learn about how things came about in the town. It was a beautiful town, and I could see that it took a lot of work to put it together. I began to take a real interest in how everything was built, which I never really had a concern for before. I wanted to learn more about building and I was excited about meeting this fellow, Ben. After a few hours, we went back to Rosa's room and talked a while. The cat was still sitting in the window and watching the birds come and go in a big tree outside.

"I never get tired of watching those birds fly, it reminds me of flying on the inner," said Little Feather.

I wrote for some time and then went to bed early. I went right to sleep and to the other side. I became aware that I was in the school house where I was to teach. I was sitting at the teacher's desk and wondering what to teach first, and then
RT walked in with Shiss. They both came up to the front and sat in the first row. "Hello Mr. Teacher," they said together.

"Hello to the both of you," I said, so very happy to see them.

All of us talked and I seemed to be laughing the whole time, and then I woke up. It was suddenly early morning and I could faintly hear the rooster in the distance as he sounded himself about six times. As I looked over what took place on the inner, I had to smile and wonder if I laughed the whole night until dawn. Rosa soon sat up in her bed with a smile and then got up and dressed. I went over to the school with the cat while Rosa went to work. I wanted to get used to the place as quickly as I could. I still had a funny feeling that was with me about what was coming to pass, but I knew that I would soon go through it. I remembered I went through the same thing when I first started scouting, but after I got involved I was okay with it. It took me a while to get good at that also, but I kept at it, because I did like it in the beginning.

Now, I was where I was meant to be, because my dream has always been to be a great teacher like Rebazar and The Guides. RT told me about some of his training when he was with his teachers. He said, he was the only student for the longest time, because it was back in the days when life on earth was very hard and most men were battling each other. He said, The Real Guides had a real tough time finding people who wanted to know about a Real Life. Presenting anything from the other worlds hundreds of years ago was a real danger, because people were very barbaric in their nature, even more so than today. He said, it was because of the way they had to survive in those times and what little awareness they had.

The cat and I arrived at the school and went inside, and then I sat at the front desk. I imagined myself teaching the children to get a feel for what was to come tomorrow. I looked through all the drawers to see what I could find and use. There were a lot of things that Sonya had brought that looked to be very useful. I was looking for something other than a feather and ink to write with. I found something very interesting that caught my eye. There was a bunch of small wood sticks with a dark center to them. One of them was sharpened to a point and I attempted to write with it. Suddenly, I discovered that it continued to write without any ink. I sat and wrote for a while. Every once in a while I would look up and see the cat at the window as he was watching the birds.
When I finished writing, I wanted to tell Rosa about my new discovery and what I had found. First, I went to the back room and looked through a lot of the books that were there. As I looked through them, I knew I had never seen any of them before. I began to wonder how many books there are in the world, there must be millions, I thought. After I write my book it will probably become lost in the seemingly huge sea of books that have already been published. Oh well, whatever I thought. After several hours of going through all that I could in the school, I went back to the general store to see Rosa. As I walked in, I could see that she was not busy at all.

"Hello Rosa. I just came from the school, and look what I found," I said, as I handed her one of the little sticks.

"That's a pencil, Goldie. It's used to write with," she said.

"It's called a pencil? Great," I said. "This will be so much easier than what I have been using."

She laughed and said, "You are so innocent, Goldie. I love your mannerisms and your need to explore," she said, smiling at me.

I was very happy to have found a pencil.

"After I am done here, we can take your things back down to the school and get you settled in," she said.

"Okay, I'll wait for you up in the room," I said.

The cat and I climbed the stairs and went into Rosa's room. He jumped right into the window, while I sat and drew with the pencil. As I was writing, I dozed off and then Rosa came up.

"Hello Goldie, it's a nice afternoon, let's walk to the school, I will bring some things to eat and we can have our supper there," she said.
I slowly got up and took all that was mine to take and we headed for the school along with Little Feather. On the way, we stopped and talked with a few people who Rosa knew, and so she introduced me as the new teacher. There were a few of her lady friends that seemed to be rather forward to me and so I had some laughs with them. I don't see myself this lifetime being with someone and having children, my intent is too centered on The Reality.

Rosa and I talked all evening about how her life has been since she moved into town. She told me stories about Sonya and everything they had gone through over the years to establish themselves here. I liked hearing what others have gone through in their lives. It gave me something to go by to determine certain areas of my own life. I was constantly realizing how Life was teaching the one main ingredient that seemed to blend through everything and that was humility. Real Humility cannot be put into words. Within myself I saw it as the Beingness that RT has taught and shown me. What I knew now was a very small part of what was to come, and what I would know and be as I became so much more aware.

After we ate and talked for a while longer, Rosa went back to her place.There were several lanterns in the school I lit as I sat and wrote at my new desk. I stayed up for a long time, because I was really enjoying using the pencil to write with. The school and all the supplies were donated by the town's people, and Rosa brought whatever was needed from the general store. She said the doctor and his wife had notified the parents and the children would be showing up in the morning. It was past midnight and I decided to stop writing. I was stiff from sitting so long. I got up and walked outside. I enjoyed how very peaceful it was here. It was a clear night and there was a partial moon that had risen. All in all, it was a beautiful experience to be in this new place and start a new journey. I walked around for a while to loosen myself up and then I soon went inside and lay on my new bed, it was great. The cat was out roaming around as usual. So, I left one of the windows partially open for him. I lay there and thought about all the good people who had helped me to get to where I was at. I realized how wonderful it is to give as a way of life, and that it is the only way to live.

I went right to sleep and found myself in a new area. It was still by the ocean, but there was so much more to the surroundings. There was also a type of tree house that was built around several huge palm trees, which were about twenty feet or so above the ground and had a stairway made from rope and tree branches that led up to it. I thought to myself that it was a very nice place, one in which I would like to live. It was of a natural look that I liked better than the
buildings on the earth. Within myself, I am a very simple man. RT said that he lived in a natural hut with a dirt floor when he was on earth.

It was a beautiful sunny day, and the ocean was a wonderful blue along with the sky. There were different types of palm trees everywhere along the shoreline and stretching back across the land. This place had some large hills that were set back from the beach a ways that were covered with a lot of greenery. As I looked out over the ocean there were big waves that continued to roll into the shore. Until I had that experience with the board, I had never noticed the waves as much before. As I was looking at all there is, I heard a voice call to me...

"Goldie, come up here and see our new island place," said Shiss, waving to me from the tree house.

I began to laugh as I walked up the stairway. When I reached the top she gave me a hug and a kiss and showed me into the place.

"Look Goldie, it has a bed so you don't have to sleep on the floor anymore," she said.

"Did you build this place, Shiss?" I asked. She laughed and said, "Maybe."

I sat on the bed and lay back and so did she. "This place is great, and this is how I would like to live on the earth. I would be next to the ocean in a simple house like this one," I said.

"You will be living in some interesting places on the earth Goldie, but none as good as here," she said.

We talked for a while and then went down to the water and swam in the shore.

"The air here is always so pure and wonderful," I said, as we moved about in the shallow water.

"I love all the levels, just like you Goldie, because we can move so freely in them," she said.
"You're right, we can go anywhere and have all these wonderful places to ourselves," I said.

After getting out of the water, we took a walk away down the beach, and then it was time for me to return. I woke up feeling so much better after sleeping in the bed. My body no longer ached, it felt very refreshed. The sun was just coming up, and so I prepared myself for the children when they would arrive. The school had what they called a clock that told the hour of the day. I found the idea very interesting and it was a good gauge to determine the length of time I was to teach each day.

Rosa had given me a lot of good advice on what subjects to teach and how long. She said that the basics were the most important, the reading, writing, and arithmetic. I had never really studied arithmetic, but I seemed sure that it couldn't be that hard. It was almost eight o'clock, and the children were beginning to arrive. I greeted them as they came in the front door along with their parents. After a little while, they were all in and sitting rather quiet in their seats as I stood at the front of the room and looked over how many there were. I counted about twenty four. No one said a word, so I started to talk and introduced myself.

"Good morning boys and girls, my name is Mr. Golden Wing. I will be your new teacher for a while, until Miss Sonya De La Cruz returns," I said, as I smiled to them.

One little girl immediately raised her hand before I could say another word, and so I asked her to stand and tell me her name, and then ask her question.

"My name is Susan, and I would like to know if you are going to be a nice teacher?"

I had to laugh while some of the other children were doing the same thing. "Thank you for asking, Susan. I want to make sure your learning experience here is fun and beneficial for all of us. Does that answer your question?" I said.

Susan said, thank you and then sat back down. There were more questions about myself, and where I was from and how did I get my name and so on. I talked with the children for most of the morning and told them a few short stories I thought would interest them. All of us did a lot of laughing together and I was beginning to relax within myself and feel so much better.
I divided them up into age groups. I had some of the older children teaching the younger ones. The first day was just going over the basic routines and adjusting to what seemed to work for these children. By the end of the teaching day at five o'clock, I needed a rest. I stood by the door as the children left.

Susan was the last to leave and said, "Thank you, Mr. Golden Wing; I know we will have fun in your class and learn so much."

Then, she put out her hand and shook mine.

"Thank you Miss Susan, and have a good evening," I said as she left.

I went back and sat at my desk and thought about how the day went. I had to laugh at my new experience, it was great fun. I was now in the creative mode to present some of the real fun things that children love to learn about, and at the same time present to them the possibilities that lie within themselves. I thought about so many of the experiences I had from the other worlds and what would make a good story for them to learn from. Then, I realized children love animals and fun things to do. I have a flying horse and I could tell about a young adventuresome boy that stumbles on to something magical and is taken to the secret worlds where the young at heart live. I liked the idea and I would stay up most of the night and write out the story.

Eventually, I did go to sleep. That night, I was with Shiss again in our tree house. I became aware while I was standing on the beach and the sun was shining overhead. I was still thinking about the story I was going to share with the children. Then, I walked over to the tree house as Shiss was standing on the deck. She immediately waved. I walked up to her on the deck and gave her a hug.

"Goldie, I like your idea about the story and the boy with the flying horse. Children love to become involved in wonderful things they can't find on the earth. There are so many magical places for everyone. Once they hear your story they will want to try and experience the other worlds for themselves," she said.

"That's what I'm considering, Shiss. This story might help to get them involved with their Real Awareness and discover a Real Adventure. I can see that most of them know the basics of what they need for their earth life, but they don't

have a source for the best part of themselves, so I will present something fun," I said.

"I have seen the children you are teaching on the inner, many of them are open to new vistas, and there are a few who have been tied to the mental and emotional realms of obedience, but they will come around. They may question the validity of what you will be presenting, but they are children, so they will want to explore also. What they have come to know is from the strict upbringing their parents have given to them and how they are to adhere to certain ideas that have been handed down for generations. Some people set themselves up as controllers of others, and in the same sense teach their children to follow certain rules so they can take over when the parents have gone. There is an inherent awareness within each Being that knows it will return again to play out the same roles as it previously did. These are the people who are involved in the political, religious, educational, and monetary systems, who have taken over. They are what are termed, 'The Ruling Class' of the common people. What you will be presenting expands beyond all reason and logic and would be termed a fantasy of a child's imagination. The Ruling Class knows that if people become aware in The True Sense of what you are proposing, they will lose control over the minds and emotions of those who support them, even their own children. Your position is one of showing each individual how to possibly free themselves from the restrictions that have been set forth by the Rule Makers. The children have the right to discover their Real Awareness, and to choose their life from a position of Real Experience, and to live any way they wish to."

"This is the reason that I am always with you, Goldie, your wonderful heart wants to share The True Reality that Life IS, and you are not afraid to do so. Who would believe that you can come to a place like this without the approval of some so-called self-appointed authority figure? We have Real Freedom without any decided restriction and we don't need the monetary influence that most people seek in their lives as their only security. RT has taught us The Real Truth of ourselves, and The True Reality Life IS. 'Life is Light, and from The Real Light all has come into Being and what The Great Reality has decided all things to be," she said, with a big smile on her face."

"You are wonderful, Shiss. Just to listen to you, I can feel my Being soar far past what I can comprehend. I have a dream of The Great Reality and what IT IS, and I know that someday I will meet that dream and See IT for myself," I said.

Shiss and I went in the Tree House and sat on the bed. I stared at the ceiling

and thought about the children and what to present to them. I knew that I would be learning from them as I taught what they were looking to learn from me. I was now having the best experience of my life, and I could learn more about the creative nature of myself by teaching. I was finally able to be in the position of what had Real Value to others. Shiss and I talked until I left.

I soon woke up in my bed back at the school. It was early morning and I had an hour or so before the children would arrive. I still didn't have the whole idea for the story, so I thought I would wait and see what the children had to say. They began arriving on time and assembled themselves in. For the first half of the day, up until lunch time, I went over the basic lessons of academic study. When lunch time came and the children were out playing, I sat at my desk going over the story I had started. As I was thinking and daydreaming, I could see the children playing outside and enjoying themselves. Children are such Free Beings, and they are always connected to The True Reality Life IS, because of their open attitude. When they came back in and were all seated, I asked them if they would like to hear a story I was writing. They agreed, so I told them what I had written.

"There once lived in time and space, a young boy that was brought to a secret tribe that no one knew about. The child was a gift from The Light Men who roamed The Unseen Worlds, to aid those who wanted to know about the beautiful regions beyond the earth that most humans could not see with their physical eyes. The tribe lived in the most remote area on the highest mountains above all the people of the world. They never left the mountains, because they had been taught by The Light Men of The Great Being, how to survive where they were without needing anything from the rest of the world. They had already lived for many lifetimes, and finally came into the position of being able to sustain without almost anything. This would be their last lifetime on earth, because they had earned their way out of the old cycle of rebirth."

"The child who was brought to them was called, Flying Feather, because he could actually fly. No one else in the tribe could fly, even though they were very wise and knew things the people who lived on the rest of the world didn't know. He had been trained to develop his ability to fly, so he could aid the tribe with their needs, because everything had to be brought to them, or they would have to go down the mountain sides which were very dangerous. Flying Feather was now about fourteen years, according to the worldly standards. He was also taught The Real Secrets of The Great Being, and how to remove himself from his limited body form, which all the tribe knew how to do also. Within his Unseen

Worlds, he was also free to travel anywhere he liked. He had a friend in his worlds, a flying winged horse he would ride. He had named the horse, Flying Friend."

"The Light Men would show Flying Feather new worlds that existed beyond the minds and reach of the humans. They would also teach him The Secrets of Real Survival that very few of the body world people knew. Young Flying Feather would also explore The Unseen Worlds on his own at times. One of the places he liked to go was to The Great Ocean, which was always a beautiful blue with a clear sky over head, along with a brilliant sun that always shined. He liked to walk on the sand and play in the water with his horse. They took many trips together to the other worlds. Flying Feather had many friends in The Secret Worlds, which he liked to see and be with. One of his friends was a young girl named Shawsu. She had a flying horse like his. They would both ride through the skies together, up beyond the clouds and too many faraway places. Flying Feather, would return to the tribe after his inner visits and tell them of his adventures within The Unseen Worlds, and relate the great wisdom The Light Men would share with him. The tribe members would always listen very closely to what Flying Feather said, because they knew the wisdom from The Light Men was very special, and it aided them in their understanding of The Great Being."

"Flying Feather was a special child that only came along so often to reveal the wonders that Life was willing to share. He would always keep the secrets of what he knew from those who did not appreciate the beauty and love that was very special to know about," I said, as I looked at the children.

I stopped there to see how I was doing with my young audience. I looked up from the reading to see most of them with their mouths open. My guess was that they hand never heard of anything like I just read to them before.

The cat was lying behind my desk and said, "Very good Mr. Teacher, I think you've got their attention."

Then, I wanted to know how they felt about the story so far. "Does anyone have a question?" I asked.

Susan raised her hand first and then stood up.

"That was real different, Mr. Golden Wing. I have never heard a story like that
before and I really liked it," she said, as she began to laugh and clapped her hands together.

Then, the other children did the same. They were all laughing and saying how they wanted to hear more about Flying Feather and his many adventures in the other worlds.

"Okay, I will write some more and tell the story of Flying Feather a little each day, after we do our regular studies," I said, as I was now experiencing a real joy being with the children.

As the children were leaving the room, Susan stopped and asked me, "Mr. Golden Wing, I fly in my dreams, is that what you meant about the inner?"

I was a little surprised at what she said, and then asked her if she could stay after school for a few moments and tell me about some of her experiences.

"I can stay and tell you a lot of things," she said.

I could tell that Susan was a very Aware Being. In her body form she was twelve years old and seemed to be very capable of almost anything. I waited until the rest of the children left and then talked with Susan.

"Let's sit and you can tell me whatever you want, Susan," I said.

She was very polite as we both sat at a bench seat along the window.

"I fly all the time in my dreams, Mr. Golden Wing. I have told my parents about the experiences I have had, but they just think I am making things up. To them, it's a fantasy stage I am going through. My mom had flying dreams when she was young, she told me about them many times. She used to make up little stories to tell me as I was going to sleep each night. I liked the ones about flying, so I started doing it, it was easy. But now, I really can't say anything to my parents, because everything is seen their way. Someday, I will have my own life like you and I will teach my children about wonderful things too. I love my parents, but I know what is real and right for me. They have tried to teach me about their religion, but it seems so hard for me. I like what I do when I am alone with my own life. I have friends in my dreams I meet and it's always fun, and I can do and have whatever I want with them," she said, as she was giggling.
"You are not alone Susan, I fly in my DreamVisions all the time. I know what you are going through, most people do not accept what I am telling them either. What you are experiencing is another part of yourself that the little Susan who lives here doesn't really understand, because you haven't been properly taught about how much more there is for you. But the good part is, you are already doing it. What people have been taught about the 'mysteries of Life,' as they have been termed, are usually a lot of fragments of the original teachings that were presented to people at different times throughout history. So many people consider limited written doctrine to correlate to The True Reality that Life IS," I said.

"I am so glad you understand these things, Mr. Golden Wing. We can be great friends and share our experiences," she said, as she smiled.

"Of course we can. You are going to learn a whole lot this year, and from now on, Susan. A few things to know about history and what took place, as some of us have read about how Moses parted the sea, and Jesus walked on water, and healed many people and also what the other saints did while they were on earth, those were events that took place at that time. Those past events are mainly part of the physical phenomena that most people look to as some kind of ultimate experience, but what is not understood is that they apply to this temporary life only, and no further. What you and I are experiencing within us is the freedom and opportunity that has been presented down through the ages to so many, but the original meaning has been lost and changed over the centuries, so most people have no clue how to connect with their Real Awareness. I want to share the freedom of opportunities with those who are truly interested in learning about the benefits that already exist for themselves. That is why I wrote the story. I wanted to see who would be paying attention. The first part of the idea is to get people to wonder about what you are presenting and then see if they are interested. Those who are, like yourself, will be shown that whatever wonders you want in your life that is all possible, but not always with this body that lives here. You have a wonderful heart, and you are open to the wonders that Life Already IS, that is why you are able to do what you do," I said.

"Wow, Mr. Golden Wing, you know a lot. I think we are going to have a lot of fun while you are here. Miss Sonya never talked about anything but the same old assignments. She read us stories and things, but what you are teaching is so much more fun," said Susan.
I liked to see the joy in her eyes and expression. It was so much fun listening to this little girl and experiencing her enthusiasm.

"Susan, why don't you write down a few of your flying experiences and share them with the class, would you want to do that?" I asked.

"That would be great, Mr. Golden Wing, I like telling about the things I do. I would like to be a writer someday and an artist, too," she said.

"Great, I'll see you tomorrow. And how about this, for now let's just keep these ideas at the school, we don't want to alert anyone who would have a hard time understanding what we are doing in our personal lives, is that okay with you?" I asked.

"Sure, Mr. Golden Wing, I understand. I already know how my parents are and I don't tell them everything either," she said, and then we both laughed as she went out.

After she left, I lay down for a while and took a rest. The cat came over and had a word to say, so I sat up and listened.

"Very good Goldie, you do have the courage to present the value." I smiled and then laid my head on the bed, I was rather exhausted.

I was just about to fall into a nice siesta, when Rosa came into the school. "Goldie, are you here?" she said rather loud.

I wanted to pretend I was asleep, but instead I said, "Hello Rosa, I'm over here taking a break from the day."

She walked back and sat at the little table I had.

"I brought you some supper, Goldie, your favorite, rice and beans with some salsa and tortillas," she said, as I was ready to sail off.

"That sounds great Rosa; can I sit here on the bed while we eat and talk?" I asked.

"Sure, Indian boy, I had a long day too. A lady ordered some special material
that took three weeks to get here, and after she looked at it she didn't like it. It was what she ordered, but she made a big fuss about not wanting to pay for it, because now she had changed her mind. I was trying to calm her down for the longest time. Finally, the owner of the store took care of her. I was exhausted after dealing with her. Anyhow, how are you doing with the children?" She asked.

"So far, I am having a good time with them. It's hard to believe, but all of them are very well adjusted," I said.

"Well then, what Sonya has done has paid off, because she used to tell me what she had to go through to get the children to pay attention to her and do their assignments," she said.

"Really? It looks as though I got lucky then, because she has done a fine job. Have you heard about her lately?" I asked.

"I will be going home on the weekend to find out; do you want to come with me?" she asked.

"Sure, that will be fun," I said.

"Oh, by the way, several of the young ladies in the town stopped by the store and asked me about you. They wanted to know if you were seeing anyone, are you?" She asked, smiling at me.

"You know what, I think going to see your parents this weekend would be a really good idea," I said, as we both laughed.

"This is a holiday weekend, so we have four days to play, plenty of time to get there and back. The store will be closing early on Friday, about noon. The owner said I could have the weekend off, so, would you like to leave Friday?" she said.

"That sounds fine with me. I know the children would be happy to leave early, besides, I'm the teacher and I can do it," I said, as we both laughed while eating our supper.

That evening, after Rosa had left, I wrote until almost midnight about Flying Feather. I wanted to be ready for the children and especially Susan, and what she would be telling about her experiences. That evening I went to the other

side and met Shiss on the beach. She was already in the shallow water, walking along the shoreline.

"Hello Goldie, it's another wonderful day here," she said, with a bit of laughter in her voice.

I walked with her and we talked a bit.

"You may need a good friend to be with as you grow older, Goldie. The earth can be a lonely place and you will need the aid of someone who will stand by you," she said.

"I'm alright Shiss, besides, I always have you here," I said.

"I am always here for you, but the earth is different. You will be going through a lot before you are finished this lifetime and a good friend will work wonders for you motivation," she said.

I wasn't really getting what she was saying, but I would just wait and see what the future would bring. We walked for the longest time and I told her about the story I wrote. She really liked it and said that it would help the children see more clearly about what is taking place within them. She said that RT and The Guides would assist the children on the inner. We strolled along the beach for the rest of the time that I was with her and then I had to leave.

It was soon the next morning and I was up early again. I prepared for the school day and soon everyone was arriving. As the day went on, I watched the children very closely and how they responded to certain ideas that came to them. They were all so individually unique in their mannerisms and how they related to each other. I was amazed myself how well behaved they were. When I first started teaching, I wasn't sure what would be the outcome, but I can see now that it is something very special. I can sense they want what all beings want, the challenge of the unknown.

What I am learning for myself is about the fear that has been established about the hidden part of Life. Most people are actually taught this fear, and so when they have the opportunity to explore, they are afraid and they label what they don't know or understand as bad or evil. After lunch I read what else I had written about Flying Feather. The children all loved it and wanted to hear more, but I only had so much.

"I will be writing more, but for now, I would like to hear from some of you. Would you like to share something with the class, Susan?" I asked.

"Oh yes Mr. Golden Wing," she said. "I wrote an experience I had last night about what you and I talked about. This is what I wrote. Before I went to sleep I began to imagine myself in a happy place where I could play and meet new friends and then fly. I thought a lot about what I wanted it to be like and then I fell asleep and I found myself in a lovely area that had very large green fields. There were a lot of trees and a lake with the bluest of water. I could hear birds singing. In the middle of all of this there was several nice swing sets. They were so neat and clean, not like the ones my dad built me, but so much better. There was another girl about my age already swinging. I went over and told her my name. She was very nice and then told me her name, but when I woke up I couldn't remember it. We both played on the swings for a while, and then we went to look for butterflies. She said she had been in this place many times and she had seen the most beautiful butterflies. We walked for a ways until we came to an area that had many different colored flowers. And as we got closer, I could see there were all kinds of different butterflies that were hopping and fluttering from one flower to another. We stood and watched them as they moved about. After a while, the butterflies began to leave. But, they didn't just fly off, they flew in the sky."

"As I was watching them go up, the girl said, "Let's follow them, shall we?" And then, she simply flew in the air after them. Then, I did the same thing and we were both flying and following the butterflies above the tree tops and into the sky. As we were flying, I asked her if she knew where the butterflies lived."

"Oh yes, they live in a wonderful place that exists in the clouds. I have been there before, you will like it. Follow me and we will go there," she said.

"I was all excited as I flew with her to where the butterflies lived. We finally came to some very big clouds that were very colorful. I watched as the butterflies flew over the clouds and then disappeared for a moment until we caught up with them. As we flew up and over the clouds, a city that was so beautiful began to appear. It had huge castles that sparkled, and there were large green grassy areas everywhere. I could also see people below. We followed the butterflies to a lovely garden that was full of beautiful flowers. The butterflies landed on the flowers and seemed to rest. We soon landed on the grassy area by the flowers. I could smell the wonderful fragrances that were in the air from the flowers. I

stood there for a moment and looked around at the wonderful place I was in. I had flown in my dreams before, but I had never been to a place like this."

"I asked the girl I was with the name of this place, and she said that I could call it whatever I wanted to. Several lovely people came up to us and said hello. I don't remember what they said, but they were very nice and so clean looking. I wanted to see the inside of the big castles and all the other things there were, but as I followed the girl to where we were going, my mother began shaking me and I woke up," Susan said.

"That was great Susan, you told that so well. You will be the great writer you want to be someday," I said, as I gave her a little applause, and then so did the rest of the children.

Several other children had stories to tell, but none of them were like Susan's. "Is there anyone else here that flies in their dreams?" I asked the class.

About half the class raised their hands. Then, I asked them if they really liked it, and they all said yes. I seemed to be on to something. I could tell that as I was teaching them I was learning so many things about myself. It was a wonderful afternoon listening to everyone and what they had to share. I knew that there would be a lot of stories to tell while I was teaching at this school.

"Tomorrow is Friday, and all of you will be getting out of here early," I said. They immediately all cheered.

"It is a holiday weekend and so you can all sleep late for several days," as they began to laugh. "Tomorrow will be a short day, so if all of you want to, we can share more experiences. Before going to sleep, be sure and decide what you want to experience," I said.

All of them agreed, and then I let them go. Susan wanted to stay for a while and talk.

"Mr. Golden Wing, do you have any idea where I went last night?" she asked.

"I do have an idea, Susan. I have actually been there myself with my parents. Just like you, I wondered what the place was called and I was given the same answer, but what the name of the place is doesn't matter. You had the

experience you wanted and that's all that really matters. Your Real Experiences are wonderful, Susan. It won't be long before you are a teacher yourself," I said.

"That would be a good idea, just like you, Mr. Golden Wing," she said, as she giggled.

"I have had Real Experiences along with Real Guidance all my life Susan, that's why I'm teaching, because I will be sharing what I know with as many people as I can," I said.

"Will you teach me what you know, Mr. Golden Wing? I would like to learn about the guidance you have," she said.

"Okay, here's what you do. Tonight, just before going to bed, use the name 'Rebazar' to make The Connection to The Real Guides. This will be your first step. When you are with any of them, be sure and ask if they will teach you. Then, let them show you what you need to do to become more aware in your own life," I said.

Susan was writing down everything that I was telling her.

"I think I have the idea, I will try this out tonight and let you know what happened tomorrow. Thank you, Mr. Golden Wing," she said, and then gave me a kiss and went out the door.

I sat there smiling about this little girl and what a gem she is. There is something so remarkable about sharing The Real Value that Life IS with someone. It really centers you on the best parts of Life. I took a little rest, and as I was lying down, Rosa came in. I didn't think she would come two days in a row at the same moment, but she did.

"Goldie, I have some goodies for you, are you back there?" she said. "I'm here Rosa, please come in," I replied.

We sat and ate, and she told me all the funny things that went on while she was working.

"I like coming to see you, Goldie. There are very few people that I can talk to who have an understanding of things like you. I'm a simple person too, that's

how I was raised and I like it, but so many of the people in this town are in love with their attitudes," she said.

"You see a lot of people each day Rosa and you begin to take on a lot, that's all. Just let all the silly stuff pass you by and you will see it's really nothing," I said.

"You're right Goldie; I think I might be getting a little stale at my job. I might want a change and do something else for a while," she said.

"I would say to stick it out until you do find something else, Rosa. But then again, maybe you need a man in your life to have some fun with and create a little drama. I know you would make someone very happy," I said.

"Goldie, this doesn't sound like you. I have seen a few men in the past, but they were not my type, so I don't know right now," she said.

I had to laugh at how she expressed herself. "I was only kidding, Rosa you know your own mind. I'm the same way, I'm not looking either," I said.

We ate and told each other a few more stories and then she went home. After Rosa left, I wrote and then went to sleep and ended up on my favorite beach. I sat on a small embankment and relaxed as I looked out upon the ocean of Life. The sea was rather calm and the reflection from the sun was moving all about on the water. I never seemed to tire of this place; it makes my whole Being feel alive and clean. As I was looking out past the horizon and loosing myself in the endless sky, I suddenly heard a voice...

"Goldie," she said.

I brought my attention from where I was at within myself and looked over to see Shiss, but this time she was with someone. It took me a few moments to recognize who it was, but finally I could see that it was Sonya. I immediately stood up and met them as they came up towards me.

"Hello Goldie, you remember Sonya?" she asked.

I stood there for a moment and wondered what was going on. I never considered Sonya to come to the inner.

"Sonya is not like Rosa, Goldie. She has known about this side for a long time,

but kept it to herself. Sonya loves her sister so much that she did not want to interfere in any way about their relationship. She wanted to come and see you and tell you that she would be okay soon," said Shiss.

Sonya walked forward and gave me a hug and then a kiss on my face. I was a little taken by her reaction and felt a bit awkward.

"It's okay Goldie," said Shiss. "You will need a good friend on the earth, and Sonya will be there for you."

As I was about to speak, I felt someone pulling on my arm.

"Mr. Golden Wing, wake up, the rest of the class will soon be here," said little Susan.

I was trying to realize what was taking place, and then I did. "Oh my, I overslept didn't I?" I said.

"I'll go out and talk to the class so that you can get ready," she said, as she giggled.

"Great, thank you Susan," I said.

As I was dressing I began to recall the experience with Shiss and Sonya. As I looked it over, I was a little puzzled at what was taking place. I could feel another change coming in my life. After a few moments I walked out and greeted the class.

"Good morning everyone, it is always so good to see all of you. This has been a really good time for me during our first week together. I hope that I have brought something fun and beneficial into your lives also," I said, as I was still trying to adjust to being back on earth.

Then, Susan stood up and said, "I think I can speak for all the class Mr. Golden Wing. We have learned so much from you and we are all very thankful for what you have shown us and how kind you are."

Then the class began to clap. I sat down and was a little taken by what the children expressed. After we shared some stories and laughter, I asked the

children if they had anything to share. First there was John who tried to do the same thing as Susan did in her dream adventures. Then, he told his experience...

"I first found myself outside of my house, and I was looking for some friends to play with. At that moment there was no one else around. Then, a man came up and said to follow him and he would introduce me to some new friends. The man was tall with dark hair and a beard and wore sandals. He led me along a narrow road that had big trees all around and we soon ended up at the ocean. There were other children my age playing in the water and along the shore. I was so excited, and when I looked to thank the man, he was gone. Then, I went around and introduced myself to the other children and played with them for what seemed to be the longest time. Then, all of a sudden, I heard my mom's voice calling me. At first I looked around, but I could not see her. I kept hearing her voice telling me to wake up and get dressed for school. I really didn't want to go to school, because I was having too much fun. Soon, I did wake up, because she was pulling on my arm and I was back with her."

"That was great John. Do you have any idea who the man was?" I asked. "Would he be The Guide, sir?" replied John.

"Very good young man, yes he would. There are many Real Guides who will teach and escort you to many wonderful and fun places. With The Connection I have given you, which is to use Rebazar's name, The Real Guides will meet you in your Real Side, and begin your own personal journey to a better understanding of yourself and the best that Life IS. The unaware public thinks of these experiences as dreams, but they are as Real as you want them to be. They may not all be like Susan's experience, but they are just as important, because each one of you is very important. The Real Guides will teach you what you need to know to have a better life for yourself," I said.

A young girl named Mandy, raised her hand and stood up.

"Mr. Golden Wing, I have been having a hard time understanding some of the arithmetic that I have been doing this year, so I asked before I went to sleep for someone in my dreams to help me, and then I went to sleep. I was in a classroom like this one. I was sitting at one of the desks and there was a man at the front of the room writing on the board. I looked around and there was no one else but me. There were a bunch of numbers on the board, but I didn't know

what they were. Then, the man turned around and it was you, Mr. Golden Wing. Then, Little Feather suddenly jumped on your desk. You smiled and waved at me and said that everything will be alright. You began explaining the math to me, but I can't remember what you were saying, then I woke up," she said.

Then, Mandy began to laugh and so did the class.

"No wonder I'm so tired in the morning, I have to work all night long too," I said, as everyone continued laughing.

"Do you think I will remember and know what I learned?" She asked.

"The awareness of what you are learning will filter through as your physical mind can handle it. You will see how you will simply become more aware and start to recognize how math works for you. This is how it is for all of us as we begin to expand our awareness. The RealU has more capabilities, but this human part of us is rather limited. I know what I am telling you is new, but in time you will catch on and see how much fun it is," I said.

Almost everyone in the class had something to tell. After listening to all their stories it was already noon.

"Thank you all so very much for sharing what you have. Your assignment will be to practice having fun in what we will call your Dream Visions, until we meet next week. Also, try and do some of your regular homework if you can," I said, and watched as the children enjoyed the humor. The class was very happy while they were giggling and talking.

"For for those of you that need some assistance with your nightly journeys, maybe Susan will take a little time and help you out. You are all free to go and I will see you on Wednesday morning," I said, as I waved goodbye to them.

As soon as the children all left, I went to get ready. Then a few moments later, Rosa walked in while I was in the back room.

"Are you ready Goldie? I have the horses here," she said. I came walking out. "I'm ready young lady, let's ride," I said.
"Little Feather, I forgot all about him," I said, and as I did, he came running from around the school and jumped on.

"You weren't trying to leave me behind were you?" he said, as I laughed out loud.

I could see that Rosa was wandering what was so funny. I never told her I could talk to my cat. If I did, she would definitely think of me as strange, so it's better to keep the peace sometimes. As I thought about it, I liked the idea of having some secrets all to myself.

"I won't tell her that you can talk to me either," said the cat.

I could tell that my horse was wandering where I had been all week, and so I answered him...

"I've been teaching the children at the school," I said out loud, then realized what I just did.

"Did you say something, Goldie?" asked Rosa.

I didn't know what to say right off, but then I said, "Oh, I thought I saw someone I knew, and I was just talking to myself."

We did wave to a few of our friends as we rode out of town. As we were almost out of the main part of town, there were two young women that moved out into the street and crossed right in front of us. We stopped and let them pass.

As they walked by they said: "Hello Mr. Goldie," and then they giggled as they walked on.

"What was that all about?" I asked Rosa.

"Maybe they want to attend your class," she said, and then started laughing as we rode on.

It was a beautiful day and not too hot. We rode for about four hours and then stopped along the beach to rest. We found a Mexican family who lived by the ocean, and they let us have some water for the horses. We paid them for some
fruit they were selling, and sat for a while in the sand and rested.

"It's been a great week with the children, Miss Rosa. I never could have imagined the real beauty and sincerity that children have. What I have learned so far surpasses what I have come to know in my life up to now," I said to her.

"You have a good heart, Goldie, and so you fit in real well with them. I want my own children someday, also an honest man I can love. You were meant to teach, that is why the children love you," she said.

"I think it comes from my parents, they are like children, very wise children," I said.

I knew that it also came from The Guides, but I didn't want to interfere with how Rosa saw things, so I didn't mention them. We were soon on our way again. We rode along the shoreline, because it was fun to be so close to the water. I could tell that Rosa liked the water too. She is a good and honest person I thought, and I'm so glad I know her. It was after dark when we finally reached Paul and Mary's house. They were outside sitting in the hammocks and enjoying themselves. When we rode up they were not that surprised to see us. They both laughed as we rode in.

"We knew you were coming, did you walk most of the way?" said Mary, as she giggled.

As she was laughing, my horse turned and looked at me as if to say, "I did all the walking. What did you do Indian boy?"

I began to laugh, and then dismounted and gave Mary a hug, and so did Rosa.

"We were just enjoying the view of the ocean, and so we took our time," I said, as I greeted them.

"Come inside you two, I have supper ready. You are hungry aren't you?" asked Mary.

"Of course we are mama, we haven't eaten all day," said Rosa. "How is Sonya, Mary?" I asked.
"Go see for yourself, Mr. Teacher," she said.

I walked into the bedroom and saw her sitting up. Sonya was a very lovely Mexican girl with brown and light colored hair mixed. She was a strong girl, not petite like some. She had a lovely smile and voice to match. She had her own wonderful aura about her.

"Hello Goldie, come in and sit with me," she said very softly.

I sat in a chair next to her bed. "You are looking much better, Miss Sonya, you look very well," I said.

"I do feel better, Goldie, but I am still weak from what I had," she said.

I just looked at her for a moment. Her being was beautiful and I knew her heart was wonderful.

Then she said, "I saw you on the inner Goldie. You and I walked along your favorite beach and we talked about the future," she said.

I hesitated for a moment and was wondering what to reply, so I said, "Yes, I remember seeing you there. You know my friend, Shiss, don't you?" I asked.

"Shiss and I have known each other for years, and we have talked a lot about you," she said.

After hearing this, now I really didn't know what to say.

"Goldie come and eat your supper," said Paul, from the other room. Saved by Life itself, I thought.

"I will be back soon and try and figure out something to say to you Sonya," I said, as I got up and walked out.

I could see her smiling as I left the room and then start to giggle. I sat down with everyone and began to eat.

"Slow down Goldie, you have plenty of time," said Mary, as I was rather stuffing myself.
I was a little nervous about what was taking place with Sonya, and what she said. "I'm so hungry; I could eat someone's else horse.

Is Sonya okay yet, Mary?" I asked.

"She's fine. She just needs a little more rest. Her mama knows what's best for her," then she laughed, and so did all of us. "I heard her talking in her sleep a few times Goldie. She mentioned your name and someone else's that I can't remember," said Mary, as she was looking at me for an answer.

"That is funny, huh? Sounds rather strange, like what the two of you do must do at night," I said, and then kept eating.

She also had a good laugh with that one. After supper, all of us talked for a while as Mary and Rosa cleaned up.

"How do you like being the teacher, Goldie," asked Paul.

"It is the best decision I ever made with my life here," I said. "The children that Sonya has taught are very special and wonderful. I could never really say enough about them, all the thanks go to Rosa, and all her help in getting me the position," I said.

Then, Paul leaned over to me and said very softly: "We saw you on the inner teaching. RT and your friend Shiss took us to see you while you were with the class," he said, as he straightened up again, as Rosa came and sat beside him. "Telling one of your funny little stories again are you, papa?" she said, as she hugged and kissed him, and then poked him a bit in his side to make him laugh which he did immediately.

Then, Mary came over and sat with us.

"Thank you Mary, that was another great meal as usual. I am so glad to see the two of you again. I had the best time teaching and learning with the children," I said.

"You are officially the teacher now, Goldie. We are proud of you. You are a great contribution to our family," she said, as she winked at me.
I got the first part of what she said, but I wasn't sure what she meant about the second part, so I just said something...

"Please excuse me, I want to go and see how Sonya is doing," I said as I got up and went to the open door of the bedroom.

"Come and sit with me, Goldie, I want to talk to you," she said, as I sat in the chair.

"It's a nice night isn't it?" I said, with a bit of laughter.

"You are funny Goldie. I already know you are a little shy about certain things, Shiss has told me a lot," she said, with a big smile on her face looking right at me.

I had a feeling that I was about to enter a brand new area in my life that I had never known this time around.

"I know what you are going to be doing this lifetime and I want to be with you, because I can help you with so many things. Shiss and I have discussed what is to come in your life, and you will need a loving assistant, because there will be times when you will be all alone. She and RT know that you have a great treasure of wonders to share, but you also need someone to give you objective views about yourself and what you will be going through," she said.

"This is all a surprise to me, Sonya. Now I know what the experience meant with you and Shiss. I love her so much, but she no longer exists here, so I do feel alone at times, until I go there to see her. This is a funny situation that I am now in. What you are saying sounds very good, but what does she consider about someone else while I am here?" I asked, wondering how all this would come out.

"She wants you to be happy while you are here. She knows you have another lifetime here, and you will have several other women in the future who you will be with. She is very real with everything, because in The Real Universes, all of this physical stuff does not matter. You already know the levels that relate to The True Reality are not in the same sense as what all of us consider being life on earth. The True Home of our Being that exists on The Seventh Level is of a total knowingness that the mind cannot comprehend. Shiss has her Beingness on that level, and to her what happens on the earth does not matter. She very
well knows the difference, because she was once here as your wife many centuries ago. You and I will have a good life together, and learn so much more and be able to give so much more. I love to teach like you do Goldie, and I can teach what you will be teaching. We can have a wonderful life together and be in the same adventure," she said.

I looked over everything she said and I liked what I was hearing. I just found it hard to believe that here was something I really never considered, but now that I knew, I could see that it seemed to be a part of what Life had set up for me. She smiled, and then put her hand out for me to take hold of. I leaned over and took her hand. She was looking straight at me with the most honest sincerity. I decided not to question anything, because I had done so in the past so many times. This time, I would go with what was presented to me and live the adventure. I think she knew what I was thinking, because she leaned over and kissed me on the lips. I was sold. This was all happening so fast, but I didn't want to have things any different than what they were, so I totally agreed within myself.

"You are a beautiful person Sonya, and I know this is all so sudden, and I can see myself loving you for the rest of my life. Thank you for coming into my life," I said, as I was really making an effort to get myself totally involved in this new part of my life.

I used to think I was sincere about my life, but after experiencing the children, and now Sonya, I felt that I had a lot of catching up to do. I wanted to learn and be more sincere with everything in my life, and I knew this was the opportunity to do so. I felt myself move right into the new change. I felt like a child at Christmas, receiving a great gift. I openly went right into an agreement with what I was experiencing and loved it. My heart felt a new joy and enthusiasm with Sonya.

"Let's meet on the inner tonight and talk some more. We can go anywhere and you will be fine there," I said.

I kissed her, and as I was walking out I could feel the difference in my life. There was suddenly a shift into a new reality that was now so obvious. I didn't want to go back to what I had been; I wanted to proceed with what was happening now. I decided to go outside and be in the cool air for a while. I went and sat in the hammock and looked up at the stars. As I lay there, I thought about how free the stars are and that there must be the same freedom for each one of us after we
have gone through the lengthily process to become aware of what Life IS. It was such a silent night, there were no sounds at all, and then I soon fell asleep.

I found myself on the other side in the tree house, where Shiss and I had been together. As I lay there, a soft breeze came in through the opening to the entry way. Then, suddenly Sonya came walking in and sat next to me on the bed, and put her arm around me and kissed my cheek.

"Hello Goldie, have you been waiting long?" She said, as she began to laugh. I laughed with her and we held each other for the longest time.

Then she said, "How long do you want to teach the class?"

I looked within myself and realized that I didn't have an answer for her.

"I don't know. I usually know when it is time to move on, but right now I don't feel the need to. But, it is your class and job, I am only filling in for you," I said.

"Well, what if we both taught the class as husband and wife?" she said, giggling while she was looking straight at me.

I hesitated for a moment, and then I actually heard a voice say, "Do it." It seemed to be a woman's voice.

"You know what, that would be a great idea," I said, and then kissed her like it's done on the earth.

She immediately laughed and said, "I am so happy Goldie. I will always love you, just like everyone else does." We laughed and laughed.

"All of this is very humorous to me. I never decided to have a relationship in my life like this, but here I am with more than I can handle," I said, as we hugged and giggled.

"You have the gift of great abundance and it is showing up for you," she said.
"I am amazed at all the sudden change in my life from just deciding to quit the army. I am in a brand new affair of loving and living and this is great. We will have the best of times teaching and loving each other, Sonya," I said, as I held her.

"Yes, we will Goldie. I saw the children with you and they love you, because you have opened them up to new worlds of freedom beyond what they could have ever imagined. We have lots of new friends who will be sharing their Real Experiences. We will be doing so much wonderful sharing together," she said.

As I was with her, I suddenly felt something, it was the cat on my stomach and then I woke up. I was so startled when I came back into my body that I flipped the hammock and landed on the ground, right on my rear. The cat jumped off as I began to twirl around.

"That was close. You are touchy in the morning," he said, as he sat and looked at me on the ground.

"I don't need help waking up," I said, as I was holding my back. "I think you were just having too much fun," he said.

"Actually, I was kitty boy," I replied, as I got to my feet.

The sun was already making its way over the horizon to another clear day. It took me a moment, but then I was wondering if I had been dreaming or did I just agree to marry Sonya? Mary, suddenly came out of the house at a rather fast pace.

She saw me as I was getting up from the ground and started laughing and said, "You are going to marry my Sonya, Goldie, she has already told me."

Well, it wasn't a dream after all, I thought.

"You are absolutely correct, Mary. I'm surprised she told you so fast," I said, as I was getting up.

Then, Paul came out of the house and shook my hand and said, "Congratulations Goldie, I will be proud to be your father."
I was not altogether awake yet, so I just agreed with what was taking place and let it be. I didn't want to think about how fast this was all taking place. I already knew it didn't matter what I did this lifetime, as long as I fulfilled my goal of presenting my life's experience to the world. As I was standing there and wondering what to do next, I suddenly noticed some movement in the distance. The sun was in my eyes so I couldn't see real well, but it looked like there were two people on horses coming towards us. I watched as they got closer, then I soon realized that it was my parents.

"Look Mary and Paul, it's my parents, they're here," I said, as I started to walk toward them. I finally caught up to them as they were riding in.

"Hello son," said dad, as he shook my hand. "We're here for the wedding," said mom. "You two already know?" I said.

"Goldie, we know everything, we're your parents," she said, and having a good laugh with it.

When we got to the house, I went inside while everyone outside greeted each other. I wanted to see Sonya and how she was. When I went to her room she was already up and dressed. I slowly went over to her. Then, she came over to me and put her arms around me and romantically kissed me. I was quite taken by everything so far.

"Our parents will marry us, Goldie. Do you approve?" she asked, with her sweet voice.

"An unofficial wedding, I like the idea a lot," I said, as I held her close.

We walked out into the front room as everyone was coming in. Rosa came in and wondered what was going on.

"Goldie and Sonya are getting married," said Mary.

Rosa suddenly looked real surprised. "But they hardly know each other, mama," she said rather shocked.
She stood there for a moment, and then went back into her bedroom as though she was disappointed.

"She will be fine. I will go and talk to her," said Mary, as she went into her bedroom and closed the door.

"Are you okay Rosa?" she asked, holding Rosa as they were sitting on the bed.

"I don't understand mama, they only met once and now they are getting married?" she said, as tears were coming from her eyes.

Mary looked at Rosa, and then realized something. "You love Goldie too, don't you?" she asked.

"Why would you say that? I hardly know him," said Rosa.

Mary laughed and said, "You can't fool your mama, I know you too well. There are very few real men like Goldie who really care for others, he is very special," she said.

Rosa began to settle down and said, "I know mama, he is a wonderful person. I knew that from the time that I met him. I was hoping he would say something to me, but he didn't really show any interest, so I didn't know what to think. But now, he is marrying Sonya, and I am really happy for her, but I still don't understand how all this is possible?" she said, as she was calming down.

"The lord works in mysterious ways," said Mary, with a smile on her face.

"Oh, you can't fool me mother, you haven't gone to church for years. Besides, I know that you and dad don't accept the funny church god as someone real anyhow," said Rosa, as she began to laugh.

"I know Rosa, but there are other things taking place that you are not aware of as yet. Goldie and Sonya have known each other in a different way other than what you can understand. In time, you will see what is taking place, but for now, this is what it is," she said.

Then, they both laughed together, as Rosa wiped the tears from her face and got up and went into the front room. Rosa went over to her sister and gave her a big hug and then gave me one to.
"It's all a mystery to me, but mama said that that's the way the lord works," said Rosa, and everyone laughed, as we all sat around the table for breakfast.

As we sat and ate, mom asked when and where we would like to get married. "I think Goldie would like to be at the beach on the sand," said Sonya.

I had to laugh, because she was right. Then, everyone else knew she was right and laughed along.

"Well, what are we waiting for?" asked Paul, "Let's get the ceremony over with, so that I can declare it to be a holiday for myself and Mary," he said which made us all laugh again.

All the women cleaned up as my dad, Paul, and I went outside.

"I am so happy for you son. You two will have a great life together and maybe some little Indians," he said, as him and Paul laughed together.

"Mexican-Indian babies," said Paul, "I like the idea." "That does sound pretty interesting," I said.

The women soon came out, and Mary said, "Let's go, we've decided to do it right now," she said, as the women grabbed their men.

I waited for Sonya, as she came out of the house. I think she was still rather weak, but she wanted to go ahead with the wedding anyhow. I walked with her down to the beach. Then, I carried her part way to the sand where we decided to be. Everyone formed a half circle around us, as Sonya and I looked out over the water with the early morning sun reflecting upon the incoming waves.

Little Feather strolled up and stood beside us and said, "I'll be the best cat."

I held Sonya and she held me, as our parents looked at us with their smiling faces.

"I will do the honors," said Mary. "Do you, Sonya, take this man as your real husband to be in love with?" asked Mary.

Sonya looked at me and said, "Yes I do."

Everyone was smiling so much that I had to laugh a bit.

"Goldie, are you ready to have Miss Sonya as your devoted and loving wife? To love and honor her with all your heart?" Mary said, with a big grin on her face.

"I really do," I said.

"Then so be it, as Life is our witness, you are now husband and wife as the bright morning sun comes up to shed its light on you both," said Mary, as she giggled like a school girl.

Everyone clapped and laughed, and then we all hugged each other. All of a sudden I was really happy, actually so much happier than I had ever been. I felt my heart soar like never before. I began to wonder to myself if I had been dead all these years, because I was truly feeling so much more alive right now. After our little ceremony, all of us went back to the house. I could tell that Sonya was not feeling well, so I took her to her room.

"Stay with me Goldie, I want to be with you," she said, so I lay on the bed with her and watched her go to sleep. Then, I went in the other room where everyone was at.

"She went to sleep. Hopefully in a couple of more days she will be fine," I said. "I will make sure of it," said Mary.

I sat and talked with my parents for a while. "Goldie, your dad and I have seen you on the inner teaching the children. RT has been taking them to some fun places to expand their experience of Life," said mom.

"I know mom, because of what the children have told me in the class and the experiences they have shared. It is quite obvious The Real Guides are participating in their Dream Visions. There is one very special little girl in the class, her name is Susan. She has had the most wonderful experiences," I said.

"We know about her, she will be with you for a long time, because she really likes you and trusts you. She seems to trust what you're telling her, even more
so than her parents. She has always had Real Experiences that she has wanted to share with someone, but after her own mother told her they were nonsense, she was afraid to tell anyone. Now she is like a bird out of her cage, she feels so confident and free from having to be confined by what others think. You have brought a real magic into her life, Goldie, because you decided to move forward and share your life with others," said mom.

"Well, I didn't know if I was responsible for all that. I really do like hearing all the children's experiences. They make me feel young and alive, because they are realizing something so much better about themselves than they knew before," I said.

Then, I was getting tired after being with everyone all day. "I am going to go lay on the floor next to Sonya, so I will see all of you tomorrow," I said, as I went into the bedroom.

She was sleeping so soundly. I moved very quietly and lay on the floor next to her and was soon asleep. I woke up at The Island Tree House. I was standing outside on the deck in front of the doorway and looking out over the ocean, and taking in the smell of the clean fresh air. I could clearly hear the waves breaking from here.

Then, I heard Sonya say, "Come in here Goldie."

I didn't realize it right away that she was already here, so I went in immediately. I lay next to her on the bed and hugged her.

"Here, I am fine and my earth body will soon be fine also, so we can get on with our life," she said.

I laughed at listening to her talk, as she has the sweetest voice. I never really paid too much attention to the voices of women until I met Shiss. Now I listen to everyone so much better. It's all the wonderful harmony of Life that I am hearing.

"We will soon teach together and I will help you finish your first book," she said.

"Do you think that I will write more books? It seems to me this one will take me the rest of my life to finish," I said.
She laughed with me and then said, "You're being silly, you have so much to offer and you will have plenty to write about, I will make sure of it," she said.

As I lay there I tried to imagine myself writing more books. I did like the idea, because I had to do something while I was on earth. We laid and talked about the school and when she would come back. She said we could both teach, because we were now man and wife.

"Let's go down to the beach and walk in the water," she said.

We went outside onto the deck, and then flew down to the water's edge.

"I haven't really looked around this island yet, this place is beautiful," I said.

"Your mother told me about her experience with you being in the future. This island is very special. Look out at the waves, they are calling us to go swimming," she said, as she grabbed my hand and started laughing.

We walked out into the shallow waters and then dove into the water and swam out to the waves.

"Goldie, let's catch a wave and ride it," she said, as she swam into the first one.

I watched her move along with the wave, and as she was in it, a pair of Dolphins jumped up from the depths and flew out of the water. Then, she swam back to me.

"That was really fun! Now it's your turn," she said, as I swam into an incoming wave.

As I was riding the wave, the same two Dolphins were riding right in front of me. As the wave finished, the Dolphins stopped and stuck their heads out of the water and began talking to me.

"Hold onto my fin, Goldie and I will take you back to Sonya," said the Dolphin.

This was my first experience talking to sea creatures. I found it very humorous, as the Dolphin took me back out to Sonya.

"Goldie, we have some new friends," she said, as she laughed.
We swam around for a while and then went back to the shore. We waved to the Dolphins, as we walked on the beach and then sat on the sand.

"This place is so wonderfully sublime for us, Sonya," I said, as I hugged and kissed her.

"Look at the waves, Goldie, someday you will be riding them just like the Dolphins," she said.

As I was holding Sonya, I came back into my body. Our Island Experience seemed to last a long time. Sonya was waking up at the same time as me.

She looked down at me on the floor and said, "We were at the tree house together Goldie, I really like that place. We are so lucky to be able to go there. We went swimming with the Dolphins," she said.

"I know it's a simple life that I like and there's no one around, but you," I said as I got up.

"How are you feeling today?" I asked.

"I am much better. I think I might go back with you and Rosa the day after tomorrow," she said.

"That would be great. We can both be there when the children return. I'm sure they have missed you a lot. Wait until they find out that you have great dreams also," I said, as we got ready and then went out into the front room.

Everyone was already up and sitting at the table and waiting for us. "Good morning you two, you look so much better, Sonya," said Mary.

"I am much better today, mama. I will be riding back with Goldie and Rosa to town," said Sonya.

"Oh, I am so glad to hear that. Come and sit down and eat with us," said Mary. "How's the book coming, son?" asked mom.
"Very well, I think I will be finished with it soon, now that Sonya wants to help me with it," I said.

"From what we see on the inner and what is taking place, you are headed in the right direction," said dad.

"I'm glad to see that you and mom are paying attention to what I am doing, I may need you as witnesses someday," I said, as we all laughed together.

"Goldie, I'm going to take your parents out fishing today, do you want to come?" asked Paul.

I thought for a moment and said, "Thank you, Paul, but I want to stay with Sonya, we were going to go over the book," I said.

"That's okay, we won't be long. We will catch everyone some bonito fish today," said Paul.

My parents and Paul soon left while; Mary and Rosa did things around the house. Sonya and I went to her bedroom to read from the book.

"Sonya, I have started my novel with the story of my life. The idea is to tell what I have learned from my life here and my Real Experiences," I said.

"I like that idea, please read me some," she said.

I read to her for several hours. She would ask me questions as I was reading and I would take notes. I knew what I had written was just a rough draft. I liked her input, because there were things she brought up that I didn't think about. After a while we sat back and talked.

"Your book is good and I will help you with it. I will teach you some English and how to spell, it would help. When you're finished, I will go over it with you and help you make it into what most people will understand, with your permission," she said, laughing with me.

"Of course, whatever it takes to make it fun and understandable. I can see that it will take me a while to become a good writer, but for now I really like it. Along with teaching the children, it gives me a real fulfillment to my life and plenty of time to be creative," I said.
I was now realizing all the wisdom Shiss had contributed to me. She had been a loving mate in a lifetime from days past, but her Being was so advanced, that she was willing to step back to aid me in what The Real Guides wanted the world to know. Sonya is the perfect Being for me to be with at this time. She is willing to go along with what I know and want to do. For me, I knew there was more than just having a wife and children and to live a standardized life. I knew that there would be challenges ahead, but that is how I wanted my life to be. Paul, Mary and my parents are the most wonderful people there are, but they were not presented with what I am capable of.

During the early afternoon, Sonya and I went down to the beach to see if Paul and my parents had returned from fishing. As we were walking down the bluff we could see Paul's boat heading for shore, and so we went down to meet them. The waves weren't too big, and so it easy for them to get to the beach. We went into the shallow water and helped them bring the boat in.

"We caught plenty for everyone, Goldie," said Paul.

"We'll help you eat them," I said, as I pulled the boat onto the land.

Dad had jumped out and helped me. Paul passed all of us the fish, and then everyone went up the bluff to the house.

Paul went inside and said, "Okay Mary, we are here and we are hungry," as he laughed with her.

Mary and Rosa came out of the house and began to clean the fish as we put them on the table.

"Your dad caught the biggest fish today, Goldie and the most," said Paul.

"Great dad, actually my two dads, caught the fish today. You both have the privilege of feeding everyone," I said, as we laughed.

# SCENE SIX

We spent the next several days sharing what all of us had learned along the road of Life that we had chosen. As we were all together, I would watch Rosa and how she would react to the real joy that everyone was going through. I could plainly see she was very interested in what was taking place. I was wondering if she would say anything about her experience with all of us. I would wait and see, I wanted her to make the choice. Tuesday morning came around fast to get ready for Wednesday's class, and we had all done a lot in the last four days, so I was more than satisfied. Sonya and I were together every night at The Island TreeHouse. We spent a lot of time going over my writing and adding some new experiences. It was early morning and we were all ready to ride back to town.

"Thank you so much for everything, Paul and Rosa, and most of all having Sonya as your daughter," I said.

"Oh, you sweet boy," said Mary, as she hugged and kissed me.

I hugged my mom and dad, and shook Paul's hand. "Until our next meeting, thank you all," I said, as I mounted my horse.

"Wait for me," said the cat as he jumped on. "I already miss the ducks in the lake."

Then Sonya, Rosa, and I rode off down the bluff and along the beach, continually waving to everyone until they were out of sight. We rode for several hours and no one said a word. I think I was rather talked out also. We came to the same Mexican family's house we had stopped at before. They were outside when we rode up.

"Buenos dias senor, I have some fish for you from my family," I said, as we stopped and dismounted.

I gave the fish to his wife and she was so gracious. We sat and had some water in the shade of their thatched roof that was spread along the front of their house. They lived right on the beach.
"I love this house Sonya, they are right at the water's edge and they can hear the great sound of Life all the time from where they are at," I said, smiling at her beautiful face.

"I like it too, Goldie. It reminds me of our Island TreeHouse," she said, as she laughed, and I kissed her.

"Where is your TreeHouse Sonya?" asked Rosa.

At first Sonya was silent, and then she said, "Every night since Goldie and I have met, we go to our own place in the other worlds. It's a beautiful place above the most wonderful ocean you can imagine. It is a place where the sun is always shining and we are free to go and do wherever we want to," she said.

Rosa listened very patiently, and then began to cry. After what seemed to be a long hesitation, she spoke...

"I watched all of you while we were with mom and dad," she was saying as she was lightly sobbing, "And with Goldie's parents, I had never seen so many wonderful people together. My family and Goldie's family, and all of you know so many things that I cannot understand. I don't know anyone that is like all of you. The people I know in town are nice, but they do not know Life like you. I can see the difference in being with you and being with other people. I don't want to be like them anymore, I want to be like you," she said, while she was crying, and then put her arms around Sonya.

As Sonya was holding her, she said, "Rosa, we will show you how to come with us and meet so many more people like us," said Sonya.

"Really? Could I meet someone like Goldie too?" she said, as she was wiping her face.

We both laughed, and Sonya said, "I don't see why not, there are plenty of wonderful people around everywhere."

I now knew what had been taking place within, Rosa. She just needed the exposure of all of us to break through what was holding her back from moving forward into a better life for herself. It's always fun to see people realize the best there is for them. After a few moments of comforting Rosa, all of us got back on our horses and rode off. We finally rode into town during the late afternoon. We
stopped at Rosa's place, and had something to eat, and then Sonya and I went to the school house. It was just getting dark when we rode up. It was a great feeling to be here again for my new life.

"It's so beautiful out tonight, Goldie. This will be our first real night together," she said, as we walked in.

We were both so tired from the long ride, so we went right to bed and talked. While we were riding in, Sonya shared a lot of her experiences with Rosa, and she seemed very open to everything.

"Sonya, do you think Rosa will try to go to the inner tonight after what you told her?" I asked.

"She said she would, and so I think that she will. She can be very determined at times. When we go tonight, we'll see if she's there," she said, as we laughed and hugged each other.

We soon went to sleep and found ourselves at The Island TreeHouse. As we walked over to the stairway, and just then we saw someone coming up from down the beach.

"Look Goldie, it's Rosa," she said all excited. We waited until Rosa came up to us.

"Sonya, Goldie, is that you? Where am I? Am I dreaming?" she asked, as she was looking around. We both had to laugh.

"Almost all of us go through the same thing when we first start becoming aware of this place, Rosa. All of a sudden you are in another world or level and the surroundings do not look like they do on earth, so you think you are dreaming, but you are really in a much better place," said Sonya.

Then, she took a moment to look around some more. She turned and observed everything.

"This place is beautiful. I can't believe that I am here. No wonder you are so taken with your dreams, it is so much nicer here than on earth," said Rosa, as she was smiling and feeling better.
"Come up and see our tree house, Rosa," said Sonya, as all three of us walked up the steps.

When we reached the top, Rosa was so taken with the view and the tree house that I think she almost cried.

"This is a wonderful place. I feel so foolish doubting you and especially mom and dad. Do they come here too?" she asked.

"They can and they do. Sometimes we see them, but they know we like to be together. Goldie's parents come here too," said Sonya, as we walked inside.

"What a lovely place, this is just like heaven," said Rosa. "This is actually one of the many heavens Rosa. There are even better ones beyond this world," I said.

"I love this place, but maybe I should go and leave you two alone," she said.

"You can't leave yet Rosa, not until we show you the best part. Follow me out to the front deck," said Sonya.

Then, Sonya leaped over the short railing and into the air. She flew about thirty feet out, and then turned around and said, "Come on Rosa, let's fly together."

Rosa stood there for a moment with a big smile and holding her hands to her face in amazement.

"I can't believe that you can fly too?" she said.

I came up behind Rosa and put my arm around her waist.

"Let's fly together, Rosa," I said, as she looked at me and then nodded her head.

We both jumped from the deck and were soon up in the air with Sonya. "This is so easy, I love it," she said.

"Let's take her up to the clouds and meet some new friends Goldie," said Sonya.

We flew up into the sky, until we came to the big clouds where we had been
before with all the butterflies. As we flew over the clouds, the big castles began to appear. Rosa was immediately surprised by what she was seeing...

"Look, are those real castles like the ones I've read about in books?" Rosa said all excited.

"They are real, Rosa," I said.

"Let's go down and meet some new friends," said Sonya.

We flew down to the huge green lawn, and as we did, a group of men and women came over and introduced themselves.

"Rosa, Sonya and I have to get back and do some things. We will leave you here and you will be fine. When you want to wake up on earth, just imagine yourself back in your body and you will be there," I said, as we flew off and waved goodbye.

Sonya and I went back to The Island TreeHouse to go over my book and to enjoy the ocean. As we were flying, she said she wanted to go into the water first and so we flew down to the sand and went in.

"This water is so great, Goldie, I just love it here." There were some little waves that were coming in and so I rode them with my body.

"You are good at that, Goldie," said Sonya.

After our swim, we went back to our place and went over some ideas until it was time to return to earth. Suddenly, we were back in our bodies at the school.

"The children will be arriving in an hour. Do you want to be part of your class today, Mrs. Goldie?" I said, smiling at her beautiful face.

"I'm feeling much better, Mr. Golden Wing, I will come and join you," she said, reaching over to kiss me.

"Okay, I can't wait to see the children and what they think about us being together," I said, laughing as I was getting dressed.

I sat and prepared a few things for the class, while Sonya cleaned the room and

then went to get the class room ready. Right on time, the children began to arrive. Little Susan was one of the first ones to come into the room.

"Mr. Golden Wing and Miss Sonya," she said. "It's Mrs. Golden Wing now, Susan."

"Oh, great!" said Susan, as she hugged Sonya.

Then, the rest of the class came in and were all seated. Sonya and I went to the head of the class.

"Good morning all of you smiling face. We have a surprise for you. Miss Sonya and I were married, and we will both be teaching for all of you," I said. Then, the children began to clap and laugh with us.

Susan raised her hand, and then stood up and asked, "Does Mrs. Sonya go to the inner too?"

And then the class was silent for a moment, and she said, "I sure do, all the time with, Mr. Golden Wing."

Then, the entire class clapped again and did a little yelling. I had to calm them down a bit, but it was such fun to experience their young hearts.

"It would be my guess that most of you had some Real Experiences during the holiday," I said.

Everyone began to talk at once, so I had to calm them down again. Sonya and I had to laugh, because everyone in the class was great.

"Who wants to go first with their adventure?" I asked.

One of the boys raised his hand. "Stand up Jeremy, and tell us what you experienced," I said.

"Well, Mr. Golden Wing, I tried what Susan did. The first night I was in a funny place where some strange people were chasing me. I don't know why, because I had no money. Then, there were some other funny things that took place and that was it. But, the second night I really wanted to go to the city in the clouds,

so I thought real hard and imagined what it would be like flying through the sky, and then it happened. I was suddenly in the sky and I was flying. I was a little nervous at first, but then this man came along and said to follow him to the city in the clouds, so I did. We flew up in the sky and over these huge clouds until I saw these giant castles with all this green lawn around them. I followed the man down to the ground where there were people waiting to meet us. I started talking to the people, and as I turned to look for the man, he was gone. I know that I talked to the people, but I can't remember what they said."

The class laughed and so did I. "That was very good. Sonya and I went to the cloud city with her sister Rosa last night. All of you can go there anytime. It is just one of the many places to explore and meet new friends. You can be taught the basics of reading, writing and arithmetic there, and be smarter than anyone. You can also go to their storehouse of files and read about Real World History, and what really happened, as compared to the edited history books that you find on the earth. There is also a place where all the inventions come from and eventually make their way to earth. If you want to find new places, use the name, 'Rebazar'.

I gave you a way to contact a Real Guide, and then ask him to escort you where you want to go. All the knowledge you will ever need is through yourself. The information that you find on the earth will always be helpful too, but it's more fun on The Real Side," I said to the class.

"It sure is, Mr. Golden Wing," said some of the children, as they chattered. Then, everyone took turns and told a story about their experiences, which took us up to lunch time. The children went out and played, and so did the cat. I told them they could stay out for a couple of hours, because I was going to write. Sonya and I rested a bit as we both wrote and discussed what the children said.

"We could write forever about what they experienced, Goldie. I really like hearing their stories, they are so genuine," said Sonya.

"The fun part is they will be learning a lot from the other side, so we will have more time to do what we want to. I like what they are doing, because it makes it all so much more real for all of us," I said.

After the children came back in they were so tired, so I let them all lie on the floor and take a nap. I was a little tired myself, so Sonya and I lay down for a while. After nap time it was almost time to go home, so I let the children go
home early. They didn't have any homework, because they were doing most of their assignments in their dreams. Now that I showed them the easy way to learn I wondered what I was going to teach them. I asked Sonya, and she said we would all keep busy with writing and art, those things that opened their creative awareness. That evening, Sonya and I went and met Rosa for dinner. There was a Mexican restaurant near the outside of town. From the looks of it, I liked the natural design it had; it wasn't real fancy like the other place we first went to. We arrived first and found a place to sit, then a few moments later Rosa came and sat with us.

"Hello Rosa," said Sonya, as she gave her a hug before sitting down.

"Hello you two wonderful friends, I have something so marvelous to tell you," she said.

"I know it's about your cloud experience isn't it?" asked Sonya.

"Yes, it is. I remember the experience very well. After you two left me in the clouds, I met some people and they showed me around. There is so much more there than you can imagine. I met this wonderful man that is tall and handsome, he showed me around also. They have a place there that is like a library with all the history of many worlds in it. He told me that I had been on many different planets in past lives and that I could find some of my lifetimes recorded in their books. I didn't look at any of the books this time, because I wanted to see so much of the surroundings that were there. Just for the fun of it, I will research my lifetimes when I go there again," said Rosa.

"So, you had a good time finding out about yourself, Rosa?" I asked.

"Oh yes, Goldie, thank you so much for being so patient with me. What I know now has changed my whole life. I want to learn as much as possible, it's so exciting," she said.

All of us sat for hours and talked about our experiences, and had the best time. Afterward, we rode with Rosa to her place, and then Sonya and I went back to the school.

"It's so nice and dark out here, Goldie, let's take a walk and see if we can see in the dark," she said, laughing.
I took her hand and we walked around the school and through the play yard, and then back into an area with a lot of trees.

"I have never been back here, even though I can see it from the school. Let's see what else there is," I said.

We walked through the trees and then on for a ways until we came to the lake. It was a partial moon that barely lit the night, and the reflection off the water on the lake helped light our way. We walked down to the shoreline and sat on a tree that was bent over on the shore and into the water.

"What a beautiful night, Goldie. This is like a dream come true. I want to stay awake all the time, and just live for the love that everything seems to be," she said.

"I like to hear you talk about all the beauty there is, it's better than listening to myself," I said, as I laughed. Just then, an Owl flew by us and landed on one of the branches of the tree. We both watched him as he was perched and looking about, turning his head to the left and right. Then, I heard him speak...

"Hello Goldie. You are doing very well with everything. We are teaching the children on the inner and they are very open to The True Light that comes through them." Then, he was silent for a moment.

I looked at Sonya to see if she was able to understand what was taking place, she just smiled at me. Through my Beingness, I asked the Owl if she could perceive him. He said no, that she was aware on certain levels, but not like me where I am aware on many levels.

"You will be coming into some interesting experiences, so be aware of what is taking place. The Dark Side will try and sway you from what you are doing, because it doesn't like people to become aware of The True Reality, it wants the control of everyone," said the Owl.

Then, he flew off into the darkness of the night. I looked at Sonya and then asked her if she heard the Owl say anything.

She laughed and then said, "Really? I didn't hear anything, what did he say?"
I thought for a moment and then told her. "He said, that we made a lovely couple," as I began to laugh, and then so did she.

"I never told you that my cat and horse also talk with me."

"Wow that sounds fun. I wish I could do it. Is it hard?" she asked.

"I don't think that it's difficult to do, it just takes practice like anything else. I was taught by my parents since I was a young boy. I can now better understand how things work here with all that I have been through. When we are young, we can be open to so many different experiences, but as we get older we become so conditioned that it is hard for us to let go and be who we really are," I said.

"As long as we are still young, Goldie, why don't we get a little romantic while we're here," she said, and put her arm around me.

"That would be fun," I said.

Later on, we walked back to the school and passed the cat as he was out moving about. You didn't get me any fish from the lake did you?" he asked, and then I laughed out loud.

"What's so funny Goldie, did I say something?" asked Sonya.

"It's not you, it's the cat. He wanted some fish from the lake," I said, and then she laughed too.

"I like your cat, Goldie," she said. Then, we went inside the school and slept for the night.

While the body was sleeping, I found myself in a strange area. It was a desert like area and it was a sunny day, but as I looked at the horizon, I could see a storm coming in. It was moving rather fast toward me. The clouds were huge with lightning and thunder moving through them. It was soon overhead and covered the entire sky. It began to rain, and as I stood there I could see the dark figure of a man in the distance. I knew who it was immediately. I was not interested in hearing anything he had to say, but I wanted to better perceive what was taking place, so I watched him and the storm at the same time.

As I watched, I began to realize that it was all a show, especially when I noticed
that I was not getting wet from the rain. This is what the Owl was talking about. I knew this scene was something that would be played out in my earth life, because of what I was presenting to others. I thought about the children and the happy experiences they were having, and I knew The Dark Side of human nature would have a justifiable reason to contest what I was doing. I realized that I had become very strong, and was able to withstand what was taking place. He didn't say anything at first, but stood and watched me. This entire experience was a very good training for me. I was now so much more aware than I was when I first met this part of Life. My greater awareness was my new strength. Then he spoke...

"I will be coming soon, so you had better run to save yourself Indian Boy," he said, with a mockery in his voice.

I didn't say a word, but stood my ground. The storm began to rage on, but I didn't move. I was feeling so very strong, that I actually wanted the confrontation. I could sense this side of Life that many people go after, the power to control and to have things instead of Being Free. His false power was that of fear and control with the illusions he created like those of his earthly followers, who ployed people into believing in the structured authorities. I could easily see how he controls most of the people on the earth. I know that it takes more than being a good person to experience Reality.

Just like Jesus said about the meek inheriting the earth, those that just agree with their happy lives will return to the earth for more lifetimes. RT has taught me that it takes a lot more than just being good to enter the higher levels. It takes courage to live for What IS Real, something that most are not aware of, because of how they have been taught. The dark figure raised his arms in disgust, and then turned and walked away, gradually fading into the surroundings until the storm dissipated. It wasn't long before the sun was out again and there was no water on the ground to be found, only new green grass growing all around. I immediately flew into the sky and to the ocean where I met Sonya and RT on the beach. Rebazar was smiling at me and I knew why.

"I did so much better this time with him," I said. He softly laughed, and then bowed and walked down the beach until he disappeared.

"Hello Sonya, did you miss me?" I said, as she laughed and then hugged me. "Of course I did, you beautiful boy."
We finished the night in the TreeHouse discussing the book and being happy with our place in Life. For several weeks, we continued the same routine with the children. Susan was helping to teach the class much of the time with Sonya, which gave me more time to write. The children had learned a lot from their Real Experiences, and they were far beyond their grades for their age. One day, while the class was taking place, Mr. And Mrs. Hastings came in with several of the parents and sat in the back of the class. I was in my room writing and I didn't know they were there. Sonya was talking to the class about something in history and I could hear her from my room. One of the children was sharing their Real Experience, about how they had gone to the Cloud City, and researched something from the history files.

Then, I heard a parent say very loud, "See, I told you, they are not teaching from the school books, they have taught our children about strange and evil things."

Then, I heard Dr. Hastings telling the parent to calm down, and that he would have a talk with Sonya. I immediately came out and wanted to see who was in the room. There were several parents with Mr. and Mrs. Hastings and they didn't look happy. I was to find out later that one of the parents, Mrs. Beacon, had talked with her son and found out what we were teaching the children. I also found out she was very religious, and anything that did not agree with what she understood her religion to be was of a demonic nature to her. She had a lot of influence in the community and she was more than willing to use it.

"Hello Mr. And Mrs. Hastings, can I be of some assistance to you?" I said, suddenly recalling the inner experience with The Dark Side.

"We have a concern with a few of the parents about what you have been teaching the children, Mr. Golden Wing. Are you teaching from the appropriate material that has been provided to you?" he asked very politely.

I wanted to be honest with him.

"I did start off using the books that were here, but then I discovered that the children were more aware than what was being provided for them, so I began to test them to find out what would match their abilities. I found they each had a unique awareness to find the answers for themselves, and to excel further along without the use of the provided written material," I said.

Mr. and Mrs. Hastings didn't say anything for several moments. I could see they
were wondering what to do themselves. They would even look at each other and smile a little as though they approved.

Then, Mrs. Beacon stood up with a rather stern look on her face and said, "Well, if you are not going to do anything about what's going on here then I will. My husband is an attorney, and we will see you in court, where justice will be served."

Then, she forcibly called to her daughter. "Melissa, come here right now, we are going home this instant," she said, in a real demanding voice.

Melissa stood a little frozen for a moment and then said, "But mother, I like what I am learning, and I don't want to leave. Mr. Golden Wing is a wonderful teacher and so is Mrs. Sonya, and I want to stay here with my friends."

"We are leaving Melissa, right now and so let's go," she demanded sternly.

Melissa slowly stood up and walked over to her mother with her head hanging down. Then, the other parents took their children also. After they had left, Mr. And Mrs. Hastings came up to the front of the class.

"I can see that you are doing a fine job with the children, Mr. Golden Wing. Our son really likes your class, and we can tell that he is so much better at so many things in his life, especially being happier within himself. If you have a magic that we don't know about, I think that it's great," he said, and then shook my hand.

"I didn't want to bring Mrs. Beacon here, and I tried to talk her out of it, but she's very religious and likes things to be according to what she believes. To be honest with you, I don't know where these religious people get their ideas from. Sometimes, I think they just like to control others," he said, as his wife nodded her head in agreement.

"Thank you, Mr. And Mrs. Hastings for being so considerate. I'm glad to see there are some people who understand there is more than one way to teach the children, and what they will be using in their life. Please come by anytime to see how your child is doing," I said.

"Thank you again for all you've done for our son," he said, as him and his wife left. I was a little discouraged, and then Sonya came over to me.
"It's to be expected, Goldie, they fear what they don't understand, because they won't take the time to understand. Give it time and things will change," she said.

"It's okay, I knew that something was coming, because I saw it on the inner, but I didn't see that it would affect the children. If it were only me it wouldn't matter, but these children are the magic that makes all things possible here," I said, feeling a little weak.

"What the parents are saying doesn't really affect the children, Goldie, they can still go to their other worlds anytime they want to, without the permission of their parents," she said softly.

"Yes you're right, nothing can stop them from having their own life the way they want it, I know that so well. What I have learned here from these children is a Real Treasure, and what they have learned for themselves is something wonderful they will always have to expand upon. What has been presented to them they would probably not find anywhere else," I said.

"They have all benefited, and they know what to do with what they know, you'll see. This is like a test of strength for them and us too," she said, and then gave me a kiss on the cheek.

I knew she was right and that all would be fine. We continued to teach the rest of the children as usual. Those that were removed by their parents did not return to class. I also found out that Mrs. Beacon had a lot of friends and plenty of influence in the town. After a day or so, I think the whole town knew about what took place. Rosa came by one evening to bring us something to eat, and told us about the latest gossip that was going around.

"People are saying the funniest things about you and what you are teaching the children, Goldie. Mrs. Beacon got the parents and children together to have the children tell everything that was taught and told to them. They have created their own strange interpretation of what you taught them. It's quite obvious, that Mrs. Beacon has a cause for living out in her life, and she seems to be dead set on doing it. I think she is just a lot of hot air, and that she may succeed a little with all the noise she is making with some people, but that's about it," said Rosa.

"It is all very interesting about what is taking place, but I'm not so much concerned over what people think. I've encountered so many who think the same thing about what I have presented. This is just a bigger test for me,
because now I'm in a bigger town with more people. Anyone can find out what I am presenting. As usual, people listen to the minds of others instead of their own Heart and Being, and then they become lost to what Life is trying to show them. This is a good example of something that has Real Value, and people jumping to conclusions before they have done any investigating at all. They are only led by their minds and what The Dark Shadow told me he would do, and that is turn people against me. It's okay; it's all part of what has to be," I said.

"You did what your heart guided you to do, Goldie. The children will always carry with them the knowledge you provided. I can see that what you did was a great gift and who else would have done it? You took the risk and did something wonderful," said Sonya.

"I love teaching The Real Knowledge of Life. I will continue to do so, no matter what the outcome of this situation reveals," I said.

"Let's enjoy the times we have together, and let the world wait," said Sonya, as we laughed together.

I can see the wisdom of what Shiss did for me. I know that I would have survived what is taking place, but it is so much better with my Real Friends. After dinner, all of us walked back to our places. That night, Sonya and I just lay in our bed, and talked a little about all that had happened so far in our relationship.

"We will have to deal with this same issue many times over, Goldie, because of how people were taught and raised. The systems on this earth will only decline, as it is more than evident by what most people blindly follow. The established orders from those in control will never change, and we know this. Shiss also told me about your future life here, and it will be a lot worse, then; so you are preparing yourself for the bigger confrontation to come. I look at how we are providing this opportunity right now for the children, and what they have learned so far. I wish that I would have had these experiences and known more about them when I was young," said Sonya.

"You're so right. I wonder how many people in the world do not know about their Real Awareness, probably millions. We will have plenty to do this life, Sonya, and that's for sure," I said, as I held her.

Then, we went to sleep and found ourselves on our favorite beach. After a few

moments, Rebazar walked up and sat on the sand. We sat beside him, because I knew that he was going to tell us something, and so we listened...

"The time has come for the world to know what you know, Goldie. You have gone through the various stages to get to where you are now in your own unfoldment. From the limited view that is developed by living on the earth, you will surpass yourself, because of what you are about to go through. Mrs. Beacon is simply part of the process that Life brings to your attention to learn from and to build your strength. She is only being herself at this time, and what she has learned so far. It is a test and training for her also, but she doesn't know that yet, because she is allowing her mind and senses to rule at this time and not her heart. You can see all you will be going through as an observation to become more aware and capable by.

"Every Being that has come from The Great Reality, must go through the trials and errors of its own awareness. The world is full of people who consider goodness and being right to be the ultimate goal that Life has to offer, but they are only the small steps that lead to The Real Awareness and The Secret Knowledge of BeingISness; that surpasses the mind all together. You are among very few who will continue to explore the unknown, until it becomes known to you. Mrs. Beacon is an example of a person that is afraid of losing her position and others close to her with what she has known in her mind. If she were to allow you to proceed with what you are doing, she would soon discover the beauty you are presenting, but it would be out of her control and reach. She has developed herself to be a certain way and cater to her decisions and limitations."

"But do not be dismayed, because The True Reality, The Real Light and Sound, that provides all the gifts to all, will come into the physical level another way, and provide for those who are willing. It is not limited by personal choice. It constantly seeks out to provide a Real Benefit in spite of the resistance of the human mind. You have the heart to succeed, and that is all that matters. The illusions that are set forth by the people of earth cannot stop the gifts of Life from becoming so. There are many people who want to know The True Reality Life IS, because they are not afraid to have it in their lives. Those who control others through their will and the written documentations that exist are afraid to divulge the truth about The True Reality, because they want to maintain their control over others. This is what is referred to as the blind leading the blind."

"Your Purpose is to let the world know about The Real Freedom of their Real

Awareness. Then, each person can decide for themselves the road they wish to take in their own life. You made the offer to the children, and they took advantage of what you provided, they are wise beyond their minds. Most children are into exploring, adventure and a happiness that the conditioned person has forgotten and no longer pays attention to. Even when the situations you are going through look bad, just let them be, it's part of the process. You cannot expect to teach in the same classroom for the rest of your stay on earth. Life has its own plans for you that will take you so much further than you could ever consider. You are headed in the right direction to expose what you are on earth for."

"People cannot be forced to look within themselves. The outer systems have bought the attention of those who are unaware of their own Beingness. The average person waits to find out what someone else has decided, and then usually agrees because so many others do, because they fear not to. It is the indifference to the secondary agreement that is necessary to be with The True Reality, and be free from the invented effects that are projected by others. No one can find The True Reality from another or any written knowledge, they can only find it within themselves after an honest effort has been made," said Rebazar. Then, he was silent.

I looked out over the water of the vast ocean, and considered what he had said. I lost myself in the light that was reflecting from the sun and into my Being. Then, I was back in my bed with Sonya on earth. I woke up laughing for some reason.

"What's so funny, Goldie?" asked Sonya.

"I don't know, Life I guess. There is so much to it, and you never really know what is coming next in this place. Sometimes, I feel so good about what is taking place, and then everything changes and becomes another question," I said, still laughing to myself.

"You're not concerned about Mrs. Beacon, and what she is telling others are you?" asked Sonya.

"Not at all. In a way, I have a real compassion for people like her, because I know they are still searching for The True Reality in their own way. Fortunately, all religious people are not like her or we would have a real uphill climb. I know there are those who respect the ideals of others that have their own beliefs. I
can see that the various systems that have been provided here are important for those people who want them, and then there are those who are trying to find The Real Answers to Life. What else would I do here, if I didn't do this adventure? I am learning a lot within myself with each day that passes. Even though I know these things and have the knowledge, going over them again and again always gives me something that I didn't notice before. The wisdom The Real Guides have provided is becoming clearer within me all the time. Unfortunately, what I am realizing, I cannot give to the next person; they must learn to realize it for themselves," I said.

Sonya and I finally got up and decided to get out of town for the weekend and ride to the beach, and so we did. By noon, we were at the ocean and looking out over the wonderful vastness.

"I am so glad we decided to come here, Sonya. I have been so busy with all that has been going on, that I just remembered the cat; we left him behind. He is our first child," I said, laughing out loud.

"I like that idea, Goldie. I love cats like you do, and now I can think of Little Feather as our son," she said, as she laughed.

"And yes, our little boy will be fine, he always is. Let's walk on the beach and let the horses play in the water," I said, as we walked and talked about fun things, and put the town situation somewhere else.

We walked along the beach for the afternoon, and then met a Mexican family who had their small house right on the beach. Almost all Mexican families will cook for you, sometimes for free, but I liked to pay them for the service they provide. They were fishermen and had plenty of fish, along with rice and beans. We stayed for several hours, and talked with them, and then walked back to our horses.

"This is fun Goldie, we should do this more often," said Sonya.

"I like it too. It would be fun to have a little house here, right on the sand," I said.

When we returned to the horses, they were in the same spot we left them. My horse said he was having a nice time too.
"Let's put out the blankets, Goldie, and lay back and watch the moon come up," said Sonya.

"That sounds fine. I've had enough walking for quite for now, so to lie down would be good," I said, feeling a few aches here and there.

We sat ourselves on the sand and lay back together. "This is the good life, Goldie, so simple. Life is simple and beautiful all at once," she said.

"I like it like this, just being and letting go of every care," I said.

We laughed and watched the sun go down and the moon come up. After a while, we soon fell asleep and were at our Island Tree House.

"I like this place even better," said Sonya, as she laughed with me. "That was a fast trip here, wasn't it?" I said, as I was still laughing.

I wrote while she did some creative things around the Tree House. I liked to watch Sonya do her creativeness, she always made it fun. As I would watch her, I would sometimes wonder why so many people resist discovering the real beauty they are. Ideas that align themselves with the naturalness of Life really make sense, while those that produce a distortion come to pass as a calamity. When we were through we returned to the earth.

It was early morning and we got our things together, and rode back to the city. We stopped to see Rosa on the way back. She was up in her room sewing herself a new dress.

"Hello Rosa, we've come to see you," said Sonya, as she peeked her head through the door.

"Come in you two and sit with me," she said.

Sonya gave her a hug and we sat down. "How's everything with you, Rosa?" asked Sonya.

"Oh, I'm fine. I think I met a man that likes me and I like him, so I am making a new dress to look nice in. We are going out to dinner tomorrow. Do the two of you want to come?" she asked.
"We don't want to intrude Rosa, especially on your first date with someone," I said.

"It's really okay, Sonya, it's the older son of Mr. and Mrs. Hastings. He knows about you two, and he wanted to meet you. His younger brother is in your class, and has told him about you," she said.

"Well, if you don't mind, Rosa, yes we will come," said Sonya.

"Of course I want you to come, I am very nervous. He is a really nice young man, and I'm still trying to figure out what to say to him," she said, sounding rather girlish.

"Rosa, you are being silly, just be you and you will be fine. If he doesn't like you just how you are, and I'm sure that he will, then you can make him pay for all our dinners," said Sonya, laughing.

Then, Rosa laughed and seemed to relax. We ate at Rosa's, and then went back to our room at the school. I wrote and Sonya got the classroom ready for the next day. Then, we went to sleep.

All of a sudden, I was in another gloomy place with an overcast sky. The wind was blowing and there were tumbleweeds rolling across the ground. There were trees scattered about, but they looked dead and had no leaves on them. I stood there, because I knew who would show up, and he soon did. He was walking across the dusty ground with the wind howling at his feet. This time, he came right up to me and stood a few feet away. I could tell he really liked this place of his.

He looked at me for several moments, and then said, "You are very persistent Indian boy, but you will soon see what I can really do," he said, as he mockingly laughed at me.

I didn't say a word, but just watched as he stood there. I think he was hoping to frighten me. Then, I could tell that he was becoming a little annoyed by me not saying a word. He moved his jaw back and forth as though he wanted to say something, but then just abruptly turned and walked off. I watched him go back into the dust he came from, and then I imagined myself back in my body.
It was still night and Sonya was gone within herself somewhere. I quietly got up and had some water to drink and then went out to the classroom. I sat at my desk and stared out the window at the evening stillness as the moon was coming up over the trees. It was a beautiful night and so perfect to see. I liked just being with Life as it Really IS. The cat was sitting in the window and looking out at the night as though he knew so much more than I ever would.

The experience with The Dark Side didn't seem to bother me at all, as I thought about it. With all that I had been through, what was to come would be an adventure. I knew he was going to try something, which he already did with Mrs. Beacon. It seemed as though he wanted to rattle people's minds and emotions even more. I felt very capable of whatever was to come, even if they destroyed my body, it would mean nothing, because then I would be in the other worlds, which I like better than the earth anyhow.

I began to consider the old dark hombre as someone that was very lonely, and could only justify his existence by tormenting others. I went back to bed and met Sonya at the Tree House for the night, until we returned to earth in the morning. We were up early getting ready for the children to arrive, and they soon did. Everyone that was coming was on time as usual. After all the children were seated, I asked the class about what was taking place and how they felt. Of course, Susan spoke first...

"Mr. and Mrs. Golden Wing, I am fine with what people say and so are my parents; they attend the church. Mrs. Beacon goes to once in a while, but they are not like her. My mother knows that I have learned so much since you have been here. She says she sees the difference in me, and to her, that's all that matters. I think she is looking at herself more now and what she knew as a little girl, because of some of the things she has said lately. Besides, I know my own mind and Being, and if my parents didn't let me come and learn from you, then I would run away, and live in the back of the school," she said, with her firm little voice.

Then, the rest of the class began to laugh and so did I and Sonya.

"Thank you Susan, you remind me of me, when I was growing up. Fortunately, I had parents that taught me what I am teaching you, so I didn't have to run away. I would say that what is taking place will be a good learning situation for all of us," I said.
As I was about to let the next child speak, a man entered the room and waved to me to come to the back of the room and meet him. I walked over to him and he handed me a piece of folded paper, then he quickly left. I walked back to the front of the class, and as I did, I could tell the children were rather curious. Sonya was sitting at the desk, and I handed the paper to her while I was talking to the children. Everyone shared their views and they were very supportive, just like Susan. It was soon lunch, and so the children went out to play while I stayed in with Sonya, to see what the piece of paper was all about.

"It's a summons to appear in court Goldie. It would seem that Mrs. Beacon has filed a complaint about your teaching," said Sonya.

I stood there for a moment, and could now understand what The Dark Side was pestering me about. I had to laugh to myself about what was taking place. I could See the adventure and challenge of what was taking place. It was okay, it would bring everything into the open.

"Are you concerned, Goldie?" she asked.

"Not really Sonya, because this situation could come out to be a Real Benefit. Last night, I had an encounter with The Dark Side fellow, and he warned me as though he was trying to scare me off, but I am used to his foolishness now, it means nothing to me. This is the next step for me to get past any limitations of human considerations and how people fence themselves in. Just like RT said, I can't teach school for the rest of my life, because I have to move on, and do what Life IS, and that is to become more aware than just being a human on earth for more lifetimes of unconsciousness," I said.

"I know it will be fine, Goldie, it will be our new adventure together," said Sonya, as I laughed from her comment.

Of course, it will be fine. This is such a small thing, even though it is a big deal to Mrs. Beacon and the others. I can See that it will be a good experience for a lot of people to wake up to," I said.

We finished out the day with the children, and then we went to dinner with Rosa and her date. We met them at a restaurant in town, and Rosa's new friend introduced himself...
"Hello Sonya and Goldie, I am Robert Hastings, please join us, it's so good of you to come," he said so politely.

"Hello Robert Hastings, I am Goldie, and this is my new wife, Sonya," I said, repeating myself and getting a laugh from everyone.

We sat down and waited to see if Rosa was going to speak, and then she did...

"Did anything interesting happen today at the school, Sonya?" she asked, as though she knew.

"Yes it did, Rosa. Goldie first taught the children about what they are learning from their nightly experiences, which all of them loved of course. They are learning so much more than they ever knew. Oh yes, there was another little matter that did came up, Goldie received a summons to a court hearing from, Mrs. Beacon. It looks as though she wants to have Goldie possibly lose his teaching position from the school. I find it all so amusing, as Goldie and I laughed about it," said Sonya, with a big smile on her face.

"Robert told me, said Sonya that Mrs. Beacon tried to talk Robert's parents into dismissing Goldie, but they wouldn't do it. She then threatened to keep her children out of school, and he said that was fine. Then, she really got upset, and said she would definitely take Goldie to court, and Robert's father also if she had to," said Rosa.

"Well it's nice to know that someone likes me. I want to thank your father for keeping me on, Robert," I said.

"Actually, he wants to thank you for what you have been teaching. My father has always been interested in the mysteries of the unknown. Both of my parents have studied so many different areas of Life. They have a lot of books from so many various paths and teachings, and they want to hear more about what you are teaching the children. Because of what is now happening, they will wait awhile to see what comes of this court silliness," said Robert.

"I thought your parents attended the local church, and were part of that group, Robert?" I said.

"They do, because they like the people in this town. They want to get along with everyone, because he is a doctor. But, they will also stand up for what they
know is right for them. They will back you all the way Goldie. Now that you've been summoned, which my dad knows about also, he is getting one of his best friends to act as your counsel, because Mrs. Beacon's husband is an attorney. He's been a lawyer for a long time and he is like her, old and set in his ways. My dad sees no problem with the court hearing. He thinks that it will actually be good publicity for the book that you are writing. And Goldie, my father also knows a few publishers," said Robert, with a smiling face.

"You have a great friend here, Rosa, you are very lucky. I can see that Life will bring you many gifts, Robert. The Real Guides want the information I am writing to be known for everyone," I said.

"I knew it Goldie, you are so taken care of by The Guides. Here are real friends to help you through this situation," said Sonya, as she kissed me and then hugged Rosa.

All of us talked while we ate, and after a couple of hours, Sonya and I went back to our place. When we returned to the school, I decided to write a little before going to sleep. Sonya prepared for the children, and what they would be doing for the rest of the week. We both finally went to sleep and woke up a week later, or so it would seem, because the entire week went very fast.

It was now Monday morning and this was the day for the court hearing. It was set for 9 A.M.

Sonya and I were there at, 8:30A.M. Robert and his parents showed up a few minutes after us, along with their friend who would assist me.

"Hello Goldie and Sonya, I'd like you to meet Mr. Jefferson, who will be providing his services for you," said Robert. I stood up and shook his hand as he sat next to us, along with Robert and his parents. Suddenly, a good number of people started showing up, and then even more. They kept coming in until there was standing room only. This was a big courthouse and there must have been hundreds, if not a thousand people jammed into the room.

Robert leaned over and softly said to me, "My parents know the press. They will be covering this story and sending it all over the country with the new telegraph they have in town," he said.

I didn't know what to say. I really didn't expect so many people to be interested
in what was taking place. Then, Mrs. Beacon and her husband entered the room, trying to make their way through the crowd of people that were everywhere. She looked surprised, and a little annoyed at all the spectators. Just as they made their way to their desk in the courtroom, the judge came out.

"All rise for this proceeding. The honorable, Judge Henry Bernard will now preside," said the bailiff.

Then, everyone sat back down. The judge took a moment to look at Mrs. Beacon and her husband, as they were thumbing through their stack of files they brought. The crowd was a bit noisy, so the judge had to call for order and silence.

"Alright Mrs. Beacon, you have filed a complaint with the court against a Mr. Golden Wing, is this correct?" the judge asked.

"Yes your Honor, we have," said her husband.

"And is Mr. Golden Wing in the courtroom?" asked the judge.

Then, I stood up. "Yes sir, I am here," I said, as I took a quick look around at all the people.

"What say you to the charges, Mr. Golden Wing?" asked, the Judge.

"It is all fine with me, your Honor," I said, and then sat down, as I had to giggle with Sonya.

Immediately, the courtroom was all a buzz like a hive of bees, as soon as I made my statement, as the judge pounded his little hammer a few times until people settled down.

"Very well sir, you may precede counselor with your charges," said the judge.

"Thank you your Honor. We are charging the defendant, Mr. Golden Wing, with severe misconduct and inappropriate action pertaining to minors, among other charges we will be submitting as this hearing continues," said Mr. Beacon.

"How do you plead to the charges, Mr. Jefferson?" the judge asked.
"Not guilty to the charges your Honor, but guilty to the appropriate actions your Honor," said Mr. Jefferson.

Then, the courtroom let out a huge laugh, and I could see the judge thought it was pretty funny too. Then, he softly put his hammer down several times, and everyone was silent again.

"Call your first witness, Mr. Beacon," said the Judge.

Then, Mr. Beacon stood up and said, "We would like to move with the guilty plea, and have Mr. Golden Wing removed from his position your Honor," he said.

Then, the judge looked at him rather sternly and said, "I don't think so counselor. I am going to hear this complaint out, so call your first witness," said the judge rather sternly.

"Yes your Honor, I call to the stand, Mrs. Beacon," he said.

Mrs. Beacon slowly stood up, and casually went to the witness stand, and was sworn in. She seemed to be very content with herself as she looked around the courtroom.

Then, her husband asked her, "Please tell the court about what you discovered was being taught in the school, Mrs. Beacon," he asked.

She fidgeted a bit, and then began to speak with her nose rather in the air...

"I found out that our children were being taught something other than our divine religious upbringing. Mr. Golden Wing has been teaching the children things that are not in the Good Book, and are of a heathen nature. I am a fine upstanding religious person, and I don't want my child to hear lies and fantasies that are untrue," she said rather proudly, as she seemed to look around the room for agreement.

"Could you explain to the court in a little more detail, Mrs. Beacon, exactly what you mean about the 'so-called' lies and fantasies?" said her husband, looking a little embarrassed.

"Well," she said, as she hesitated for a moment, "I am of the good
understanding from what I have been taught and always known, and what I have heard about what is taking place in the school does not seem to be the way things have always been. Mr. Golden Wing has brought something entirely new to our good fearing community, and it does not conform to what all of us have known. I want my family to have what the lord has decided for us, and not what someone else imagines," she said rather abruptly and proud of it.

"Did what Mr. Golden Wing teach your child have a bad effect on him?" he asked.

"Of course it did, all of a sudden he wasn't taking the upbringing that I have taught him serious anymore. He seemed to be too happy with himself," she said, with a smirk of pride and a funny look on her face.

Then, the courtroom really got roaring with laughter. I had to laugh myself along with everyone that was sitting with me. It really was a great statement she made, as she put herself right in it.

"Silence please, I would like to hear this most interesting testimony," said the judge, as he rolled his eyes, and kind of looked to the ceiling rather funny like.

"No further questions, your Honor," said Mr. Beacon.

"Do you want to question the witness, Mr. Jefferson?" asked the judge. "Yes sir, I will give it a try, your Honor," said Mr. Jefferson, smiling.

Then, he stood up, and walked over to where Mrs. Beacon was sitting in the witness chair.

"Hello Mrs. Beacon," he said to her, as she nodded, and then quickly froze up. "Mrs. Beacon, did you just say that your son is happier since Mr. Golden Wing has been teaching at the school?"

I could tell that Mrs. Beacon began to realize she was in a bit of a spot, and then she said, "Happiness is not everything. Our children need to be taught the proper doctrine of our lord. The Good Book doesn't mention a lot of happiness, but trail and tribulation to temper the soul, so that we are obedient to the laws of God. If I let my child fly free with what Mr. Golden Wing is teaching, then he will end up as a lost heathen, and be thrown into hell forever," she said.

"I sense you find the imaginative freedom Mr. Golden Wing is teaching to end up as something detrimental, like butterflies that should be restricted from their natural ways, and as nature already demonstrates to use how it is. Do you happen to know what one of the main ideas this country was established on when we broke away from Mother England?" He asked her, as he smiles at her.

Suddenly, she looked to be a little puzzled by the question, and then blurted out, "Freedom from England and The Liberty Bell," she said, as the courtroom roared again with huge laughter.

After a moment of calming everyone down, Mr. Jefferson continued when he stopped laughing.

"I really like your answer Mrs. Beacon, and that is part of it, but it was also founded on the free choice of a person's religious beliefs, or so-called beliefs of any kind, wasn't it?" he asked.

She put her hand to her chin for a moment, as she was looking very puzzled, and then said, "I don't really know, but I do know what the Good Book says, sir."

The courtroom really liked that one too.

"It is amazing how we can so conveniently and quickly forget how we got here, and the rights each one of us has, as it is all laid out in The United States Constitution. The US Constitution is the law of the land that all of us go by, and allows us to be standing here and having a fair trial for both parties involved. Without it, people like you and me, and anyone could be hauled off to a prison or slavery without any considerations at all."

"I will admit, Mr. Golden Wing has taken a risk to bring forth something most of us know little about, but from what I am seeing and hearing, those who are being taught by him have no complaints, but only the opposite, and that of being happier than they have been. If all of us were to follow the ways of the original cave people, then we wouldn't be having this experience now, we would be out battling dinosaurs. So it only makes sense that we keep exploring better ways to survive and be happier. Thank goodness for people like Mr. Golden Wing, who has shown courage and expanded upon what all of us already have known."

"Well, Mrs. Beacon, getting back to what I asked you. It's okay that you don't

know about all the freedoms each one of us have, because everyone else seems to know already, and now you know. Maybe some of your friends can clue you in after this trial," he said, as she looked at him with a hard stare.

"All I know is, The Good Book is the word of God, and all there is," she said very fast.

"Where does it say in The Good Book that children are not to learn about themselves and their dreams, and what else Life has to offer? Have you ever read the story of Joseph and his dreams in the Bible, and how he was sold into slavery by his brothers, then became a renowned dream interpreter?" he asked.

She thought for a moment, and then said, "The Bible says to be aware of false prophets, and that goes for people like, Mr. Golden Wing!"

The courtroom was very quiet, and then Mr. Jefferson asked, "You didn't really answer my question, Mrs. Beacon. Have you read about Joseph and his dreams in the Bible? She hesitated for the longest time, and then slowly said, "I have read about him and his life, but I do not understand how he could interpret dreams, so I do not see where they have any importance at all. I have been taught those things are of the devil," she said, very firmly.

"Well, it would seem, Mrs. Beacon that since Mr. Golden Wing has been teaching about the children's dream experiences, that there has not been any devil around. Again, actually the opposite, that of a new awakening for all the children in his class, as they have even excelled with their basic studies," he said, as the courtroom began talking.

"He is a heathen, and should be cast out," she said loudly.

Mr. Jefferson paid no attention to what Mrs. Beacon blurted out, and then continued...

"From what I am seeing and learning here, Mr. Golden Wing is a fine teacher, and is providing many of the experiences he has lived about Life, just like what is stated in your Bible. The way I see it, the Bible is a valid piece of literature, about the events some people went through from the past. I see it as a part of what all of us experience in this life, but I do not see it as all there is, because I like nature too, and I also have dreams, and I really do want to know what they mean, especially if they really do have a meaning for me."
"His idea is to share what he has learned with others, so they can better understand themselves through their own choices. He doesn't appear to me to be a devil, heathen, or even prophet at all, but a caring person, who has only promoted what the children themselves wanted, and have shared of their own free will," he said, as he waited for an answer from her.

"I don't really know him that well," she said, then stayed silent.

"Mrs. Beacon, if we look at the times in which the experiences from The Good Book were taken, we see that most people lived in very poor conditions, and mainly fear. Would it be so that all of us should continue the same lifestyle, and with all the ideas as then? he asked.

He looked at her, but she said nothing.

"For me, of course not, I want to do better, and become more aware of how to better survive and obtain some kind of happiness while I am here, and living this sometimes hard life. So, does it make sense that we continue to see our lives through the same ideas that we have come to know as all there is, or can be?" he said.

He was silent and waited to see if she would reply, but she didn't.

"This wonderful town that you live in would not exist if people didn't imagine the building of it, or anything else for that matter. Mr. Golden Wing has simply presented an opportunity for the children, and those who choose to be stubborn adults can do so, or imagine a better life without harming anyone or anything. Does it really make sense that we become afraid of our own dreams, whether here, or in other worlds we imagine?"

"All of us have the right to imagine our lives the way we want, without any outer hindrance, intimidation or fear, from others to tell us different. Are there already laws that say we cannot imagine ourselves flying in our dreams? I already know, The Good Book speaks about dreams, and it is written in many places among the text, but who really pays attention? Is The Good Book that you speak about, the only source for all of us to learn from?" he asked.

"It's all I need to live by," she said, very sternly with her head up.
"You do have that right, Mrs. Beacon, and you are perfectly right in your own life, but what about the rights of others? Will it be you that will continually decide their lives also? It would seem to me that everyone else should have the freedom to choose for themselves. What do you think about each person deciding their own legal and rightful freedoms, according to how they want their life?" He asked.

She sat quite for a while, before she had her answer, and then said, "I was taught by my mother that God loves everyone, and we are to spread God's word."

Then, Mr. Jefferson asked, "Okay, Mrs. Beacon, I get the idea here, but where does it say that those who follow the Good Book are to decide the life of others, as to what they say and think?"

Mrs. Beacon looked a little nervous, as she was rubbing her hands together. She just sat there without saying a word. Then, the judge told her to answer the question.

"I am not sure exactly," she said, very softly and sat still. Then suddenly she said rather loud, "The good lord brought the savior for all of us and his word is in the Good Book, that's all I know and need to know, and he said that there is no other way than his," she said.

"I respect your personal choices Mrs. Beacon, but we are all now Americans who decide the labeled faith we wish to follow or not follow at all. Freedom of Choice is the idea here. Just like this trial, it is your Freedom of Choice to make it happen, which you did. Possibly, without you realizing it, you are doing a great service to so many who have no prior knowledge of what Mr. Golden Wing is teaching. Now they will all know, and have the advantage of learning so much more. I would like to thank you, Mrs. Beacon, because I am learning a lot by just being here," said Mr. Jefferson, with a big smile.

Then, the courtroom laughed, and openly applauded. When everyone calmed down, Mr. Jefferson continued...

"Who is it that wrote the Good Book, Mrs. Beacon?" he asked her. "The Lord," she said, as the courtroom laughed again out of control.
"I don't think you understood the question, and that is who actually wrote the book you own?" he asked.

She sat there and looked over at her husband, then up to the judge without saying a word.

Finally, after waiting several moments, Mr. Jefferson said, "People, just like you and I wrote the book, didn't they Mrs. Beacon?

She said nothing, as she just looked around the room.

"Then, they rewrote it, and rewrote it, and rewrote it, and how many times did they do that? Plenty I would say! I like the Good Book too, but I also like to discover what else Life can show me, besides what others have only written. One of the parts I like is where Jesus says, "You shall do greater things than I." Well, from what I have learned so far from what Mr. Golden Wing is teaching, I would say this man has the great courage to be doing greater things," he said, as he smiled.

And then, the children who were there from the school stood up and yelled and clapped, and then some of the courtroom did also. The judge said nothing, and let the response settle down by itself.

"Was Jesus a Christian, like you Mrs. Beacon?" he asked. "Of course, he is the savior for everyone," she said.

"Mrs. Beacon, Christianity was started by St. Paul after Jesus; they didn't even know each other. I do not remember reading where Jesus had someone taking notes of what he was doing or saying, nor him professing anywhere in all he said that one should be a Christian, because it did not exist in his day. It is only obvious someone else started the whole idea. So, it seems to be interesting to wonder how accurate what he supposedly did and said really is. As a matter of fact, Jesus never wrote anything down himself, did he?" he asked.

She sat there not knowing what to say by the look on her face. I think that Mr. Jefferson knew that she had enough, and dismissed her.
"Your Honor, I personally find this case very interesting, and I would like to call to the witness stand some of the children, who were taught by Mr. Golden Wing," said Mr. Jefferson.

"I object your Honor, children have no place in a courtroom, nor their reliable testimony," said Mr. Beacon, as he stood up abruptly waving his arms.

"They have a place in your home and hopefully in your heart, sir, and maybe you should listen to yours a little more closely counselor, now sit down. You may call your first witness Mr. Jefferson," said the judge, as he had a gleam in his eye.

"I would like to call Miss Susan Jamison to the stand," he said.

I was surprised to see Susan here, but I later found out that a lot of things were planned for my benefit that I didn't know about. Susan was sworn in, and then sat in the witness chair. I was learning a lot from all of this. I could easily see that Being Real has its benefits.

"Hello Miss Susan, if you would, please, tell the court and everyone here, what Mr. Golden Wing has shared with you in school," he said.

"Mr. Golden Wing taught me what my mother used to tell me, when I was little, littler that is. She would tell me stories about when she was young, and how she flew in her dreams and had all kinds of invisible friends. Then, as I grew older, or she was older, she stopped telling me the stories, and said that she had made them up. When Mr. Golden Wing started telling us his stories, I knew they were true, because I was having my own Real Experiences all the time, but I didn't tell anyone. Every day in school, I became more and more excited to go, because I knew there was so much more than my life here. Mr. Golden Wing opened a brand new door to a wonderful world that anyone can visit, while they are still living here. I didn't want to stay the same as I was, or as my mother wanted me to be, I wanted my own life. I have come to understand that my life counts, and I want to keep exploring the way Mr. Golden Wing has shown me and my friends who feel the same way," she said.

And then, she went on to tell several of her experiences. After what seemed to be about two hours, I looked around the room at the faces of the people listening; most of them were very interested. The judge then halted the proceedings for lunch. We were to return at two o'clock. Everyone left the
courtroom, and so did all of us. We went across the street and had lunch in a restaurant. I was a little weary from sitting and listening, so I just sat while everyone else talked. Then, a man came up to our table...

"Excuse me everybody, but I wanted to ask Mr. Golden Wing, if I could have an interview, in the near future, about his book and what he is teaching, and also about his upbringing. Oh, I forgot to introduce myself, my name is Bill Henderson, I write for several newspapers," he said, holding out his hand to shake mine.

I stood up and greeted him with my hand, "That would be fine Mr. Henderson, please come by the school anytime. Would you like to join us while you're here?" I asked.

He said yes, and then sat with us for lunch. He was very interested in what I told him and said he would write whatever I wanted said. After lunch, all of us returned to the courtroom by two o'clock and took our seats again. The judge entered the room, and then asked Mr. Jefferson, if he had any more witnesses, and he replied yes.

"I would like to call to the stand, Mrs. Beacon's son."

Mr. Beacon immediately stood up and emotionally objected, but was swiftly overruled by the judge as he said, "I want to know the truth here, don't you counselor?"

Mr. Beacon slowly sat back down and said real softly, "Yes sir."

Then, Mrs. Beacon's son walked across the courtroom and took the stand.

"Hello Billy Beacon, are you ready to tell what you have learned in school from Mr. Golden Wing?" asked Mr. Jefferson.

"Yes sir I am, sir," he said, smiling very politely.

"Since Mr. Golden Wing took over as your teacher, have you learned anything that you think has added a real value to your life?" he asked.

"Oh yes sir, Miss Sonya has always been a wonderful teacher, and I have learned so much from her, but when Mr. Golden Wing started telling us about
our dreams, and the other places we could find for ourselves, and how we could learn on our own, I began to have my own experiences after a while. It was like a new life for me, where I was able to get my own answers without even having to read the books. I am so happy to know about what he has shared with us. I really liked hearing the stories of the other children in the class too," he said, as he was all happy and bubbly.

"I can see by your enthusiasm, young man, that your life is so much better from what you have learned in school, and you are looking forward to learning more, is that not so?" asked Mr. Jefferson.

"Oh yes sir! I am doing great with everything! Then, Billy went on to tell several of his experiences as the courtroom listened.

"Thank you, Billy, you can step down now," said Mr. Jefferson.

"Next your Honor, I would like to call another student, Miss Jenny Lee to the stand," he said. She was sworn in, and then sat down.

"Hello Miss Jenny, I will not take too much of your time. Would you tell us what it is you have learned in school?" he asked her.

"I was having trouble with my math; it has always been hard for me to figure out. I told Mr. Golden Wing, and he suggested that I get help from The Guides, who teach math in our dreams. Every night I would use the name of The Real Guide that he gave me, so that I could ask for help. After all this time doing what he said, I can now understand math, and I really like it," she said, as she smiled and waved to me.

Mr. Jefferson laughed with others in the courtroom and said, "Thank you Miss Jenny, you can step down now."

He walked back to where I was sitting, and then turned and spoke to the judge...

"There is one more witness that I'd like to call, Your Honor, and that is Mr. Golden Wing," he said.

I walked up to the bench, and was sworn in.
"Mr. Golden Wing, please tell the court in your own words, what you are teaching the children besides their regular studies," he said.

"Most of my life I have been exposed to the hidden and unseen areas that most people have overlooked. My parents taught me about my inner worlds, and they were taught by their parents. I don't go around telling everyone, because I know that everyone is not always ready to know. I first present certain ideas to people to see if they would be open to learning more about themselves. I have found that not everyone wants to know what else Life has to offer, most people just want to stay with what they known, and so I respect their choice and let them be."

"I am just like anyone else that wants to share what Life has brought to them that is of an expansive benefit. If it were not for those people that did present what others didn't know, then the world would be different, much different. I have met people like Mrs. Beacon before, and I am truly respectful of their way of living and believing, but I also have a real life, and I like to share what I know as a way of life for me. Everything that I have related to the children has been something of a Real Benefit that they are already experiencing. I am not showing them something new, but simply pointing out what they are not paying attention to. There is nothing bad about it, because everyone is doing it. I wouldn't want anyone to accept what I am presenting, unless they are sincerely interested."

"The children are very open to what I taught them, and after they began experiencing what was already taking place in their lives, they became more attentive and better students, and wanted to learn more. They also became more individualized for themselves, which always leads to a higher level of survival. I am not here to compete or denounce anyone's beliefs or way of life, but I have learned that, just like the continual improvements all of us make and experience in our outer lives, there is always something new to be discovered and shared with ourselves. Each one of us is very unique, and should respect the many experiences we each have. My part is very small compared to all this is in Life, and what I am sharing is just the beginning," I said.

"I have studied many of the beliefs and teachings, which exist in this world, and I can see they do provide a benefit for those that want them. Many of the teachers who started them, went through what I am going through now to find their place in this life. Those people that brought forth the knowledge to be known had the courage to do so, because what they discovered was needed
and served a purpose. I am doing the same thing, and simply offering what I have learned until the next person with something to offer comes forward. I know some people feel threatened by the changes that occur in their lives; I have also at times, and then learned to move past my own ideas of things. What I am presenting adds to our existing experiences here, because Life is ever so much bigger and endless, and there is room for everybody, and there will always be something new to explore," I said, holding my breath.

Then, Mr. Jefferson walked up to the judge and said, "your Honor, in light of all the testimonies we have heard here today, and I'm sure that we could bring in more, I would like to move for a dismissal of all the nonsensical charges against the teaching of Mr. Golden Wing," he said, as Mr. Beacon immediately stood up to protest...

"I object your Honor, I object, I object," as he waved his arms in protest. We want Mr. Golden Wing removed for his position, and we will not accept a dismissal until this is done!"

The judge looked at him for a moment, and said, "Sit down counselor and learn to be an example for your child. You should have paid more attention to what took place here. There is no jury here, and I am making my decision based upon what I have heard, and also the reactions from those in the courtroom. This is The United States of America, and I am a religious person, but first of all, I am an American, and proud of it. All charges from this frivolous case are dismissed, this court is adjourned," said the judge, as he stood up and clapped.

Then, everyone else in the courtroom actually clapped as we stood up and walked out. It had been a real interesting day and all I wanted to do was go back to the school and take a siesta. Several newspaper people wanted to interview me, but I told them to make it tomorrow. Sonya and I walked back to the school, and as we did, there were people that would wave to us and say hello who we didn't know. We arrived at the school, and I went straight for the bed. Sonya came in and sat beside me...

"That was a lot of fun, don't you think, Goldie?" she said laughing, knowing that I was the one they were after.

"I did learn a lot about myself going through the proceedings. I have a hunch that Rebazar and The Guides lined all this up just to test me and provide a very good lesson. I can see a lot of things that I didn't see before, and that is the
illusion that some people present that has no real effect at all. I'm glad all of this happened, even though I wasn't sure of it in the beginning, because I cared for the children. But now, I see Life takes care of everyone, and all I have to do is do my part," I said.

"You have become wiser Goldie," she said, smiling and putting her arm around me.

"I have become worn out from this life, and I still have a lot to do," I said, as we both laughed. "It simply ends another chapter in my life."

After a nice rest, I wrote for the rest of the night. I wanted to add this adventure about the court hearing to my book. It looked as though I would still be teaching for a while, until what else was to come into my life. I had to also finish the book, which would take another several months. When I first started writing, I never really considered that it would take as long as it has, but then again, this was my first attempt at writing. Sonya was lying on the bed watching me as I wrote.

"Did you have fun today?" I asked, as I came over and l sat beside her.

She laughed and hugged me and said, "I sure did, I learned a lot. What we just went through is a good start for what we will have to deal with as time goes on, which is fine with me. Even though things looked bad, it all came out better."

That night, at the beach of The Island TreeHouse, Rebazar came and talked with us...

"Now your life will begin to change for the better. You will soon have offers about your books, and you will be traveling and living in nice places. There are many people who will listen to what you have to say, because they are ready and we are preparing them. You have a school break coming up where the children will be on vacation for a week. You and I will be going to The Real Universes. You will have a lot to write about when you return, and our journey will give you the courage to do what you have to," he said. Then, he got up and left.

# SCENE SEVEN

Sonya and I walked along the beach for the rest of the time until morning till we were back in school. It was almost time for the children to show up and so we prepared.

When they did come in, they were so happy. And to my surprise, they were all here. After they took their seats, I asked them about what happened in their lives since yesterday. Those children who were not allowed to attend said that their parents had a change of heart, after the court hearing.

Everyone else's parents were already fine with how they were being taught, and happy the proceeding came out the way that it did. We spent the entire day going over all the nightly experiences that everyone had. I was having the best time talking with the children, and hearing all their wonderful episodes. The week went rather fast, and during that time I did two interviews with reporters, and talked with a publisher that Dr. Hastings had sent over. He was very interested in what I had to say, and said that when he publishes the book, he would like me to go on tour together, and help promote it. The best part was, his company was going to pay me. He told me to research some societies that are along the lines of what I am writing about to prepare myself for my journey. I did some research during the week, and found out about groups I never knew existed.

It was Friday night, and this was the week the children would be gone. This is when Rebazar said that he was going to take me on our journey. Sonya and I went to The Island Beach at the same time and met RT. All of us stood on the beach as he told me what would take place...

"We will be going to The Great Reality and some of the levels that extend up to IT. Sonya will stay on earth, and tend to your body, because we will be gone for at least three days. This journey will be very special and will add so much to what you already know. We will leave right now," he said.

I said goodbye to Sonya and gave her a hug, then Rebazar led the way through the sky and I followed. We were soon far above the ground. We were sailing on the wind of Life. It was so smooth as we kept going higher into the unknown worlds I would be seeing. We soon came up through what appeared to be a vast ocean that was spread from horizon to horizon. It was a celestial tapestry of liquid reality that was more transparent than solid. As we came to the surface, RT moved his hand into it and showed me what it Really IS...
"This is The Great Sea of Life, an endless ocean of Real Awareness, which has come from The True Reality, The ISNESS. Look all about you at the wonder of it all. You can see The Real Light that each drop of Life is made up of. It is all from The True Source, The Great Reality that provides Life for all there is to exist. These unaware Beings of Light are here to eventually enter the stages of processing themselves with the material worlds to become eventually aware like you and I. The end result is The AllAwareness with The IS. Lifetimes of embodiments mean nothing to The Real Awareness, only The Real Connection to The True Reality has Real Value," he said.

I looked and saw nothing but millions upon millions of endless dots of light that formed this gigantic ocean, like drops in the sea that reached into eternity and beyond. The experience was beyond splendid, even more so than the ocean we had left, where Sonya stood on the beach.

"This is The Great Sea of Love and BeingISness that all souls are from and will someday again return to as their True Source on The Seventh Level. The scriptures of the earth talk of this place, but their description is a pale tale compared to what it Really IS here. The love that is contained here is beyond the passion that is experienced on the lower levels that most people have come to know as their personal love. Until a person takes The Real Journey, they will never know Real Love. Here, we have come into the first position beyond time and space, where Life is more complete and not drudgery like on the earth. This area is not seen by the average person, only by those who are shown," said RT.

We flew up above the surface of the smooth, blue, and beautiful sea of sparkling diamond like Beings that made up this endless sea of light. The air here was so very clear and pure. As we flew higher, I suddenly saw something in the distance. As we got closer, I could see that it was a huge city, the likes of which I had never seen before. The true description of it cannot be written. It was like we were in the future and what I was seeing is what would be. The city was actually surrounded by a huge white wall of sorts, which was very high. As we flew higher, I could see a gigantic mountain that was near the center of the city. The scene was so enormous in proportions, and far too much to estimate with something to compare to.

"We are now in the main part of the second world, or heavenly level that is referred to, by the humans as their final resting place. This is actually the first heaven known to man, and the home of one of his worshiped gods. What you
are looking at is The Mountain of Light in this heaven. This is where The Sound and Light Reality from The ISNESS flows downward to sustain this world and all the worlds below, including the earth and all the systems and galaxies. The Sound Light Reality takes on a dualistic creative nature from this level, thus you have the opposites in human life," he said.

The mountain was so very tall, it was undoubtedly many times taller than any mountain on earth. Out of its summit there were millions of different colored lights that were continuously pouring into the ethers and upward into the sky. There was also a beautiful sun that lit the entire area with a sharp brilliance and clarity. Here too, the sun caught my attention more than anything, as it stood glowing for all.

"This great city has many various names by those who have taken this journey, and then went back to earth to tell others of this place. There have been many who have traveled here and thought this was the ultimate heaven, but this is just the first heaven, not the last one. We will meet with the god that governs this world for you to see him as he really is. Many of the earth people consider him to be the ultimate creator, but he is only in charge of managing this level and the ones below it. He is so much more aware than the humans, so most tend to worship him as their god, not knowing he is a governor," said RT.

We flew over the city that was filled with white palaces and with beautiful domed roofs. I could see people below throughout the area. They were very simply dressed, and seemed to be very happy here. There was soft and beautiful music that was everywhere, this place was truly a heaven to be in. I really did like what I saw, but I liked my simple life at the beach also. The feeling here is so very clear and clean compared to the earth.

"This world is the source of the psychic sciences that I have told you about. You have not encountered any psychics on earth at this time, but in your next lifetime you will," said Rebazar.

As he was telling me about where we were, there were beautiful Beings that passed us, while we were up over the city. They seemed to be going somewhere, and then they would disappear into the lights that came from The Mountain of Light.
"Those who come here from the earth, and especially those who have had a hard life, immediately consider this to be the best of all worlds, because compared to the earth, this level is so much better," said RT.

We flew down to the surface, as I saw people dressed in simple clothing, and they were involved in different forms of creativeness that I had never seen before. It didn't seem to be the same type of lifestyle like that on earth, but it was similar. I never saw any form of money or the usual means of exchange. Everyone was busy and very happy to be doing what they were involved in. This place was a paradise beyond description, yet the life here was very simple. As we moved along and went further into the city, we came across a huge statue that was so tall I could hardly see the head of it. It stood all the way up to the clouds, and seemed to look out over everything. RT said the statue was erected in honor of the governor of this world. It had been here for millions of years, and was built by many unknown inhabitants of a distant race from the past. He said this is the heaven to many of the religions of the earth, and that they had established themselves here to maintain their followers for support.

He also mentioned the alien influence, and said that I would learn so much more in my future life on earth about them. We moved to the palace of the lord and governor of this world. As we entered from the air, we landed on the huge entrance area. There were 'soldier-like' people at the entrance of the palace. They immediately let us pass, as we went inside and walked through a hallway that was faintly lit, and had numerous large paintings, the likes of which I had never seen. Then, we entered a vast room that had an opening to the sky, and I could see millions of stars shining everywhere in a beautiful open vastness.

As we moved into the room, something began to appear in front of us in the distance. The form then became more solid looking and had the features of a man. He was wearing a reddish type of apparel, and looked to be almost ten feet tall. He watched us with keen eyes as we entered. I was a little surprised at his appearance, because what I was seeing was like nothing that I had seen before. If a person were to come here in their dreams, which many do, they would think they were only dreaming, because of how different this world is compared to the earth and what is there. This heaven is like being in a dream.

"The first lord governor of heaven and earth," said Rebazar, as he nodded in a humble pose.

Rebazar told me, prior to entering this world, about this soul that governed the
physical worlds, and this heaven that was thought to be the ultimate by so many people on earth. He said to pay attention to what he would say, because it was his job to escort unaware souls to his kingdom and keep them there, until they had to return in future lifetimes to try and find The Great Reality again. I was a little excited to see what would happen with this ruler, and how he would handle himself. Then, he spoke...

"Welcome good friends, welcome to your final resting place where I will take care of all your needs," he said, as he softly laughed with a tone of mockery in his voice. Then, he looked at me very keenly, as though he were sizing me up.

I looked at RT, and he just nodded to me as though to say just go through the experience. I looked back at the ruler as he spoke again.

"Young soul, you like many others have had a hard life on the earth, and I, your lord god have provided this entire world for you to come and be with me forever. Everything you will ever need is here. I can give you all that you desire for as long as you want something. There is nothing that I would not do for you. All I ask is, that you worship only me, and I will provide whatever you want," he said, and then he looked at me as though he wanted me to react to what he said.

I just stood there waiting for him to continue, and he did.

"What is it that you want and I will get it for you?" he asked again, waiting for my response.

I took a chance and said, "The Real Truth."

He hesitated for a moment, and then said, "What can be more real than what you see? Look at all the light there is in my kingdom, and look at all the happy souls who are here. Ask any of them who is their lord and god, and they will tell you that it is me. Look above you into the endless sky, I am everywhere there can be anything. All the riches of heaven and earth are here, and they are all yours, if you will stay and love me as I have always loved you," he said, with a slight grin on his face, but seemed to hide it once he saw I noticed it.

"Thank you for the offer, but I will trust my guide, and what he has taught me. We are only here to visit and then we will be going," I said.

Then, he looked very directly at me and said, "You have gained the wisdom of

The Unknown Guides. You have passed the test that enables yourself to enter the next world that awaits the expansion of your awareness into what you will be choosing. I cannot fool all those who come here, but then again, I have fooled most of the souls who are all around me. I would have liked to have you with me, but it is your choice to wander through Life, always entering The Unseen like your guide. I could have given you everything, but you chose nothing, so be it," he said, and then he slowly disappeared.

"This has been something that I didn't count on," I said.

"This lord has a different line for each soul that comes here, Goldie. He was hoping you would accept his offer, but because of the awareness you have, he knew you wouldn't. If it were anyone else, they would have gladly accepted, and stayed here to get what their personal self wants. The unaware, stay here for many earth years, but must eventually return unconscious to earth under the command of The Lords of Karma, as they are the real task masters of souls," said RT, as he motioned for us to fly to the next level.

He took off first, and then I quickly followed. As we were leaving, and passing above the Mountain of Light, I could see transparent Beings moving about in the ethers and going about their way, it was an incredible site to behold. There was so much beauty in this world, so much more so than on the earth. The beautiful terrain and lifestyle are all so breathtaking. I can understand why the souls, here, were so happy and wanted to stay. We flew above the city and up into the vast sky, until the Mountain of Light were no longer seen. The sky around us had various beautiful colorings that were soft in nature and then began to change as we came to the next world. As we flew, Rebazar told me to look at myself and how illuminated I was.

"Just like on earth where you left your physical body, you have left your emotional body behind at The Astral Heaven. We are not moving in the various bodies that you have, but The Real Awareness you are. There are mystical paths on earth that use what is known as the light body, but they are only referring to the emotional body that glistens when it emerges from the physical shell. The light body can only take you to the second world, the one we were just in, because there is a cord attached to it that limits you to the first heaven only. There are many teachers that consider the light body to be the soul of the individual, but it is not true," he said.

We soon entered the next heaven, and as we did, RT told me to pay close
attention to the dividing line that was not really seen, but perceived through the awareness of one's self. It was very subtle, but as we crossed over, I could faintly sense something. Then, we flew up above the area to a city that was so magnificent, that no amount of description could tell of it. RT said that there were many names for this world, but what was important was the experience of being here, and not what so many have labeled it as, just like where my parents lived on earth. He said that as I meet the inhabitants of each world I would become more familiar with what each person terms where they are. For now, it was the second heaven, in the secondary realms, all I needed to know. In this world, there were three gigantic towering mountains that were higher than the Mountain of Light on the level below, with incredible light coming from them. It was hard for me to realize how the beauty of this place could be more so than the one we just left. I was in awe at all I saw.

"This is the highest world known to most established beliefs. This god of man, governor of this realm, is the holy lord god for almost all the invented systems. This governor is looked to as the ultimate authority according to where you were born on earth. It would be no different than you are living on one side of an ocean and someone else living across the world. You would have your name for the ocean and they would have theirs, but it would be the same ocean. This is how the millions of souls all over the earth relate to the governor of this world. Each has their own name for him. It really doesn't matter what idea people have about their authoritive lords. Many of the wars that have been fought through human history, have been about whose god is better and bigger, when they are all really this same god," he said.

I could see within myself that I was learning to understand so much more of how Life represented itself to us as humans, and how limited our awareness of what is really taking place is. Being in this realm gave me a whole new vista of realization from my physical life. As we floated and observed the world in which we were in, I was overwhelmed at the magnificent beauty that was all around me. Everything was so wonderful. I could see myself living here and having a good life, but I think Rebazar knew what I thought, and began to laugh a little.

"You would not be happy here long, Goldie, your heart for adventure is too big. It will take more than this place to satisfy you and what you will be doing in Life. This place is for those who are looking to be satisfied with their emotional and mental needs," said RT.
I was still so amazed at this place, because this heaven is really a heaven, so much more so than the first heaven.

"This is the great city that is spoken of in the holy book of man's scriptures, like the one Mrs. Beacon holds so dear to her. You can see that the dimensions of it are all laid out according to what is written, but to tell a follower of their faith that this is only one of many heavens, and also one of many governors and lords, would be a waste of words, because of how people are taught on the earth. This is simply one of the 'Many Mansions,' said RT.

There are wonderful deserts, hills, and rivers, that are everywhere in this wonderful land. The people who live here are very beautiful and have great gardens of lovely flowers of all fragrances to wander through. As we flew about, we were not really noticed, but seemed to blend in with others. There were so many different types of people who reside here. What I liked about the city is that it was right next to an incredible ocean, which was so much greater than the one I would visit in my Dream Visions. Rebazar told me about the sound that emanated from this world; he said that it was the sound of AUM. He said many of the mystics on the earth used the word AUM to reach this heaven, considering it to be their ultimate resting place. He told me that the word I use to connect to The Real Light and Sound is the direct way to reach the ultimate, The Great Reality.

"This is The Mind Power Heaven. This is where lives, The Lord God of the ancient scriptures in man's documented works. Many of the world systems call this ruler by different names, but it is all The OM God. He is the one people pray to for his blessings, and the same god that people petition to destroy their neighbors. The idea of 'Amen' originally comes from AUM. Of course, to try and explain the reality of this to an inexperienced human is futile. All things of the mind come from this realm, and then filter down into the material worlds," he said.

The entrance to the city has a huge wall that has all types of precious stones all about it. There are many gates that have pearls on them, and the streets and some of the buildings are actually made of pure gold. What I noticed was there was no sun at this time. Rebazar said the light here comes from the sound of the dualistic power AUM, which is a lesser part of The Sound Wave of The IS.
We entered the city through the gates, and saw so many people who were similar to angels, as they were going about their affairs. I was told the people here worked for the advancement of mankind in some form of creativeness, such as writing, painting and all forms of inventiveness.

RT said the light in this world was always present, not like on earth where there is day and night. We went to what he called The River of Light. It is a huge river that you would think to be The Ultimate Reality, because of the light that it is. It flows from what is known as The Throne of God, where it moves outward into time and space and all the worlds beyond, and below to create and sustain all there is. I could have stayed and watched it forever; it is truly magnificent. At the base of the Three Mountains is the source of this river and where lies The Lord God, The All Knowing Mind God that rules over this level, the Astral Worlds, and the physical realm and all that reside here.

Our approach was very casual, as we came upon the deity that appeared and then greeted us. He is a brilliant light that supersedes anything that I had seen so far. He appeared to us as a gigantic soul, who was in my estimation about three hundred feet tall. RT said this god can appear any way that he wishes, depending upon who he is meeting and trying to convince. He also said that all the governors of these lower worlds know him very well, and he only pretends to fool the onlookers who are unaware. I have come to find out these gods purposely hold souls back from going into The Real Universes, because then they are no longer slaves to such authorities. It's a test of strength to see who will make it and who won't. Each one of us builds our strength to meet Life head, and this is all part of it.

The Lord Governor God is positioned on his throne to appear as the magnificent one that lights all of life, on this level that is. After seeing him, I can certainly understand why any soul would think that he is the ultimate. It is a joyous feeling to be here in his presence and to experience him as he really is. As we were standing in front of him, The River of Light was constantly moving outward into all directions, and the thundering sound of AUM was everywhere. This god is a strong looking soul, especially with his size, as he was there gazing down at us with a benevolent smile on his face. Only a part of his upper body was showing, as it was mostly his head with all the light around it. He didn't have the white beard, like the scriptures have portrayed him having. As he began to speak, the sound of the AUM became a roaring flow that moved outward through everything.
"Greetings my children, I am all that there is! I am the beginning and the end of everything, and there are no other gods but me. You have reached the ultimate goal that you have been seeking for all your life. I have been waiting for such a long time to greet you. I have seen the tribulations you have endured, but now your wait is over, and you are home at last and I will tend to all your needs as you worship only me and no one else," he said, in his mighty voice.

This god was so much more convincing than the last one. I liked the sound of his voice; it had a lot of strength in it. I looked at RT, and he slightly shrugged his shoulders as if to say, "Whatever."

This was my experience, and Rebazar was just going to see how I would handle it. Then, The OM God continued...

"Do not be deceived by those who profess to know the secrets that only I know, and can give to every soul that finds me in their heart. I am The Great Mind Power, who has created all there is. No one is greater than I, and there will never be anyone greater. It was I who sent the saviors to earth to redeem mankind from all his sins, and to rejoice in the fact that I welcome all with open arms. Only I rule, and no one else. The freedom that one seeks is for those who worship me, for I am The Lord that has a divine plan for all my subjects," he said, as he looked down upon us, as he began to laugh in a soft voice.

"All that man sees is good and evil, is part of what I am, it is my nature. Everywhere you go you will find me in all things. I am the mystery that all men are seeking, but I will not tell them what they should seek or how they should find the answers to what they want to know. I keep all who seek to know me ignorant of how things really are, it is my way of getting all to be obedient to me and the power that I have as their god. You can be a part of the glory that will last forever if you bow down, and become subservient to my will," he said, as he looked at us with a big grin on his face.

I was beginning to get the idea of this god, and how he manipulated unaware souls into his domain. It was very understandable according to the way that all of this heaven was laid out. There is a lot to be described here, so much more than I could ever relate.
Then, The Lord God said, "You have listened well. I have performed my duty as the ruler of this world. I can tell that you know more than the average soul. You are free to go further." Then, he gradually melted into the light and was gone from our sight.

RT said that this god only gave a small performance this time, because he knew the awareness we had. For most souls, he talks until they are so worn out they gladly concede to his demands. For me, it was all so stunning with more realization that became part of me. He also said, that we had now dropped two more bodies, that of the mind and memory.

RT motioned for us to continue on. We flew up over the mountains and through the wondrous light that was all around us, ever upward into the sky. Then, I did see a gigantic sun in the vast sky. I got the impressions from what I experienced from this god, that he wanted to be seen as the light of this realm, and not the actual light that is here. So far, everything was more than I could have imagined it to be. What I have said here about these worlds is nothing compared to what there really is. I know that I could write for a hundred years and still not give all the details of what I had experienced on this journey so far.

Rebazar directed us to a very interesting place that was at the top of The OM Heaven, just beyond its borders.

"You are going to find this place to be a Real Experience for you, Goldie. We are going to drop off your four other bodies, which are unseen, those that you use while on earth. We must leave them here until we return from our journey in the higher levels," said RT.

Rebazar said this place is a depository station for those who are going beyond the realms of The OM God. To enter into the higher levels of the limited realms and beyond, we now needed nothing to encumber us. He said I would now experience my Real Awareness without the restrictions of the mind bodies and the lower emotions. From the looks of everything, I felt as though I were in some future event. We entered this strange place and we were greeted by Beings that were not earthly looking. They said nothing, as they escorted us through hallways and finally into a gigantic room where I saw thousands upon thousands of bodies encased in cylinder type containers. They motioned us to step into a pair of the open containers, and as we did, I felt myself leave from the body that I was still wearing. In an instant, I was floating above the structure that RT and I had entered and feeling as free as a bird.
"What happened?" I asked, as I looked at Rebazar, all aglow.

"You are now free to move about in your Real Awareness, without the restrictions of your mind bodies," he said.

"I feel wonderful. I feel really free for once in my life," I said, as I was moving about.

"Now that you are outside of the mind completely, there can no longer be any deception of what you have come to know over all the lifetimes spent in the material realms. We will now enter the final two realms before going into, The Real Universes of Purity," he said.

Rebazar led the way as I followed his light body.

"We are now approaching the upper realms in the limited worlds, which are more suitably humble than the religious heavens and The Gods of Man. You will see and experience the difference. We will meet with the governors of these realms so that you can experience them for yourself," said RT, as we swiftly moved along.

We entered the next level and came into a world where a wondrous light, exceeded the ones that I had witnessed so far. We were in a place that was especially for the purpose of removing the Ingrams of the mind from ourselves. We were now without any restriction from the secondary causes of the mind, because we no longer had a mind and its influences. RT said the mind is just like a machine without any awareness. We were now Light Beings that moved freely about with a great feeling of awareness and a perception that I had never known before as we came into this level.

To most, it would be hard to imagine themselves without a mind, but actually, it is so much better not to have one at all. The reason that most people will not look to their Real Awareness is because their own mind, which is ruled by the invented gods, tells them there is nothing but what is seen on the outer and through their senses. I have come to learn these gods are everywhere like they claim, but only up to their levels and not beyond them. The best part of Life exists beyond what the mind can perceive, but very few will take the risk to find out. Without the freedom from the mind and its pull, all one has to look forward to his more lifetimes of wandering about, and trying to discover the mysteries of Life.

This new world was so much more brilliant than the last, and the music was of violins, that I had only heard once on the earth. These violins were of such a fine sound that I know the ones from my world could not compare. The wonderful sound was everywhere, and calmed my very Being into wanting to stay and be here forever. RT motioned to keep moving, because it was just going to keep getting better. He took me to a special area where I was able to gain a vast amount of knowledge about all the lower worlds we had passed through. We went around, and met several of the rulers and spent some time with them. They furnished me with huge amounts of knowledge that became so much of a part of me. There were many different worlds here and each one had a governor who ruled over it. They were so filled with light, and much more humble than the gods who rule the lower heavens and earth.

Rebazar led me to the main governor of this level. He said we were now beyond all the good and evil that existed in the lower levels. I could feel the difference within myself, I no longer had the mind to pester me with all the attitudes that it contains. I felt a real sense of peace and a greater harmony about this area and myself.

We came to the small palace where the Being who oversees all, and knows all resides. It was nothing fancy, but rather humbling. RT said we were in a new area that was so much better than the last two gods, but we were still down from The Real Universes of Sound and Light, the original home of our Being.

As we approached, I could hear the beautiful sound that moved through this world, it was very soft and soothing. The surroundings were of a wonderful nature with rolling hills and trees all about and fragrant flowers that grew everywhere. I was told the entire scene was created for my benefit, because of how the awareness that existed here is. We entered the humble palace and immediately saw the overseeing Being sitting in a casual position upon what looked to be a chair that was made just for him. RT led the way, and then sat down on the floor in front of him, and so I did the same. The light that came from this Being was extremely splendid and moved out through the walls and beyond. Then, he began to communicate to us in a silent language of perception...

"Hello my fellow Beings, greetings to both of you as you have come so very far to be in my home. As Rebazar Tarzs very well knows, I am known by many names throughout the worlds of time and space. What I am called is not important, but The True Reality that will Always Be is all that matters. You are

among the privileged to be here, because you have taken the time to learn what very few will explore within their own lives. I am always so glad to see those that make it to my world beyond the ploys of The Authoritative Gods. You are not held here like in The Two Heavens of Man, where the gods must persuade the unaware into submission. This is the first real step of your journey to The True Reality. All that you have learned has come from your unseen life and those who have instructed you. You can plainly see that the world on which your body lives does not have the answers for you. You have decided to go further than most, and be a part of something that cannot be explained or proven. You are now beyond the mind and all that it considers. As I communicate to you, it is not with words or voice, but through your own Being. What we are experiencing here is The Real Natural Life that each person wants, but must learn to go after for themselves. It is not my words that have the real meaning to what is being given to you, but The Light and Sound that is everywhere and knows all that is to be. You and I are beyond the blessings that provide the healings for the lower bodies."

"We are in a wonderful place where all is a Real Blessings that continues on forever. I have only given you a small portion of what you will be receiving, because there is no limit to how long it will take you to gain what is needed. You will experience so much more than your little body and mind can comprehend. You may now pass on to the next world of experience," he said, and then closed his eyes and remained silent and became the light all around him.

RT and I softly removed ourselves and went outside. I was so invigorated by what this unique individual imparted to me and by being in his presence. There was so much more to this experience, and it would have been too much to relate. I looked around at all that was here and then to my very Being. It was such a gift to be past the mind and into a place that not even my imagination could see.

I followed RT into the beautiful sunlit sky that had a marvelous blue color to it. I was like an effortless feather on the wind. There was nothing but a Real Freedom that kept getting better, a Beingness that was complete and gaining more momentum within me as we continued on. RT said that we would be entering the last heavenly realm before getting into The True Reality of The Real Universes.

"This next level will amaze you," he said, as we flew into a new position of awareness for me.

I could sense the subtle transition that took place as we entered. And then it became very apparent, as we were in a wonderland that seemed to be more fantasy than Reality. The light here was so bright that it took a few moments to adjust myself to it. I became aware that my Being had recognized the perception of a greater sense of hearing and seeing. This level was different from the last one. I was again amazed at what Life could possibly be. Even within myself, I could not comprehend the endless expansion that was taking place. It seemed to be so automatic, as we continued into each new world and level. I was now enjoying a great sense of Well Being, to where I could have once again stayed forever.

RT motioned me on, and gave me the impression that this is nothing compared to what will come. We flew over a beautiful mystical world that is filled with worlds upon worlds of huge continents and cities that were something that I could not describe. There were palaces studded with precious gems everywhere with Majestic Beings, who lived and had their being here. This world is called, 'The House of Truth,' and thought to be the ultimate reality also. It is a wondrous world where one would consider everything to be a real dream. Anything you want is here just for the asking, and the sound is purifying.

Rebazar said there were those in earth's history that visited this place and tried to tell of its wonder, but were usually not believed, and many times destroyed for the supposed telling of tales that were not in agreement to the documented systems of their day. Everyone here lives on The Light and Sound that sustains all Life, which moves from the higher levels to this one. The Sound here was that of a wondrous flute that filled everything with a feeling of magical wonder. We went down to the surface and stood in front of a huge castle like structure. There were large jeweled golden gates at the entrance, which opened automatically as we approached. We walked through a beautiful courtyard that was filled with a radiant green lawn that was spread out everywhere. There were wonderful and Beautiful Beings who greeted us as we moved along.

As we came to the palace, a door opened and we went inside. We entered a huge room, and on the far side was the overseer of this level. RT told me his name, and he said that I was not to mention it. He said that each person that wants to enter this world will be given the name of this Being through their Real Experiences, once they have earned the privilege to be here.

By repeating his name, one can gain this level and then proceed from here. The
Being we stood in front of had a marvelous light that spread from him and filled the room and then went out into the foreverness. He appeared to be a youth, and looked as though he were an Indian like me, but without any hair. We sat in front of him on pillows that were placed before us. His smile was so radiant, as he looked upon us. For the longest time he didn't give any impressions. He remained silent and illuminated. Then, I began to receive impressions from him...

"Welcome Golden Wing and to you my good friend Rebazar Tarzs. You are on your life long journey to The Real Wonder and adventure that awaits you, Goldie. You have become a part of a select group of Beings that provides a Real Service to all of mankind. Your task will not be easy, like your being able to be here in this world. The earth is a hard place, and The Real Guides know this, but they are so in love with Life that they sacrifice their eternal position in The Real Universes to serve the people of earth. They must tolerate the unaware and their love for their illusions. What you will be doing will far surpass what the average person can comprehend. As usual, you will be looked upon as a person providing a story of fantasy. The majority of mass thinkers only consider their old rewritten documents to contain truth, but it is only the truth from the pens of those that maintain control, not The Real Truth. Real Truth is unique and not something found in any old book, or even in the heart of a person that loves the most, but in the very BeingISness, which is provided by The Real Guides and what they deliver from The IS. You, like others before you, will go forth and present The Real Possibilities to the unaware. But, unlike so many that have gone before you, you are from a strange and unknown relationship, The Real Universal Guides."

"The heart of man can be taught what has value if he listens and learns about The Great Secrets that can be his. No man will find the answer to his life in any common form, but only through the realization of recognition of What IS Real. When the student is ready, The Real Guides will direct him to The True Source that provides everything. Mankind considers what he is discovering on earth is something that is necessary, but when he gains The Real Connection to the Sound and Light Reality, his life begins to make sense. You will provide so much for so many and become a Universal Being like, Rebazar Tarzs, and teach those who have the heart to go past their limited minds. All you will ever need to know will be from the higher levels that you will enter after you leave here. Thank you for listening, and now you can pass into The Pure Reality of Sound and Light," he said.
RT stood up and did a slight bow and so did I, then we went out into the courtyard again. "When we leave here, we will first be entering a zone of darkness that divides the lower worlds from The Real Universes," he said.

Then, we flew upwards above these wondrous worlds upon worlds and into a bluish gold sky with a huge bright sun. We traveled for a ways, until we came to the area we were to go through.

"The Deep Dark Border," said RT, as he motioned.

RT entered first and then I followed. All of a sudden, everything was very black except for our Light Beings. We were now a light unto ourselves, as I thought about the earthly scriptures in this moment. It was a rather interesting experience where we were. RT said this was a place that most thought to be the end of all Life, and was considered to be nothingness, an endless void. But actually, this is the point where each soul wants to get to so they can become NU, as this is merely the real start of the journey. We continued on through the dark gloom and floating through the darkness, over what seemed to be water, until all of a sudden I began to see a little light up ahead. It started off small, but soon grew until we entered, The Seventh Level.

All at once, and with an amazing recognition of where I was at, we finally arrived at the first part of our Real Destination, The Seventh Level, and The Real Home of our Radiant Being. As we did, we came out of the total darkness into the most unbelievable light of an awesome universe. At first, the light was so blinding I could hardly stand it. It took me a moment, and then I did see this marvelous sight to behold. There is no real way to describe what I was experiencing, as I became aware of this True Reality. There was so much light everywhere that it took me a moment to adjust. When I did, standing in front of me was, Shiss Harah U.

"Hello Goldie, welcome home," she said, in the loveliest voice. "Am I really here or is this all a dream?" I asked.

"You came from The Passing Dream, where you were dreaming in the lower levels, and now you are ALL Aware," she said, taking my hand and helping me to adjust.

It took a few moments to realize the difference of being in this incredible
position. It was so amazing, the light here is so pure and radiant, and it was everywhere and everything. Looking around, I was not familiar with the huge structures that I saw, but I could see that they were made of a silvery gold, almost entirely. Just by being in this new position, my awareness was expanding and becoming capable of realizing far beyond what my outer personal self could ever know. Shiss explained to me what the huge golden structures are.

"They are immense palaces, Goldie, just like on the earth and they are your color, and you and I have our own," she said.

From what I had learned on the earth, there is no way I could ever describe this region and all that was in it. Once I crossed over to this Real Universe, I was so brilliantly illuminated, brighter than any sun that I have ever seen. Shiss and RT were Radiant Beings beyond description, and there were so many more Beings, who were the same everywhere. It was like being amongst all the stars in the heavens, everyone was so radiant. I stood for the longest time, which there really is none at this level, and watched all the beautiful Beings pass and go about their affairs. After a while, Rebazar led us over to a huge lake, or what appeared to be one. He said that it is filled with The Living Waters that are The Eternal Aliveness for all Beings who have earned their way here to have and enjoy.

"The waters flow from here to all the areas that make up this Great Universe of The IS," said RT. "This is the universe of The Great Overseer of IS, the unique manifestation that provides for all who reside here. He is one of the many True Beings from The Great Reality, who oversees this Reality and supports all with The Real Light and Sound. His position is to take care of those who have established themselves here. You are now one of the few earth people who has come this far, you can now consider yourself to be an Eternal Being of this Real Universe. You will take back with you The Great Knowledge, and Real Experience that you will gain here, and then tell the people of earth there is so much more to Life than just tending to their body until it vanishes from them," said RT.

It was very plain to See, and actually PerSeeve that this universe had become so, from the eternal awareness of The Great Overseer of The Great Reality. This was an incredible verification of The Real Truness Life IS. This defined position was so wonderfully abundant with everything that was of the most pleasing and gracious experience. I would say the Beings here were more than gods themselves, as they displayed their brilliance, which radiated constantly.

There was a constant aroma in the air, a sweetness that came from all the different trees and flowers that were everywhere. It was hard for me to imagine how all this came about, especially the jeweled trees, that were everywhere with singing birds and their sweet melodies.

RT said that all was to be enjoyed and loved according to The Reality IT IS, and everything is for all the Beings who have made their life here. There is a constant Aliveness within this universe, unlike the lower one's we had moved through. I discovered, there was no darkness here, evil, or wrong doing that everything is Pure and Real, and that the lower realms are a pale reflection of this incredible place.

In all my life, I could never have imagined that there were so many colors as there were in this world. I tried to count them, but it was useless, because there would always be more, that would appear and disappear into the silvery light that emanated from everywhere. There was no boredom here or the drudgery of having to work for anything. Whatever one needed was readily available.

"This is The Real Heaven that all people are seeking," said RT. "Most are led to believe the lower realms are The Real Heavens, and the governors who rule them are the gods their scriptures speak of as The Ultimateness. Most people are trapped by the rulers of the first two heavens, and persuaded to return to earth for more lifetimes, thinking the earth is what their god has planned for them forever. You are now having 'Real Experience,' in a place that is beyond what the mind and senses can comprehend. What words can describe this position of 'BeingISness'? You have now taken The Real Journey into The Truness that can only be realized within each one of us. The written word should lead a person to What IS Real, and then The Real Universal Guides will assist with the journey home."

After being on this journey, I was better prepared to understand what was really taking place from the limited awareness that anyone has with the physical body. All the precious things that have value on the earth, and so much more are found here, radiate the various colors from their source. They are made of gold, silver, emerald, crystal, coral, pearls, and too many others to mention.

"This is what is known as a lotus flower, Goldie," said RT, as he pointed to a huge plant that was as big as a house, and there were many that were even bigger. "On earth they are rather small in comparison, but here they can even be miles wide."

I did see many of them that were beyond the reach of my sight that were spread far and wide. They had all sorts of colors, which were brilliant with light moved from the center of the flower and then outward, and as they did there, would be a Radiant Being who are part of the light that streamed out into this unknown universe.

"These Great Beings have served their time in the lower worlds as you are doing now. They have earned their way to this wonderful place and are now free forever. The True Reality is what each Being has within them already. When The RealU decides to take the journey home, The Real Guides will assist until The RealU reaches this universe, The Seventh Level," said RT.

I continued to be amazed at everything I was Seeing, since everything here is so perfect and the awareness of this level is so great and incredible that I was constantly filled with a joy and enthusiasm beyond anything that exists on earth. I could know anything I wanted to, and anything I wanted was of a beneficial nature. My Being was absorbing an awesome awareness at a staggering pace, but what was being realized was not prevalent to the meaning of things that applied to the lower realms according to the mind and senses, even though what I PerSeeved could apply anywhere. I knew what was taking place, but to relay it or write about it was something that I would have to figure out when I returned. From the position I now had, I didn't want to ever return. All the levels I had been through were basically forgotten compared to this one. I had to keep reminding myself that I was in Reality and not dreaming, because everything here is so wonderful and so perfect. The Beings here are far beyond the saints that the earth had come to know. RT said that so many of the figures in human history were only students of The Real Guides.

"Those who are in training to become one of us must first prove themselves by going out and presenting what they have learned from their training to see if they can 'Weather the Storm' from the human awareness of how Life is thought to be," said RT.

There are so many wonderful rivers here that flow everywhere through this endless universe; they are all different shapes and sizes. There is a sound here that I was not familiar with; it was so haunting and cleansing. RT said it was the sound similar to bagpipes, an instrument that is used in other countries on the earth. Drinking the waters, here, transforms you into the desire to reach beyond even this world into the real unknown higher levels. I took a drink and I could

feel the wonderful difference. I was lured in my awareness to go further within myself, but I wanted to stay and See so much more of this place that had unlimited joy and bliss. I felt like a young child free of any care or want. In the human mind, it is very hard to even consider that a place like this could even exist. RT said that it takes millions of lifetimes to get to the position of realizing there is more to Life than the material bodies we are so used to.

Everywhere I looked, there were Radiant Beings enjoying all that this place had to offer. The Beings, here, are the most amazing part and whatever they want they can have. The palaces, as RT called them, are all over the landscape and in endless scenes. We came across an area that was like a retreat, a large area where many Beings gathered. It was covered with the greenest golden layer of grass that spread itself everywhere. Shiss stood with me as we explored the vastness of this Real Universe.

"I have never seen such a vibrant greenness," I said. "Everything is so pure and good here."

"Come and see our palace, Goldie, the one you and I have for ourselves," said Shiss.

RT went off with some of the other guides to a meeting, while I followed Shiss to her place. We floated over the surface like angels gliding on the wind. There was no need to hurry here, because all there is in The Here and Now, and there would always be more opportunity for whatever was needed.

We came to her huge palace that was all of a silvery white glow, and brilliant white with shiny golden trim around the entrance along all the openings. Looking up, I could barely see the top. It was so tall and large. As we went inside, I saw very large paintings on the walls. They were very interesting and held my attention as I stood and looked at every detail.

"You painted those, Goldie, you are the artist," she said.

As I stood there and looked at them for a moment, I said, "How can that be? I don't recall any of this," I said, wondering about them.

"There is the bigger part of you that you are not Seeing yet, which will eventually come into view. All of us have so many different areas to our life, and at some point we become Totally Aware of our Real Connection and who we really are.
The life you have on earth is so different from who you really are, yet similar, because it is only the 'tip of the iceberg.' The earth is the 'Testing Ground of Confusion,' to where The RealU eventually learns to focus on The True Reality, and then is guided to The Real Universes. By going through the 'Process of Elimination,' The RealU comes out of its unconscious agreement with matter and time, and discovers there is only one way to experiencing What IS Real, and that is through Itself. Your position is not through yet, because there are a lot of souls looking for The Real. The Guides have a purpose for you, and that is why you have the experiences you do. Your training is very intense and will continue to be so."

"The earth, as we know it today is moving into the most rigorous conditioning that it has ever known. You will experience what I am telling you in your next lifetime. Future societies will be of more mechanical nature than what you are experiencing with your Indian family. And at the same time, there will be the opportunity for many more people to discover their True Purpose. In the future, there will be so many different paths that seem to lead to The True Reality that will be formulated from ancient times and doctrines, but only The Real Universal Guides have the answer. Only they can lead the unaware soul into becoming NU and Free."

"Your next life is already laid out for you. You will actually become a follower of a teaching that one of The Real Guides will be presenting, and over time you will come to realize how it will become corrupted from the transferring of leadership positions, as most of the world's religions and political systems will fall prey to The Influence. In those future times, The Influence will become a female, because the feminine force will rule the mechanical future of humans. All formulas of the mind eventually become corrupted in the human awareness; they must, because the dualistic forces of Cause and Effect demand it."

"You will have many confrontations, as The Real Guides give you The Golden Staff of Sound and Light. Your task will be the hardest, because very few will accept what you are presenting. So many of the new systems that will be coming about, will only want followers and their support, as they copy what The Belief Systems have been doing for eons. You will provide information that will allow each person to have their own individual freedom as much as possible on the earth. Of course, we both know there is no Real Freedom on the earth, only implied freedoms, and a continued maintenance for the body, and all the things that people want. For now, let's enjoy ourselves," she said.
We went into the main part of the palace, the central room which was very large and the ceiling was so very high, hundreds of feet high, I would have guessed. There were openings all along the roof and all I could see was light coming in and moving through everything. There were more awesome looking paintings along all the walls.

"You like to do large pictures, because of your Being and how realized it is with all that is here," she said.

I began to laugh a little. "This is all so very interesting," I said. "I am beginning to like the idea that there is something about me that is greater than I can realize."

She smiled and said, "As long as there is more to be known and realized, there will always be something better to be."

As I was looking around, I began to experience something happening within myself. I wasn't sure what was taking place, but it seemed as though the light from the openings in the roof was affecting me. I stood very still, as I also heard a sound that was so uplifting enter my Being, and then begin to vibrate all through me. I was losing contact with myself in a way that is hard to describe, but after a few moments I regained my awareness, but it seemed to be suddenly different. Then, I suddenly noticed that the palace had actually gotten bigger than what I first perceived it to be. I could tell that Shiss was a part of this, as she watched.

"The awareness of yourself is expanding beyond what you now know, Goldie. You are in The True Reality, and it is providing for you what you are willing to be," she said, with her lovely voice.

Then, something unexpected began to appear. It was as though a part of the wall disappeared, and all that I could see was the light. Suddenly, there was a Being of such radiance, that I could hardly look at him. He gradually appeared from the light right in front of me. I looked at him very closely as he stood there as brilliant as he could be. He was radiating so much that it was hard at first to make out his outline and features. I had the feeling I knew who he was, but I was hesitant to consciously bring forth the confirmation.

"You have always had a hard time seeing yourself, Goldie, but now you are face to face with who you are," said Shiss.
She was right, I really never could see myself, even with all the experience I've had. I knew within myself that I was The Light of Life, but to totally accept it was always something I avoided. There is a part of me that has always felt that I was not really worthy, but that it was the adventure and The Real Value from the experience that I was after. It is like a child's dream that I live and want it to be so, but at the same time, living in the physical body where there is very little light, it is hard to totally accept the dream and how I wanted it to be.

"This is The RealU, Goldie, the beautiful Radiant Reality, that you have become in your own Trueness and Real Awareness, because of the dreams you have dreamt, that you thought were only something you imagined. It is true that the physical life is hard, but it is your defined reality, that has kept you going and provided a way for you. You took the risk a long time ago and decided to go after something very few will attempt or even realize could be possible. Most people do not even consider anything past their own personal life. To them, all real heroes are but a fantasy, but you know deep in your heart What IS Real. You are looking at the end result of what you have decided yourself to be. What you are Seeing is only the beginning, there is still so much more to decide. Like all of us, you need assistance to be objective about yourself, because of how you are. You are not like the common man who only wants things for his emotional life. You are willing to risk your life to discover what else is possible. You will never be content being an earth person. That is why your life on earth will always encounter the turmoil that it does. Look at yourself, you are magnificent," she said.

The Radiant Being, who was standing before me, suddenly began to grow as the sound and the light came more to life within me and all around. He became so much larger, and as he did, so did the entire room and the whole palace. It seemed to be only a matter of moments before he and the palace were beyond something that I would consider being enormous. I felt like an ant, in a universe with something that was far beyond what I could understand. The light and sound began to swirl around the huge figure that I was staring at. He was now far beyond thousands of feet high. From where I stood, I could not calculate the size of him.

"You see, Goldie, you will have to be very big to accomplish what you have to in the future of the earth and the adventure you will be living. From where you are now in time and space with your body life, the future will seem and be so much more enormous, as the lower consciousness evolves in the creative realms," she said.
The light and sound moved in and out of me and I could feel the change that was taking place. It was The True Aliveness of The IS. I felt a love for all of Life that I had never felt or known before. I knew I already had no personal life at all, but now it was even more so, because I was a part of everything now. I was experiencing a radical indifference to all that mattered to me according to the life that I once knew. There was a stage of freedom that was happening to me as I was being in this very moment. It was a wonderful expansion for me to recognize this Reality, and how it is so intense on providing this benefit. It seemed as though every atom of my Being was vibrating with the caring for What IS Real, and nothing else. This was something I always wanted, and that was for me to be this True Reality, where it was all automatic without the personal effort of trying to bring it into my life.

I also had the sense that what was to take place with my personal life would not be like it is on this level, because of how the earth is. Everything that is so Wonderfully Pure cannot be found anywhere but, Here and Now. I was gaining a remarkable awareness and strength as the experience proceeded. I could See how those on the earth were caught up in the illusions, that had been fabricated over the idea of time, and the manipulation of space, that had become a standard amongst the minds of so many.

Most of the earth people are caught up in a planned deception, even by those who profess to be holy. Through this Real Journey, all was being revealed to me, because I was the willing subject for Life to test my very Being. I was in The Pure Reality, the best of all positions, and the earth people were lost and confused with The Darkened Side, and how it constantly presented itself to them. This is what was being shown to me.

My purpose would be to present a reference to The True Reality, in the terms the people of earth could understand. Even then, I would have the hardest time relating the simplest of things. All this and so much more was becoming an apparent realization. I stood there trying to maintain my position of awareness. Teaching about The True Reality is not hard or even hard to understand, but each person must be prepared for it accordingly.

What is hard is getting past all the preconceived notions and ideas, which people have about what they have come to know. They can have their old ideas, and at the same time gain new insights into themselves, and then graduate into greater areas of survival. I could See, the earth people were at the bottom of the
receiving line, and that I was now at the top, and there would be more levels to explore after this one.

The appointed Authoritarians have rule the minds of the unaware, so that their hearts are forgotten in a sea of regulatory drudgery. Brutality has changed its face, from the barbaric days to the present modern day deceptive ploy of psychological submission. Those people who do take the time to weigh the ideas and consider them soon, find out that what The Real Guides are presenting, really does make sense. Life does exist on different levels hidden within ourselves and there is no end to them.

As we become more aware of these different levels and the possibilities they contain, we begin to realize we will live forever, and continue going through an endless journey into the forever Nowness Life IS. I looked directly into the eyes of the giant figure, as he was staring right at me. He was so beautifully poised and benevolent in his mannerism. His eyes were like the ocean, a blue green color that had so much light and sincerity in them.

"He has blond hair," I said out loud, and found it to be very interesting. Shiss laughed, as she waved to me.

I felt the Real Freedom of being able to let go of everything that was within me, and accept all for what it is. I knew this is how Life wanted to share itself with me. It was showing me that it was so capable of granting the most unbelievable lifestyle that I could ever possibly imagine. Then, the sound became calm and serenely subtle; it was like a soothing breeze that is oh, so soft against your face.

The giant figure then raised his arms up from his side toward the upper heavens, and looked up into the vast unknown and said, "I have now become as thee, Great IS. I am U."

And with that, he lowered his arms and head, and looked back at me and smiled. I was nothing but a viewpoint, a spot of light in a brilliant arena of light. Then, the scene began to calm down and smooth itself out. After a while everything turned back to the way it was. What took place was no real surprise to me after all the experiences I had already been through.
Very few people have the experiences that I have had. Reality is so unbelievable and Real, compared to the earth life, and it is the best part, as it is actually magical in the sense that it is always on, and only cares for each one of us all the time.

On earth, most people look for love from someone else, thinking that finding someone else is the only place where love is to be found. Real Love comes from our relation with The True Reality Life IS. Real Love has many levels to it, and it is this love that permeates everything. As we expand more so into Life, we find that Real Love is Real Freedom, a freedom beyond the senses that cannot be mentally explained. The Seventh Level is a universe of Unbelievable Reality that cannot truly be described with words. The Real Guides, with their humble mannerism, exemplifies The True Reality that sustains all of us. It is through our own Being, that is the heart of ourselves, that we are led to worlds that one would hope to imagine would exist. What more can I say, Life will expose itself to any of us according to what we are willing to experience. If we are not willing, then we are only left with the ideas we have come to know, which are from the mind, or usually from someone else. The earth is full of people who cannot dream past the dirt they have walked on for millions of years.

Shiss and I sat for a while and talked about what was to come.

"Your next life, which will be your last, will be very interesting in many respects. You have already seen some of what is to take place, but there is so much more, and it is best to live it as it comes. Rebazar, will once again be with you, and there will be another Real Guide that will go before you who will build the foundation as a huge opportunity for a lot of people. He will set the pace for what you are to do, and provide a lot of information as a good training for you and many others. The idea is to present the knowledge of The True Reality to all who will listen. Each person has free will, and this is how things must be done according to The Great Reality and what IT IS," she said, as I listened and was still in awe at what just took place.

"I am amazed at what I am in this world. I almost find it hard to accept the reality of this world, but it is what I have decided and even more so," I said, as I looked into all the light.
"It's not always the experience that is so important, Goldie, but What IS Real, and the love you have for what you know is True. Your Being is the very heart of yourself and it is your Real True Love, it is The Reality that Always IS," she said, as she stood up and I followed her.

We left the palace into the wide openness of this brilliant universe. It was an amazing feeling just being here. I loved the sound that was everywhere and always present. We floated along for a while and just viewing the marvelousness of everything. After a while, RT returned and said that we were to see The Overseer of this universe, before going into the upper levels. We floated across the surface that was all light beneath us, until we came to The City of Pure Radiance, where The Great Overseer resided. It was a huge palace that covered an unspeakable distance with an entrance of huge brilliant golden gates. There were wonderful, Radiant Universal Guides, who stood at the entrance and bowed to Rebazar, as he led the way into the palace.

As we approached the entrance, the experience of all the light that was emanating from this unbelievable place was utterly astounding. Then, we entered and I looked upward at the ceiling, if you would call it one. It was so high and there was a huge opening at the top, and as I looked to the sky, I saw a shaft of light coming down into the highest point of the structure. RT said, it is the Life Giving ALL Awareness and True Aliveness from The Unseen IS. He said, this is The True Reality, that all the systems on earth are trying to get to and figure out and that they are far from ever having the experience, because of how they have mislead themselves into the phenomena of 'belief.' I could tell, as this Life Giving Reality was entering, how it was affecting everything inside.

As we moved further into the enormous main room of the palace, the light that was coming towards us was so blinding. I had to refocus to enable myself to see what was taking place. The Great Overseer was standing in the center of the room directly inside the shaft of the ominous light. He was a very tall Being, who looked like one of The Real Guides. RT said, he is always in this same position as The Overseer of The Seventh Level, and that he will become different forms according to who he is meeting. "He will always be The Real Connection to The ALL IS," said Rebazar.

Even though the light was everywhere in this world, and on the surface it would appear to be the same as on the lower levels, I could PerSeeve the difference of being here within this place, as opposed to being elsewhere. What I am describing does not portray The Reality of what is taking place within this level. I
am trying to consider the human mind and how unaware it is to The True Reality, until a person is willing to have this experience for themselves. Humans, for the most part, cannot even fathom the raw conditioning they have been exposed to for eons, and this position I am trying to describe becomes far more so than anything imagined. So, when the opportunity of The Genuine Realness becomes apparent in their lives, to the slightest degree, they will usually resist. Life itself, has endless opportunities for us, and is not limited by the conditions people have agreed to.

As we stood in the blinding light looking at The Great Overseer, I could sense the great and unconditional love this Being has for all of Life. RT said, HE is the reason Life exists everywhere. The ALL IS has appointed HIM to be The True Reality of ITSELF, The ISNESS, for all the lower levels, where mankind struggles for the smallest amount of light. Then, I received pure impressions from HIM that I have tried to put into words from this experience...

"Come in Rebazar Tarzs and Golden Wing and Shiss Harah U. Welcome to my place of Being Real. It is so good to see all of you," HE said and then paused. "Look everyone, The Great Guide, Rebazar Tarzs, has brought The New Risk Taker to experience The True Reality with all of us."

At first, I didn't notice there was anyone else in the room, and then hundreds, if not thousands of Radiant Beings began to appear all along the inner walls of the palace. They were all smiling and beaming with the same light. All attention was on His BeingISness, as HE began to speak to us in impressions that were like waves of light.

"Welcome all who have come to hear The True Sound from The IS. It is here that the beginning of Life starts, from The Pure Universes of Sound and Light, The Seventh Level. Those who earn the right to enter The Seventh Level are free forever and no longer under the rule of all the lords and gods on the lower levels. Our position is perfectly hidden from the profane minds of authoritarian obedience. A special welcome to Rebazar Tarzs, The Great Universal Guide, who has brought so many to this Truness and beyond. In this Nowness, he has brought the future for the earth, The Golden Winged Warrior, the Being who will present The Sound and Light Reality to the humans. He will be sharing the great insights of the beauty that is ever occurring in ME, and flowing outward to all the worlds below. Through experience, each Being of awareness is able to eventually realize The Real Sound and Light that I provide. After each unaware soul has gone through all the cycles of the lower gods, then The Real Guides

bring them to ME, for their final journey into The Real Universes and beyond. It is only here that one becomes a Pure Radiant Being that surpasses all the lower embodiments forever."

The Overseer paused again, and as he did an illuminated Being stepped forward from the onlookers that were surrounding us. I felt an impression from Rebazar...

"Your predecessor, Goldie, he will appear prior to you on the earth to set the pace for you to expand upon," said RT.

I looked at this being very closely. He was shorter than me and had a wonderful smile. I wanted to know his name, but I was not allowed at this time to know. Then, he stepped back with the others, and as he did, The Great Overseer began to send more impressions...

"To find ME, is to learn to be with The Oneness That IS, and to truly give up everything to experience The True Reality. I cannot be found in any document or belief system, because I am always freer than the wind that moves among the masses. I cannot be touched by the vain and undeserving, they will never find me. It takes Real Humility, Sincerity, and Gratitude and above all, The Greatest Courage, to risk what most will not surrender to come into my position of Being, and Being Free and Real. I am here for all those who want Real Truth, and not to just hear pretty words that make the emotions feel safe and secure. I am here to provide The True Wisdom that equals great strength to succeed past the decay of the lower realms. Listen to the instruction of The Real Guides, and they will lead you to ME and The Real Life that is already prepared for all. There could never be enough Radiant Beings to fill the endless levels of The Real Universes."

"You are the fortunate chosen one, Golden Boy. You will provide The Sacred Presentation to all who will listen. Your task will not be easy, but your heart will be alive with all that is Real. Wherever you go, The Golden Staff of Sound and Light will be with you and uplifting all those who open their hearts to its benefits. My BeingISness touches even the lowest of creatures to see if they will become aroused and look to the light that is already with them."

"I am always here for all the seekers of The Real Truth. Those who want false doctrines can look to the secondary gods for their wisdom. Without the hand of The Real Guide upon the paper the presentation is written on, there is very little

light from the words that are shown. It takes my light, The Reality That IS, to bring to life the written works to provide the wealth and Truness that aids all those that want to live in Real Truth. The written word is only the first step. The Real Experiences must first take place and be attended to along with The Real Connection. The Real Universal Guides are forever waiting to assist all those who reside in the realms of phenomena. I am always The Real Light and the way. This is what I have taught all the Beings of awareness who have come to this level. You will soon return to your purpose, Golden Wing, and I will always be with you. The earth is a dark place, and the future of the earth will only become darker. In so many earth years it will be ending its cycle, and so it is those Brave Beings, such as you, who will provide the way for those who are lost and cannot find The Real Light. You have listened well, and there will be so much more to come, but for now, you must continue your journey to the upper levels and into The IS. May you forever Just Be."

As HE stood in front of us, HE became all the light that surrounded HIM. HIS wonderful appearance is The Real Light. RT said that HE very seldom appears, but it was for me that he did, because of the devotion that HE knows is constantly growing within myself. I have had a lot of experiences so far, and I was wondering how much more I could take. All three of us left the huge palace and went outside.

"I have to meet with the other guides before we go further. I will meet you back at Shiss's palace when we are ready," said RT.

Before we went back to her place, Shiss took me to an ocean that was a short distance away. We flew there, up and over the palace tops and into a sky that was all light.

"I miss the blueness of the sky," I said.

Then suddenly, the light parted and behind was hidden the bluest sky with a huge sun in the great distance.

"HE has a love for you and all, and anything you want here you can have, so here is your sky, and as you can See, it can only be The IS, in the great beyond that is waiting for you," said Shiss, as she smiled.

We flew into the bluest sky that seemed to sing with the lovely sound of Life. It was a pure experience of wonderment and a Real Love that cannot be

described. I knew that Shiss and I were meant to be, she was beyond the angels that I read about in books upon the earth. All the stories I have read are very pale in comparison to the experience of being here with her. Every moment is alive.

We finally arrived at the ocean on The Seventh Level. It seemed to be an endless sea of light with gold and blue coloring. We went down and sat along the shoreline. There was a golden sand that was similar to earth, but different by its own. There were lovely green palm trees with long and lush branches that were bigger and much healthier looking than where I lived. We sat in the warm sand and rested up against several palms that were clustered together.

"This is where I would be if I lived here, Shiss. I would be here along The Ocean of Life," I said.

I heard the sound of small waves rolling into the shore. I looked to the sky and saw a sun in the great distance, as I knew it was The IS. It was not hot like on earth, but was just the right temperature, which made everything that I was experiencing to be of a pure harmony.

"That is not a sun like in the first few levels, Goldie. What you are seeing is, The Great Reality ITSELF. It is showing ITSELF to you, from beyond the levels that exists in a place that is all to ITSELF, because IT is Pure," she said. "Amazing," I responded.

I knew that this was a Reality like nothing else. The earth was forgotten after being here, but what lingered inside was the love and compassion for all the souls who were still in the lower levels. As I looked up at The True Reality, I could sense the realization that IT was communicating with me about what I was to do back on earth. It seemed to be concerned for all who were still searching for IT. This ISNESS is the center of all the endless number of Beings that are everywhere throughout ITS Endless Reality. Man's conception of the creator is an old man, or some form of personality that was invented by promoters for the purpose of control.

The Space Gods have portrayed themselves as the ultimate, but they cannot fool people into considering them to be The IS. From where I was at and what was taking place within me, it was very easy to realize what has happened on the earth, because of the limited position the physical mind produces. No amount of explanation I could give would produce any experience for anyone

about The Reality of this place and those who reside here. I was far beyond even the dreams that we consider to be something wonderful. This universe is so much more than any dream.

"You are finally happy here, Goldie," she said.

"Yes I am Shiss, this place is a perfect world that has everything."

Then, I had to ask her something... "Why have you sought me out Shiss, when you already have all of this?" I asked.

She gleamed her beautiful smile and said, "I have always loved you so deeply, that you are a part of me, and I want to be with you forever. It is not like the desire that exists on the earth between two bodies, but a real connection of Being, which continues to expand beyond all things of any nature. All souls find their place sooner or later, and you and I are perfect for each other," she said.

"I must be having the same experience, Shiss. I have never met anyone like you. You add to my life in a way that goes beyond anything that I have ever known. I could be here with you always. All of what is taking place is because of The Reality that has made all of this possible. I would like to consider that what I know and am from this world will be known back on the earth when I return," I said.

"You will know you were here within yourself, but your mind will soon wonder if it all really happened. The earth is a hard place, and all the events that take place there are because of the choices that each person makes. People think that Life is hard, because they are on the earth, but what they do not realize is that the life they are in is not The Reality Life IS. You can See beyond the veil, Goldie, so much so that nothing will hold you back. It is your time to bring to the earth what all souls are seeking. Unfortunately, there will only be a few who will sincerely make the effort. The history that has been produced on the earth is a good indicator of how people see their life and limitations."

"Those unique individuals who came in the past to provide the lighted way were soon gotten rid of, because the majority of the masses are always convinced about what has been presented to them from the authorities that make the rules for others to follow. As you can plainly see and behold, there are no rules or morality here, no restrictions or confinements, nothing to hinder the beauty that everything Already IS. This level is beyond all goodness and darkness, nothing
but Pure Love and a glorious insight of BeingISness exist here. All those who reside here would have it no other way."

"The dark hearts that rule the minds of men will never see this place, until they have gone through all the process they need to and become Pure. There can be so many ways to explain what could be possible for any soul to reach this level, but something must take place within the individual to make the beginning of the journey possible," she said.

I began to wonder if I really had to go back after achieving this level.

Shiss began to laugh and then said, "Goldie, of course you have to go back. As usual, you are not seeing the whole picture. You must go back, because you are a part of what is taking place now. Without you, the earth would be like a dead zone. The Great Reality and all The Real Guides have prepared for who knows how long to get you, yes you, to this position to present The True Reality to all who will listen. Even those that don't listen will be affected in a very good way. You have free will, but the experience lies in the sacrifice of what you must do. Your very Being knows what is true, but you must make the right choice. Before you go back, you must go forward into The IS. You will take the journey many times, and each time you will learn more about yourself and what you must do. This is your time and your greatest adventure, and only you can do it," she said with the sweetest tone in her voice.

I knew she was right. I had finally reached a dream come true, and now I would have to leave and probably not remember that I was here. I couldn't be discouraged, because of how this place and the realty of it is. But now that I was here, I had such a great perception of everything. RT soon returned and said, we were to leave now for the higher levels until we reached The IS. I said goodbye to Shiss, and she said she would always be around and I would see her again. RT and I left through the sky, up over the gigantic ocean that seemed endless, as we soon came to the invisible border of the next level.

Once again, I was perplexed by what I was going through and becoming aware of. I knew that I must hold my course, even though a part of me wanted to just live and forget what would eventually be taking place on the earth. The impact of all of this was something that I would come to understand as I gained the objective view from what was taking place now. This experience would be like a preview of ones that would occur in the future.
RT said we would move rather quickly through the levels to get to The IS. All I could do was going through the experience and try and realize the fine realism of it. There is no language or understanding on earth that can relate to what was taking place in my life at this moment. We stopped at a place, I would never have believed possible, but that is what I considered about The Seventh Level. We were now entering a new unseen position for me. RT had been here many times before and he knew the secret way to the unknown, which very few did. I had no conception at all as to what was going to happen next. As I was looking into this different kind of universe, I thought about Shiss, and what she had said to me. I had to go against a form of resistance within myself, because I knew that after completing this journey, I would have to fulfill the obligations of it. This is what all of us must do when we gain our position with our Real Awareness, we must for our own Being sake, expand our adventure. It is the 'Way of The IS.'

Here again is an objective view of what is taking place with the elementary experiences all of us go through while on places like the earth. The creative inventiveness always becomes outdated and limited and it must be so. Just like being raised by our parents, there comes a time when we must head out on our own, and for me at this moment it was even more than that, way more!

Looking forward into something that was and is totally indescribable was rather hard at first. What intrigued me was the sound that was coming from this new area of this strange new unseenness. It was a haunting and beautiful sound that seemed to tempt my very Being, like a beautiful deer in the forest that you come upon and want to touch it and experience its gentleness. This is how our Being really lives and survives past the temporary physical life. It lives on the sound and in the light of the many levels and worlds that are available to us, yet unseen from the human mind. On earth, a person eats material things for surviving in the body form, but in these Real Universes, there is no need for anything, only the light and sound, as there is also no disease or discomfort, like there is on the earth.

I soon began to forget all that had taken place, because my Being was now centered on what is happening now, and what lies before me. As we were standing at the edge of this new adventure RT suddenly walked right into the light that covered this universe, and then disappeared. I knew he was the guide, but it was up to me to follow. I then went right after him and found myself a little lost at first. This place was different than The Seventh Level. There was a whole new perception of some kind that was taking place within me. Suddenly, I found
that I was more of the light and sound that I had been familiar with on the other levels. It was moving with me in a very subtle way and having its own way about me. The sound was always present, as it made a low sustaining support to my Being, while I was trying to realize a position in this new reality. I was very happy with myself, as I was being supported and led along by my heart's intent.

I became aware of the presence of strange brilliant shapes that moved about like shadowy vapors in this world that seemed to be elusive from my presence. They would faintly come and go, but were so subtle as they passed without a hint of what they were. My impression was they were Beings that were very far advanced, and this is where they resided. There was also a sound that was more active in what seemed to be a far distance from where I was at. This sound was like a subtle storm out in the far reaches somewhere. It was taking place in the distance and making itself evident as I slowly entered a new stage of my experience. I began to realize this world knew I was here, and it knew everything about me. It knew that I was a beginner in this area and that it was like a test for me to encounter what The Realness of this place meant to my own Being. While all of this was going on within myself, there was nothing but light, a solid rainfall of the most wonderful and brilliant whitish light with a weaving of golden color to it at times.

As I was being aware of where I was, I was beginning to get the feel of this unknown Reality. I considered all the things that were taking place while I was the observer from my position. I was starting to enjoy this new found BeingISness that was unlike anything I had ever experienced before. It was an experience and feeling of something that was beyond the bliss that I had encountered on The Seventh Level. Then, an impression came to me, it was RT. He told me to move forward and to continue on. There was no real movement to what I was doing; only the notion to do so that made the reality of my experience to become as it would. As I went forward into the heavy rainfall of light, a subtle form in front of me was taking place, it was RT. As I came to his awareness, he was now appearing as a very fine outline of a form of light that was mixed in with the surroundings, as they moved about with a life of their own. My impression was that I must have looked the same, but I couldn't really see myself.

He sent me an impression... "The Being who oversees this level far surpasses that of The Seventh Level. You will not be able to comprehend what HE is. Let us go and see HIM, and how he will appear to us."
We traveled out over the vast unknown areas that had faint and subtle appearances like hills and rivers and so on, but it was a lonely place that seemed to be hiding all its magnificent beauty only for the very few who were able to make it this far. This was a region of mystery unlike anywhere else. RT said there were many Beings here with a Super Beingness that far surpasses anything imaginable, and they lived more in the invisible Reality, and preferred it that way. Now I knew what the strange shapes I saw were.

I was learning to be patient, because it was only a matter of when all that I needed to know would be exposed to me. We continued into the thick softness of the light I was getting used to. It was a totally supportive experience where I needed nothing for myself. I was experiencing a fuller type of True Freedom that was like being the wind. There was a real beauty to this place that was so unlike the worlds of man and what is conceived to be life. In this place, you are the everything, as opposed to being a piece of Life within the body forms that are always restless about something. The lower bodies are just temporary until The Real Awareness is able to get past all of them, then the best part of Life exposes itself to us. We are the 'experiencer' of ourselves, and it is up to us to decide to go further into the bigger part that Life has hidden from the average person. RT escorted me to the area where we were to meet the unknown Being who served this level.

"It will be hard at first for you to comprehend who and what this Being is, so be patient and you will learn so much. Just go with the experience and do not try to determine it," he said.

I was rather excited like a child that was about to get a present for his birthday, and at the same time, I had a feeling and a wondering if I would survive what was to take place, because of all the awesomeness I was in. This Being had a presence beyond all the others that oversaw the previous levels. I wondered how anything so unbelievable could exist, a Being of such unreachable magnitude. We came to an open area where the light had parted a bit, and it was like a softness that was spread out for a great distance.

Then, I felt the presence of something very close by that was totally affecting me in the most wonderful way. In a way, it was all the feelings and emotions that one could realize coming together and creating a form of euphoria that was unexplainable. It was an ecstasy that I never experienced before. The most impressive part was the strong and beautiful sound that was nonstop throughout the entire region and into my very Being. I got an impression from RT to just be,
and all would be known to me from the unknown Being that oversees this level for The Great Reality. I began to sense the wisdom that was about to come into the heart of myself and I was ready for it. There were no words, but impressions that seemed alive which soon entered my awareness. This is the best I could make of what I was given...

"You have entered my unspeakable vastness to take the test of a lifetime, and to see if you are worthy. Not every Being of awareness can come this far as you have. I am the guardian and caretaker of this hidden place that the mind and imagination of man cannot find. It takes a special desire and persistence, along with real courage to enter this world and the ones beyond this one. Your guide has brought you here to experience the wisdom that cannot be found anywhere but here. Listen closely and realize what so very few are able to. You have an opportunity that very few will ever know. You have the best guidance and you are a strong willed Being, who can take on the assignment with The IS. Your life on earth will not be easy, because you are not concerned that it is or not, you only want the experience and to know What IS Real. You are in The Profound Reality Now, and you are having everything that Life is granting you. When you relate what you have experienced and known to others, they will not believe you, because they mainly have one life only, and it belongs to the earth. Their view is from their conditioned mind of illusionary reason and logic.The history of all the lower worlds has provided so much information and knowledge for so many to seek something other than the voices of those who control the masses and decide for them what is truth and what is not."

"Your task will be similar to theirs, only you will provide something that is missing amongst all the doctrines of the world, and that is The Real Connection, The Secret Sound to The IS. There is nothing that can really be said about where you are now and what is taking place. You have come to realize there is so much more than just the body forms and all the desires they are involved in. Once you finish this journey and return to your body, you will make the choice to continue to go into the unknown, or you will decide to stay the same like most of the other people who walk the earth. You must be tested before you can go further into Life; it is all part of the maturity all of us go through once you leave the limited levels."

"There is no Life without The Secret Sound and Light, to agitate you into expanding your own awareness of what you already know. It is true that The ALL IS will set you free from all things, but you must also take your place among the immortals that exist beyond the senses of all that can be considered.

Mankind has never really experienced Real Love, until one has entered The Real Universes of Sound and Light. It is not possible to experience True Love, where you are now in the human body and senses. This is why the people of earth are confused into thinking that Life comes from being born in a body and the earth supplies all that is needed to survive. The emotions that are exchanged from one person to another are the starting point, but only a shallow beginning to what eventually leads to Real Love and a Real Life, where there are no restrictions, and no control over oneself from anyone."

"You must understand that most people want to be controlled, they want to be needed, but in doing so, they allow themselves to be a part of a collection of the unconscious returning group that looks constantly for The Real Light of Life, but must accept the terms of The Space Gods instead. Your life and all that it entails are now fulfilled, because you have made The Real Connection to The ALLNESS, The Sound of Life. Who now can tell you What IS Real? Can the clergy or the prophets of ancient writings reveal what you are experiencing here? No! They know nothing! Do they bring their followers to this unseen place and have them know what exists beyond the fairy tales of the earthly gods? No! All of them know nothing! You are in The True Reality, the heavens beyond all the decided heavens of man. You know that no one can say that it is not so, but others will never know until they enter this level and I test them to see if they are worthy, and can realize my Being and ALL That IS. There will be more later, as you return once again in the future, but for now, you may pass to the next level and experience what others will not."

Rebazar gently guided me through the brilliant light and ever upward to the next unknown world. It was all so astounding, a dream within a dream. I was constantly moving toward a huge sun that I would never reach. What I have mentioned here from my experience is a shallow and pale interpretation of the real event.

This journey can only be realized individually and then presented in a limited form, because any description of what lies beyond the mind and what it conceives is not really possible. I have tried to keep the details simple and easy to understand; the reason being is, The Real Guides want this information to be known, so more people have the opportunity to learn about The True Reality life IS, from Real Experience.

I could tell there was still so much more to consider, now that I have been past all the levels of form. There was a need within myself to complete this

experience, and See The True Reality that all things have come into being form. The Reality of these levels is not in the normal sense of 'seeing,' but a Reality of Perseeved Recognition, to See without seeing. My position was one of non- judgment, because there was nothing to really consider, there was only The Now of what was taking place. I was realizing that everything I needed was always Now, and the ideas of past and future events were things that only had value, if they were contained in The Nowness of Life.

We moved onward into the beautiful light, as it seemed to carry us to our next destination, it was like continually staring into a brilliant sun. I was feeling good about the journey so far, it was something that really implied my Being, and seemed to fit all the areas of myself to the point of a Real Fulfillment.

The True Freedom I was experiencing became more defined as we traveled through this wondrous region of endlessness. I had a joy within myself that was so finely obvious, that I was rather oblivious to what would take place next. I had no concerns or short comings. I was so wonderfully content to be a part of this world and all the others.

All that I had been through proved to me that all that really mattered was my Real Awareness. It no longer matters where I am, as long as I have the control of myself that I want. One may think, by doing what they want they have control of themselves, not necessarily. The control that I am referring to is the adjustment we make with ourselves according to The True Reality Life IS. When a person does not have The Real Connection, then they are simply wandering through Life, and trying to find themselves and their relationship to IT. Most people are out of balance with Life.

As we moved upward, I PerSeeved a so finely tuned sincerity to all that was taking place. These worlds or universes are so pure from anything that seemed to make sense in the body forms. I was eager to fulfill my life with this experience and so we continued on, ever into the limitless vastness of brilliant light.

There were several more levels Rebazar and I moved through, but to describe them would be so difficult. We met with each one of The Overseers, and I went through various tests, so as to enter each stage of purification. As we continued on, I could sense the elimination of hidden Ingrams in my Beingness that was taken care of by each Overseer. One of the experiences with the last Overseer was rather overwhelming. To eventually get to The ALL IS, one must become as

pure as possible. Rebazar said there are few who will go all the way to The IS, with what it takes to do so.

After leaving The Seventh Level, I went through many tests to ensure that my Being was ready to meet The IS. There is absolutely no time here, so I really don't know how long it took. RT said that it was necessary, because The Great Reality is Pure, and nothing can approach IT, that is not cleansed of all the aberrations that each Being takes on as they go through their lower world processing. We soon entered the unknown universe or level where The ALL in ALL resides. It was covered with a blanket of whitish light that fell like rain from the sky. There was the most beautiful sound that wove its way through all the light and seemed to lift me ever upward into my unknown destination. Everything within me was now so effortless, and I could tell that I was a total part of what everything is with this ISNESS. I really loved these Positions of Being. I knew this is why I existed, to be a part of all of this. RT sent me the impression that this was The ALL Aware Position with The True Reality.

As the light continued to move in the fashion that it did, I could sense there was something up ahead, something so unknown and unidentifiable. We moved further along, and then I began to see something. At first, it was like an outline, and then it became as though it were more solid in a soft sort of way. Then, I realized that it was me, the real big me that I had met when I was with Shiss in her palace. RT and I stopped and looked upon this huge reality of myself, and as we did it, spoke...

"Hello Goldie, you have finally made it and Thank You for coming. After millions of lifetimes of searching and being lost, and beaten down by the dirt worlds and the false gods of man, you are finally here," he said, as he smiled while looking down on me.

Then suddenly, I felt the most wonderful feeling of warmth that I had ever experienced. It was me standing before radiating the most wonderful love. I felt totally overwhelmed and inspired as I received this most unexpected gift. I could feel the difference with myself. I was experiencing a True Freedom that I had never known before. Then, I began to grow larger, as he radiated the most sublime BeingISness to me. I was soon as big as him and looking right directly at him.

"We are Now in the moments of all the moments that have ever been since you and I first came from The Center of The IS. We are The Story of Life for US.

Each individualized NU that comes from The Unseen Imagination of The ALL IS, becomes an eternal expression of eventual Radiant Nowness, a never ending expansion and expression of the most True Sublimeness, which cannot be contained by any means. It is the defined destiny of each NU to risk beyond what it could possibly ever conceive. You are among the very few who has decided to constantly explore the violent process of surmounting the bondage of a contrived social upbringing. There are no witnesses here, only What IS Real beyond all means. We are The Great Birds of Life, The Unknown Eagles from The Unseen IS. When you return to your little body on earth, you will wonder about what took place here, because your mind will fail you when it comes to Being Here Now. Because you have risked all, you have the privilege of becoming one with IT," he said, as he opened up his arms and came toward me, and then wrapped himself around and all through me.

Then, in a brief moment there was only me. I was now complete as a unique Benevolent Radiant Being that is Pure Light and Sound. I was in the very moment that ALL Life IS, and I knew that I did not ever again need anything. I was now all there is and would ever be. I was totally free from everything. After, for I do not know how long, as I was being in this complete position, RT sent an impression to me that we were ready to meet The ALL IS.

I no longer had to move to any position or place. I became very aware that all I had to do is Be Now in this ISNESS. As I did, the PerSeeved Realization of What IS Real would be so. My Real Awareness became instantly fathomless and pure. I firmly became the perceptiveness of an ALL Awareness, and as I did, The True Reality Life IS, became evident to me. As I PerSeeved IT, there was a long silence of a bliss that cannot be shared with any explanation. It was like the relation of a mother and child that is always perfect. I could See that it was all about my Decided Focus, as to where I am.

Then, something did appear. It was like an unexpected surprise to me, an apparition you might say of this extraordinary place of hidden wonders. There was really nothing, nothing at all, but then there really is something, something that most will miss. I wondered how it could be, ALL IT IS. IT began to take a vaporous form, as the light from all sides created the shape of a small person. Then, it was apparent to me, the form was that of a child, a little girl. The impression I first received was, this Being was like Susan in my class. Being Aware of all that was taking place, I continued to become More Aware of what was being given me. Then, another surprise from IT came into my Being, like a rapturous rhapsody of benevolent sincerity. This True Reality was sharing

ITSELF with me, from a position I could never have imagined with all my heart and Being. I PerSeeved that it is the childlike awareness, which encompasses all that could ever be. IT was demonstrating to me what this is and what IT IS.

Then, I realized as I was experiencing the most sublime sincerity, that this Unknown Being was not like The Overseers on the other levels that administered The Sound Light Reality, to ALL of Life from this position of centeredness. This wondrous Being of True Realism and All Aliveness is so Perfectly Pure that none can approach IT. IT IS Exceptionally Unique, among all that IT has made so, yet stays in ITS own position of Perfect Reality of Pure Freedom. I knew I could not approach IT, because IT cannot be touched, but only PerSeeved from a Heart of Purity. Now, I knew the meaning of the appearance of the child.

The True Heart of a child, who has not been plagued with useless conditioning, is the closest one that can come to first taking this journey to meet his True Self. This is the secret of all secrets that very few humans ever come across, because through their conditioning of the world orders and all the inventiveness that buries their awareness in material drudgery, they have forgotten where they have originated from. And so, the people of earth want to be saved so bad from their material burdens that they have invented authoritative gods whom they think will cater to their desires to obtain Real Freedom. It is all a huge fallacy of corruption, because it must be developed with a True Heart, which first takes Real Guidance to even discover and find.

I now knew my place in Life, a search that has taken what would seem to be forever. Then, the form of the child became the surrounding light and appeared like a gigantic sun in the sky. It was as though I was taken back from the scene and trying to PerSeeve the endless vastness of this Reality. A wonderful sound came into my Being, and the impression was, that I was to share this sound with all who would risk entering themselves with this True Reality.

"The Real Connection," was the impression from Rebazar.

Then, there was a silence that fulfilled everything, and as it did, the sound that was once everywhere subsided and became a subtle shadow that was barely heard. I was totally focused on The Reality as IT revealed ITSELF. There is nothing that I can say that can describe IT, nothing. I was in The ALL ISNESS that RT taught me about. I was now here, and there was nothing but a wondrous light that spread itself everywhere from this, and into me. I was all inspired and
complete. I now knew this is Really Living. IT appeared like a huge endless sun, which had the softest light that was felt as the tenderness embraced my Being.

As I stood there being in the moment with the blissful experience, a shaft of golden white light began to appear before me. It started off ever so lightly, and then became so much more apparent. It seemed to have a life of its own, as it became a long extended light that touched down where I was at, and then made its way up into the foreverness that was so unseen. It gently swirled and continued to do so, separate from everything else. Then, I felt a soft impression enter my Being...

"It will be here when you are ready, Golden Wing. It is The Golden Gift of The Real Sound and Light, and you shall have it as your protection. Your life is now a preparation for the next one. What you will be doing, only a very few can do. The world that you are now in has so much more life and awareness than the lower levels. Look upon IT and I will show you," was the impression.

Then, something began to happen, I don't really know what, but I suddenly became a viewpoint from a certain direction, and I could See the lower worlds below the deep dark border, that we crossed to get to The Seventh Level. What I saw was a comparison of the area the lower levels were contained in, as to where I was now. I looked closely to understand what I was Seeing. The lower levels were like a minute speck of dust, so small to be hardly noticed, in contrast to The Real Universes of Pure Sound and Light.

"What you are Seeing is the illusion of a life, that is so insignificant compared to where you are now. Your awareness within this world is beyond belief, beyond comprehension, beyond all things. There is nothing to judge the size of all that you See, but you will understand when you return to earth. You will never forget that you were here, but for the bodies of the mind to encompass the fathomless depths of this Reality is futile. I cannot change the way I am, because I must be what I am. You have reached the top of Life, The ALLNESS, yet there are secrets that are still hidden forever to discover. You have earned your way here, and I have granted your entrance into my ISNESS. I am here for all to come and be in this True Reality, that is all mine and who I am. I am constantly sending The Real Guides to the worlds below to rescue the unaware who have originally come from my BeingISness. The lower worlds and levels are for the process and the purpose of becoming more aware of, The Reality That IS, so that all can live in my Real Universes and Truly Be Free."
"Most will not endure the struggle to get here, or they are lost and taken by The Space Gods. I want every Being that came from me to return, so they can have what you are having now. You will soon return to earth and continue your own struggle to maintain your life there, but someday you will return to me again, when you are stronger and have shared your knowledge with so many. The Golden Gift will someday be in your hands to assist The Real Guides in bringing more of the unaware to me who are ready. The love I have for all that is cannot be measured, but only realized with each Being. You have been patient and honest with yourself, and now it is time for you to return and let the world know, I do exist for ALL."

And then, IT was silent. The Golden Gift of Light began to rise and was soon gone. The IS, seemed to fade back into all the light that existed, as I was with RT in all the light that surrounded us. Then, in a matter of moments, we were back on The Seventh Level. We were standing beside the great ocean and Shiss was there...

"I can see the change in you Goldie, you have done well," she said, as she came to me and it was as though we became one.

I stayed with Shiss for a while, as RT went off with some of the guides.

"It was the most unbelievable experience, Shiss. It is all so simple in its own way, but nothing can be said about it. I am truly lost for words of any nature. The difference between being a man, and Just Being are so vast. All the considerations that involve the personal life seem to have no real meaning when I am here. I can see that it takes such a great strength to handle what The Real Guides do. I now know the real relation with Life is in the doing, and not necessarily the entire experiences one can have. I love this place and how I can be here," I said, as I stared out at the sea of light.

"You are so real, Goldie. You are my heart and Being also. When you are on the earth, I love to watch all the things you do," she said.

"What about Sonya, Shiss? Who is she?" I asked.

"She is a wonderful Being who must play her part in your life, as you play your part with her and others. The same is true of your family that you love so much. All these Beings will enter this universe someday, and we will all be together. While you are on earth, you need someone to be with, it is too hard to go
through it alone. The dreary sense world is too confusing, especially for you. It is easier for you, but at the same time, it becomes a difficult position, because you know where you belong don't you?" she said.

"Yes I do, I belong in this vast unknown. This entire experience truly haunts me. All I can see within myself is all those universes of light that are endless. There is something so unseen and Real here, an Aliveness like nothing else. These universes know you are here and they totally support us. On earth, there seems to be nothing but obstacles to deal with. Here, there is a position that is so wonderful and unobstructed. It is easy to see why most people cannot accept this place; the body mind is such a burden of unawareness. I know that I will be a little discouraged when I return to earth," I said.

As I stood with Shiss, she just smiled as we held each other. "I will always be with you, Goldie. We are all there is," she said.

After a while, RT returned and we left The Seventh Level, and then went back down to the gloomy earth. RT and I swiftly went through all the levels. We stopped at the top of The Mental Worlds to retrieve our bodies, and then continued until I saw the earth from a distance.

"I feel lost already, Sir," I said, with a moan in my voice.

"I will see you soon, Goldie. You are taken care of," he said, and then disappeared into the ethers.

When I returned, I suddenly woke up and felt the stiffness of the body. It was late afternoon and I slowly got up. As I looked over at Sonya that was lying beside me, I could see she was sleeping. I didn't want to disturb her, so I quietly got up and walked into the classroom. I was really stiff from not moving around. I could only walk a bit and then I had to sit. I felt like an old man all of a sudden. Then, Sonya heard me, and woke up and came into the classroom.

"Goldie, you're back!" She said, all excited, and then came over and gave me a hug.

"I was trying to walk for what seemed to be the first time," I said, laughing as I was going through the pain of trying to maintain myself.

"You have been gone for four days," she said as she held me.
I thought about what she said. "I must have stayed too long in the invisible worlds. I went through a lot of testing to finally get to The IS. The experience is something that my mind is trying to define, so that I can write about it. As soon as I get the body flexible again I will start to write," I said, as she began to rub me all over.

"Why don't you come back and lie down, and I will give your whole body a rub," she said, as she giggled.

We went back into our room and I lay down on the bed, and then she rubbed me until I felt better.

"Tell me about some of your experiences, Goldie," she said, as we sat on the bed and relaxed.

"In the first part of the journey, I met the gods of the lower worlds and became more aware of how they operate, and how they promote their doctrines that seem to have value. Then, we went beyond them into worlds that were like places from fairy tales, where the life there is so wonderful. There are places that have no night, and you are a Pure Being of such a wonderful nature. I am amazed at how many different levels there are. I can see why people consider Life to be as they decide through their minds. The mind here is so lacking in any Real Perception. Then, RT took me past where Shiss lived, and into levels and worlds that I really cannot describe. They were all light, and the experience in them is beyond what the mind can relate to. Eventually, we entered the hidden place of The IS. I will be writing everything down that I can remember, and then you will have a better idea of what took place," I said to her.

"Goldie, it all sounds so amazing from the little you have told me. We are going to have the time of our lives writing this and presenting it to the world," she said, as she was laughing.

"You're so right, and who would believe us anyway. Maybe I should just forget about all of it and we'll go live by the beach, and no one will know where we're at," I said, as I looked at her, then we both laughed.

"Of course we won't, this is the greatest adventure that a person could have and I want to live it forever," and then I hugged and kissed her.
We spent the night talking and giggling about what I had been through. She wrote everything down as I tried to describe what took place. I loved Sonya, she was beyond the angels. From all that I experienced, I had the great fortune to realize the magnificent love that all these Great Beings I know have for the unaware people of the earth. It is easy to see that the love and adventure children have is so similar to the reality of all the illuminated Beings I met.

I could plainly see what I would be sharing with this world would seem to be a fairy tale of an interesting nature, but once a person begins to explore and have Real Experience, then their life is changed forever. It may not be so that everyone will know and experience what I have, but all that is really needed is the contact with someone like Rebazar. For those who are reading this, this life has already gone by.

The good news is, The Real Universal Guides are always aware of The Real Risk Takers, those who want to know The Real Truth, and not just the pretty words that have been written down through time. It really does not matter if someone can prove what has happened in the past, or if they are able to dig up things that relate to the events that have gone by. ALL Life is Here and Now, and all that will ever be is with each one of us Now. Eventually, each one of us can be like RT and The Real Guides, True and Pure Free Beings of Light.

As time went by, Sonya and I taught for almost another year at the school while I finished the first book. I eventually wrote three books with her help. They were published and I was paid for them, not a lot, but something. Sonya and I went on tour, and shared our experiences with different teaching paths and some public gatherings at that time for several ongoing years. The publishers made arrangements for the engagements for me at so many different places. There were a lot of people who were interested, and there were those who were very upset by what I was presenting, stating that what I had written was false, and that there were no places like I had described. Of course, there couldn't be The Real Universes for those with no experience.

For most people, I talked about the experiences that the children in my class had, because I liked what they experienced. Sonya was always a great support and a pure heart, I was so lucky to know her. Shiss would make herself known on the inner from time to time, and constantly help me with making certain decisions about what to do and where to go. I have helped to set up small groups of interested people who were willing to be taught and learn about their Real Experiences.
As Sonya and I traveled around, we would revisit some of the groups from time to time, but for the most part, we would see the people in the other worlds. The groups themselves learned to share their insights and learn from The Real Guides, and gain The Real Connection. I taught so many people who became connected to The Sound and Light of The IS. I was shown that most of them would be returning again like I me, and I would possibly know them once more.

After touring different parts of The United States for many years, Sonya and I came back to Southern California, and lived out the rest of our lives in the area that we loved, right next to the Pacific Ocean. We lived in the house that her parents had built, and then had it to ourselves when they went into the higher worlds. Then, my parents came out and lived with us until they also left the earth. Their passing was a wonderful experience like that of my grandfathers.

# CLOSING SCENE

The day came when it was time to say goodbye to this life as an Indian. RT was preparing Sonya and I to leave together. We had reached about all the people we could during our stay on earth, and so it was time to go. Sonya's parents and my parents were already on The Seventh Level, and that is where we would be going also. It was now the morning of the day of our departure, we would be leaving during the night. This would be our last day on earth during this lifetime, and so we let our horses go and the several cats we had. We told them they were free, because we were leaving. Sonya and I walked along the beach and talked most of the day.

"All the inner travels that we love so much will now be our life, Goldie, but there is a part of me that is a little sad we are leaving," said Sonya.

"I can understand," I said. "It is the little part of us that wants to hold on to this place."

We had given the house to some friends of ours who had children, and that had lived in a very small place they could barely afford. They were so happy to get the beautiful house that Sonya's parents built. Nighttime came fast, and we were getting ready to leave permanently. Our bodies would be taken care of by the people we gave the house to. They would come in the morning and do the proper thing. Sonya and I lay down on our bed together, and then left as swift as the wind. We found ourselves far above the beautiful inner ocean that we had always visited.

As we were floating in the sky and looking back at where we'd been, RT came flying up and said, "Follow me to your Real Home."

All of us flew straight up and through the heavens of man, and then beyond all the limitations of the mind until we passed the dark border and into The Seventh Level. I once again entered The Reality of Life, with all The Sound and Light filling my very Being. Shiss was there to meet us as we came into this universe of pure silvery light, and a bliss that cannot be described.

"Hello Goldie and Sonya, welcome home forever," she said, with a great glowingness to herself.
My earthly parents were there along with Sonya's. All of us went to Shiss's palace, while RT went to be with the other guides to plan the future of what was to come. All of us sat around her palace and communicated for the longest time, then the others went to their places and I stayed with Shiss.

"Goldie, you will be here for a while with me until you return to earth. Rebazar and The Boys are lining up the person you are to come through. She is a good person, but needs a few attitude adjustments, so maybe she will listen to you. She is only fourteen years old on earth right now, and is not considering having a child as of yet. She will be a good choice for you, because you will be very motivated to succeed through what you have to go through by being raised by her. With the new body and mind you will be getting, you will have to work through the limitations you encounter. You will be introduced to The Real Outer Guide at a young age. RT will begin to prepare you during your youth, and then around 1970, you will have the outer presentation to go by for several years until it is your time. All in all, it looks to be a very interesting lifetime," she said.

I really had no questions at this point, because of where I was at, I was fine. For what would be termed earth years, I lived and planned what would be taking place in the next life. Shiss and I stayed together until the moment came for me to return to the earth. I took a last look around and she gave me a hug and a kiss.

"I will come to visit you when you have been prepared and gone through what is needed. There will be others you will teach, who need your assistance, and so you must attend to them," she said.

RT came at that very moment and motioned to me that it was time to go. We flew down through the dark border and through the lower heavens, until we once again came to the physical realm. From where we were above the earth, I could sense the difference that had taken place. We flew down near the surface, and I could see all the development that was now covering the land. The earth had changed so much in the short time I was away.

"Is this place safe to be in, RT?" I asked, as I looked over the land masses and all that was taking place.

He laughed and said, "Not really, but it is a good training ground for the soul who wants to reach The Real Universes of Sound and Light. This life will be a Real Test for you, but I will be here and so will many of your friends. The
experience you will be gaining will aid so many people who are looking for the way out of this place. Sometimes, it takes a knock on the head for some people to wake up to what is really taking place in Life. You have been prepared for lifetimes, and there is still more for you to consider, but all of what you need will come as a gift to you."

We had flown very low to the ground, as we moved across the different parts of The United States. We finally came to the area I was to enter into this new life form, and become an earth person once again. I was not really thrilled to do this, but what else could I do? I wanted to be the best I could be, so I was more than willing to go through the process again. RT pointed to the building that I was to go into, and meet my new mom. I entered the building while the rain was coming down. I seemed to know just where to go and I was finally there. I was hovering above the woman who was lying on the table and going through her child birth with the doctor. He was standing in front of her and trying to pull the body out. All of a sudden, I saw the little body coming out, and I could feel myself being drawn to the situation. It was very dark and I felt strange, and then I forgot everything...

DUANE

THE GREAT WRITER 2012

www.DuaneTheGreatWriter.Info DUANETHEGREATWRITER@LUS.COM DUANETHEGREATWRITER@INBOX.COM

